Copy

This category describes the copying features.



Basic Copying Method

This section describes the basic procedure for copying.

  1. Place originals on the platen glass or load them in the feeder.
  • Close the feeder after placing your originals.
  • When the display shows the message <Enter the Dept. ID and password using the numeric keys.>, enter the department ID and password. Then press (Log In/Out) on the control panel. For details, see "Security."
  • When <Allow Black Copy Jobs> in <System Management Set.> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <On>, you can make black and white copies without entering <Dept. ID> and <Password>. (For details, see "Accepting B&W Copy Jobs without Entering the Department ID and Password.") To make black and white copies, press the right Any key to select <Black Copy>.
  • When the display shows the message <Enter User ID and password.>, enter the user ID and password. Then press (Log In/Out) on the control panel. For details, see "Security".
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Make the copy settings you require.

You can specify the following settings:

  • <Density/Background Rem. Set.>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See "Adjusting Density (Copy).")
  • <Various 2-Sided Settings>: Makes two-sided copies. (See "2-Sided Copying.")
  • <Copy Ratio Settings>: Adjusts the size by enlarging/reducing original images. (See "Enlarge/Reduce Images.")
  • When you press (Reset), all settings will return to the Standard mode. If you want to keep your own settings as the Standard mode, see "Changing Standard Mode."
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

If you make a mistake when entering values, press (Clear) and enter the correct values. The copy quantity appears on the right side of the Copy top screen.

  • You cannot change the copy quantity while the machine is copying.
  1. Press (Start) to start copying.
  • When scanning is complete, remove your originals.
  • You cannot change copy mode settings, such as the copy quantity, paper size, and copy ratio, while the machine is copying.
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
  • If the machine remains idle for more than two minutes, the display returns to the Main Menu screen (Auto Clear Time). You can change the value of time for the Auto Clear Time. For details, see "Setting the Auto Clear Time."
  • If you want to make another copy when there is an ongoing job, press the right Any key to select <Done>. Then repeat from the step 1.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Canceling Copy Jobs

You can cancel scanning or ongoing jobs.


Remark
  • If you cancel a copy job during scanning, make sure to remove the original.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Cancel>.

The display will return to the Copy top screen.

  • While the machine is scanning, printing, or waiting to print, you can cancel a copy job by pressing (Stop).
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Selecting Color Mode (Copy)

This section describes how to select the color mode (color/B&W).
The default setting is <Auto-color Select>.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Mode Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the color mode, then press [OK].
  • <Auto-color Select>: For the automatic selection of color or B&W*
  • <Color>: For copies in full-color
  • <Black>: For black and white copies

* Depending on the condition of the originals, the machine may not be able to properly distinguish between color and black-and-white originals.

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Selecting Paper Source

You can manually specify a paper source.
The default setting is <Drawer 1: LTR>.


Remark
  • If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the same size paper at a copy ratio of 100%, the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly on the copy. For details, see "Scanning Area."
  • The suffix <R> (such as in STMTR), used in paper size designations, indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or the stack bypass tray horizontally.

Copying on Paper in Drawers

Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper Sizes

Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper

Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes

Recalling Irregular Paper Size Registered for the Stack Bypass Tray


Copying on Paper in Drawers

Return to Overview

You can select paper drawer 1 or 2 (optional) for a copy. You need to set up the paper size and type for each drawer in advance. For details about configuring the paper size and type, see "Setting Paper Size and Type."

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Paper Source Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper source, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper Sizes

Return to Overview

This section describes how to copy onto standard-sized paper using the stack bypass tray.


Remark
  • If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting in <Paper Settings> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <Off>, the paper size/type setting screen appears when you load paper in the stack bypass tray. If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting is set to <On>, copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>, <OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-OFI>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>
For details, see "Paper Requirements."

  • The available paper sizes will vary depending on the country where the unit was purchased.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>, <Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>, <Transparencies>, <Labels>
For details, see "Paper Requirements."

  • If you want to print the back side of the printed paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2-Sided>.
  1. Press [OK] to select <Stack Bypass:>.

The selected paper size is displayed next to <Stack Bypass:>.

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper

Return to Overview

This section describes how to copy onto non-standard-sized paper using the stack bypass tray.


Remark
  • If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting in <Paper Settings> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <Off>, the paper size/type setting screen appears when you load paper in the stack bypass tray. If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting is set to <On>, copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Custom Size>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [OK] to select the horizontal length <X>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the length of X, then press [OK].
  • You can adjust values for <X> between 3" (76 mm) and 8 1/2" (216 mm).
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the vertical length <Y>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the length of Y, then press [OK].
  • You can adjust values for <Y> between 5" (127 mm) and 14" (356 mm).
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Size>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>, <Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>, <Labels>, <Envelope>
For details, see "Paper Requirements."

  • If you want to print the back side of the printed paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2-Sided>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Stack Bypass: Custom Size>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes

Return to Overview

This section describes how to copy onto envelopes using the stack bypass tray.


Remark
  • If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting in <Paper Settings> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <Off>, the paper size/type setting screen appears when you load paper in the stack bypass tray. If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting is set to <On>, copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Load envelopes into the stack bypass.

For details, see "In the Stack Bypass Tray."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired size of envelopes, then press [OK].

You can select from the following sizes of envelopes:
<COM10>, <Monarch>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>
For details, see "Paper Requirements."

  1. Press [OK] to select <Stack Bypass:>.

The selected paper size is displayed next to <Stack Bypass:>.

  1. Press (Start).
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Recalling Irregular Paper Size Registered for the Stack Bypass Tray

Return to Overview

You can easily set the frequently used irregular paper size for the paper loaded in the stack bypass tray by recalling the pre-registered paper size. For details on how to register irregular paper sizes, see "Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray."

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Custom size>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Recall/Register>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Size 1> or <Size 2>, then press <OK>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Size>, then press <OK>.

Make sure that the recalled paper size is the same as the actual size of the paper you loaded in the stack bypass tray in step 4. If not, set the correct paper size. (See "Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper type, then press [OK].

You can select the paper type from the following:
<Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>, <Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>, <Labels>, <Envelope>
For details, see "Paper Requirements."

  • If you want to print the back side of the printed paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2-Sided>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Stack Bypass: Custom Size>, then press <OK>.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Density (Copy)

You can manually adjust the copy exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
The copy tone becomes lighter as the indicator moves to the left, and darker as it moves to the right.
The default setting is <0>.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the copy density, then press [OK].
  • To make dark originals lighter, move the density scale to the left.
  • To make light originals darker, move the density scale to the right.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Adjusting Base Color (Copy)


Adjusting Base Color (Copy)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to adjust or remove the base color of the originals.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Background>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the background setting, then press [OK].

  • If you select <Background Removal>:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Background Removal>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Press [OK], then skip to step 7.

  • If you select <Background Fine Adjust.>:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Background Fine Adjust.>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].

  • 4. Press the right Any key to select <Set>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


2-Sided Copying

This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals, or make one-sided copies from two-sided originals. This enables you to cut print costs in half when copying in large quantities.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When you use the feeder to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals or one-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.
  • For details on the paper size that can be used for the 2-sided copying, see "2-Sided," in the print section. (The same paper size can be used for the 2-sided copying and 2-sided printing.)
  • 2-Sided modes cannot be used with the ID Card Copy mode.

1 to 2-Sided Copying


2 to 2-Sided Copying


2 to 1-Sided Copying



1 to 2-Sided Copying

Return to Overview

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Various 2-Sided Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <1-Sided to 2-Sided>.
  • If there are odd number of originals when the 1-Sided to 2-Sided mode is used, the back side of the last copy is left blank.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Layout Settings>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Vertical Original> or <Horizontal Original>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Book Type Copy> or <Calendar Type Copy>, then press [OK].
  • <Book Type Copy>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <Calendar Type Copy>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


2 to 2-Sided Copying

Return to Overview


Remark
  • When you use the feeder to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Various 2-Sided Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <2-Sided to 2-Sided>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Layout Settings>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Vertical Original> or <Horizontal Original>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type Original> for the original layout, then press [OK].
  • <Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original will have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Book Type Copy> or <Calendar Type Copy>, then press [OK].
  • <Book Type Copy>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <Calendar Type Copy>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


2 to 1-Sided Copying

Return to Overview


Remark
  • When you use the feeder to make one-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Various 2-Sided Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <2-Sided to 1-Sided>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Layout Settings>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Vertical Original> or <Horizontal Original>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type Original> for the original layout, then press [OK].
  • <Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original will have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Enlarge/Reduce Images

You can convert a standard-sized original to a different standard-sized copy (preset zoom), or you can enlarge or reduce images in 1% increments (custom copy ratio).
The default setting is <100% 1:1>.


Preset Zoom

Custom Copy Ratio


Preset Zoom

Return to Overview

You can enlarge or reduce standard size originals to another standard paper size.

  1. Set original.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Copy Ratio Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the zoom ratio, then press [OK].

You can select the preset zoom from the following:

  • <100% Direct>
  • <200% Maximum>
  • <129% STMT LTR>
  • <78% LGL LTR>
  • <64% LTR STMT>
  • <50% Minimum>
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Custom Copy Ratio

Return to Overview

You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 50% to 200%.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Copy Ratio Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Custom Copy Ratio>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the zoom ratio in 1% increments, then press [OK].
  • If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Selecting Image Quality (Copy)

You can adjust the image quality of copies according to the types of originals. A correct selection is necessary for the optimal reproduction of the colors of the original.
The default setting is <Text/Photo/Map>.


Remark
  • Combinations of these four modes (Text/Photo/Map, Printed Image, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type, then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Original Image Quality Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].
  • <Text/Photo/Map>: For originals that contain text, photos, and maps
  • If you select <Text/Photo/Map>, you can set priority on text or photos. Press the right Any key to select <Priority Level>, then use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the priority revel.
  • <Printed Image>: For originals that contain dot photos such as magazines
  • <Photo>: For photo paper originals such as photographs
  • <Text>: For originals that contain only text
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)

This mode enables you to reduce multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper (one-sided/two-sided). You can make well-organized copies by copying multiple originals onto one sheet. This mode enables you to cut print costs by saving copy paper, and it is also useful for saving space.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • The N on 1 mode cannot be used with the ID Card Copy, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, or Binding Erase mode. For details about the erase mode, see "Erasing Shadows/Lines."
  • The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit onto the selected paper size.
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  • When placing horizontal (landscape) originals into the feeder in the 2 on 1 mode, place the originals bottom side up.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the combination type, then press [OK].
  • <2 On 1>: This setting reduces two 1-sided originals or one 2-sided original to fit onto one side or both sides of the copy sheet.
  • <4 On 1>: This setting reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit onto one side or both sides of the copy sheet.

If you select <4 On 1>, you can specify the copy layout. Press the right Any key to select <Option>, then select the desired layout type.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  • To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper source, then press [OK].

If you select <Stack Bypass Tray>, specify the paper size and type.

  • If you want to make N on 1 copies from two-sided originals, select <2-Sided to 1-Sided> in the two-sided settings. For details, see "2 to 1-Sided Copying."
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Making ID Card Copies

This mode enables you to copy the both sides of an ID card on one side of paper at actual size.


Remark
  • The ID Card Copy mode can be combined with the Color Mode, Density/Background Rem., Original Image Quality, Collate, Copies, or Sharpness settings. Other setting combinations are not available.
  • Place the ID card on the platen glass when using this function. Make sure that no originals are placed in the feeder.
  • The zoom ratio is automatically set to 100% with this mode. You cannot change the copy ratio.
  • The ID Card Copy mode can be used with LTR or A4 paper.
  1. Place the ID card on the platen glass as illustrated.

Place the ID card on the middle of the left side of the platen glass.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <ID Card Copy Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper source, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).
  • You can adjust the copy density and base color by pressing [OK] to proceed to the Density setting display. After the settings are complete, press [OK] to return to the previous display. For details on density and base color settings, see "Adjusting Density (Copy)."
  • Proceed to step 9 if density and base color adjustment is not necessary.
  1. To scan one side of the ID card, press (Start).


  1. To scan the other side, turn the ID card and place it on the platen glass, then press (Start).

You can adjust the copy density and base color as indicated in step 8 to scan the other side of the ID card.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Sharpness (Copy)

You can set the sharpness of the copied image. If you want to copy text and lines more clearly, move the sharpness scale to the right. If you want to copy a halftone original such as a picture, move the sharpness scale to the left.
The default setting is <0>.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Sharpness Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the sharpness, then press [OK].
  • To make copies of printed images or other halftones, move the sharpness scale to the left.
  • To make copies of blueprints or faint pencil-drawn images, move the sharpness scale to the right.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Erasing Shadows/Lines

This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when using various types of originals. The following three Frame Erase modes are available: Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Binding Erase.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • Combinations of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • Frame Erase modes cannot be used with the ID Card Copy mode.

Original Frame Erase

Book Frame Erase

Binding Erase


Original Frame Erase

Return to Overview

This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy if the original is smaller than the selected paper size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy.


Remark
  • The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1 mode.
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Original Frame Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  • To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes>.

  • If you want to set the same width for all four borders:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].
  • The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
  • To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select <Enter mm>. When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [], [], (Scroll Wheel), and - (numeric keys).
  • If you want to change the value, press (Clear) before entering the new value.
  • If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.

  • If you want to set the top, left, right, and bottom widths independently:

  • 1. Press the right Any key to select <Adj. Each Dim.>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired frame erase borders, then press [OK].
  • To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select <Enter mm>. When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [], [], (Scroll Wheel), and - (numeric keys).

  • 3. Use[], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].
  • The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
  • If you want to change the value, press (Clear) before entering the new value.
  • If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Apply Settings>, then press [OK].

The display will return to the Copy top screen.

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Book Frame Erase

Return to Overview

This mode erases the dark borders and the center and contour lines that appear when you copy facing pages in a book or bound original onto a single sheet of paper.


Remark
  • The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1.
  • You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function.
  1. Set an original on the platen glass.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Book Frame Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  • To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes>.
  1. Enter the each erase width value:

  • If you want to specify the erase width value for center:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Center>, then press [OK].
  • To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select <Enter mm>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].
  • The default setting is <3/8" (10 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
  • When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [], [], (Scroll Wheel), or - (numeric keys).
  • If you want to change the value, press (Clear) before entering the new value.
  • If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.

  • If you want to specify the erase width value for all sides:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <All Sides>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].
  • The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Apply Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Binding Erase

Return to Overview

This mode erases the shadows that appear on copies from binding holes on originals.


Remark
  • Do not place originals with binding holes into the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
  • The borders you do not select are attenuated when using this function.
  • You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function.
  1. Set an original on the platen glass.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Binding Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use[], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  • To switch to the inch sizes, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) (Scroll Wheel) to select the hole punch location, then press [OK].
  • To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select <Enter mm>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the frame erase width, then press [OK].
  • The default setting is <3/4" (18 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <13/16" (20 mm)>.
  • If you want to change the value, press (Clear) before entering the new value.
  • If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.
  • When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [], [], (Scroll Wheel), or - (numeric keys).
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Color Balance

This mode enables you to adjust the color balance for the copy. The adjusted color balance settings can be stored and named so that you can use them repeatedly.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Adjustment>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of each color then, press [OK].
  • To weaken the selected color, move the adjust scale to the left.
  • To heighten the selected color, move the adjust scale to the right.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Registering Color Balance

Recalling Registered Color Balance

Deleting Color Balance


Registering Color Balance

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register the color balance setting. Up to four different settings can be stored.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Adjustment>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of each color, then press [OK].
  • To weaken the selected color, move the adjust scale to the left.
  • To heighten the selected color, move the adjust scale to the right.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Recall/Register>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the memory key that you want to store the color balance setting under, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Settings>.

  • If you want to name the color balance setting:

  • 1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use the software keyboard to enter a name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 10 characters for the name.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Recalling Registered Color Balance

Return to Overview

This section describes how to recall registered Color Balance settings.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Adjustment>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Recall/Register>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory key, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Deleting Color Balance

Return to Overview

This section describes how to delete the color balance setting.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Adjustment>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Recall/Register>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the memory key that you want to delete, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Collating Copies

You can sort copies into sets arranged in page order. This function is useful when making handouts for meetings.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Finishing Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Making Multiple Copies

This section describes how to make multiple copies.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Number of Copies Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys), [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99), then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking Current Settings

This section describes how to visually confirm the settings selected for the copy.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Preview Img.>.
  1. Check the current settings, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  • Actual scanned image of the original will not be displayed.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)

You can set any possible combination of copy modes and store them as a mode memory. There are four mode memories, and they can be assigned names for increased convenience. This feature is useful for storing frequently used copy settings.


Remark
  • Even if the power is turned OFF, the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted.

Registering Mode Memory

Recalling Mode Memory

Checking Mode Memory

Deleting Mode Memory


Registering Mode Memory

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register the copy settings to a mode memory.


Remark
  • Even if the power is turned OFF, the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Mode Memory>.
  • The currently specified settings are registered for the mode memory.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the mode memory key that you want to store the copy settings under, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Settings>.

  • If you want to name the mode memory setting:

  • 1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, press [OK].

  • 2. Use the software keyboard to enter a name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 10 characters for the name.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

If you want to check the details of the setting, use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details>, then press [OK].

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Recalling Mode Memory

Return to Overview

This section describes how to recall the registered mode memories.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Mode Memory>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired mode memory, then press [OK].


Checking Mode Memory

Return to Overview

This section describes how to confirm the registered mode memories.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy> , then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Mode Memory>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired mode memory, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the contents of the mode memory, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Deleting Mode Memory

Return to Overview

This section describes how to delete the copy settings from the mode memory list.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Mode Memory>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the mode memory key that you want to delete, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Changing Standard Mode

The Standard mode is the combination of copy modes that the machine automatically applies when the power is turned ON, or when (Reset) is pressed. You can change the Standard mode to suit your needs.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Color Mode Settings>: Auto-color Select
  • <Paper Source Settings>: Drawer 1: LTR
  • <Density/Background Rem. Set.>: 0
  • <Various 2-Sided Settings>: Off
  • <Copy Ratio Settings>: 100%
  • <Original Image Quality Settings>: Text/Photo/Map
  • <Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page>: Off
  • <Sharpness Settings>: 0
  • <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>: Off
  • <Color Adjustment>: Default
  • <Finishing Settings>: Off
  • <ID Card Copy Settings>: Off
  • <Number of Copies Settings>: 1
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Standard Mode Reg./Initialize>, then press [OK].
  • The currently specified settings are registered as the standard mode.
  1. Press [OK] to select <Register>.
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Initializing Standard Mode

This section describes how to initialize the current standard mode.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Standard Mode Reg./Initialize>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs

This section describes how to confirm copy jobs/logs, or cancel copy jobs.


Checking Copy Jobs

Canceling Copy Jobs

Checking Copy Logs


Checking Copy Jobs

Return to Overview

You can check the status of a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the copy status, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Canceling Copy Jobs

Return to Overview

You can cancel a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.

If you want to check the copy information, press the left Any key to select <Details>.

  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking Copy Logs

Return to Overview

You can check copy logs that contain detailed information of finished copy jobs.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Log>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the copy log, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


FAX

Fax Instructions



Introduction to Using Fax Functions

This section describes the things that you must do before using fax functions.
Be sure to set the following items first:

  • Your fax number

Register your machine's fax number. (See "Make Fax Settings.")

  • Your personal name or company name

Register your name or company name. (See "Make Fax Settings.")

  • Time and date

Set the current time and date. (See "Setting the Date and Time.")

  • Your telephone line type

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. (See "Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax).")

  • Fax receiving mode

Set how the machine receives fax documents to suit your needs. (See "Methods for Receiving Faxes.")



Sending Faxes

This section describes the settings and procedures for sending fax documents.


Basic Methods for Sending Faxes

Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending)

Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing (Fax)

Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax)

Canceling Sending Fax Documents

Specifying Destinations (Fax)

Specifying a New Fax Number


Using the Address Book (Fax)


Using the One-Touch (Fax)


Using the Group Addresses (Fax)


Specifying a Group from the Address Book (Fax)


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (Fax)


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Fax)


Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server


Selecting Resolution (Fax)

Adjusting Density (Fax)

Manual Exposure Adjustment (Fax)


Adjusting Base Color (Fax)


Selecting Image Quality (Fax)

2-Sided Original (Fax)

Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (Fax)

Direct Sending (Fax)

Favorites (Fax)

Registering Favorites (Fax)


Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Fax)


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Fax)


Erasing Favorites (Fax)


Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Fax)


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Fax)


Using the Favorites (Fax)


Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (Fax)


Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Fax)


Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Fax)


Job Recall (Fax)

Registering Your Machine's Fax Number

Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax)

ECM Transmission (Fax)

Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax)

Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial) (Fax)

Checking the Dial Tone before Sending (Fax)

Registering the Machine's Name (Fax)

Standard Send Settings (Fax)

Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax)


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Fax)


Printing the TX Terminal ID (Fax)

Adjusting Sharpness (Fax)

Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (Fax)

Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (Fax)

Send Start Speed (Fax)


Basic Methods for Sending Faxes

Return to Overview

This section describes the flow of sending faxes.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the fax number using - , and (numeric keys).
  • You can enter up to 40 characters for the fax number.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Destination>, then press [OK].
  1. Make the scan settings you require.

You can specify the following settings:

  • <Density/Background Rem.Set.>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See "Adjusting Density (Fax).")
  • <Direct Send Settings>: Sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned. (See "Direct Sending (Fax).")
  • <Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See "Favorites (Fax).")
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending)

Return to Overview

Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically.


Remark
  • You cannot use group addresses for manual sending.
  1. Connect an external telephone to the machine if you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document.

For information on how to connect an external telephone to the machine, see "Connect Telephone Cables."

  1. Place your originals.
  • You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Hook> or pick up the handset of your external telephone.
  1. Dial the recipient's fax number.
  • You can enter up to 40 characters for the fax number.
  • Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not connect, or the wrong number may be dialed.
  1. Talk through the handset to the recipient.
  • If you select <Hook> in step 6, you can pick up the handset when you hear the recipient's voice.
  • If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of the recipient's voice, go to step 10.
  1. Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive faxes.
  1. When you hear a high-pitched signal, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Start>, then press [OK] before hanging up the handset.
  • Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel>.


Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing (Fax)

Return to Overview

If your machine is set for pulse dialing, use the procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use information services (e.g., banks, airline reservations, and hotel reservations).


Remark
  • To talk to the other party, you will need to connect an external telephone to the machine.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Hook>.
  1. Enter the number of the fax information service using - (numeric keys).

  • If you are using one-touch:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <One-touch>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired one-touch, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. When the recorded message of the information service answers, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Tone> to switch to tone dialing, then press [OK].
  • If you are already using this machine with tone dialing, this step is not necessary.
  • After you press <Tone>, <T> appears on the display.
  1. Enter the numbers requested by the information service using - (numeric keys).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Start>, then press [OK] if you require a faxed copy of the information.

If you do not require a faxed copy of the information, press the right Any key to select <Done>.



Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax)

Return to Overview

When you dial or register an overseas number, you may need to insert a pause within the number.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the international access code using - (numeric keys).
  1. If necessary, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press [OK].
  • You can enter successive pauses within the fax number to make the pause time longer.
  • You can change the length of a pause inserted within the fax number in <Set Pause Time>. The default setting is two second. (See "Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax).")
  1. Enter the country code, the area code, and the fax number of the recipient.
  1. If necessary, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press [OK].
  • Pauses entered at the end of fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Canceling Sending Fax Documents

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel) during transmission.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to cancel, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying Destinations (Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify a fax destination. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch, or specify a new destination.


Remark
  • If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you can only specify a destination using <Address Book>, <Search LDAP Server>, or <Log>. If you select <Log>, you can select only settings stored. (See "Restricting the New Address.")
  • The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent.


Specifying a New Fax Number

Return to Overview

You can specify a new fax number using - , and (numeric keys).


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter a fax number using - , and (numeric keys).

You can enter up to 40 characters for the fax number.

Details of each item are shown below.

  • <Set Destination>: Set the desired destination.
  • <Backspace>: Delete the last number entered.
  • <Pause>: Insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number you are dialing. If you insert a pause within the fax number, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers. If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number, the letter <P> appears.
    When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code and at the end of the fax number. (See "Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax).")
  • <Tone>: Select when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which accepts only tone signals. If you select <Tone> and press [OK], the letter <T> appears.
  • <Direct Send>: Send documents directly to the recipient. Select <On>, then press [OK]. If you do not select direct sending mode, memory sending mode is used. (See "Direct Sending (Fax).")
  • You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number.
  • If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
  • You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.
  • If <Confirm Entered Fax No.> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you should enter the fax number again for confirmation. Enter the fax number you entered in step 4, then press [OK]. (See "Confirming Entered Fax Numbers.")
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Destination>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

  • 3. Specify a destination again.

  • If you want to confirm/edit the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to confirm or edit is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Confirm the specified destination.
  • To complete this procedure, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  • To edit the specified destination, press [OK], then edit the destination.

  • If you want to register the specified destination in the Address Book:
  • For the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you cannot register the destination in the following procedures.

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to register is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Press the left Any key to select <Reg. Add. Book>.

  • 4. Register the specified destination.

For details on how to register the destination in the Address Book, see "Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book."



Using the Address Book (Fax)

Return to Overview

You must specify the destination to send documents. A maximum of 300 (200 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations (including 200 one-touch destinations) can be stored. If you store addresses in the Address Book, you can easily select them.


Remark
  • If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book.
  • Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See "Import/Export Function.")
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press[OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].

The icons displayed on the Address Book are:

  • : Fax
  • : E-mail
  • : I-Fax
  • : File Server
  • : Group

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • If the register name is longer than 10 characters, the first 10 characters are displayed in the name column in the Address Book.
  • If the registered destination is longer than 13 characters, the first 13 characters are displayed in the destination column in the Address Book.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Using the One-Touch (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch.
Follow the procedure below to start a transmission and send a document using one-touch.


Remark
  • If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in Address Book.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Using the Group Addresses (Fax)

Return to Overview

Group address enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address Book or one-touch. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 299 (199 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations in one group.
You can use the group address from the Address Book or from the one-touch.


Remark

Specifying a Group from the Address Book (Fax)

Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (Fax)


Specifying a Group from the Address Book (Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Fax)

Return to Overview

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • A maximum of 332 (232 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 332 or 232 destinations, 32 new destinations can be specified.) If you specify a group of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  • When <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See "Restricting Broadcasting.")
  • You cannot cancel sending the document to only one destination out of the multiple destinations.
  • If you specify e-mail or file server addresses as destinations, <Color/File Format Settings> appears on the Send Settings screen. However, this setting is disabled when sending faxes.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Add Destination>.
  1. Repeat step 4 and 5 until all the destinations are set.
  • Up to 32 new destinations can be specified. If you add destinations, specify them from Address Book.
  • You cannot specify the detail settings for each destination.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server

Return to Overview

You can specify e-mail addresses and fax numbers by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. E-mail addresses and fax numbers obtained via the server can be specified as destinations or stored in the Address Book.
This section describes how to specify fax numbers via an LDAP server.


Remark
  • You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment.
  • If you want to specify or register destinations via an LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must be specified in the machine beforehand. (See "Registering LDAP Server.")
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired server to search, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the search criteria.
  • There are two methods to search for a fax number: Simple Search and Detailed Search. Simple Search enables you to search for a fax number by entering the name, e-mail address, or fax number for the destination. To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, use Detailed Search.
  • If a destination has both a registered e-mail address and fax number, you can search for it by entering either the e-mail address or the fax number as the search criterion.

  • To use Simple Search:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Name>, <E-mail>, or <Fax>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use the software keyboard to enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched.
  • To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press the left Any key to select <Detailed Search>, and follow the directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.

  • To use Detailed Search:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Detailed Search>.

  • 2. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Add Search Condition>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the first item, then press [OK].

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired search category, then press [OK].
  • <Name>: Search by name.
  • <E-mail>: Search by e-mail address.
  • <Fax>: Search by fax number.
  • <Organization>: Search by organization name.
  • <Organization Unit>: Search by organization unit (e.g., departments in an organization).

For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept, o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the directory, enter <Organization>/<Organization Unit> of the user as follows:
<Organization>=canon
<Organization Unit>=salesdept

  • <Organization>/<Organization Unit> can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the LDAP Server.
  • Detailed Search by <Organization>/<Organization Unit> may not be performed, depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP server and depending on the type of application on the server.

  • 6. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the second item, then press [OK].

  • 7. [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired search condition, then press [OK].
  • <contains>: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <does not contain>: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <equals>: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <differs from>: The result must be different from the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <begins with>: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <ends with>: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.

  • 8. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the third item, then press [OK].

  • 9. Use the software keyboard to enter the search criterion, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information on using the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."


  • 10. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Add or edit the search criteria as necessary.

If you search for a fax number using the criteria specified in step 5, go to the next step.


  • To continue adding more search criteria:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search Method (and/or)>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <or> or <and>, then press [OK].
  • <or>: The machine searches and returns a result that matches any of the specified search criteria.
  • <and>: The machine searches and returns a result that matches all of the specified search criteria.

  • 4. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Add Search Condition>, then press [OK].

  • 6. Follow step 5 to add the search criteria.
  • You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
  • If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both <or> and <and> together.

  • To edit the search criteria:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search criterion that you want to edit, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit Search Condition>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Follow step 5 to edit the search criteria.

  • To delete the search criteria:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search criterion that you want to delete, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase Search Condition>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Start Search>.

To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press the left Any key to select <Cancel>. If the machine finds some results before you select <Cancel>, these search results are displayed.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  • The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in <Register LDAP Server> in <System Management Set.>. (See "Registering LDAP Server.") If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of addresses to search, or change the search criteria.
  • If you select <Start Search> without specifying any search criteria, all of the addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.
  • If the Network Password Entry screen is displayed, enter your user name and network password, then press [OK].
  • The Network Password Entry screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:
  • If <Login Information> in <Register LDAP Server> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Use> or <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)>, and <Display Auth. Screen> is set to <On>. (See "Registering LDAP Server.")
  • If the user name, password, and domain name specified in <Register LDAP Server> in <System Management Set.> are incorrect. (See "Registering LDAP Server.")
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].

You can select up to 32 destinations.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Selecting Resolution (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
The default setting is <200 x 200 dpi (Fine)>.


Remark
  • The maximum size of an image that you can send at a resolution of 400 x 400 dpi is LGL.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Resolution Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired resolution, then press [OK].


Adjusting Density (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original manually.


Manual Exposure Adjustment (Fax)

Adjusting Base Color (Fax)


Manual Exposure Adjustment (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the density, then press [OK].

Move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter or move it to the right to make the exposure darker.



Adjusting Base Color (Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original when scanning. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals such as catalogs and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Background>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select background setting, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not erase the background color of the original.
  • <Background Removal>: If you want to erase the background color of the original, following step is not necessary.
  • <Background Fine Adjust.>: If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].

If you adjust the strength of <Yellow>, the levels of <Red> and <Green> adjust automatically to the same level as <Yellow>. If you adjust the strength of <Red> or <Green>, the <Yellow> level returns to its default level.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Selecting Image Quality (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning.
The default setting is <Text/Photo>.


Remark
  • Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the <Photo> mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using the sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting Sharpness (Fax).")
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Original Image Quality Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].
  • <Text/Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos such as magazines or catalogs.
  • <Text>: This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly.
  • <Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper or photo originals containing halftones (e.g. printed photos).


2-Sided Original (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • The 2-sided original mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the direct sending or manual sending mode.
  • When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>, then press [OK].
  • If <Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type Original> has been selected, <2-Sided Originals Settings> is displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of original, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: 1-sided originals are scanned.
  • <Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.


Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (Fax)

Return to Overview

The delayed sending mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it sent at a later time.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • You can reserve up to 70 jobs for the delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 70, depending on the following conditions:
  • If multiple documents are being sent at the same time.
  • If large documents are being sent.
  • If there are jobs other than delayed sending.
  • Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Delayed TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the send time using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
    Examples:
    3:50 p.m.→1550
  • To cancel to enter the time, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> to return to the previous screen.
  • If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on the next day.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four-digit number.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder. The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.



Direct Sending (Fax)

Return to Overview

The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • If you do not select direct sending mode, memory sending mode is used.
  • With direct sending mode, you can send a document of two or more pages only when using the feeder. You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.
  • You can specify only one destination at a time for direct sending mode.
  • Memory sending is automatically set when using delayed sending or when multiple destinations are specified.
  • If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the direct sending mode, you can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing the Activity Report, the Fax Activity Report, or on the <Log> for fax on the System Monitor screen.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Direct Send Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Send after all pages are scanned.
  • <On>: Send each page as it is scanned.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
  • To cancel sending, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  • You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.


Favorites (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them as favorites in memory. You can register up to 9 favorites. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.
  • If an address included in a favorites is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites.

Registering Favorites (Fax)

Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Fax)


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Fax)


Erasing Favorites (Fax)

Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Fax)


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Fax)


Using the Favorites (Fax)

Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (Fax)

Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Fax)


Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Fax)



Registering Favorites (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can register names for favorites from the Select Send Type Screen or register settings for favorites from the Send Settings screen.


Remark
  • The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.


Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
  • If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  • The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes> or <Details>, then press [OK].

To store the current settings, select <Yes>. To cancel storing the settings, select <No>.
If you select a key that has settings stored, select <Yes> to overwrite the previous settings.
You can check detail settings to select <Details>.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
  • If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).


Erasing Favorites (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can erase the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.



Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.


Using the Favorites (Fax)

Return to Overview

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.
You can recall the settings from the Select Send Type screen.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to recall, then press [OK].
  • If you select favorites that already has specified destinations, the Send Settings screen appears. You can change the send settings or add destinations at this time.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>.

  • If you select favorites that has no specified destinations, the Select Send Type screen appears. You can specify destinations.
  • To cancel all settings and return to the Select Send Type screen, press (Reset).


Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to check detail settings for favorites.
You can check the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.


Remark
  • To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites. (See "Registering Favorites (Fax).")


Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.

You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.



Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.

You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.



Job Recall (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can recall the addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set in the <Log>, and then send your documents.


Remark
  • The settings such as destinations, scan settings and send settings are stored in a log. The actions below after you change settings are not recorded in a log:
  • Pressing the (Start) or (Reset) or (Main Menu).
  • Activation of the Auto Clear mode.
  • Turning OFF the machine.
  • Identical send settings are stored only once in recall memory.
  • If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, the addresses specified from the Address Book are only recalled.
  • The settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF.
  • If <Restrict Sending From Log> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you cannot specify a destination using the <Log>. (See "Restricting Recall.")
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Log>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Mode 1>, <Mode 2> or <Mode 3>, then press [OK].

You can check the recall settings by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>.


  • If you select a log in which a destination is stored:

The Send Settings screen appears.


  • 1. Confirm the settings.

  • If you select a log in which a destination is not stored:

The Select Send Type screen appears.


  • 1. Specify a destination.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Registering Your Machine's Fax Number

Return to Overview

Your machine's fax number must be registered. When you send a document, the number that you registered is printed on the recipient's paper. For information on registering the fax number, see "Make Fax Settings."



Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax)

Return to Overview

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.
If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to send faxes. Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.
The default setting is <Tone>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Tel. Line Type Selection>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Manual>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of telephone line, then press [OK].
  • <Pulse>: Pulse dialing
  • <Tone>: Tone dialing
  • If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


ECM Transmission (Fax)

Return to Overview

ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise. ECM reduces errors when sending faxes in a poor telephone line condition.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • To communicate using ECM, make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines. ECM transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines.
  • Even when ECM is activated, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
  • If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to send the documents.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <ECM TX>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use ECM.
  • <On>: Uses ECM.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax)

Return to Overview

Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of connections when dialing the international access code, country code, and the destination's telephone number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. When the machine dials the number, it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number. This helps to improve the connection.
The default setting is <2 Seconds>.


Remark
  • Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Pause Time>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the pause time, then press [OK].

You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the pause time.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial) (Fax)

Return to Overview

Auto Redial enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient's fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs.
Auto Redial can be turned on or off. If you set Auto Redial to on, you can set how many times the machine redials, the redial interval, and whether the document should be resent due to an error.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Auto-redial>: On
  • <Redial Times>: 2 Times
  • <Redial Interval>: 2 Minutes
  • <TX Error Redial>: All Pages
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto-redial>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not redial automatically when a transmission fails. If you select <Off> and press [OK], go to step 15.
  • <On>: Redials automatically when a transmission fails. If you select <On> and press [OK], press [OK] again, then go to the next step.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Option>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Redial Times>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the number of redial times, then press [OK].

You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the number of redial times.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Redial Interval>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the redial interval, then press [OK].

You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the redial interval.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Error Redial>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, <All Pages>, or <Error and 1st Page>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Redialing does not take place if a sending error occurs.
  • <All Pages>: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. All pages of the document are resent.
  • <Error and 1st Page>: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. The first page of the document, the error page, and all subsequent pages are resent.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking the Dial Tone before Sending (Fax)

Return to Overview

The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines on the market made by companies other than Canon. The Check Tone Before Sending mode prevents this rare occurrence from happening.
If you are sending a fax document from your machine at the same time another fax machine (made by a company other than Canon) is trying to send you a fax, your fax document may end up being redirected to that fax machine, instead of the original destination you had intended.
Setting <Check Tone Before Sending> to <On> enables you to avoid such sending problems.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Check Tone Before Sending>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering the Machine's Name (Fax)

Return to Overview

Your name or company's name must be registered as the machine's name.
When you send a document, the name that you registered is printed as the sender's name on the recipient's paper. For information on registering the unit name, see "Make Fax Settings."



Standard Send Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the send function.



Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can store the standard send settings.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Resolution Settings>: 200 x 200 dpi
  • <Density/Background Removal>: 0
  • <Original Type>: Text
  • <2-Sided Originals Settings>: Off
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  • <Density/Background Removal>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See "Adjusting Density (Fax).")
  • You do not need to specify <Color/File Format Settings>. This setting is disabled when sending faxes.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can restore the standard send settings to their default settings.


Remark
  • All settings including <Color/File Format Settings> are restored to their default settings.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing the TX Terminal ID (Fax)

Return to Overview

The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID information is printed at the top of every document that you send via fax. Information such as your fax number and name is printed, enabling the recipient to know who sent the document.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <TX Terminal ID>: On
  • <Printing Position>: Outside
  • <Telephone # Mark>: FAX
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Terminal ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Printing Position>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Inside> or <Outside>, then press [OK].
  • <Inside>: The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipient's paper.
  • <Outside>: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipient's paper.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Telephone # Mark>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <FAX> or <TEL>, then press [OK].
  • <FAX>: "FAX" is printed before the fax number.
  • <TEL>: "TEL" is printed before the telephone number.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Sharpness (Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast.
The default setting is <0>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Sharpness>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to slide the indicator towards <Low> or <High>, then press [OK].
  • <Low>: To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be towards <Low>. This setting lessens the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern).
  • <High>: To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards <High>. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to specify what screen is displayed for a send operation. When you select <Send/Fax> on the Main Menu screen and press [OK], the screen specified here is displayed for a send operation.
The default setting is <Default Screen>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Default Screen for Send>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the initial screen, then press [OK].
  • <Favorites>: The Set Favorites screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  • <One-touch>: The One-touch Selection/Clear screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  • <Default Screen>: The Select Send Type screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can restore almost all of the Send Function Settings to their default settings.


Remark
  • You cannot initialize <Register Unit Name> and <Retry Times>. (<Retry Times> is disabled for the fax functions.)
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Send Start Speed (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to change the send start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the sending of a document.
The default setting is <33600 bps>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Start Speed>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired start speed, then press [OK].

If your document transmission is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, <7200 bps>, <4800 bps>, or <2400 bps>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Receiving Faxes

This section describes the settings and procedures for receiving fax documents.


Methods for Receiving Faxes

Auto RX Mode


Fax/Tel Auto Switch Mode


Answer Mode


Manual RX Mode


DRPD Mode


Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax)

Reducing a Received Document (Fax)

Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (Fax)

Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (Fax)

ECM Reception (Fax)

Setting the Incoming Ring Tone (Fax)

Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception) (Fax)

Activating the Remote Reception (Fax)


Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception (Fax)


Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode (Fax)

Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders (Fax)

Receive Start Speed (Fax)

Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (Fax)

Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (Fax)


Methods for Receiving Faxes

Return to Overview

Your machine provides several methods for receiving fax documents. You can receive documents automatically or manually. Follow the chart below to choose the fax receive mode that best suits your needs.
The default setting is <Auto RX>.



Auto RX Mode

Return to Overview

In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically. Select this mode if you use the machine for fax operations only, and not for voice communications using an external telephone.

  • Before using this mode

Simply set the receive mode to <Auto RX>. (See "Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax).")

  • When an incoming call is received
  • With no external telephone connected to the machine:
  • For fax calls, the machine receives fax documents automatically.
  • For telephone calls, you cannot talk to the caller.
  • With external telephone connected to the machine:


Remark


Fax/Tel Auto Switch Mode

Return to Overview

In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and the external telephone connected to the machine rings for telephone calls. (If <Incoming Ring> is set to <On>, the external telephone rings for both fax and telephone calls. To set the telephone to ring only when a telephone call is received, set <Incoming Ring> to <Off>.)

  • Before using this mode

Make sure to do the following:

  • When an incoming call is received


Remark
  • Incoming calls or outgoing calls may not work properly, depending on the type of the external telephone connected to the machine.


Answer Mode

Return to Overview

In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and your answering machine records a message for telephone calls.

  • Before using this mode

Make sure to do the following:

  • Set your answering machine to answer after 1 to 2 rings.
  • Record a message on your answering machine. (When you record a message, we recommend you insert about 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message, or limit the message to 20 seconds.)
  • When an incoming call is received


Remark
  • This mode does not support voice mail.
  • Make sure to change the receive mode if you turn off your answering machine; otherwise, the machine cannot receive fax documents automatically.


Manual RX Mode

Return to Overview

In this mode, you can monitor all incoming calls by picking up the handset each time your telephone rings. This mode is a suitable option if you expect to use the machine mainly as a telephone, and only occasionally receive fax documents.

  • Before using this mode

Make sure to do the following:

  • When an incoming call is received

*If <Remote RX> is set to <On>, you can also start to receive fax documents by dialing from your telephone. (See "Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception) (Fax).")


Remark
  • If you do not pick up the handset, you receive neither telephone nor fax calls. However, setting <Manual/Auto Switch> to <On> enables you to receive fax documents automatically after the telephone rings for a specified length of time. (See "Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode (Fax).")


DRPD Mode

Return to Overview

DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s) using only one telephone line. Your fax will automatically monitor incoming calls and based on the ring pattern, will let you know if the call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for availability.

  • Before using this mode

Make sure to do the following:

  • Subscribe to a DRPD service. Contact your telephone company for availability.


Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

Return to Overview

Select the fax receive mode to suite your needs.
The default setting is <Auto RX>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reception Mode Selection>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired receive mode, then press [OK].

For <Fax/Tel Auto Switch> and <DRPD>, you can specify optional settings. If you want to specify the optional settings, press [OK] again.


  • If you specify the optional settings for <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Ring Start Time>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the duration (4 to 30 seconds) for which the machine attempts to detect the fax tone before it starts ringing, then press [OK].
  • You can also use - (numeric keys) to specify the duration.
  • If the machine receives a fax, the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically.
  • The default setting is <6 Seconds>.

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax/Tel Ring Time>, then press [OK].

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the duration (15 to 300 seconds) of ringing, then press [OK].
  • You can also use - (numeric keys) to specify the duration.
  • The default setting is <15 Seconds>.

  • 6. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <After Ring Action>, then press [OK].

  • 7. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the action the machine will take after the ringing ends, then press [OK].
  • <Done>: Disconnects the call.
  • <Receive>: Receives a fax.

  • If you specify the optional settings for <DRPD>:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <DRPD>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a ring pattern, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <2-Sided Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Reducing a Received Document (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Receive Reduction>: On
  • <RX Reduction>: Auto
  • <Reduce %>: 90%
  • <Reduce Direction>: Vertical Only
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive Reduction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>.
  • <Off>: Does not reduce received documents. If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step 14.
  • <On>: Reduces received documents. If you select <On>, press the right Any key to select <Set>, then go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Reduction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto> or <Fixed Reduction>.
  • <Auto>: The image is automatically reduced by a suitable reduction ratio. If you select <Auto>, press [OK], then go to step 12.
  • <Fixed Reduction>: The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set for <Reduce %> in the next step. If you select <Fixed Reduction>, press [OK], then go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reduce %>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the reduction ratio, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reduce Direction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Vertical and Horizontal> or <Vertical Only>, then press [OK].
  • <Vertical and Horizontal>: The image is reduced in both the vertical and horizontal directions.
  • <Vertical Only>: The image is reduced in the vertical direction only.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set whether the machine prints the date, day, and time received, transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Received Page Footer>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to continue printing your current jobs when the toner is low.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When <Toner Out Continuous Print> is set to <On>, the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Toner Out Continuous Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


ECM Reception (Fax)

Return to Overview

ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise. ECM reduces errors when receiving faxes in a poor telephone line condition.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • To communicate using ECM, make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines. ECM transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines.
  • Even when ECM is activated, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
  • If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to receive the documents.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <ECM RX>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Incoming Ring Tone (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to activate the ring alert of the external telephone when the machine receives a fax or telephone call in the Auto RX or Fax/Tel Auto Switch mode.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Incoming Ring>: On
  • <Ring Times>: 2 Times

Remark
  • Incoming calls or outgoing calls may not work properly, depending on the type of the external telephone connected to the machine.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Incoming Ring>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>.
  • <Off>: Incoming tone does not ring. If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step 9.
  • <On>: Incoming tone rings. If you select <On>, press [OK], then go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the number of ring times, then press [OK].

You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the number of ring times.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception) (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can connect one external telephone to the machine.
When the telephone rings with the machine in the Manual RX mode, you can use the external telephone to start receiving the document without walking over to the machine.



Activating the Remote Reception (Fax)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to turn on the remote reception.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Remote RX>: On
  • <Remote RX ID>: 25
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Remote RX>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a remote reception ID (a combination of two characters using 0 to 9), then press [OK].
  • You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter a remote reception ID.
  • The default ID is 25. If you do not want to change the ID, press [OK] without entering any numbers.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception (Fax)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to receive fax documents using the remote reception.


Remark
  • Before using the remote reception to receive fax documents, make sure the followings:
  • An external telephone is connected properly.
  • Your telephone is set to tone dialing.
  1. When you receive a call, pick up the external telephone.
  1. When you hear a beep, use the numeric keys to enter the two-digit remote reception ID to start reception.

If you hear someone on the line, you can start talking to the other party.

  1. When the reception is complete, hang up the telephone.


Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to set the machine to switch to document receive mode after ringing for a specified length of time in the Manual RX mode.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Manual/Auto Switch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the amount of time the machine waits before automatically switching to the document receive mode, then press [OK].

You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the time.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to reject incoming faxes from senders who do not transmit their fax numbers (telephone numbers) to your machine. This can be useful when you do not want to receive direct mail (DM).
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Restriction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not reject to receive faxes from unknown senders.
  • <On>: Rejects to receive faxes from unknown senders.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Receive Start Speed (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to change the receive start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the receiving of a document.
The default setting is <33600 bps>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive Start Speed>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired start speed, then press [OK].

If your document reception is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, <7200 bps>, <4800 bps>, or <2400 bps>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (Fax)

Return to Overview

Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be occasions when you want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].

If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>.
  • <Off>: Does not use the memory lock reception mode. If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step 12.
  • <On>: Uses the memory lock reception mode. If you select <On>, press the right Any key to select <Option>, then go to the next step.
  1. If you want to set or change a password for the Memory Lock mode, enter a password (up to seven digits) using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].

If you set a password, it will be necessary to enter the password whenever you want to change the Memory Lock mode settings, or cancel the Memory Lock mode.

If you do not want to set the Memory Lock with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.

  • You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
  • If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
    Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear), then enter the correct password.
  1. Set the machine to print an RX report or not.

If you want to print an RX report when receiving documents, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to print an RX report, select <Off>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to print an RX report, you need also to set <RX Report> to <On>. (See "RX Report.")
  1. Set the time for the machine to enter and leave the Memory Lock mode.

If you want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings, select <Do Not Specify>, then press [OK]. Go to step 12.

If <Do Not Specify> is selected, the Memory Lock mode will not start automatically at a specified time. The machine enters the Memory Lock mode only when you manually set the Memory Lock mode to <On> in step 6.

  1. Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to enter the Memory Lock mode using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.
  1. Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to leave the Memory Lock mode using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.
  • If you set the same time for Memory Lock Start Time and Memory Lock End Time, the machine will be in the Memory Lock mode through the entire day.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (Fax)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].

If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].

The received documents are printed.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

This machine enables you to automatically forward received fax documents to a pre-specified destination. You can specify the desired forwarding destination to suit your needs, as shown below.

When you are forwarding the received documents to a specified destination, you can also specify a condition such as "Only the fax documents sent from a specific fax number are to be forwarded" to sort the received documents automatically.


Remark
  • The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 52 (12 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn): 50 (10 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) with forwarding conditions and 2 without conditions.
  • If a forwarding error occurs when <Print Image> and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to <Off> and <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Do Not Store>, the received documents will be lost.

Before Specifying the Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Specifying Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Storing Forwarding Settings (Fax)


When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions (Fax)


Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings (Fax)


Erasing Forwarding Settings (Fax)


Printing Forwarding Settings (Fax)


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (Fax)


Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (Fax)

Handling Forwarding Documents (Fax)

Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax)

Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax)


Before Specifying the Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

The necessary settings before forwarding received fax documents are as follows.


To Forward Received Documents to Fax Machine

Registering Fax Numbers as a Forwarding Destination
(See "Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book*" or "Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch.")
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
Registering Forwarding Settings
(See "Specifying Forwarding Settings (Fax).")

To Forward Received Documents via E-Mail/I-Fax

Specifying the Settings Necessary for E-Mail and I-Fax Communications
(Make the following settings in the order listed.)
1. Network Settings

(See "Basic Network Settings.")
2. Machine Settings for Sending and Receiving E-Mails/I-Faxes
(See "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-fax.")
Registering E-Mail/I-Fax Addresses as a Forwarding Destination
  • Registering E-Mail Addresses
(See "Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book*" or "Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch.")
  • Registering I-Fax Addresses
(See "Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book*" or "Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch.")
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
Registering Forwarding Settings
(See "Specifying Forwarding Settings (Fax).")

To Forward Received Documents to Shared Folder (SMB/FTP) on a Computer

Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer as a Forwarding Destination
(Make the following settings in the order listed.)

1. Network Settings
(See "Basic Network Settings.")
2. File Server Settings
(See "Setting Scan to File Server.")
Setting Up the Machine for Sending Documents to Shared Folder
(See "Setting Scan to File Server.")
Registering File Server Addresses as a Forwarding Destination
(See "Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book*" or "Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch.")
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
Registering Forwarding Settings
(See "Specifying Forwarding Settings (Fax).")


Specifying Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings.



Storing Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can register the forwarding conditions and the forwarding destinations. If the machine receives fax documents matching the registered conditions, the documents are automatically sent to the specified destination. You can also specify forwarding destinations for received documents that do not match the forwarding conditions.
To be able to forward received documents, you need to specify the forwarding settings in this section, then activate the settings. (See "Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings (Fax).")

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for the forwarding condition, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information on using the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding condition, then press [OK].

The available forwarding conditions are:

  • <disregard>: Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding condition.
  • <Does Not Exist>: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not exist.
  • <equals>: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information matches all of the characters entered.
  • <differs from>: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information differs from the characters entered.
  • <begins with>: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information begins with the characters entered.
  • <ends with>: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information ends with the characters entered.
  • <contains>: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information contains the characters entered.
  • <does not contain>: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not contain the characters entered.

If you select <disregard> or <Does Not Exist>, go to step 11.

  1. Enter the forwarding criterion (up to 20 characters) using - (numeric keys), then press the right Any key to select <Register>.

The following items are also available for entering the forwarding criterion:

  • <Space>: Inserts a space between numbers.
  • <+>: Use to insert a country code. Use <+> after the country code, and before the fax number.
  • <Backspace>: Deletes the last number entered.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Next>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press [OK].
  • You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.
  • <TIFF>: Forwards the file in the TIFF format.
  • <PDF>: Forwards the file in the PDF format.
  • This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 12. Go to step 17.
  • To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Divide Pages>.
  1. If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.


Remark
  • Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the received document.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forward w/o Condition>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press [OK].
  • You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.
  • <TIFF>: Forwards the file in the TIFF (B&W) format.
  • <PDF>: Forwards the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
  • This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 8. Go to step 13.
  • To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Divide Pages>.
  1. If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set whether received documents are forwarded.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired forwarding setting, then press [OK].

Each time you press [OK], the icon status displayed on the left side of the condition name is switched.

  • <>: The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it matches the forwarding conditions.
  • <>: The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Erasing Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to erase.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to check or change.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details/Edit>, then press [OK].
  1. Check or change the forwarding settings.

For instructions on changing forwarding settings, see "Storing Forwarding Settings (Fax)."

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can redirect the fax documents received in memory to the specified destination.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Received Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Forward>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Start>.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • You cannot select a group address.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Handling Forwarding Documents (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set how the machine handles the documents to be forwarded.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Print Image>: On
  • <Store Image to Memory>: Do Not Store

Remark
  • When <Print Image> and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to <Off> and <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Do Not Store>, the received documents will be lost if a forwarding error occurs.
  • If <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <On>, forwarded documents or those with forwarding errors are not printed even if <Print Image> is set to <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>. They are printed when <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <Off>.
  • When <Print Image> is set to <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>, the first page of a document with forwarding errors will be printed on the Error TX Report if it is set to be printed with image in <Report Settings>, even if <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <On>. For information on Report Settings, see "Printing Reports Automatically."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store/Print When Fwding.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print Image>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, <On>, or <Only When Error Occurs>, then press [OK].
  • <Off >: Does not print the image.
  • <On>: Prints all the images that has been forwarded.
  • <Only When Error Occurs>: Prints the image only when forwarding has failed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store Image to Memory>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Do Not Store> or <Only When Error Occurs>, then press [OK].
  • <Do Not Store>: Does not store the image.
  • <Only When Error Occurs>: Stores the image in memory if forwarding fails.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can resend the fax documents that the machine failed to forward.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Only When Error Occurs> in <Store/Print When Fwding.> in <System Management Set.>. (See "Handling Forwarding Documents (Fax).")
  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Error Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forward>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Start>.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • If the transfer is successful, the document is erased from memory.
  • You cannot select a group address for transferring the document.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can check the details of fax documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print those documents.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Only When Error Occurs> in <Store/Print When Fwding.> in <System Management Set.>. (See "Handling Forwarding Documents (Fax).")
  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Error Status>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to check the details of documents with forwarding errors:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to check.

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  • If you want to erase a document with a forwarding error:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to erase.

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.

  • If you want to print a document with a forwarding error:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to print.

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • To print multiple document, select and print one document at a time.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

The System Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of fax documents in memory.


Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents

Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents

Checking/Printing the Fax Log


Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the detailed information of fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job.

  • If you want to erase the selected job:

  • 1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then go to the next step.

  • If you complete this procedure:
  • 1. Go to step 8.
  1. Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the detailed information of the fax documents currently being received or fax documents that have been received in memory. If the documents are unwanted, you can delete them as necessary. In addition, documents that have been received in memory can be forwarded to a specified destination.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Received Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job.

  • If you want to erase the selected job:

  • 1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then go to the next step.

  • If you complete this procedure:
  • 1. Go to step 8.
  1. Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select <Erase>.
  • To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.
  • You cannot erase a document that is being printed.
  • If you select a document that is being received, <Erase> changes to <Cancel>, enabling you to cancel receiving the document.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Printing the Fax Log

Return to Overview

You can view or print the results of fax transactions that list all faxes sent or received.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Log>, then press [OK].
  • If <Job Log Display> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Off>, <Log> is not displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. If you want to print a list of transaction results, press the right Any key to select <Print List>.

If you do not want to print the list, go to step 8.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


I-Fax

I-Fax Instructions



Introduction to Using I-Fax Functions

Internet faxing (I-fax) enables you to send and receive fax documents over the network. Scanned documents are converted to TIFF format and are transmitted as an e-mail attachment to the recipient's I-fax compatible machine. For I-fax functions, enter the recipient's e-mail address instead of the fax number.
This section describes the things that you must do before using I-fax functions.
Be sure to set the following items first:

  • Your personal name or company name

Register your name or company name. (See "Make Fax Settings.")

  • Time and date

Set the current time and date. (See "Setting the Date and Time.")

  • Network settings

Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See "Basic Network Settings.")

  • E-mail settings

Set the e-mail settings to enable your machine to communicate with a mail server. (See "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-fax.")


Remark
  • An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet.


Sending I-Faxes

This section describes the settings and procedures for sending I-fax documents.


Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes

Canceling Sending I-Fax Documents

Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)

Specifying a New I-Fax Address


Using the Address Book (I-Fax)


Using the One-Touch (I-Fax)


Using the Group Addresses (I-Fax)


Specifying a Group from the Address Book (I-Fax)


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (I-Fax)


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (I-Fax)


Selecting Resolution (I-Fax)

Adjusting Density (I-Fax)

Manual Exposure Adjustment (I-Fax)


Adjusting Base Color (I-Fax)


Selecting Image Quality (I-Fax)

2-Sided Original (I-Fax)

Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (I-Fax)

Naming a Sent Document Using an I-FAX

Subject/Message (I-Fax)

Reply-to (I-Fax)

Favorites (I-Fax)

Registering Favorites (I-Fax)


Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (I-Fax)


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (I-Fax)


Erasing Favorites (I-Fax)


Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (I-Fax)


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (I-Fax)


Using the Favorites (I-Fax)


Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (I-Fax)


Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (I-Fax)


Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (I-Fax)


Job Recall (I-Fax)

Registering the Machine's Name (I-Fax)

Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (Retry Times) (I-Fax)

Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)

Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax)


Printing the TX Terminal ID (I-Fax)

Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax)

Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (I-Fax)

Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (I-Fax)

Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes

Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes

Registering a Subject Line for Your I-Faxes


Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes

Return to Overview

This section describes the flow of sending I-faxes.


Remark
  • The following conditions are always selected:
  • Paper Size: LTR
    This is because the sender does not know whether the recipient's machine can receive sizes other than LTR. Originals larger than LTR are reduced to LTR size.
  • File Format: TIFF
  • Resolution: B&W 200 x 100 dpi or B&W 200 x 200 dpi
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter I-Fax (New), then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the I-fax address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the I-fax address.
  1. Make the scan settings you require.

You can specify the following settings:

  • <Color/File Format Settings>: Sets <B&W TIFF (Divide into Pages)> or <B&W TIFF (Do Not Divide into Pages)>.*
  • <Density/Background Rem.Set.>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See "Adjusting Density (I-Fax).")
  • <Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See "Favorites (I-Fax).")

* If you want to divide multiple images into single pages and send each page as a separate file, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <B&W TIFF (Divide into Pages)>, then press [OK].

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <B&W TIFF (Do Not Divide into Pages)>, then press [OK].

  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Canceling Sending I-Fax Documents

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel) during transmission.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to cancel, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify an I-fax address. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch, or specify a new address.


Remark
  • If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you can only specify a destination using <Address Book> or <Log>. If you select <Log>, you can select only settings stored. (See "Restricting the New Address.")
  • The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent.


Specifying a New I-Fax Address

Return to Overview

You can specify a new I-fax address.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter I-Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter an I-fax address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the address.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

  • 3. Specify a destination again.

  • If you want to confirm/edit the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to confirm or edit is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Confirm the specified destination.
  • To complete this procedure, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  • To edit the specified destination, press [OK], then edit the destination.

  • If you want to register the specified destination in the Address Book:
  • For the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you cannot register the destination in the following procedures.

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to register is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Press the left Any key to select <Reg. Add. Book>.

  • 4. Register the specified destination.

For details on how to register the destination in the Address Book, see "Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book."



Using the Address Book (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You must specify the destination to send documents. A maximum of 300 (200 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations (including 200 one-touch destinations) can be stored. If you store addresses in the Address Book, you can easily select them.


Remark
  • If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book.
  • Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See "Import/Export Function.")
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press[OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].

The icons displayed on the Address Book are:

  • : Fax
  • : E-mail
  • : I-Fax
  • : File Server
  • : Group

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • If the register name is longer than 10 characters, the first 10 characters are displayed in the name column in the Address Book.
  • If the registered destination is longer than 13 characters, the first 13 characters are displayed in the destination column in the Address Book.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Using the One-Touch (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch.
Follow the procedure below to start a transmission and send a document using one-touch.


Remark
  • If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Using the Group Addresses (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Group address enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address Book or one-touch. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 299 (199 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations in one group.
You can use the group address from the Address Book or from the one-touch.


Remark

Specifying a Group from the Address Book (I-Fax)

Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (I-Fax)


Specifying a Group from the Address Book (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • A maximum of 332 (232 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 332 or 232 destinations, 32 new destinations can be specified.) If you specify a group of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  • When <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See "Restricting Broadcasting.")
  • You cannot cancel sending the document to only one destination out of the multiple destinations.
  • If you specify e-mail or file server addresses as destinations, <Color/File Format Settings> appears on the Send Settings screen. However, this setting is disabled when sending I-faxes.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Add Destination>.
  1. Repeat step 4 and 5 until all the destinations are set.
  • Up to 32 new destinations can be specified. If you add destinations, specify them from Address Book.
  • You cannot specify the detail settings for each destination.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Selecting Resolution (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
The default setting is <200 x 200 dpi>.


Remark
  • If you are sending documents by I-fax, the maximum image resolution is 600 x 600 dpi.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Resolution Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired resolution, then press [OK].


Adjusting Density (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original manually.


Manual Exposure Adjustment (I-Fax)

Adjusting Base Color (I-Fax)


Manual Exposure Adjustment (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the density, then press [OK].

Move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter or move it to the right to make the exposure darker.



Adjusting Base Color (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original when scanning. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals such as catalogs and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Background>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select background setting, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not erase the background color of the original.
  • <Background Removal>: If you want to erase the background color of the original, following step is not necessary.
  • <Background Fine Adjust.>: If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].

If you adjust the strength of <Yellow>, the levels of <Red> and <Green> adjust automatically to the same level as <Yellow>. If you adjust the strength of <Red> or <Green>, the <Yellow> level returns to its default level.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Selecting Image Quality (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning.
The default setting is <Text/Photo>.


Remark
  • Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the <Photo> mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using the sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax)")
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Original Image Quality Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].
  • <Text/Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos such as magazines or catalogs.
  • <Text>: This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly.
  • <Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper or photo originals containing halftones (e.g. printed photos).


2-Sided Original (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>, then press [OK].
  • If <Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type Original> has been selected, <2-Sided Originals Settings> is displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of original, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: 1-sided originals are scanned.
  • <Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.


Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

The delayed sending mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it sent at a later time.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • You can reserve up to 70 jobs for the delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 70, depending on the following conditions:
  • If multiple documents are being sent at the same time.
  • If large documents are being sent.
  • If there are jobs other than delayed sending.
  • Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Delayed TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the send time using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
    Examples:
    3:50 p.m.→1550
  • To cancel to enter the time, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> to return to the previous screen.
  • If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on the next day.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four-digit number.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder. The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.



Naming a Sent Document Using an I-FAX

Return to Overview

You can add the document's name.
The default setting is <None>.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Send Document Name Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the document name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate TIFF image attached to the I-fax. The file name prefix of the image attached to the I-fax is generated based on the date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) and four digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: date and time_0001.tif
    If you specify the document name in this step or set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>, the file name prefix is assigned as follows:
  • If you specify the document name:
    The document name specified in <Send Document Name Settings> comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: document name_date and time_0001.tif
  • If you set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>:
    The user ID entered when you log in to the machine comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: user ID_date and time_0001.tif
  • If you specify the document name and set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>:
    The document name specified in <Send Document Name Settings> and the user ID entered when you log in to the machine comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: document name_user ID_date and time_0001.tif
  • For instructions on how to set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>, see "Managing User IDs."


Subject/Message (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can add a subject line and message body text.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Subject/Message Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Subject>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the subject of the I-fax message, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 40 characters for the subject.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the subject, press (Clear) to clear your entry.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Message>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the message body text, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 140 characters for the text.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the text, press (Clear) to clear your entry.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Reply-to (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can add reply-to addresses.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • You cannot select multiple destinations for the reply-to address.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Reply-to Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the address to which you want to send the reply, then press [OK].
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Favorites (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them as favorites in memory. You can register up to 9 favorites. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.
  • If an address included in a favorites is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites.

Registering Favorites (I-Fax)

Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (I-Fax)


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (I-Fax)


Erasing Favorites (I-Fax)

Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (I-Fax)


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (I-Fax)


Using the Favorites (I-Fax)

Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (I-Fax)

Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (I-Fax)


Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (I-Fax)



Registering Favorites (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can register names for favorites from the Select Send Type screen or register settings for favorites from the Send Settings screen.


Remark
  • The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.


Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
  • If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  • The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes> or <Details>, then press [OK].

To store the current settings, select <Yes>. To cancel storing the settings, select <No>. If you select a key that has settings stored, select <Yes> to overwrite the previous settings.
You can check detail settings to select <Details>.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
  • If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).


Erasing Favorites (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can erase the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.



Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.


Using the Favorites (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.
You can recall the settings from the Select Send Type screen.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to recall, then press [OK].
  • If you select favorites that already has specified destinations, the Send Settings screen appears. You can change the send settings or add destinations at this time.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>.

  • If you select favorites that has no specified destinations, the Select Send Type screen appears. You can specify destinations.
  • To cancel all settings and return to the Select Send Type screen, press (Reset).


Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to check detail settings for favorites.
You can check the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.


Remark
  • To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites. (See "Registering Favorites (I-Fax).")


Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.

You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.



Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.

You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.



Job Recall (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can recall the addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set in the <Log>, and then send your documents.


Remark
  • The settings such as destinations, scan settings and send settings are stored in a log. The actions below after you change settings are not recorded in a log:
  • Pressing the (Start) or (Reset) or (Main Menu).
  • Activation of the Auto Clear mode.
  • Turning OFF the machine.
  • Identical send settings are stored only once in recall memory.
  • If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, the addresses specified from the Address Book are only recalled.
  • The settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF.
  • If <Restrict Sending From Log> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you cannot specify a destination using the <Log>. (See "Restricting Recall.")
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Log>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Mode 1>, <Mode 2> or <Mode 3>, then press [OK].

You can check the recall settings by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>.


  • If you select a log in which a destination is stored:

The Send Settings screen appears.


  • 1. Confirm the settings.

  • If you select a log in which a destination is not stored:

The Select Send Type screen appears.


  • 1. Specify a destination.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Registering the Machine's Name (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Your name or company's name must be registered as the machine's name.
When you send a document, the name that you registered is printed as the sender's name on the recipient's paper. For information on registering the unit name, see "Make Fax Settings."



Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (Retry Times) (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select <0> to turn the Retry Times mode off.
The default setting is <3>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Retry Times>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the number of retry attempts, then press [OK].
  • You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the number of retry attempts.
  • If the number of retry times is set to <0>, the machine will not resend the data.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the send function.



Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can store the standard send settings.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Color/File Format Settings>: B&W TIFF
  • <Resolution Settings>: 200 x 200 dpi
  • <Density/Background Removal>: 0
  • <Original Type>: Text
  • <2-Sided Originals Settings>: Off
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  • <Color/File Format Settings>: Sets <B&W TIFF (Divide into Pages)> or <B&W TIFF (Do Not Divide into Pages)>.*
  • <Density/Background Removal>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See "Adjusting Density (I-Fax).")

* If you want to divide multiple images into single pages and send each page as a separate file, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <B&W TIFF (Divide into Pages)>, then press [OK].

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <B&W TIFF (Do Not Divide into Pages)>, then press [OK].

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can restore the standard send settings to their default settings.


Remark
  • All settings including <Color/File Format Settings> will be restored to their default settings.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing the TX Terminal ID (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID information is printed at the top of every document that you send via I-fax. Information such as your I-fax address and name is printed, enabling the recipient to know who sent the document.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <TX Terminal ID>: On
  • <Printing Position>: Outside
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Terminal ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Printing Position>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Inside> or <Outside>, then press [OK].
  • <Inside>: The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipient's paper.
  • <Outside>: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipient's paper.
  • You do not need to specify <Telephone # Mark>. This setting is disabled for sending I-faxes.
  • "IFAX" is printed before the I-fax address.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast.
The default setting is <0>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Sharpness>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to slide the indicator towards <Low> or <High>, then press [OK].
  • <Low>: To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be towards <Low>. This setting lessens the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern).
  • <High>: To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards <High>. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to specify what screen is displayed for a send operation. When you select <Send/Fax> on the Main Menu screen and press [OK], the screen specified here is displayed for a send operation.
The default setting is <Default Screen>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Default Screen for Send>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the initial screen, then press [OK].
  • <Favorites>: The Set Favorites screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  • <One-touch>: The One-touch Selection/Clear screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  • <Default Screen>: The Select Send Type screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can restore almost all of the Send Function Settings to their default settings.


Remark
  • You cannot initialize <Register Unit Name> and <Retry Times>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes

Return to Overview

This function enables you to set the maximum data size for outgoing I-fax documents. If an I-fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is handled as an error and is not sent.
The default setting is <3 MB>.


Remark
  • When sending an I-fax document, you can set to divide the data before sending it if the size of the data exceeds the maximum data size for sending. For information on dividing data before sending it, see "Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Data Size Limit>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the maximum data size for sending I-faxes, then press [OK].

You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the data size.

  • The maximum data size for sending must not be greater than the maximum data size of the mail server.
  • If you enter <0> MB as the data size, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes

Return to Overview

This function enables you to divide an I-fax document into separate files when it is sent, if the data size exceeds the limit you specify in "Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes." Each file is sent separately as an e-mail attachment.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Divide TX Data Oversize>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering a Subject Line for Your I-Faxes

Return to Overview

This function enables you to register a subject line for I-faxes you send. The subject that you enter here is used as the default subject whenever you do not enter a subject when sending a job.
The default setting is <Attached Image>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Default Subject>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a subject, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information on using the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Receiving I-Faxes

This section describes the settings and procedures for receiving I-fax documents.


Remark
  • When the machine receives I-fax documents, the sender's I-fax address and the subject of the I-fax documents are always printed at the top of the first page. (If the first page of the I-fax documents contains the body text, the sender's I-fax address and the subject are not printed. )

Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax)

Reducing a Received Document (I-Fax)

Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (I-Fax)

Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (I-Fax)

Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (I-Fax)

Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (I-Fax)


Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <2-Sided Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Reducing a Received Document (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Receive Reduction>: On
  • <RX Reduction>: Auto
  • <Reduce %>: 90%
  • <Reduce Direction>: Vertical Only
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive Reduction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>.
  • <Off>: Does not reduce received documents. If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step 14.
  • <On>: Reduces received documents. If you select <On>, press the right Any key to select <Set>, then go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Reduction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto> or <Fixed Reduction>.
  • <Auto>: The image is automatically reduced by a suitable reduction ratio. If you select <Auto>, press [OK], then go to step 12.
  • <Fixed Reduction>: The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set for <Reduce %> in the next step. If you select <Fixed Reduction>, press [OK], then go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reduce %>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the reduction ratio, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reduce Direction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Vertical and Horizontal> or <Vertical Only>, then press [OK].
  • <Vertical and Horizontal>: The image is reduced in both the vertical and horizontal directions.
  • <Vertical Only>: The image is reduced in the vertical direction only.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set whether the machine prints the date, day, and time received, transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Received Page Footer>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to continue printing your current jobs when the toner is low.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When <Toner Out Continuous Print> is set to <On>, the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Toner Out Continuous Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be occasions when you want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].

If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>.
  • <Off>: Does not use the memory lock reception mode. If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step 12.
  • <On>: Uses the memory lock reception mode. If you select <On>, press the right Any key to select <Option>, then go to the next step.
  1. If you want to set or change a password for the Memory Lock mode, enter a password (up to seven digits) using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].

If you set a password, it will be necessary to enter the password whenever you want to change the Memory Lock mode settings, or cancel the Memory Lock mode.

If you do not want to set the Memory Lock with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.

  • You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
  • If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
    Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear), then enter the correct password.
  1. Set the machine to print an RX report or not.

If you want to print an RX report when receiving documents, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to print an RX report, select <Off>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to print an RX report, you need also to set <RX Report> to <On>. (See "RX Report.")
  1. Set the time for the machine to enter and leave the Memory Lock mode.

If you want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings, select <Do Not Specify>, then press [OK]. Go to step 12.

If <Do Not Specify> is selected, the Memory Lock mode will not start automatically at a specified time. The machine enters the Memory Lock mode only when you manually set the Memory Lock mode to <On> in step 6.

  1. Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to enter the Memory Lock mode using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.
  1. Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to leave the Memory Lock mode using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.
  • If you set the same time for Memory Lock Start Time and Memory Lock End Time, the machine will be in the Memory Lock mode through the entire day.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].

If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].

The received documents are printed.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Forwarding Received I-Fax Documents

This machine enables you to automatically forward received I-fax documents to any desired destination. If a received document matches the specified forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. Received documents that do not match the forwarding conditions can also be forwarded to any desired destination.


Remark
  • The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 52 (12 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn): 50 (10 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) with forwarding conditions and 2 without conditions.
  • If a forwarding error occurs when <Print Image> and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to <Off> and <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Do Not Store>, the received documents will be lost.

Specifying Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Storing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)


When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions (I-Fax)


Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)


Erasing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)


Printing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)


Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (I-Fax)

Handling Forwarding Documents (I-Fax)

Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax)

Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax)


Specifying Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings.



Storing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can register the forwarding conditions and destinations.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for the forwarding condition, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information on using the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination>, <Sender>, or <Subject>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding condition, then press [OK].

The available forwarding conditions are:

  • <disregard>: Disregards the Destination, Sender, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
  • <equals>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
  • <differs from>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
  • <begins with>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
  • <ends with>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
  • <contains>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
  • <does not contain>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.

If you select <disregard>, go to step 12.

  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the forwarding criterion using - (numeric keys), then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the forwarding criterion.
  1. If necessary, repeat steps 9 through 11.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Next>.
  1. Check the message on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press [OK].
  • You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.
  • <TIFF (Black)/PDF (Color)>: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or PDF (Color) format.
  • <TIFF (Black)/JPEG (Color)>: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Color) format.
  • <PDF>: Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
  • <PDF (Black)/JPEG (Color)>: Sends the file in either the PDF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Color) format.

If you select <PDF>, go to the next step.
If you select the others, go to step 21.

  • This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 16. Go to step 21.
  • To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Divide Pages>.
  1. If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.


Remark
  • Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the received document.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forward w/o Condition>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Check the message on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press [OK].
  • You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.
  • <TIFF (Black)/PDF (Color)>: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or PDF (Color) format.
  • <TIFF (Black)/JPEG (Color)>: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Color) format.
  • <PDF>: Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
  • <PDF (Black)/JPEG (Color)>: Sends the file in either the PDF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Color) format.
  • This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 9. Go to step 14.
  • To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Divide Pages>.
  1. If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set whether received documents are forwarded.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired forwarding setting, then press [OK].

Each time you press [OK], the icon status displayed on the left side of the condition name is switched.

  • <>: The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it matches the forwarding conditions.
  • <>: The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Erasing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to erase.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to check or change.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details/Edit>, then press [OK].
  1. Check or change the forwarding settings.

For instructions on changing forwarding settings, see "Storing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)."

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can redirect the I-fax documents received in memory to the specified destination.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax RX Document>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Forward>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Start>.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Handling Forwarding Documents (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set how the machine handles the documents to be forwarded.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Print Image>: On
  • <Store Image to Memory>: Do Not Store

Remark
  • When <Print Image> and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to <Off> and <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Do Not Store>, the received documents will be lost if a forwarding error occurs.
  • If <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <On>, forwarded documents or those with forwarding errors are not printed even if <Print Image> is set to <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>. They are printed when <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <Off>.
  • When <Print Image> is set to <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>, the first page of a document with forwarding errors will be printed on the Error TX Report if it is set to be printed with image in <Report Settings>, even if <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <On>. For information on Report Settings, see "Printing Reports Automatically."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store/Print When Fwding.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print Image>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, <On>, or <Only When Error Occurs>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not print the image.
  • <On>: Prints all the images that has been forwarded.
  • <Only When Error Occurs>: Prints the image only when forwarding has failed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store Image to Memory>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Do Not Store> or <Only When Error Occurs>, then press [OK].
  • <Do Not Store>: Does not store the image.
  • <Only When Error Occurs>: Stores the image in memory if forwarding fails.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can resend the I-fax documents that the machine failed to forward.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Only When Error Occurs> in <Store/Print When Fwding.> in <System Management Set.>. (See "Handling Forwarding Documents (I-Fax).")
  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax Fwd. Error Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forward>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Start>.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • If the transfer is successful, the document is erased from memory.
  • You cannot select a group address for transferring the document.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can check the details of I-fax documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print those documents.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Only When Error Occurs> in <Store/Print When Fwding.> in <System Management Set.>. (See "Handling Forwarding Documents (I-Fax).")
  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax Fwd. Error Status>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to check the details of documents with forwarding errors:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to check.

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  • If you want to erase a document with a forwarding error:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to erase.

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.

  • If you want to print a document with a forwarding error:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to print.

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • To print multiple document, select and print one document at a time.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing the Status of I-Fax Documents in Memory

The System Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of I-fax documents in memory.


Checking/Deleting I-Fax Transmission Documents

Checking/Deleting I-Fax Reception Documents

Checking the Arrival of I-Fax Documents

Checking/Printing the I-Fax Transmission Log

Checking/Printing the I-Fax Reception Log


Checking/Deleting I-Fax Transmission Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the detailed information of I-fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job.

  • If you want to erase the selected job:

  • 1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then go to the next step.

  • If you complete this procedure:
  • 1. Go to step 8.
  1. Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Deleting I-Fax Reception Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the detailed information of I-fax documents received in memory, then delete unwanted documents as necessary. You can also forward received documents in memory to a desired destination.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax RX Document>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job.

  • If you want to erase the selected job:

  • 1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then go to the next step.

  • If you complete this procedure:
  • 1. Go to step 8.
  1. Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select <Erase>.
  • To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.
  • You cannot erase a document that is being printed.
  • If you select a document that is being received, <Erase> changes to <Cancel>, enabling you to cancel receiving the document.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking the Arrival of I-Fax Documents

Return to Overview

The machine regularly checks for the arrival of an I-fax. However, you can check for the arrival of an I-fax at any time by performing the procedure below.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Confirm I-Fax RX Doc.>, then press [OK].

The machine accesses to your mail server for checking for I-fax documents.

  • To be able to use <Confirm I-Fax RX Doc.>, you must first set <POP> to <On> in <E-mail/I-Fax>, so that you can receive documents using POP. (See "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-fax.")


Checking/Printing the I-Fax Transmission Log

Return to Overview

You can view or print the results of fax transactions that list all I-faxes sent.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store Log>, then press [OK].
  • If <Job Log Display> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Off>, <Send/Store Log> is not displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. If you want to print a list of transaction results, press the right Any key to select <Print List>.

If you do not want to print the list, go to step 8.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Printing the I-Fax Reception Log

Return to Overview

You can view or print the results of fax transactions that list all I-faxes received.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive Job Log>, then press [OK].
  • If <Job Log Display> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Off>, <Receive Job Log> is not displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. If you want to print a list of transaction results, press the right Any key to select <Print List>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


PC Fax

PC Fax Instructions



System Requirements (PC Fax)

The fax driver can be used in the following system environments:

  • Operating System Software
  • Windows 2000
  • Windows XP
  • Windows Vista
  • Windows 7
  • Windows Server 2003
  • Windows Server 2008
  • With a Server-Based Computing Environment
  • Compatible Windows Terminal Server (Service)
  • Windows 2000 Server
  • Windows Server 2003
  • Windows Server 2008
  • Compatible Software
  • Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
  • Citrix Presentation Server 4.5
  • Citrix XenApp 5.0
  • Citrix XenDesktop 2.0
  • Citrix XenDesktop 2.1
  • Citrix XenDesktop 3.0
  • Citrix XenDesktop 4.0
  • Computer

Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly.



Where to Find Help (PC Fax)

Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the fax driver.


  • README.HTA file

Any hints, enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your fax driver are included in the README.HTA file provided with the driver. This file is located in \FAX\us_eng.

  • Online Help

You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your fax in the Online Help file provided with the driver. In the fax properties dialog box, you can click [Help] to display additional information about every feature and option in the fax driver.

  • Canon Authorized Dealers or Canon Customer Care Center

If the Online Help file does not provide the information you need, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or Canon Customer Care Center.



Faxing Fundamentals (PC Fax)

This section explains the fundamental operations of the fax driver, such as how to display the fax driver, and how to send a fax from a computer.


Faxing a Document (PC Fax)

Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)

Setting Up the Fax Configuration (PC Fax)

Viewing the Online Help (PC Fax)


Faxing a Document (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

The procedure for faxing a document created in application software is as follows.


Remark
  • Faxing methods may differ depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
  • Up to 512 fax transmission destinations can be stored in the device. If the number of destinations exceeds 512 after a fax job has been sent to the device, the last job to be input will be erased. Be careful when registering more than 512 destinations in groups or when sending a fax continuously to multiple groups.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Open the document you want to fax from the application.
  1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  • The procedure for displaying the [Print] dialog box may differ depending on the application you are using.
  1. Select your fax, then click [Preferences].

The fax driver screen is displayed.

  • The fax name displayed in the fax driver screen is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
    See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" to display the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
  • The procedure for displaying the fax driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
  1. Configure the required settings in the fax driver screen, then click [OK].

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Click [Print].

The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Specify destination name and fax number in the [Sending Settings] sheet → click [Add to Destination List].

  • The number of destinations to which you can send simultaneously depends on the conditions of cover sheet attachment. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • You can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, log on as a user who has access to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission. See "Changing the Address Book Export Destination (PC Fax)" for changing where you save the address book.
  • When you click [Add to Destination List], a dialog box to prompt you to confirm the destination appears, if the Security Settings in the [Special] page is enabled. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  1. If you want to attach a cover sheet, select [Cover Sheet] sheet → specify a format for the cover sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

Faxing begins.



Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

To fax a document, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • When faxing, you can change the settings you configured beforehand. To change the settings, configure them from the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. On the [start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows 2000, on the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2008, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Devices and Printers].
  1. Right-click the icon of the fax whose settings you want to configure → click [Printing Preferences] from the displayed menu.

The fax driver screen is displayed.

The fax driver screen includes the following sheets.

  • [Edit Address Book] sheet
  • [Register Cover Sheet] sheet
  • [Special] sheet

  • To access the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), you need to be assigned full control permission for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  1. Configure the required settings in the displayed fax driver screen.

For details about the fax driver settings, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.

  1. Click [OK].


Setting Up the Fax Configuration (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

To configure the fax conditions, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • Full control access is required to configure the fax settings. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  • If you use this procedure in a shared printer environment, Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be installed on the print server. For details about installing Canon Driver Information Assist Service, refer to the "Fax Driver Installation Guide."
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. On the [start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows 2000, on the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2008, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] →[Printers].
  • If you are using Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Devices and Printers].
  1. Right-click the icon of the fax whose settings you want to configure → click [Properties] (Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: [Printer properties]) from the displayed menu.

The printer properties dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the [Device Settings] sheet → click [Get Device Status].

  • If the printer and computer are connected via USB, the [Get Device Status] function is unavailable. You need to configure the settings manually.
  1. Confirm the settings → click [OK].


Viewing the Online Help (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the fax driver screen.

See "Faxing a Document (PC Fax)" or "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Click [Help].

The online help is displayed.



Useful Fax Functions (PC Fax)

This section explains useful functions for sending faxes, such as scheduling the fax send time, attaching a cover sheet, etc.


Setting the Fax Send Time (PC Fax)

Attaching a Cover Sheet (PC Fax)


Setting the Fax Send Time (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can store the data temporarily in the printer, and send the fax at the specified time.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Sending Settings] sheet.

See "Faxing a Document (PC Fax)" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Specify the destination name and fax number → click [Add to Destination List].

  • When you click [Add to Destination List], a dialog box to prompt you to confirm the destination appears, if the Security Settings in the [Special] page is enabled. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  1. Select [Set the Time to Send] → specify the time to send the fax.

Specify a time from 0:00 to 23:59.

  1. Click [OK].

The data is stored temporarily in the printer, and the fax is sent at the specified time.



Attaching a Cover Sheet (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

To attach a cover sheet to the fax, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The number of destinations to which you can send simultaneously depends on how a cover sheet is attached. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Sending Settings] sheet in the [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box.

See "Faxing a Document (PC Fax)" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Select an option for attaching the cover sheet to the fax from [Cover Sheet Attachment].

Select one of the following options:

  • [None]
  • [Different Sheet to Each Destination]
  • [Same Sheet to All Destinations]

  1. Select a cover sheet template from [Style].

  1. Click [Settings] to specify the items to include on the cover sheet.

If you do not specify the items to include on the cover sheet, proceed to step 12.

The [Item Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet in the [Sender] sheet → enter the information in the text boxes for the selected items.

You can specify the following items:

  • [Include Sender Name (TTI)]
  • [Include Company]
  • [Include Dept./Div.]
  • [Include Fax Number]

  • You can save the information entered in the [Sender] sheet in a file by clicking [Save Sender]. Then, when you send a fax, you can import the information by using [Import Sender], instead of entering the sender information each time you send a fax.
  1. Select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet in the [Destination] sheet.

You can specify the following items:

  • [Include Destination Name]
  • [Include Company]
  • [Include Dept./Div.]
  • [Include Fax Number]

  • The information of the destinations specified in the [Sending Settings] sheet prints on the cover sheet.
  1. Display the [Logo] or [Signature] sheet.

  1. Select [Print with Logo] or [Print with Signature] to include a logo or signature on the cover sheet.
  1. Click [Browse] to select a bitmap logo or signature file name for [File Name] → specify the magnification and position of the selected logo or signature.
  1. Select [Include Number of Sheets to Send] in the [Sheets to Send] sheet → enter the number of sheets you are going to send as a fax.

  • The number of sheets is not counted automatically. The number which you entered manually is shown on the cover sheet.
  1. Click [OK].

The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select [Insert Attention Note] to insert an attention note → select a note from [Attention Note].

  • You can also enter the characters you want to insert. You can enter up to 30 characters.
  1. Enter any other information you want to include on the cover sheet in [Comment to include].

  1. Click [Preview] if you want to check the preview image on the cover sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

The specified cover sheet is attached to the fax when the fax is sent.



Using the Address Book (PC Fax)

This section explains how to use the address book, and includes the procedures for registering individual and group addresses, editing the address book, etc. You can also specify destinations from address books created in applications other than the fax driver.


Remark
  • You can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, log on as a user who has access to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission. See "Changing the Address Book Export Destination (PC Fax)" for changing where you save the address book.

Single Person Entry (PC Fax)

Group Entry (PC Fax)

Importing Address Book Entries (PC Fax)

Exporting Address Book Entries (PC Fax)

Changing the Address Book Export Destination (PC Fax)


Single Person Entry (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can register addresses for individual people in the address book.


Remark
  • You can register up to 3000 address entries for individual people.
  • If you cannot browse or edit the address book, log on as a user with access privileges, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and change the address book destination folder to a folder such as [My Documents] for which you have read/write privileges.
  • You can also edit previously registered single person addresses. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Add Person].

The [Add Person] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter information about the new person such as their name and company name.

  1. Enter the fax number.
    You can also enter information concerning the fax number in [Description].

  • You can register two fax numbers: a primary number and a secondary number.
  1. Enter any additional information about the person in [Notes].

  1. Click [OK].

The settings are registered.

  • If you specify two fax numbers for a single individual destination, two fax numbers with the same name will be displayed in the address book.
  • To delete a registered entry in the Address Book, select the entry in the list of the addresses and click [Delete].


Group Entry (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can register groups in the address book. As well as the addresses of individual people in a group, you can also register other registered groups as sub-groups.


Remark
  • You can register the group address up to 3000 entries.
  • If you cannot browse or edit the address book, log on as a user with access privileges, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and change the address book destination folder to a folder such as [My Documents] for which you have read/write privileges.
  • You can also edit previously registered group destination information. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Add Group].

The [Add Group] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter the new group name → select what to register from [Show].

Select what to register from among the following:

  • [Person]
  • [Group]
  • [All]

  1. Select person or group entries as members of the new group from the [Available Destinations] list → click [Add].

To remove a member of the selected group, select the person or group entry you want to remove from the [Current Group Members] list → click [Delete].

  • You can select multiple entries by holding down [SHIFT] or [CTRL] on the keyboard and clicking each entry that you want to select.
  1. Enter the keyword of the new group in [Notes].

  1. Click [OK].

The settings are registered.

  • To delete a registered entry in the Address Book, select the entry in the list of the addresses and click [Delete].


Importing Address Book Entries (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can load data from CSV (*.csv) files or Canon Address Book files (*.abk) into the address book. If you load CSV format data, specify the character to be used as a separator.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Import].

The [Open] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the file to import → click [Open].

Select the type of the file to import from [Files of type]: CSV Files (*.csv), Canon Address Book(*.abk), All Files(*.*)

The address book is imported, and added to the list.



Exporting Address Book Entries (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can save data registered in the address book as a CSV (*.csv) file or a Canon Address Book file (*.abk). If you save it in CSV format, specify the character to be used as a separator.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Export].

The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.

  • When you click [Export], a dialog box to prompt you to enter a password appears, if the Security Settings in the [Special] page is enabled. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  1. Enter the file name → click [Save].

Select the type of the file to export from [Save as type]: CSV Files (*.csv) or Canon Address Book(*.abk)

The specified address book is saved as a file. You can use the saved (exported) CSV file on other application software.



Changing the Address Book Export Destination (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can change the save destination of the address book of the fax driver (the Canon Fax Driver Address Book), or create a new address book.


Remark
  • You can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to this folder).
    If you are not permitted access to the folder, save the address book file in another folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Specify a Folder].

The [Browse for Folder] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the folder to save the address book → click [OK].

  • Save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission.
  1. If you want to create an address book, click [New], or if you want to copy the existing address book to the specified folder, click [Copy].

  • If an address book already exists in the folder selected in step 3, the following message box will be displayed. If you want to use the existing address book, click [Use as-is], and if you want to use the address book of the fax driver, click [Overwrite].



Printing from Computer

This category describes how to print from computers.



Introduction to Using Print Functions

Normally, the series of operations involved in printing data from a computer is specified by control commands generated using a printer driver. Control commands are a command system for controlling a printer. For example, when printing using a printer driver, control commands print data according to the following flow.

1 Using a printer driver, data to be printed is converted to control commands.

2 Control command data is sent to the machine.

3 Following the received control commands, the machine processes and prints the data.

To print in the following printer modes, a Printer Driver supported by this machine must be installed.

For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see "Network Connection."
For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your computer to the machine, see "USB Connection."


Remark
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using.
  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use Department ID Management. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see "Set Up Computers and Software."
  • Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.

  • UFRII LT Mode

UFR (Ultra Fast Rendering) is printing technology developed by Canon. High-speed printing is made possible by sharing the processing of print data normally done by the machine with the computer.


Remark
  • For information on the machines supported by the UFRII LT printer driver, see Canon Products Supported by UFR II Driver.

  • PCL Mode

PCL (Print Control Language), developed by Hewlett-Packard, is a command system for controlling page printers. Command versions supported by this machine are PCL5c and PCL6.


Remark
  • The PCL printing function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • For information on the machines supported by the PCL5c and PCL6 printer drivers, see Canon Products Supported by PCL Driver.

  • PS Mode

PS (PostScript), developed by Adobe Systems, is a page description language renowned for its use in desktop publishing and publishing on demand. The version supported by this machine is PS3.


Remark
  • The PS printing function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • For information on the machines supported by the PS3 printer driver, see Canon Products Supported by PS Driver.

Printing through USB Connection

Printing through Network Connection

Where to Find Help


Printing through USB Connection

Return to Overview

To install the printer driver through a USB connection, see "USB Connection."


Remark
  • Before installing a printer driver through a USB connection, turn the printer OFF. Turn the power back ON only if the instruction to do so appears on the screen during installation.
  • In a USB environment, you cannot set up the printer configuration automatically or use Department ID Management.


Printing through Network Connection

Return to Overview

To install the printer driver through network, see "Network Connection."



Where to Find Help

Return to Overview

Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the printer driver.

  • README.HTA file

Any enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your printer driver are included in the README.HTA file provided with the driver. The README.HTA file is located in \UFRII\us_eng, \PCL\us_eng, or \PS\us_eng.

  • Online Help

You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your printer in the Online Help provided with the driver. In the printer properties dialog box, you can click [Help] to display additional information about every feature and option in the UFRII LT, PCL5c, PCL6, and PS3 printer drivers. See the Online Help for the detailed information on specifying UFR II, PCL, and PS options.

  • Canon Authorized Dealers or Canon Customer Care Center

If the Online Help does not provide the information you need, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or Canon Customer Care Center.



Printing Fundamentals

This section explains how to print a document and how to display the online help.


Remark
  • To use the printer, you need an appropriate printer driver.
  • For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see "Network Connection."
  • For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your computer to the machine, see "USB Connection."

Printing with the Printer Driver

Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand

Setting the Printer Configuration

Viewing the Online Help


Printing with the Printer Driver

Return to Overview

The procedure for printing a document created in application software is as follows.


Remark
  • Printing methods may differ depending on the applications you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use Department ID Management. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see "Set Up Computers and Software."
  • The machine may not be able to print data such as color photos if the data size of a single page is too large. If such is the case, reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format.
  1. Open the document you want to print from the application.
  1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The printer driver screen is displayed.

  • The procedure to display the printer driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
  1. Select your printer, then click [Preferences].

  • The printer name displayed in the printer driver screen is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]). See "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" to display the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
  1. Configure the required settings in the printer driver screen, then click [OK].

  1. Click [Print].

  • The name of the button to start printing may vary depending on the application you are using.

Printing begins.



Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand

Return to Overview

To configure the printing conditions, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • When printing, you can change the settings you configured beforehand. To change the settings, configure them from the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. On the [start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows 2000, on the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2008, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Devices and Printers].
  1. Right-click the icon of the printer whose settings you want to configure → click [Printing Preferences] from the displayed menu.

The printer driver screen is displayed.

  1. Configure the required settings in the displayed printer driver screen.
  1. Click [OK].

The printer whose settings you have configured will print with the same settings every time.



Setting the Printer Configuration

Return to Overview

To set the printer configuration, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • Full control access is required to configure the settings for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. On the [start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows 2000, on the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2008, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Devices and Printers].
  1. Right-click the icon of the printer whose settings you want to configure → click [Properties] (Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: [Printer properties]).

The printer properties dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select [Device Settings] sheet → click [Get Device Status].

  • If you are using the machine as a shared printer, you can use the [Get Device Status] function by installing the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the print server. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see "Set Up Computers and Software," in the Starter Guide.
  • If the information request returns an error message, you need to configure the settings (such as paper feed options, paper output options, etc.) manually.
  • If the printer and computer are connected via USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices), the [Get Device Status] function is unavailable. You need to configure the settings manually.
  • Depending on the printer model you are using, the function version of the device is obtained together with the device information.
  1. Confirm the settings such as paper source options and output options → click [OK].


Viewing the Online Help

Return to Overview

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the printer driver screen.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Click [Help].

The online help is displayed.



Printing Functions

These sections explain what you can do in each sheet of the printer driver UI.


Remark
  • The items displayed in the printer driver window differ according to the printer model you are using.
  • Some functions may not be available depending on the printer model you are using.
  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use Department ID Management. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see "Set Up Computers and Software."

Common Functions

[Page Setup] Sheet

[Finishing] Sheet

[Paper Source] Sheet

[Quality] Sheet

[Device Settings] Sheet


Common Functions

Return to Overview

The following functions are common to all sheets.


1

Selecting Profiles

You can select a profile to conveniently repeat the same print settings.

4

Preview

The settings configured in each sheet are displayed in the preview.

2

Adding/Editing Profiles

You can add and edit profile settings.

5

Verifying Settings

You can verify the settings specified in each sheet.

3

Changing the Output Method

You can change the output method.




[Page Setup] Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Page Setup] sheet, you can configure the following settings. The numbers in the image at the bottom indicate where to configure the settings.


1

Output Paper Size

Enables you to select the paper size actually output from the printer.

4

Watermark

Prints pages with a watermark (such as "COPY") superimposed on the document.

2

Print Direction

Sets the print direction relative to the orientation of the paper.

5

Page Border

Prints each page with a border.

3

Page Layout

Prints multiple pages arranged on one sheet of paper.

6

Header/Footer

Prints pages with headers and/or footers with the date, page number, etc.




[Finishing] Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Finishing] sheet, you can do the following.


1

2-sided Printing

Prints on the front and back of the paper.

3

Collating

When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs each set separately in page order.

2

Booklet Printing

Prints pages in a sequence that allows them to be folded and grouped into a booklet when output.

4

Grouping

When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs the pages in groups according to their page numbers.




[Paper Source] Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Paper Source] sheet, you can do the following.


1

Printing on Transparencies

Prints on transparencies. You can also insert interleaving pages between the transparencies.

2

Front/Back Covers

Uses different paper for the front and back covers from that used for the main body copy.




[Quality] Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Quality] sheet, you can do the following.


1

Black and White Printing

Prints color documents in black and white.

3

Objective

Enables you to conveniently select the appropriate settings for the current content.

2

Color/Black & White Auto Detect

Switches between color and black and white according to the color content of each page.

4

Advanced Settings

Enables you to change detailed settings concerning print quality.




[Device Settings] Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Device Settings] sheet, you can do the following.


1

Set Options

You can set device information manually.

3

Display Version Information

You can display version information.

2

Obtain Device Information

You can obtain device information and update the settings displayed in the sheet.



Remark
  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use Department ID Management. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see "Set Up Computers and Software."


Scaling Documents

You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size, such as reducing a document created in LTR size to print on STMT, or enlarging a document created in STMT size to print on LTR.
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.



Remark
  • Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document.
  • Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the selected page size.
  • If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or reduce the document, configure the settings in the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select page size of the document you created in the application from [Page Size].

  1. Select output size of the document from [Output Size].

The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output Size].

  1. If you want to increase or decrease the magnification manually, select [Manual Scaling] → specify the scaling ratio for [Scaling].

  • If the ratio is less than 25% or more than 200%, the document is printed without scaling on the paper specified in [Output Size].
  1. Click [OK].


Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. You can make well-organized documents by editing multiple materials onto one sheet. And you can cut down print costs by saving papers, and it is also useful for saving space.



Remark
  • Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies depending on the application you are using, do not used it together with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly.
  • You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select the page layout from [Page Layout].

  • If the options are not displayed for [Page Layout], display the [Device Settings] Sheet, then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from [Spooling at Host].
  1. Select the page order from [Page Order].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].


2-sided Printing

This mode enables you to make two-sided printing. You can cut down print costs by half when copying in large quantities.



Remark
  • The page sizes for which two-sided printing is available differ according to printer model. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the printer driver window to view the Online Help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].

  1. Select binding edge for the paper printout from [Binding Location].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].


Booklet Printing

You can create a booklet by printing 2 pages on both sides of each sheet of paper.



Remark
  • You cannot specify the [Finishing] options in the [Finishing] sheet when performing Booklet Printing.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Booklet Printing] from [Print Style] → click [Booklet].

The [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box opens.

  1. Specify the detailed settings such as [Booklet Gutter] → click [OK].

The [Finishing] sheet is displayed.

  • For details about the various settings in the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box to view the online help.
  1. Click [OK] in the [Finishing] sheet.


Poster Printing

You can enlarge a one-page image and print it over multiple pages. You can then glue the printed pages together to create a poster.


Remark
  • When outputting the pages face up, the print sequence for the pages (the sheets into which the image is divided) starts from the top left proceeds to the right. When outputting the pages face down, the sequence starts from the bottom right and proceeds to the left.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select page layout for poster from [Page Layout].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  • If the options are not displayed for [Page Layout], display the [Device Settings] sheet, then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from [Spooling at Host].
  1. Click [OK].


Watermark Printing

You can print a watermark (such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "COPY") on a document created using an application. You can register the customized watermark other than the various predefined watermarks.



Remark
  • You can register up to 50 watermarks, not including the watermarks already provided.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Watermark] → select watermark for printing.

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  • By clicking [Edit Watermark], you can display the [Edit Watermark] dialog box, and create and register new watermarks based on previously registered ones. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the [Edit Watermark] dialog box to view the online help.
  1. Click [OK].


Switching Between Color and Grayscale Printing

You can switch between color and grayscale printing while outputting print jobs.



Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Quality] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Black and White], [Color], or [Auto [Color/B&W]] from [Color Mode].

[Auto [Color/B&W]] switches automatically between color printing and black-and-white printing according to the type of document.

  1. Click [OK].


Viewing the Print Preview

You can display a preview and verify the print results prior to printing.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Edit and Preview] from [Output Method].

  1. Set the printing conditions in each of the sheets in the printer driver UI → click [OK].

See "Printing Functions" to find what you can configure in each sheet.

  1. Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.
  • The name of the button to proceed to the next step may vary depending on the application you are using.

The [Canon PageComposer] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the document you want to see a print preview of from [Document Name] → click the [Print Preview] button.

The print preview is displayed.

  • In the Canon PageComposer, not only you can display a print preview, but also merge and edit print jobs. For details, see the Canon PageComposer online help.


Selecting a Profile for Printing

Combinations of printer driver settings corresponding to a variety of printing purposes are provided with the printer driver as "profiles". This enables you to print documents according to a desired objective by simply selecting a profile from the [Profile] list.


Remark
  • To select a profile, you need to select [Allow Profile Selection] in the [Profile] sheet of the printer properties dialog box (→"Setting the Printer Configuration"). To change this setting, you need full control access for the device. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select a profile from the [Profiles] list according to your objective.

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].


Printing Directly Using the Command Prompt

You can print directly by entering the LPR command in the command prompt.

When printing with LPR commands, print settings can be specified from both the control panel and the command prompt.

  • Specifying from the command prompt

You can specify LPR command settings with the P option, where each item is separated with an underscore ( _ ). The following commands are supported with this machine.


Item Command
Paper Size LETTER, LEGAL, A4, A5, B5
Layout SIMP (One-sided), DUPL (Two-sided/Long Edge), DUPS (Two-sided/Short Edge)
Copies C<Number of copies>.

Command example (with Paper Size as "LETTER," Layout as "DUPL," and Copies as "20"):

Input Example: lpr -S <IP Address> -P LETTER_DUPL_C20 <file name>


Remark
  • If settings have not been specified from the command prompt, settings specified with the control panel will be enabled.
  • When printing PS files using LPR commands from the command prompt, some data may take too long to process causing a timeout error. In such a case, the data may not be printed.

  • Specifying from the control panel

Settings that are applied to this printing method can be selected from the control panel.

For more information, see "Settings Menu."



Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs

You can check the numbers of prints and the print results, or you can cancel a print job before the printing starts.


Checking Print Jobs

Canceling Print Jobs

Checking Print Logs


Checking Print Jobs

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no jobs in the memory of the print job status.
  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the print job status, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Canceling Print Jobs

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no print jobs in the memory.
  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <YES>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking Print Logs

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Log (Printer)>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the print status, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

This category describes how to print from memory media.
The Direct Print function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.



Printing with Direct Print

You can print data from a memory medium, such as an SD Card, by directly inserting it into the machine and selecting the desired image on the display. You do not need to connect the machine to your computer.


Memory Media Supported by This Machine

Data Supported by This Machine

Inserting Memory Media

Removing Memory Media

Printing from Memory Media

Index Printing


Selecting All Files in Folder


Selecting Files by Date


Selecting Files by Extension



Memory Media Supported by This Machine

Return to Overview

The memory media listed below are compatible with this machine.


USB Memory/Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the slot:
  • USB Memory
  • SD Secure Digital memory card
  • SDHC memory card
  • Compact Flash (CF) Card: supports Type I/II (3.3 V)
  • Microdrive
  • Memory Stick
  • Memory Stick PRO

Memory cards that can be inserted in the slot using an adapter:
  • If one of the following memory cards is inserted without an adapter, the card may get stuck in the slot. Be sure to attach an adapter to the memory card before inserting it into the slot.
  • miniSD Card*1
  • microSD Card*2
  • Memory Stick Duo*1
  • Memory Stick PRO Duo*1

*1 Use the special adapter provided with the card.
*2 Use the SD Card Adapter provided with the card.



Data Supported by This Machine

Return to Overview

Note the followings so you can use an appropriate memory medium.

  • Supported file systems of a memory are FAT16 and FAT32.
  • You can not select the data contained in other folder at once.
  • You can not select a data in a lower level folder.
  • The following file formats are supported:
  • JPEG
  • TIFF

Remark
  • JPEG files that conform to the following are supported:
  • DCF/Exif2.21 or earlier/JFIF
  • Number of pixels: 160 × 120 to 7,040 × 10,200 pixels (approximately equivalent to 11" × 17" or A3 size in 600dpi)
  • Number of components: 3
  • Sampling ratios: 4:1:1 (16 × 16), 4:1:1 (32 × 8), 4:2:2 (16 × 8), or 4:4:4 (8 × 8)
  • Progressive JPEG files are not supported.
  • Supported TIFF file format is TIFF Profile F, which is a black and white TIFF file format used for I-faxes.
  • The size of the TIFF image cannot be scaled for printing. If the size of the TIFF image exceeds the size of the selected paper, only the part that fits on the paper is printed.
  • Depending on the files, some images cannot be displayed in the <Image Display> mode.


Inserting Memory Media

Return to Overview


Remark
  • When a memory medium is inserted into the slot, the access lamp lights up. Do not touch the memory medium or the area around the memory medium slot/USB port at this point because the machine is accessing to the data in the memory medium. Doing so may damage the machine and the memory medium.
  • When inserted, some memory media protrude from the slot. Do not force them into the slot any further. Doing so may damage the machine and the memory media.
  • Make sure that the memory medium is correctly oriented before inserting it into the slot. Forcing an improperly positioned memory medium into the slot may damage the memory medium and/or the machine.
  • Depending on the SD card, it may take a few seconds to recognize it.

  • How to insert a memory medium

Insert only one memory medium into the slot. Confirm that the Access lamp has lit up.


Media Type Inserting Media
  • USB Memory
  • SD Secure Digital memory card
  • SDHC memory card
  • Memory Stick
  • Memory Stick PRO
  • Memory Stick Duo*1
  • Memory Stick PRO Duo*1
  • miniSD Card*1
  • microSD Card*2
  • Compact Flash (CF) Card
  • Microdrive

*1 Be sure to attach the memory medium to the special adapter before inserting it into the slot.
*2 Use "SD Card Adapter" Provided with the card.



Removing Memory Media

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.
  1. Make sure that the access lamp is not blinking, then remove the memory medium from the slot.


Printing from Memory Media

Return to Overview

  1. Insert a memory medium into the slot.
  1. Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Direct Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the memory medium that stores the data that you want to print, then press [OK].

If you want to print an index of all the files in the selected memory medium, see "Index Printing."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the folder that contains the data that you want to print, then press [OK].

If you select data which is saved outside the folder, skip to step 8.

  • If you want to select the data from the displayed images, press the left Any key to change the display method from <Folder/File Name Display> to <Image Display>, then press [OK].



You can select the desired data by sorting all data according to date or extension. If you want to sort data by date, see "Selecting Files by Date." If you want to sort data by extension, see "Selecting Files by Extension."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the data that you want to print, then press [OK].
  • In the <Image Display> mode, the screen below appears. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the data that you want to print, then press [OK].

  • You can select data by entering the desired copy quantity with - (numeric keys) instead of pressing [OK].
  • You can select multiple data at once from one folder.
  • You can not select the data contained in other folders at once.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Print Settings>.

In the <Image Display> mode, the screen below appears.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].

The followings are the settings that can be made:

  • <Color>: Selects full color or B&W.
  • <Drawer 1>: Selects paper for printing.
  • You cannot set <Stack Bypass Tray> when the custom size is specified for the stack bypass tray.
  • <Layout>: Specifies the layout.
  • To make this setting, see the detailed procedures below.
  • <Copies>: Selects print quantity.
  • <Print Date>: Prints the shooting date on data.
  • To make this setting, see the detailed procedures below.
  • <Print File Name>: Prints the file name on data.
  • To make this setting, see the detailed procedures below.
  • <Vivid Photo>: Makes green and blue more lively.
  • <Brightness>: Adjusts brightness.
  • <Halftones>: Optimizes data for printing.
  • The <Halftones> default setting is <Auto>. <Gradation> is suitable for photos taken with a digital camera and <Error Diffusion> is suitable for scanned images. In <Auto> mode, printing from a memory card is automatically processed with <Gradation> and printing from USB memory is automatically processed with <Error Diffusion>. For optimal images, select <Error Diffusion> when printing scanned images stored in memory cards. When printing photos stored in a USB memory, select <Gradation>.
  • Print settings cannot be specified to each file except for <Copies> (print quantity).

  • If you select <Layout>:
  • The print quantity is limited to one.
  • Only JPEG data can be printed. Even if the selected files contain TIFF data, only JPEG data is printed.
  • The print size is adjusted automatically to fit on one sheet of paper.
  • The order of the images in the layout cannot be specified.
  • This setting cannot be used with two-sided printing.
  • A blank space for printing the date and file name is left below the printed image even if <Print Date> or <Print File Name> is set to <Off>.

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the layout type, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

  • If you select <Print Date> or <Print File Name>:
  • Only JPEG data can be printed. Even if the selected files contain TIFF data, only JPEG data is printed.
  • The file name can consist of up to 20 characters.

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start) to start printing.

When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.

  • Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.


Index Printing

Return to Overview

You can print an index of the data saved on a memory medium.


Remark
  • This function is only available for JPEG. If the selected medium contains TIFF files, they are not printed.
  1. Insert a memory medium into the slot.
  1. Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Direct Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Index Print>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press [OK].
  • You can not select multiple memory media or folders at once.
  • If you want to print only the data that is saved outside folders, press the right Any key to select <Set>. Then skip to step 8.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired folder, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

If the selected folder contains a subfolder, the files in that folder will not be printed.

  • The maximum depth of a sub-folder you can select is 20.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].

Press [OK] after making each setting.

  • <Color>: Selects full color or B&W.
  • <Drawer 1>: Selects paper source for printing.
  1. Press (Start).

When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.

  • Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.


Selecting All Files in Folder

Return to Overview

You can print all files in the selected folder.

  1. Insert a memory medium into the slot.
  1. Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Direct Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the folder that contains the files that you want to print, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Display/Select>.
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change File Selection>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify Conditions>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [OK] to select <Select All>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start) to start printing.

When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.

  • Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.


Selecting Files by Date

Return to Overview

You can print only the selected files saved within the specified range of dates or all files on the specified dates.

  1. Insert a memory medium into the slot.
  1. Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Direct Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Display/Select>.
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change File Selection>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify Conditions>, then press [OK].
  1. Select the files by specifying dates.

  • If you want to print only the selected files saved within the specified range of dates:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specified Date>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the start date, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the end date, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file that you want to print, then press [OK].

  • 5. Press the right Any key to select <Print Settings>.

  • If you want to print all files on the specified dates:

  • 1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify Date Select All>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the start date, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the end date, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start) to start printing.

When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.

  • Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.


Selecting Files by Extension

Return to Overview

You can print only the selected files or all files of the specified extension.

  1. Insert a memory medium into the slot.
  1. Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Direct Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Display/Select>.
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change File Selection>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify Conditions>, then press [OK].
  1. Select the files by specifying extensions.

  • If you want to print only the selected files of the specified extension:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify Extension>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired extension, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file that you want to print, then press [OK].

  • 4. Press the right Any key to select <Print Settings>.

  • If you want to print all files of the specified extension:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify Ext. Select All>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired extension, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start) to start printing.

When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.

  • Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.


Printer Settings from the Machine

This category describes the printer settings which you can specify from the machine.



Settings Menu

There are some settings which can be made from the machine. To set up from the machine, see "Making the Printer Settings from the Machine."


Remark
  • Some of these settings may also be available from the printer driver. In this case, settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <Printer Settings> menu.
  • The following functions are not available with the UFRII printer driver:
  • Print Quality
  • Layout
  • Collate
  • Color Mode
  • Gradation Settings
  • Compressed Image Output

Making the Printer Settings from the Machine

Number of Copies

2-Sided

Paper Feed

Default Paper Size


Default Paper Type


Paper Size Override


Print Quality

Gradation Level


Toner Density


Save Toner


Line Control


Layout

Binding Location


Unit of Measure


Margin


Auto Continue

Collate

Timeout

Personality

Mode Priority

Auto Select

Color Mode

Gradation Settings

Compressed Image Output

Initialize Printer Settings

PCL Settings

Paper Save (PCL Only)


Orientation (PCL Only)


Font Number (PCL Only)


Point Size (PCL Only)


Pitch (PCL Only)


Form Lines (PCL Only)


Symbol Set (PCL Only)


Custom Paper Size Setting (PCL Only)


Unit of Measure (PCL Only)


X dimension (PCL Only)


Y dimension (PCL Only)


Append CR to LF (PCL Only)


Enlarge A4 Print Width (PCL Only)


Halftones (PCL Only)


RGB Source Profile (PCL Only)


Output Profile (PCL Only)


Matching Method (PCL Only)


Gray Compensation (PCL Only)


CMS (Matching) Selection (PCL Only)


CMS (Matching)/Gamma (PCL Only)


Gamma Correction (PCL Only)


Advanced Smoothing (PCL Only)


PS Settings

Job Timeout (PS Only)


Wait Timeout (PS Only)


Print PS Errors (PS Only)


RGB Source Profile (PS Only)


CMYK Simulation Profile (PS Only)


Use Grayscale Profile (PS Only)


Output Profile (PS Only)


Matching Method (PS Only)


RGB Pure Black Process (PS Only)


CMYK Pure Black Process (PS Only)


Pure Black Text (PS Only)


Halftones (PS Only)


Advanced Smoothing (PS Only)


Toner Volume Adjustment (PS Only)



Making the Printer Settings from the Machine

Return to Overview

To set up from the machine, select <Printer Settings> in <Additional Func.>.
Make the printer settings referring to the following procedure. For the menu list of printer settings, see Settings Menu.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Printer Settings>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the printer setting you want to make.

Some menus have one more step for selecting the setting you want to make. In this case, repeat the step 4.

  1. Make the desired setting.

If you select <Number of Copies>, the screen below appears.



Number of Copies

Return to Overview


1 to 999; 1*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify the number of copies printed. The default setting is <1>. You can specify up to 999 copies.


Remark
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


2-Sided

Return to Overview


2-Sided, 1-Sided*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This parameter enables you to select one-sided or two-sided printing. When <2-Sided> is specified, the document is printed on both sides of the paper.


Remark
  • You can make two-sided prints with the following paper size and weight:
  • Size: LTR, LGL, FLSC, A4
  • Weight: 16 to 32 lb (60 to 120 g/m2)
  • When printing on letterhead paper, or paper with a logo (such as a cover sheet), please note the following:
  • If the paper is fed from a paper drawer, the printing surface should be face down.
  • If the paper is fed from the stack bypass tray, the printing surface should be face up.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Paper Feed

Return to Overview

You can specify the following settings from <Paper Feed>.


Default Paper Size

Default Paper Type

Paper Size Override


Default Paper Size

Return to Overview


LTR*, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI, G-LTR, G-LGL, COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5, A4, A5, B5


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This parameter defines the default paper size used when the paper size cannot be set within the application software, when no paper source is specified.


Remark
  • If you are printing from an OS that does not have a printer driver for the machine (MS-DOS, UNIX, etc.), make sure that the paper loaded in the paper drawer matches the paper size specified in this setting. If the paper size specified in this setting is not available, an error message is displayed when the machine tries to print the job and the machine stops. In addition, if a paper source has not been selected through the application, the machine automatically selects the default print settings for the paper size and type.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Default Paper Type

Return to Overview


Plain 1, Plain 2*, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparencies, Labels, Envelope


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This parameter sets the default paper type to be used for print jobs. This machine has internally defined optimal print modes for each specified paper type.


Remark
  • If you are printing from an OS that does not have a printer driver for the machine (MS-DOS, UNIX, etc.), make sure that the paper loaded in the paper drawer matches the paper type specified in this setting. If the paper type specified in this setting is not available, an error message is displayed when the machine tries to print the job, and the machine stops. In addition, if a paper source has not been selected through the application, the machine automatically selects the default print settings for the paper type and size.
  • Use the following figures as a guideline to decide whether paper should be specified as Plain Paper or Heavy Paper.
  • Plain Paper: 16 to 28 lb (60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)
  • Heavy Paper: 28 to 47 lb (106 g/m2 to 176 g/m2)
  • Use only transparencies designed for laser printers.
  • Canon label paper is recommended for printing on labels.
  • Transparency and Labels cannot be printed using two-sided printing.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Paper Size Override

Return to Overview


Off*, On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

Paper of the size selected in the printer driver might not be loaded in any of the machine's paper drawers. If this setting is enabled, the machine will automatically substitute paper of an available size for the missing paper, as shown in the table below.

Printer Driver Setting Substitute Paper
LTR A4
A4 LTR

Remark
  • The machine does not use substitute paper if the above substitute paper is not loaded in the machine' s paper drawers.


Print Quality

Return to Overview


You can specify the following settings from <Print Quality>.


Gradation Level

Toner Density

Save Toner

Line Control


Gradation Level

Return to Overview


High Gradation 1*, High Gradation 2


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting specifies the gradation level for printing data.

Specify <High Gradation 1> when printing pictures or other data in general quality and specify <High Gradation 2> when printing in higher quality.


Remark
  • The results of image refinement may be different depending on the types of characters and graphics you want to print.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Toner Density

Return to Overview


Cyan: -8 to 8; 0*
Magenta: -8 to 8; 0*
Yellow: -8 to 8; 0*
Black: -8 to 8; 0*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting adjusts the print density of the respective colors.

Moving the density scale to the left makes the print image lighter, and to the right makes the print image darker. This setting has 17 levels you can adjust, with level <0> (middle level) being the default setting.


Remark
  • This function is not available if <Toner Save> is set to <On>.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Save Toner

Return to Overview


Off*, On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to set the Toner Save function. Toner Save uses less toner to print documents and may result in longer toner life.


Remark
  • The <Save Toner> function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • The <Save Toner> settings on the machine is only valid when [Toner Save] in [Details] in the [Quality] page of the PCL printer driver or PS printer driver is set to [Printer Default].
  • Depending on the data to be printed, <Save Toner> may not be applied even if <On> is selected.
  • If <On> is selected for <Save Toner>, very light or finely detailed images may not be printed clearly.


Line Control

Return to Overview


Resolution Priority*, Gradation Priority


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify the image processing for lines. Under most circumstances, it is preferable to leave this setting as <Resolution Priority>.

If <Resolution Priority> is selected, image processing is performed that upholds the same resolution as text for lines.

If <Gradation Priority> is selected, image processing is performed that upholds the same color and gradation as graphics for lines.


Remark
  • This setting can only be applied to jobs in the UFR II mode, PCL6 mode, or PS mode.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Layout

Return to Overview


You can specify the following settings from <Layout>.


Binding Location

Unit of Measure

Margin


Binding Location

Return to Overview


Long Edge*, Short Edge


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This parameter determines whether the binding position is along the long edge or the short edge of the paper. When binding for two-sided printing, the image orientation is automatically adjusted for correct layout.

When the binding position is on the long edge of the paper:

When the binding position is on the short edge of the paper:


Remark
  • You cannot create a binding margin with this setting alone. Use this setting in combination with the Margin setting to create a binding margin.
  • For two-sided printing, the orientation of the image on the back side of the page may be changed by this setting.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Unit of Measure

Return to Overview


Millimeter, Inch*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify the unit of measurement you would like to use to specify page margins.


Remark
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Margin

Return to Overview


-1.97 to +1.97 inch (in increments of 0.01 inch); 0.00* inch


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to set the page margin in millimeters. The settings can be set in increments of 0.01 inches (0.5 mm) from -1.97 inches (-50.0 mm) through +1.97 inches (+50.0 mm).

Use [▲] to increase the width of the inside margin.

Use [▼] to increase the width of the outside margin.

You can specify the edge along which the margin will be created in the <Binding Location> setting (previous setting). To create a margin along one of the edges of the paper, use this setting in combination with the <Binding Location> setting.


Remark
  • If this setting moves the image outside the printable area, part of the image may be cut off.
  • Pressing [▲] increases the setting value by 0.01 inches (0.5 mm) each time the key is pressed. Pressing [▼] decreases the value by 0.01 inches (0.5 mm) each time.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Auto Continue

Return to Overview


Off*, On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to automatically clear an error and continue printing when an error occurs (Error skip).

If <On> is selected, error skips are performed automatically.

If <Off> is selected, you must perform error skips from the control panel.


Remark
  • Auto Continue only temporarily clears an error, so the data may not print correctly.
  • This setting is valid even if multiple errors have occurred.


Collate

Return to Overview


Off*, On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to sort copies into sets arranged in page order.

If <On> is selected, all pages of each copy are printed before printing the next copy.

If <Off> is selected, all copies of the same page are printed before printing the next page.

Examples of each collate option when printing three copies of three page document:


Remark
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Timeout

Return to Overview


Off, Timeout (5 to 300 seconds); 15* seconds


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

If the data for a job does not end, the machine does not start the next job even if it receives other print commands. In cases like this, use the Timeout setting to force jobs to finish if no data is received during the set period of time.

If Timeout is enabled, jobs can finish automatically. For example, if print data still remains in the machine because a form feed command cannot be processed, the paper can be fed automatically.

If Timeout is <Off>, jobs will not end automatically.


Remark
  • If this function is set so that a job will timeout, the machine may end a print job before all the data has been received if it takes a long time for the computer to send the data. If this occurs, adjust the length of the <Timeout> setting.
  • If you send data from a printer driver that is not compatible with the machine, and the end of job command is not received within the time set in this setting, the machine cancels the job, which may cause the data to be printed incorrectly.
  • When a job is being processed, the Processing/Data indicator on the control panel blinks green.


Personality

Return to Overview


Auto*, PS, PCL


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables the machine to process data received from the host computer in the specified data format.

The machine can distinguish between computer-sent control commands and Direct Print data and automatically switch personalities. However, in instances such as where received control commands are exclusively defined or the machine does not automatically switch to the appropriate personality, please set this setting to match received data. The machine enables you to switch the personality and set specifications for printing using the menu functions on the display.

Setting <Personality> to <Auto> makes the machine determine the type of data received from the host on a job-by-job basis. If you are printing from applications on a computer, we recommend that you use the <Auto> setting.


Remark
  • The <Personality> function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This setting is available only when both PS and PCL printing functions are activated.
  • If you find that the machine does not correctly switch to the appropriate personality when <Personality> is set to <Auto>, change the setting manually to match the data you are sending from the host computer.
  • This function is not available when printing in the UFR II mode.


Mode Priority

Return to Overview


Off*, PS, PCL


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting determines which personality should be used if a job is received without a specified command language or Direct Print data. <Mode Priority> is used when <Personality> is set to <Auto>.

Off
This does not specify a preferred personality. If a job is received without a specified command language or Direct Print data, the current personality is used. The default setting is <Off>.

PS
This assigns priority to the PS personality.

PCL
This assigns priority to the PCL personality.


Remark
  • The <Mode Priority> function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This setting is available only when both PS and PCL printing functions are activated.
  • This function is not available when printing in the UFR II mode.


Auto Select

Return to Overview


PS: Off, On*
PCL: Off, On*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting defines the personality options available for the machine receiving a job without a specified command language or Direct Print data. The setting is applied only when <Personality> is set to <Auto>. The PS and PCL personalities can be enabled or disabled.

If <On> is selected, the selected personality is available for the machine.

If <Off> is selected, the selected personality is not available for the machine.


Remark
  • The <Auto Select> function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This setting is available only when both PS and PCL printing functions are activated.
  • This function is not available when printing in the UFR II mode.


Color Mode

Return to Overview


Auto Detect*, Color, Black and White


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to set the color mode you want to specify when printing.

If <Auto Detect> is selected, the machine automatically decides whether to print in color or black and white depending on the color type of the original.
If <Color> is selected, data is printed in all 4 colors: cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K).
If <Black and White> is selected, data is printed in black (K) only, even if the original is in color.


Remark
  • If different color data is overlaid, the machine may not distinguish color from monochrome, even if <Auto Detect> is selected. For example, although the printout looks monochrome, if different color data is overlaid, it is printed in color mode, thereby using the color toner cartridges to print, not the black toner cartridge. Furthermore, if the data is created as color data in the application you are using, it is printed in color mode, even though the data looks monochrome.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Gradation Settings

Return to Overview


Gradation: Off*, Smooth 1, Smooth 2
Graphics: Off, On*
Image: Off, On*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

Set this function when the gradation of graphics (illustrations made by software applications) or images (bitmap images) does not print smoothly (the color changes stand out).

<Smooth 2> performs a smoother gradation than <Smooth 1>. If <Smooth 1> is selected and the gradation is still not printed smoothly, select <Smooth 2>. You can select whether to apply smoothing to graphics or image data.


Remark
  • This setting does not apply to text data.
  • If <Smooth 1> or <Smooth 2> is selected, and gradation is applied to halftones, graphics and images may appear grainy.
  • Graphics and Image are only displayed when <Smooth 1> or <Smooth 2> is selected.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Compressed Image Output

Return to Overview


Output*, Display Error


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify how the data should be treated if the data size of the print job is too large to be stored in the machine's internal memory.

If <Output> is selected, the data is highly compressed (so it is able to stored in the internal memory), and then the job is printed. However, the print quality may diminish.

If <Display Error> is selected, the job can be cancelled without being compressed.


Remark
  • Even if <Output> is selected and the data is highly compressed, the data may still be too large to be stored in the machine's internal memory. In this case, the job is canceled and an error is logged in the Print Log.
  • When <Display Error> is selected and the print job is cancelled when the compressed data could not be stored into the internal memory, a blank page may be printed but this will not be counted as a print job.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Initialize Printer Settings

Return to Overview



The menu settings can be reset to the factory defaults by initializing the printer settings.

If you select <Initialize Printer Settings>, the confirmation message <Initialize settings?> is displayed. If you select <Yes>, the settings are initialized. If you select <No>, the settings are not initialized.


Remark
  • Do not turn OFF the machine while the settings are being initialized, as doing so may damage the machine's memory.
  • When you initialize the settings, make sure that the processing/memory indicator is not blinking.
  • The data received while the printer setting is initializing may not be printed properly. Deleting and retrying the job is recommended.


PCL Settings

Return to Overview


Remark
  • These settings are applicable only when printing in the PCL mode.
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Paper Save (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Off*, On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting specifies whether to output a blank page when software does not send print data between End Page codes.

If <On> is selected, a blank page is not output, thus saving paper.

If <Off> is selected, a blank page is output.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Orientation (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Portrait*, Landscape


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to set the paper orientation.

If <Portrait> is selected, the print image is printed in portrait orientation regardless of the orientation of the paper in the paper drawers.

If <Landscape> is selected, the print image is printed in landscape orientation regardless of the orientation of the paper in the paper drawers.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Font Number (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


0 to 104; 0*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

You can set the default font typeface for this printer function using the corresponding font numbers. Valid font numbers are from 0 to 104.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Point Size (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


4.00 to 999.75 point (in increments of 0.25 points); 12.00* point


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

If the number selected in <Font Number> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font, this option appears in the PCL menu. It enables you to specify a point size for the default font. The point size can be adjusted in increments of 0.25 pts.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This function is available if a value from <1> to <69> is specified for the <Font Number> option.


Pitch (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


0.44 to 99.99 cpi (in increments of 0.01 cpi); 10.00* cpi


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

If the number selected in <Font Number> is that of a fixed pitch scalable font, <Pitch> appears in the PCL menu. It enables you to specify the pitch for the default font. The pitch can be adjusted in increments of 0.01 cpi (characters per inch).


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This function is available if a value of <0> or from <70> to <89> is specified for the <Font Number> option.


Form Lines (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


5 to 128 lines; 60* lines


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify the number of lines to be printed on a page. You can specify from 5 to 128 lines.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Symbol Set (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


ARABIC8, DESKTOP, GREEK8, HEBREW7, HEBREW8, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOCYR, ISOGRK, ISOHEB, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL, PC775, PC8*, PC850, PC851, PC852, PC862, PC864, PC866, PC8DN, PC8GRK, PC8TK, PC1004, PIFONT, PSMATH, PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINARB, WINBALT, WINCYR, WINGRK, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to select the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Custom Paper Size Setting (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Off*, On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify a custom paper size. If <On> is selected, you can enter a custom size.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • You can only select the custom paper size entered with settings from the printer driver.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Unit of Measure (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Millimeter, Inch*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify the unit of measurement you would like to use to specify your custom paper size.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This function is only available if the <Custom Paper Size Setting> option is set to <On>.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


X dimension (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


3.00 to 8.50 in; 8.50* in


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify the X dimension of the custom paper. The X dimension can be adjusted from 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) through 8.50 inches (216.0 mm) in increments of 0.01 inches (0.1 mm).

This function can be very useful when part of the printed image is cut off. Increasing this dimension may allow some of the missing image to be correctly printed. Make sure you do not increase the X dimension beyond the actual size of the paper you are using for printing.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This function is only available if the <Custom Paper Size Setting> option is set to <On>.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Y dimension (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


5.00 to 14.00 in; 14.00* in


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify the Y dimension of the custom paper. The Y dimension can be adjusted from 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) through 14.00 inches (356.0 mm) in increments of 0.01 inches (0.1 mm).

This function can be very useful when part of the printed image is cut off. Increasing this dimension may allow some of the missing image to be correctly printed. Make sure you do not increase the Y dimension beyond the actual size of the paper you are using for printing.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This function is only available if the <Custom Paper Size Setting> option is set to <On>.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Append CR to LF (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Yes, No*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received.

If <Yes> is selected, the print head moves to the beginning of the next line when line feed code is received.

If <No> is selected, the print head moves down to the next line when line feed code is received, and the margin does not change (such as to the beginning of the next line).


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Enlarge A4 Print Width (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Off*, On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting determines whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter size in width.

If <On> is selected, all the area on a page 1/6 inches (4.23 mm) from the top and bottom edges and 1/20 inches (1.28 mm) from the left and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper. Only the width increases.

If <Off> is selected, all the area on a page 1/6 inches (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.


Settings On Off
A: Length 11 1/3 inches (288.54 mm)
B: Width 8 inches (203.22 mm) 7 7/8 inches (201.54 mm)
C: Left and right edges 11/80 inches (3.39 mm) 1/6 inches (4.23 mm)
D: Top and bottom edges 1/6 inches (4.23 mm)

Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This setting is applicable for A4 paper only.
  • This setting is applicable for portrait orientation only.


Halftones (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Off*

Text: Resolution*, Gradation
Graphics: Resolution, Gradation*
Image: Resolution, Gradation*

On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting specifies how you print halftones.

Halftoning is used to print each process color at a different intensity, allowing millions of different color to be reproduced using only the four process colors. Depending on the required intensity of a given color, toner is placed on paper in dots of different sizes. The grid of dots used for each toner color is called a screen. Halftone screens are aligned to unique angles designed to eliminate interference patterns called moiré (a shimmering, wavy effect) that can arise with halftoning.

If <Resolution> is selected, a dither pattern that gives priority to the resolution of the images is used. This helps eliminate the appearance of jagged or uneven lines along the edges of objects and is best for printing standard text and graphics.

If <Gradation> is selected, a dither pattern that gives priority to the appearance of smooth changes in tone is used. This is best for reproducing images with delicate gradations or changes of tone.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • A dither pattern creates the illusion of varying shades of gray or additional colors by treating areas of an image as groups of dots that are colored in different patterns.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


RGB Source Profile (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Text: sRGB*, Gamma 1.5, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.4
Graphics: sRGB*, Gamma 1.5, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.4
Image: sRGB*, Gamma 1.5, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.4


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to define the characteristics of the RGB profile (color data represented using the RGB (Red Green Blue) color model) that is appropriate for your monitor, used when printing color images or graphics in a document. This ensures that the machine uses the most appropriate color conversion when printing color documents using the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) color model. The default setting is <sRGB>.


sRGB
This setting specifies the industry standard definition for generic Windows (PC) monitors. If you are using an sRGB compatible monitor, you can print out colors close to how they appear on your monitor.

Gamma 1.5, Gamma 1.8, and Gamma 2.4
These settings enable you to select the gamma correct level of the RGB data. The higher the value, the darker the printout.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This setting is only applied if the <CMS(Matching)/Gamma> option is set to <CMS>.
  • If the machine receives data with a device-independent (CIE-based) color space definition, it is color-processed with the specified settings. Therefore RGB Source Profiles are not applied by the machine.
  • When the machine receives a device-dependent color space definition that is color-processed by the host computer, RGB Source Profiles are also applied by the machine.
  • Device-independent colors are not dependent on any particular device, such as a monitor, and are meant to be true representations of colors as perceived by the human eye. These color representations, called device-independent color spaces, result from work carried out by the Commission Internationale d'Eclairage (CIE) and for that reason are also called CIE-based color spaces.


Output Profile (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Text: Normal*, Photo
Graphics: Normal*, Photo
Image: Normal, Photo*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to define the profile that is appropriate for the data you are going to print. It is applied to all data in the print job, so make sure the selected profile is right for your job.


Normal
This setting prints the colors closely matching the ones displayed on your monitor.

Photo
This setting prints at photograph quality.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This setting is only applied if the <CMS(Matching)/Gamma> option is set to <CMS>.


Matching Method (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Text: Perceptual, Saturation*, Colorimetric
Graphics: Perceptual*, Saturation, Colorimetric
Image: Perceptual*, Saturation, Colorimetric


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to specify a method of printing when the <RGB Source Profile> is applied. This machine includes a color management system that provides the following color rendering styles.

Perceptual
This setting optimizes the range of colors on the machine to produce the best results for photographic or bitmapped images.

Saturation
This setting optimizes the output of pure, saturated colors, such as those used in business presentations.

Colorimetric
This setting provides a close match to the CMYK device being simulated.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This setting is only applied if the <CMS(Matching)/Gamma> option is set to <CMS>.
  • When <Normal> is selected in the Output Profile, the <Perceptual> function is automatically set to Monitor Color Matched mode.
  • When <Photo> is selected in the Output Profile, the <Perceptual> function is automatically set to Photographic mode.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Gray Compensation (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Text: Off, On*
Graphics: Off, On*
Image: Off, On*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting determines whether only black (K) toner is used when the ratio of R (red) to G (green) to B (blue) is the same. Gray compensation can be set for Text and Graphics data.

If <On> is selected, black and gray data for the equivalent levels of RGB is printed using the black (K) toner only, thereby lessening toner bleeding.

If <Off> is selected, black and gray data for the equivalent levels of RGB is printed using all 4 (CMYK) toners. However, there is a possibility that the toner may bleed.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • If a problem occurs to the <Graphics> data with the default values set, switch <Graphics> on and off to fix the problem.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


CMS (Matching) Selection (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Printer*, Host


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to select whether the color process will be done by the printer or the host computer (printer driver).

If <Printer> is selected, the color process will be done by the printer.

If <Host> is selected, the color process will not be done by the printer.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


CMS (Matching)/Gamma (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Text: Gamma, CMS*
Graphics: Gamma, CMS*
Image: Gamma, CMS*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to select whether to perform color matching, or perform color correction by specifying a Gamma value.

Settings can be applied separately for text, graphics, and image data.

Making changes to this setting switches between available / unavailable for the following items.



Gamma CMS
RGB Source Profile Unavailable Available
Matching Method Unavailable Available
Output Profile Unavailable Available
Gamma Available Unavailable

Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Gamma Correction (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Text: 1.0, 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2
Graphics: 1.0, 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2
Image: 1.0, 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

The brightness of printing can be adjusted to not lose the brightest and darkest portions of the original data. For example, this setting is made when the printout is brighter than the original image (original photograph before being scanned, graphics created on a monitor, etc.) or when wanting to change the brightness before printing.

Four gamma correction values are available. The larger numbers result in darker printed documents. <1.4> is the value for an uncorrected (default) state.

Settings can be applied separately for text, graphics, and image data.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This setting is only applied if the <CMS(Matching)/Gamma> option is set to <Gamma>.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


Advanced Smoothing (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Advanced Smoothing: Off, Smooth 1*, Smooth 2
Graphics: Off*, On
Text: Off, On*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting smooths jagged outlines of graphics (illustrations created by application software) and characters.

<Smooth 2> performs a higher level of smoothing than <Smooth 1>. If <Smooth 1> is selected and the results are still not printed smoothly, select <Smooth 2>.

By switching the on/off for "Graphics" and "Text," you can select whether to apply smoothing to graphics or text data.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • The setting made from the printer driver will override this setting made in the <Printer Settings> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.


PS Settings

Return to Overview


Remark
  • These settings are applicable only when printing in the PS mode.
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.

Job Timeout (PS Only)

Wait Timeout (PS Only)

Print PS Errors (PS Only)

RGB Source Profile (PS Only)

CMYK Simulation Profile (PS Only)

Use Grayscale Profile (PS Only)

Output Profile (PS Only)

Matching Method (PS Only)

RGB Pure Black Process (PS Only)

CMYK Pure Black Process (PS Only)

Pure Black Text (PS Only)

Halftones (PS Only)

Advanced Smoothing (PS Only)

Toner Volume Adjustment (PS Only)


Job Timeout (PS Only)

Return to Overview


0 to 3600 seconds; 0* seconds


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify the amount of time before a job times out. If a job has not finished within the set time limit, the job automatically cancels.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Wait Timeout (PS Only)

Return to Overview


0 to 3600 seconds; 300* seconds


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify the amount of time the machine will wait for data sent from the host computer before it times out. If data is not received within the set time limit, the job automatically cancels.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Print PS Errors (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Off*, On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting determines whether an error page is printed when an error occurs.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


RGB Source Profile (PS Only)

Return to Overview


sRGB*, Gamma 1.5, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.4


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to specify the RGB profile (color data represented using the RGB (Red Green Blue) color model) that is appropriate for the characteristics of your monitor. This setting is applied when printing a document containing color images or graphics made by the RGB color model.

Settings can be applied separately for text, graphics, and image data.

sRGB
This setting specifies the industry standard definition for generic Windows computer monitors. If you are using an sRGB compatible monitor, you can print out colors close to how they appear on your monitor.

Gamma 1.5, Gamma 1.8, and Gamma 2.4
These settings enable you to select the gamma correct level of the RGB data. The higher the value, the darker the printout.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


CMYK Simulation Profile (PS Only)

Return to Overview


US Web Ctd(Canon)*, Euro Standard


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on the simulation target selected in the CMYK Simulation Profile.

US Web Ctd(Canon)
This setting uses the U.S. Web Coated profile. This is for obtaining a printout closely matching the printing standard in the USA.

Euro Standard
This setting uses the Euro Standard profile. This is for obtaining a printout closely matching the printing standard in Europe.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • You may not be able to use all the profiles that are available.
  • If the machine receives data with a device independent (CIE based) color space definition, it is color processed with the specified settings. Therefore <CMYK Simulation Profile> is not applied by the machine.


Use Grayscale Profile (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Off*, On


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to define how device dependent gray data is processed.

If <On> is selected, device dependent gray data is converted into CMYK data using the grayscale profile of the machine. The data may be reproduced using only the black (K) toner, depending upon the <Pure Black Text> process or <Output Profile>.

If <Off> is selected, device dependent gray data is reproduced using black (K) toner only.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Output Profile (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Normal, Photo, TR Normal*, TR Photo


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to define the profile that is appropriate for the data you are going to print. It is applied to all data in the print job, so make sure the selected profile is right for your job.

Settings can be applied separately for text, graphics, and image data.

Under most circumstances, it is preferable to select <Normal> for text and graphics data, and <Photo> for image data.

Normal
This setting prints the colors closely matching the ones displayed on your monitor.

Photo
This setting prints colors close to photographic prints.

TR Normal
This setting prints the colors closely matching the ones displayed on your monitor, and also reduces toner bleeding of text and fine lines.

TR Photo
This setting prints colors close to photographic prints, and also reduces toner bleeding of text and fine lines.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Matching Method (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Perceptual*, Saturation, Colorimetric


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting allows you to specify a method of printing when <RGB Source Profile> is applied. This machine includes a color management system that provides the color rendering styles outlined below.

Settings can be applied separately for text, graphics, and image data.

Perceptual
This setting produces the best results for photographic or bitmapped images.

Saturation
This setting is best suited for printing illustrations and diagrams used in business presentations.

Colorimetric
This setting provides a close match to the RGB color value of the machine's printing range.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • Selecting <Normal> for <Output Profile> and <Perceptual> for <Matching Method> is equivalent to setting [Matching Method] to [Perceptual(Normal)] in the printer driver.
  • Selecting <Photo> for <Output Profile> and <Perceptual> for <Matching Method> is equivalent to setting [Matching Method] to [Perceptual(Photographic)] in the printer driver.
  • Selecting <Photo> for <Output Profile> and <Saturation> in <Matching Method> is equivalent to setting [Matching Method] to [VIVID Photo] in the printer driver.


RGB Pure Black Process (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Off, On*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify how black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B should be processed when device dependent RGB data is converted into device dependent CMYK data using the <RGB Source Profile> of the machine.

If <On> is selected, black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B is printed using the black (K) toner only, regardless of the selected <Output Profile> setting.

If <Off> is selected, black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B is printed using CMYK toners based on the selected <Output Profile> setting.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • If you can see gradations or jagged lines in the printouts of black or gray data, select <Off> for <RGB Pure Black Process> and select <Normal> for <Output Profile>.
  • In combination with certain settings, black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B may be printed using the black (K) toner only, even if <Off> is selected. The following are examples.
  • When <On> is selected for <Pure Black Text>
  • When <TR Normal> or <TR Photo> is selected for <Output Profile>
  • When [Use 100% GCR Profile] in the printer driver is selected


CMYK Pure Black Process (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Off, On*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to specify how monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) should be printed when the device dependent CMYK data is processed using the <CMYK Simulation Profile> of the machine.

If <On> is selected, monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) is printed using the black (K) toner only, regardless of the selected <Output Profile> setting.

If <Off> is selected, monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) is printed using CMYK toners based on the selected <Output Profile> setting.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • In combination with certain settings, monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) may be printed using the black (K) toner only, even if <Off> is selected. The following are examples.
  • When <On> is selected for <Pure Black Text>
  • When <TR Normal> or <TR Photo> is selected for <Output Profile>
  • When [Use 100% GCR Profile] in the printer driver is selected


Pure Black Text (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Off, On*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting affects the printout for black (R=G=B=0% or C=M=Y=100%/Bk=N% or C=M=Y=0%/Bk=100%) text on a page. Under most circumstances it is preferable to leave this option set to <On>.

If <On> is selected, black colors generated by applications are printed using only 100% black toner. This means that the color toner will not be misaligned since only one toner color (black) is used.

If <Off> is selected, the black text is printed using CMYK toners based on the selected Output Profile setting. For some jobs, it is preferable to turn this option <Off>.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • Depending on the data to be printed, <Toner Save> may not be applied even if <On> is selected.
  • If <On> is selected for <Toner Save>, very light or finely detailed images may not be printed clearly.


Halftones (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Error Diffusion: Off*, On
Text: Resolution*, Gradation
Graphics: Resolution, Gradation*
Image: Resolution, Gradation*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting specifies how you print halftones.

Print data is expressed in dots. Fine gradations, edges, and shades are expressed by using dither patterns, which are groups of dots. This is called halftone processing.

For example, using a pattern that sharpens character and line edges, or a pattern that smoothens image and graph gradation, enables you to obtain the most suitable texture.

If <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>, select <Resolution> or <Gradation> for each of <Text>, <Graphics>, and <Image>:

Resolution
The machine uses a dither pattern that gives priority to the resolution of the images. This helps eliminate the appearance of jagged or uneven lines along the edges of objects and is best for printing standard text and graphics.

Gradation
The machine uses a dither pattern that gives priority to the appearance of smooth changes in tone. This is best for reproducing images with delicate gradations or changes of tone.

If <Error Diffusion> is set to <On>, the machine uses an error diffusion method that gives priority to printing fine lines or text. This is best for printing images with small text or very fine lines.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Advanced Smoothing (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Advanced Smoothing: Off, Smooth 1*, Smooth 2
Graphics: Off*, On
Text: Off, On*


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting smoothes jagged outlines of graphics (illustrations created by application software) and characters.

<Smooth 2> performs a higher level of smoothing than <Smooth 1>. If <Smooth 1> is selected and the results are still not printed smoothly, select <Smooth 2>.

By switching the on/off for <Graphics> and <Text>, you can select whether to apply smoothing to graphics or text data.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • This setting allows you to apply smoothing to graphics data and text data. Smoothing is not applied to image data.
  • <Graphics> and <Text> can only be selected when <Smooth 1> or <Smooth 2> is selected for <Advanced Smoothing>.
  • Settings for <Graphics> and <Text> on the display will be effective only if [Printer Default] is set for [Advanced Smoothing] in the printer driver.
  • The results of <Advanced Smoothing> may differ depending on the characters and graphics patterns.


Toner Volume Adjustment (PS Only)

Return to Overview


Normal*, Gradation


An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.

This setting enables you to set the Toner Save function. Toner Save uses less toner to print documents and may result in longer toner life.

If <Normal> is selected, text and line data are printed with a toner volume that upholds the resolution for text and lines. Other types of data are printed with a toner volume that upholds the color.

If <Gradation> is selected, all data is printed with a toner volume that upholds the color.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • The internal restriction value cannot be changed.
  • This setting can only be applied to jobs in the PS mode.
  • If <Gradation> is selected, characters and lines may bleed.


Some Basic Facts about Fonts

This section summarizes some of the basic facts you should know about fonts.


What Is a Font?

Attributes of Fonts

Typeface


Stroke Weight


Style


Point Size


Pitch (cpi)


Character Width (Fixed and PS)


Orientation


Symbol Set


Fonts and Scalable Fonts

Bitmapped Fonts


Scalable Fonts


Standard Scalable Fonts (PCL)


OCR Sets Fonts (PCL)


Symbol Sets (For Scalable Typefaces Only)


PS Fonts


Typeface Samples

Standard Scalable Fonts (PCL)


Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)


OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL)


PS Fonts Typeface Samples


Symbol Sets

Arabic-8


ASCII


DeskTop


Greek-8


Hebrew-7


Hebrew-8


ISO 8859-1 Latin 1


ISO 8859-2 Latin 2


ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic


ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek


ISO 8859-8 Latin/Hebrew


ISO 8859-9 Latin 5


ISO 8859-10 Latin 6


ISO French


ISO German


ISO Italian


ISO Latin 9


ISO Norwegian


ISO Spanish


ISO Swedish


ISO United Kingdom


Legal


Math-8


MC Text


Microsoft Publishing


OCR-A


OCR-B


PC-1004


PC-775


PC-8


PC-8 D/N


PC-8 Greek


PC-850


PC-851


PC-852


PC-858


PC-862


PC-864


PC-866


PC-Turkish


Pi Font


PS Math


PS Text


Roman-8


Ventura International


Ventura Math


Ventura US


Windows 3.0 Latin 1


Windows 3.1 Latin 1


Windows 3.1 Latin 2


Windows 3.1 Latin 5


Windows Arabic


Windows Baltic


Windows Latin/Cyrillic


Windows Latin/Greek



What Is a Font?

Return to Overview

A font is a collection of letters and symbols used when printing a document. In general, a group of letters and symbols sharing a common design is referred to as a font. A font consists of the letters A to Z in both upper and lowercase, digits, and symbols.

The design that distinguishes one font from another is referred to as a "typeface." Each font has a typeface name, such as Courier, CG Times, Letter Gothic, etc.



Attributes of Fonts

Return to Overview

All fonts share some common characteristics, which are called "attributes." The typeface is one such attribute. The letters and symbols that are actually printed are determined by the values of a collection of these attributes.


Typeface The design of the letters (e.g., Courier, CG Times, Helvetica, or Gothic).
Stroke Weight The thickness of the lines with which the letters are drawn (e.g., bold, medium, or light).
Style Whether the letters are drawn straight or at an angle (e.g., upright or italic).
Point Size Height of the letters (e.g., 10 point or 5 point).
Pitch (cpi) Number of characters that are printed in one inch (e.g., 10 cpi, 12 cpi, or Scale).
Character Width (Fixed/PS) Indicates whether the character width is set to "Fixed" or "Proportional."
Orientation Orientation of the characters on a page ("Portrait" or "Landscape").
Symbol Set The rule that defines the correspondence between the character codes coming from the host computer, and the letter forms that appear on the page (e.g., Roman-8).


Typeface

Return to Overview


Typeface refers to the design of the characters and symbols. The following figure shows an example of some typefaces.



Stroke Weight

Return to Overview


Stroke weight refers to the thickness of the print. There are light, medium, and bold stroke weights. The printer function has medium and bold fonts available. The figure below shows an example of medium and bold printing.



Style

Return to Overview


Style refers to the shape of the characters. The printer function can print in two styles: upright and italic.

With some fonts, like CourierPS and Letter Gothic, the terms "Oblique" and "Slanted" are used in the same manner as italics.



Point Size

Return to Overview


Point size refers to the height of the character. Character size is measured in points. One inch is divided into 72 points and 1 point is 1/72 of an inch (about 0.35 mm). The printer function has bitmapped fonts and scalable fonts available.The bitmapped fonts are fixed in size, but the scalable fonts are not fixed in size. Scalable fonts are freely scalable to any size you wish in 0.1 point increments. The following figure shows an example of various point sizes.


Remark


Pitch (cpi)

Return to Overview


Pitch refers to the number of characters that are printed in one inch. The unit is cpi (characters per inch). As the number of characters per inch increases, the space between characters decreases; as the cpi decreases, the space between characters increases.



Character Width (Fixed and PS)

Return to Overview


Each character has a different width from all the other characters in a font at a given point size. For example, "W" is a wider letter than "I." There are two ways to print letters of different widths: you can print all letters with the same spacing, regardless of their actual width; or you can change the spacing between letters to accommodate these different widths. Printing all letters with the same spacing is called "Fixed spacing," while changing the spacing to accommodate different letter widths is called "Proportional spacing."

Because the Fixed spacing method prints all letters with the same spacing, the number of characters which will fit into a given length is a fixed quantity which can be specified.

If the characters are printed with Proportional spacing, then the number of characters that will fit into an inch varies depending on the letters printed.



Orientation

Return to Overview


Orientation refers to the direction of printing. The printer function can print using two different paper orientations: portrait and landscape. With portrait orientation, text is printed across the width of the paper (short edge), and with landscape orientation, text is printed across the length of the paper (long edge).



Symbol Set

Return to Overview


When you print the letter "A," the host computer sends a code corresponding to "A" (hexadecimal 41 is an example of this) to the machine. This code is referred to as the character code. The machine stores an internal representation of each character, and selects from among these character patterns the pattern corresponding to the received code. In this case, the machine searches for the pattern for "A," and prints it.

  • The process by which letters are printed

The machine uses a fixed rule to decide which letter or symbol corresponds to the character code sent from the host computer. For example, the letter "A" is printed for the hexadecimal code "41." The rule which determines the correspondence between character codes and printed letters is called the "symbol set."



Fonts and Scalable Fonts

Return to Overview


There are two types of fonts available, and these fonts are distinguished by the type of data from which they are formed.

  • Bitmapped fonts
  • Scalable fonts


Bitmapped Fonts

Return to Overview


Each character of bitmapped fonts are composed of a grid of small dots and stored in the machine's memory in dot matrix format.

Bitmapped fonts are fixed in size and specified by characteristics called "attributes," such as typeface, stroke weight, style and so on. Various types of bitmapped fonts are produced by the combination of these attributes.



Scalable Fonts

Return to Overview


With scalable fonts, characters are freely enlarged or compressed from the one point to any size you wish in 0.1 point increments.



Standard Scalable Fonts (PCL)

Return to Overview

With scalable fonts, characters are freely enlarged or compressed from one point to any size you wish in 0.1 point increments. (The maximum range of scaling depends on the size of the memory installed in the machine and the size of the paper used.)

The following scalable typefaces are included with the machine.


Albertus Extra Bold Garamond Kursiv Halbfett Naskh
Albertus Medium Helvetica Naskh Bold
Antique Olive Helvetica Bold New Century Schoolbook Bold
Antique Olive Bold Helvetica Bold Oblique New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
Antique Olive Italic Helvetica Narrow New Century Schoolbook Italic
Arial Helvetica Narrow Bold New Century Schoolbook Roman
Arial Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique Palatino Bold
Arial Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Oblique Palatino Bold Italic
Arial Italic Helvetica Oblique Palatino Italic
CG Omega ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Palatino Roman
CG Omega Bold ITC Avant Garde Ryadh
CG Omega Bold Italic

Gothic Book Oblique

Ryadh Bold
CG Omega Italic ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Symbol
CG Times ITC Avant Garde SymbolPS
CG Times Bold

Gothic Demi Oblique

Times Bold
CG Times Bold Italic ITC Bookman Demi Times Bold Italic
CG Times Italic ITC Bookman Demi Italic Times Italic
Clarendon Condensed Bold ITC Bookman Light Times New Roman
Coronet ITC Bookman Light Italic Times New Roman Bold
Courier ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic Times New Roman Italic
Courier Bold ITC Zapf Dingbats Times New Roman Bold Italic
Courier Bold Italic Koufi Times Roman
Courier Italic Koufi Bold Univers Medium
CourierPS Letter Gothic Univers Bold
CourierPS Bold Letter Gothic Bold Univers Bold Condensed
CourierPS Oblique Letter Gothic Italic Univers Bold Condensed Italic
CourierPS Bold Oblique Malka Univers Bold Italic
Dorit Malka Bold Univers Medium Italic
Dorit Bold Malka Italic Univers Medium Condensed
Garamond Antiqua Marigold Univers Medium Condensed Italic
Garamond Halbfett Naamit Wingdings
Garamond Kursiv Naamit Bold


OCR Sets Fonts (PCL)

Return to Overview


OCR A

OCR B



Symbol Sets (For Scalable Typefaces Only)

Return to Overview

The following symbol sets are included with the machine.


Arabic-8 (ARABIC8) Legal Pi Font
ASCII (ISO6) Math-8 PS Math*
DeskTop MC Text* PS Text
Dingbats (14L) Microsoft Publishing Roman-8
Greek-8 (GREEK8) OCR-A Roman 9*
Hebrew-7 (HEBREW7) OCR-B Symbol
Hebrew-8 (HEBREW8) PC-1004 (OS/2) Ventura International
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 PC-775 Ventura Math
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 PC-8 Ventura US
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic (ISOCYR) PC-8 D/N Windows 3.0 Latin 1*
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek (ISOGRK) PC-8 Greek CP437 Windows Baltic*
ISO 8859-8 Latin/Hebrew (ISOHEB) PC-8 Greek (PC8GRK) Windows 3.1 Latin 1*
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 PC-850 Windows 3.1 Latin 2*
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 PC-851 Windows 3.1 Latin 5*
ISO French (ISO69) PC-852 Windows Arabic (WINARB)
ISO German (ISO21) PC-858* Windows Latin/Cyrillic (WINCYR)
ISO Italian (ISO15) PC-860 Portugal Windows Latin/Greek (WINGRK)
ISO Latin 9* PC-862 Wingdings
ISO Norwegian (ISO60) PC-864
ISO Spanish (ISO17) PC-865 Norway
ISO Swedish:names (ISO11) PC-866
ISO United Kingdom (ISO4) PC-Turkish * Supports the euro symbol.


PS Fonts

Return to Overview


AlbertusMT GillSansCE Italic NewCenturySchlbk BoldItalic
AlbertusMT Italic GillSans Bold NewCenturySchlbkCE BoldItalic
AlbertusMT Light GillSansCE Bold
AntiqueOlive Roman GillSans BoldItalic NewYork
AntiqueOliveCE Roman GillSansCE BoldItalic NewYorkCE
AntiqueOlive Italic GillSans Condensed Optima
AntiqueOliveCE Italic GillSansCE Condensed OptimaCE Roman
AntiqueOlive Bold GillSans BoldCondensed Optima Italic
AntiqueOliveCE Bold GillSansCE BoldCondensed OptimaCE Italic
AntiqueOlive Compact GillSans Light Optima Bold
AntiqueOliveCE Compact GillSansCE Light OptimaCE Bold
Apple Chancery GillSans LightItalic Optima BoldItalic
Apple ChanceryCE GillSansCE LightItalic OptimaCE BoldItalic
ArialMT GillSans ExtraBold Oxford
ArialCE GillSansCE ExtraBold Palatino Roman
Arial ItalicMT Goudy PalatinoCE Roman
ArialCE Italic Goudy Italic Palatino Italic
Arial BoldMT Goudy Bold PalatinoCE Italic
ArialCE Bold Goudy BoldItalic Palatino Bold
Arial BoldItalicMT Goudy ExtraBold PalatinoCE Bold
ArialCE BoldItalic Helvetica Palatino BoldItalic
AvantGarde Book HelveticaCE PalatinoCE BoldItalic
AvantGardeCE Book Helvetica Oblique StempelGaramond Roman
AvantGarde BookOblique HelveticaCE Oblique StempelGaramondCE Roman
AvantGardeCE BookOblique Helvetica Bold StempelGaramond Italic
AvantGarde Demi HelveticaCE Bold StempelGaramondCE Italic
AvantGardeCE Demi Helvetica BoldOblique StempelGaramond Bold
AvantGarde DemiOblique HelveticaCE BoldOblique StempelGaramondCE Bold
AvantGardeCE DemiOblique Helvetica Condensed StempelGaramond BoldItalic
Bodoni HelveticaCE Cond StempelGaramondCE BoldItalic
BodoniCE Helvetica Condensed Oblique
Bodoni Italic HelveticaCE CondObl Symbol
BodoniCE Italic Helvetica Condensed Bold Taffy
Bodoni Bold HelveticaCE CondBold Times Roman
BodoniCE Bold Helvetica Condensed BoldObl TimesCE Roman
Bodoni BoldItalic HelveticaCE CondBoldObl Times Italic
BodoniCE BoldItalic Helvetica Narrow TimesCE Italic
Bodoni Poster HelveticaCE Narrow Times Bold
BodoniCE Poster Helvetica Narrow Bold TimesCE Bold
Bodoni PosterCompressed HelveticaCE NarrowBold Times BoldItalic
BodoniCE PosterCompressed Helvetica Narrow BoldOblique TimesCE BoldItalic
Bookman Light HelveticaCE NarrowBoldOblique TimesNewRomanPSMT
BookmanCE Light Helvetica Narrow Oblique TimesNewRomanCE
Bookman LightItalic HelveticaCE NarrowOblique TimesNewRomanPS ItalicMT
BookmanCE LightItalic HoeflerText Regular
Bookman Demi HoeflerTextCE Regular TimesNewRomanCE Italic
BookmanCE Demi HoeflerText Italic TimesNewRomanPS BoldMT
Bookman DemiItalic HoeflerTextCE Italic TimesNewRomanCE Bold
BookmanCE DemiItalic HoeflerText Black TimesNewRomanPS BoldItalicMT
Candid HoeflerTextCE Black
Chicago HoeflerText BlackItalic TimesNewRomanCE BoldItalic
Chicago CE HoeflerTextCE BlackItalic
Clarendon HoeflerText Ornaments Univers
ClarendonCE JoannaMT UniversCE Medium
Clarendon Light JoannaMTCE Univers Oblique
ClarendonCE Light JoannaMT Italic UniversCE Oblique
Clarendon Bold JoannaMTCE Italic Univers Bold
ClarendonCE Bold JoannaMT Bold UniversCE Bold
CooperBlack JoannaMTCE Bold Univers BoldOblique
CooperBlack Italic JoannaMT BoldItalic UniversCE BoldOblique
Copperplate ThirtyTwoBC JoannaMTCE BoldItalic Univers Light
Copperplate ThirtyThreeBC LetterGothic UniversCE Light
Coronet Regular LetterGothicCE Univers LightOblique
CoronetCE Regular LetterGothic Slanted UniversCE LightOblique
Courier LetterGothicCE Slanted Univers Condensed
CourierCE LetterGothic Bold UniversCE Condensed
Courier Oblique LetterGothicCE Bold Univers CondensedOblique
CourierCE Oblique LetterGothic BoldSlanted UniversCE CondensedOblique
Courier Bold LetterGothicCE BoldSlanted
CourierCE Bold LubalinGraph Book Univers CondensedBold
Courier BoldOblique LubalinGraphCE Book UniversCE CondensedBold
CourierCE BoldOblique LubalinGraph BookOblique Univers Condensed BoldOblique
Eurostile LubalinGraphCE BookOblique
EurostileCE LubalinGraph Demi UniversCE Condensed BoldOblique
Eurostile Bold LubalinGraphCE Demi
EurostileCE Bold LubalinGraph DemiOblique Univers Extended
Eurostile ExtendedTwo LubalinGraphCE DemiOblique UniversCE Extended
EurostileCE ExtendedTwo Marigold Univers ExtendedObl
Monaco UniversCE ExtendedObl
Eurostile BoldExtendedTwo MonacoCE Univers BoldExt
EurostileCE BoldExtendedTwo MonaLisa Recut UniversCE BoldExt
NewCenturySchlbk Roman Univers BoldExtObl
Geneva NewCenturySchlbkCE Roman UniversCE BoldExtObl
GenevaCE NewCenturySchlbk Italic Wingdings Regular
GillSans NewCenturySchlbkCE Italic ZapfChancery MediumItalic
GillSansCE Roman NewCenturySchlbk Bold ZapfChanceryCE MediumItalic
GillSans Italic NewCenturySchlbkCE Bold ZapfDingbats


Typeface Samples

Return to Overview

For samples, refer to the following contents.


Standard Scalable Fonts (PCL)

Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)

OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL)

PS Fonts Typeface Samples


Standard Scalable Fonts (PCL)

Return to Overview




Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)

Return to Overview




OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL)

Return to Overview




PS Fonts Typeface Samples

Return to Overview



Symbol Sets

Return to Overview

For samples, refer to the following contents.


Arabic-8

ASCII

DeskTop

Greek-8

Hebrew-7

Hebrew-8

ISO 8859-1 Latin 1

ISO 8859-2 Latin 2

ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic

ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek

ISO 8859-8 Latin/Hebrew

ISO 8859-9 Latin 5

ISO 8859-10 Latin 6

ISO French

ISO German

ISO Italian

ISO Latin 9

ISO Norwegian

ISO Spanish

ISO Swedish

ISO United Kingdom

Legal

Math-8

MC Text

Microsoft Publishing

OCR-A

OCR-B

PC-1004

PC-775

PC-8

PC-8 D/N

PC-8 Greek

PC-850

PC-851

PC-852

PC-858

PC-862

PC-864

PC-866

PC-Turkish

Pi Font

PS Math

PS Text

Roman-8

Ventura International

Ventura Math

Ventura US

Windows 3.0 Latin 1

Windows 3.1 Latin 1

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

Windows Arabic

Windows Baltic

Windows Latin/Cyrillic

Windows Latin/Greek


Arabic-8

Return to Overview




ASCII

Return to Overview




DeskTop

Return to Overview




Greek-8

Return to Overview




Hebrew-7

Return to Overview




Hebrew-8

Return to Overview




ISO 8859-1 Latin 1

Return to Overview




ISO 8859-2 Latin 2

Return to Overview




ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic

Return to Overview




ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek

Return to Overview




ISO 8859-8 Latin/Hebrew

Return to Overview




ISO 8859-9 Latin 5

Return to Overview




ISO 8859-10 Latin 6

Return to Overview




ISO French

Return to Overview




ISO German

Return to Overview




ISO Italian

Return to Overview




ISO Latin 9

Return to Overview




ISO Norwegian

Return to Overview




ISO Spanish

Return to Overview




ISO Swedish

Return to Overview




ISO United Kingdom

Return to Overview




Legal

Return to Overview




Math-8

Return to Overview




MC Text

Return to Overview




Microsoft Publishing

Return to Overview




OCR-A

Return to Overview




OCR-B

Return to Overview




PC-1004

Return to Overview




PC-775

Return to Overview




PC-8

Return to Overview




PC-8 D/N

Return to Overview




PC-8 Greek

Return to Overview




PC-850

Return to Overview




PC-851

Return to Overview




PC-852

Return to Overview




PC-858

Return to Overview




PC-862

Return to Overview




PC-864

Return to Overview




PC-866

Return to Overview




PC-Turkish

Return to Overview




Pi Font

Return to Overview




PS Math

Return to Overview




PS Text

Return to Overview




Roman-8

Return to Overview




Ventura International

Return to Overview




Ventura Math

Return to Overview




Ventura US

Return to Overview




Windows 3.0 Latin 1

Return to Overview




Windows 3.1 Latin 1

Return to Overview




Windows 3.1 Latin 2

Return to Overview




Windows 3.1 Latin 5

Return to Overview




Windows Arabic

Return to Overview




Windows Baltic

Return to Overview




Windows Latin/Cyrillic

Return to Overview




Windows Latin/Greek

Return to Overview




Scanning Documents to a File Server

Instructions for sending scanned documents to a file server.



Overview of Scanner Functions

This machine enables you to send scanned documents to a file server. Scanned documents are converted to file formats such as TIFF and are transmitted to the specified file server.



Introduction to Using Scanner Functions - Scanning Documents to a File Server

The necessary settings before scanning documents to a file server is as follows.

  • When scanning documents to an FTP server

For instructions, see "Setting Scan to File Server."

  • When scanning documents to a shared folder

For instructions, see "Setting Scan to File Server."



Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server

This section describes the basic procedure for sending scanned documents to a computer that acts as a file server on a network.


Remark
  • If you select a file format for color from the <Color/File Format Settings>, you will not be able to consecutively scan multiple-page originals from the platen glass. If you want to consecutively scan multiple-page originals using a file format for color, use the feeder instead.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter File Server (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the file server's address.

For information on how to specify the file server's address, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)."

  1. Make the scan settings you require.

You can specify the following settings:

  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Canceling Scanning Documents to a File Server

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel) during transmission.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to cancel, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)

This section describes how to specify the destination to send documents to a file server. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch, or specify a new address.


Remark
  • If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you can only specify a destination using <Address Book> or <Log>. If you select <Log>, you can select only settings. (See "Restricting the New Address.")
  • The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent.

Specifying a New Destination (Scan to File Server)

Specifying a Destination Using the Keyboard (FTP) (Scan to File Server)


Specifying a Destination Using the Keyboard (Windows (SMB)) (Scan to File Server)


Specifying a Destination Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB)) (Scan to File Server)


Specifying Destinations Using the Address Book (Scan to File Server)

Using the One-Touch (Scan to File Server)

Using the Group Addresses (Scan to File Server)

Specifying a Group from the Address Book (Scan to File Server)


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (Scan to File Server)


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Scan to File Server)


Specifying a New Destination (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify a new file server on the network as the destination of a send job.


Remark
  • Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008 restricts the number of users or clients that can be accessed. Once the limit of users or clients has been reached, it is not possible to send documents to a file server using Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008.
  • If <Language Switch> in <Common Settings> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, the host name and file path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • Set the following items when sending to a file server:
  • Protocol
  • Host Name
  • Folder
  • User Name
  • Password
  • You can use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.


Specifying a Destination Using the Keyboard (FTP) (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter File Server (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <FTP>, then press [OK].

<FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information Services 5.0 under Windows 2000 Server, Internet Information Services 5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 under Windows Server 2003, Internet Information Services 7.0 under Windows Vista/Server 2008, Internet Information Services 7.5 under Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 or Red Hat Linux 7.2.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Host Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the host name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 47 characters for the name.
  • A host name is a name assigned to a host computer that provides services on the Internet. A specific host name is assigned to each host computer to identify it on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Folder>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the folder path, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 120 characters for the path.

  • A folder path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the user name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.

  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the password, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.

  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You cannot proceed to the Send Settings screen unless you have entered a <Host Name> and <User Name>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

  • 3. Specify a destination again.

  • If you want to confirm/edit the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to confirm or edit is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Confirm the specified destination.
  • To complete this procedure, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  • To edit the specified destination, press [OK], then go to the next step.

  • 4. Edit the specified destination.
  • To change the server protocol, press the left Any key to select <Edit Protocol>, then select the desired protocol.

  • If you want to register the specified destination in the Address Book:
  • For the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you cannot register the destination in the following procedures.

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to register is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Press the left Any key to select <Reg. Add. Book>.

  • 4. Register the specified destination.

For details on how to register the destination in the Address Book, see "Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book."



Specifying a Destination Using the Keyboard (Windows (SMB)) (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter File Server (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Windows (SMB)>, then press [OK].

<Windows (SMB)>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later) or Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Host Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the host name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the name.
  • A host name is a name assigned to a host computer that provides services on the Internet. A specific host name is assigned to each host computer to identify it on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Folder>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the folder path, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 120 characters for the path.

  • A folder path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the user name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.

  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the password, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 14 characters for the password.

  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You cannot proceed to the Send Settings screen unless you have entered a <Host Name> and <User Name>.


Specifying a Destination Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB)) (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter File Server (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Windows (SMB): Browse>, then press [OK].

<Windows (SMB): Browse>: Select this protocol if you want to specify a file server connected to a specific network.

  • After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in Startup Time Settings to elapse before selecting <Windows (SMB): Browse>. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See "Setting Startup Time.")
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired workgroup, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • If the <Network Password Entry> screen is displayed, enter your user name (up to 24 characters) and network password (up to 14 characters), then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

  • 3. Specify a destination again.

  • If you want to confirm/edit the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to confirm or edit is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Confirm the specified destination.
  • To complete this procedure, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  • To edit the specified destination, press [OK], then go to the next step.

  • 4. Edit the specified destination.
  • To change the server protocol, press the left Any key to select <Edit Protocol>, then select the desired protocol.

  • If you want to register the specified destination in the Address Book:
  • For the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you cannot register the destination in the following procedures.

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to register is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Press the left Any key to select <Reg. Add. Book>.

  • 4. Register the specified destination.

For details on how to register the destination in the Address Book, see "Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book."



Specifying Destinations Using the Address Book (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You must specify the destination to send documents. A maximum of 300 (200 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations (including 200 one-touch destinations) can be stored. If you store addresses in the Address Book, you can easily select them.


Remark
  • If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book.
  • Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See "Import/Export Function.")
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].

The icons displayed on the Address Book are:

  • : Fax
  • : E-mail
  • : I-Fax
  • : File Server
  • : Group

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • If the register name is longer than 10 characters, the first 10 characters are displayed in the name column in the Address Book.
  • If the registered destination is longer than 13 characters, the first 13 characters are displayed in the destination column in the Address Book.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Using the One-Touch (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch.
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document using one-touch.


Remark
  • If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Using the Group Addresses (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

Group address enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address Book or one-touch. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 299 (199 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations in one group.
You can use the group address from the Address Book or from the one-touch.


Remark

Specifying a Group from the Address Book (Scan to File Server)

Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (Scan to File Server)


Specifying a Group from the Address Book (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • A maximum of 332 (232 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 332 or 232 destinations, 32 new destinations can be specified.) If you specify a group of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  • When <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See "Restricting Broadcasting.")
  • Broadcasting is available only when you scan the document in the B&W mode.
  • You cannot cancel to send only one destination out of the multiple destinations.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Add Destination>.
  1. Repeat step 4 and 5 until all the destinations are set.
  • Up to 32 new destinations can be specified. If you add destinations, specify them from Address Book.
  • You cannot specify the detail settings for each destination.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Selecting Color/File Format (Scan to File Server)

You can select the color mode and file format when sending documents to a file server.
The default setting is <B&W TIFF>.


Remark
  • If you select the <Color PDF (Compact)>, <300 x 300 dpi> is available as the resolution.
  • Details about the color modes are as follows:
  • Color: Scans in full-color regardless of whether the original is in full-color or black-and white.
  • B&W: Scans in black-and-white regardless of whether the original is in full-color or black-and-white.
  • Details about the file format is as follows:
  • TIFF: Sends the file in the TIFF format. This file format is available only when you scan the document in the B&W mode.
  • JPEG: Sends the file in the JPEG format. This file format is available only when you scan the document in the Color mode.
  • PDF: Sends the file in the PDF format.
  • PDF (Compact): Enables you to send files containing <Text> originals or <Text/Photo> originals using a high compression ratio. This file format is available only when you scan the document in the Color mode.
  • To view a JPEG file, a software application that supports the JPEG format is required.
  • To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
  • If a black-and-white original is scanned in the Color mode, it is counted as a color scan.
  • If you select a file format for color from the <Color/File Format Settings>, you will not be able to consecutively scan multiple-page originals from the platen glass. If you want to consecutively scan multiple-page originals using a file format for color, use the feeder instead.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color/File Format Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the color mode and file format.
  • If you select <Color JPEG>, <Divide Pages> is automatically set to <On>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Divide Pages>.
  1. If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.



Selecting Resolution (Scan to File Server)

You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
The default setting is <200 x 200 dpi>.


Remark
  • When sending documents to a file server, the maximum image resolution is 600 x 600 dpi.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Resolution Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired resolution, then press [OK].

The following resolution is available.

  • B&W/Color: 100 x 100 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 150 x 150 dpi
  • B&W: 200 x 100 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 200 x 200 dpi
  • B&W: 200 x 400 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 300 x 300 dpi
  • B&W: 400 x 400 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 600 x 600 dpi


Adjusting Density (Scan to File Server)

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original manually.


Manual Exposure Adjustment (Scan to File Server)

Adjusting Base Color (Scan to File Server)


Manual Exposure Adjustment (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the density, then press [OK].

Move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter or move it to the right to make the exposure darker.



Adjusting Base Color (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original when scanning. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals such as catalogs and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Background>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select background setting, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not erase the background color of the original.
  • <Background Removal>: If you want to erase the background color of the original, following step is not necessary.
  • <Background Fine Adjust.>: If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].

If you adjust the strength of <Yellow>, the levels of <Red> and <Green> adjust automatically to the same level as <Yellow>. If you adjust the strength of <Red> or <Green>, the <Yellow> level returns to its default level.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Selecting Image Quality (Scan to File Server)

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning.
The default setting is <Text/Photo>.


Remark
  • Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the <Photo> mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using the sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to File Server).")
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Original Image Quality Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].
  • <Text/Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos such as magazines or catalogs.
  • <Text>: This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly. When PDF (Compact) is selected as the file format and the text mode is selected, the image level in the text mode setting made in <PDF(Compact) Img. Quality> in <TX Settings> under <Common Settings> in <Communications Settings> (from the Additional Functions screen) is activated. (See "Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (Scan to File Server).")
  • <Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper or photo originals containing halftones (e.g. printed photos).

If you select <Text/Photo>, go to the next step as necessary.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Priority Level>.
  • If you select B&W in color mode, <Priority Level> is grayed out.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the text level or photo level, then press [OK].

Move the indicator to the left to make the text level higher or move it to the right to make the photo level higher.

  1. If you are finished, press [OK].


2-Sided Original (Scan to File Server)

You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>, then press [OK].
  • If <Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type Original> has been selected, <2-Sided Originals Settings> is displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of original, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: 1-sided originals are scanned.
  • <Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.


Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (Scan to File Server)

The delayed sending mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it sent at a later time.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • You can reserve up to 70 jobs for the delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 70, depending on the following conditions:
  • If multiple documents are being sent at the same time.
  • If large documents are being sent.
  • If there are jobs other than delayed sending.
  • Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory.
  • Delayed Sending is available only when you scan the document in the B&W mode.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Delayed TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  • If you selected <Scan to Store> in step 3, <Delayed Store Settings> is displayed.
  1. Enter the send time using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
    Examples:
    3:50 p.m.→1550
  • To cancel to enter the time, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> to return to the previous screen.
  • If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on the next day.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder. The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.



Naming a Sent Document Using a File Server

You can add the document's name.
The default setting is <None>.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Send Document Name Settings>, then press [OK].
  • If you selected <Scan to Store> in step 2, <Store Document Name Settings> is displayed.
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the document name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image and stored in a file server. The extension of the document matches the file format that you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the document you are sending is generated based on the date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) and four digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: date and time_0001.tif
    If you specify the document name in this step or set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>, the file name prefix is assigned as follows:
  • If you specify the document name:
    The document name specified in <Send Document Name Settings> comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: document name_date and time_0001.tif
  • If you set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>:
    The user ID entered when you log in to the machine comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: user ID_date and time_0001.tif
  • If you specify the document name and set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>:
    The document name specified in <Send Document Name Settings> and the user ID entered when you log in to the machine comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: document name_user ID_date and time_0001.tif
  • For instructions on how to set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>, see "Managing User IDs."


Message (Scan to File Server)

You can add a message body text.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Subject/Message Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Message>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the message body text, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • The texts entered here are sent to the file server as a separate text file.
  • You can enter up to 140 characters for the text.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the text, press (Clear) to clear your entry.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Favorites (Scan to File Server)

You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them as favorites in memory. You can register up to 9 favorites. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned off.
  • If an address included in a favorites is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites.

Registering Favorites (Scan to File Server)

Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Scan to File Server)


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Scan to File Server)


Erasing Favorites (Scan to File Server)

Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Scan to File Server)


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Scan to File Server)


Using the Favorites (Scan to File Server)

Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (Scan to File Server)

Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Scan to File Server)


Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Scan to File Server)



Registering Favorites (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can register names for favorites from the Select Send Type Screen or register settings for favorites from the Send Settings screen.


Remark
  • The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.


Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
  • If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  • The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes> or <Details>, then press [OK].

To store the current settings, select <Yes>. To cancel storing the settings, select <No>. If you select a key that has settings stored, select <Yes> to overwrite the previous settings.
You can check detail settings to select <Details>.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
  • If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).


Erasing Favorites (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can erase the settings from the Select Send Type Screen or from the Send Settings screen.



Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.


Using the Favorites (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.
You can recall the settings from the Select Send Type screen.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to recall, then press [OK].
  • If you select favorites that already has specified destinations, the Send Settings screen appears. You can change the send settings or add destinations at this time.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>.

  • If you select favorites that has no specified destinations, the Select Send Type screen appears. You can specify destinations.
  • To cancel all settings and return to the Select Send Type screen, press (Reset).


Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to check detail settings for favorites.
You can check the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.


Remark


Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.

You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.



Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.

You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.



Job Recall (Scan to File Server)

You can recall the addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set in the <Log>, and then send your documents.


Remark
  • The settings such as destinations, scan settings and send settings are stored in a log. The actions below after you change settings are not recorded in a log:
  • Pressing the (Start) or (Reset) or (Main Menu).
  • Activation of the Auto Clear mode.
  • Turning OFF the machine.
  • Identical send settings are stored only once in recall memory.
  • If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, the addresses specified from the Address Book are only recalled.
  • The settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF.
  • If <Restrict Sending From Log> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you cannot specify a destination using the <Log>. (See "Restricting Recall.")
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

If you select <Scan to Store>, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Log>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Mode 1>, <Mode 2> or <Mode 3>, then press [OK].

You can check the recall settings by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>.


  • If you select a log in which a destination is stored:

The Send Settings screen appears.


  • 1. Confirm the settings.

  • If you select a log in which a destination is not stored:

The Select Send Type screen appears.


  • 1. Specify a destination.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (Scan to File Server)

You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.
The default setting is <Normal>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Data Compression Ratio>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <High Ratio>, <Normal>, or <Low Ratio>, then press [OK].
  • <High Ratio>: A small amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a low quality.
  • <Normal>: The amount of memory used for the document and the quality of the images are moderate, between the High and Low Ratio settings.
  • <Low Ratio>: A large amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a high quality.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (Retry Times) (Scan to File Server)

Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select <0> to turn the Retry Times mode off.
The default setting is <3>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Retry Times>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the number of retry attempts, then press [OK].
  • You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the number of retry attempts.
  • If the number of retry times is set to <0>, the machine will not resend the data.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server)

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the send function.


Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server)

Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server)


Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can store the standard send settings.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Resolution Settings>: 200x200 dpi
  • <Density/Background Removal>: 0
  • <Original Type>: Text
  • <2-Sided Originals Settings>: Off
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can restore the standard send settings to their default settings.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (Scan to File Server)

If you are sending to a file server destination, you can specify the gamma value used when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr. By setting a gamma value corresponding to the gamma value at the receiving end, sent image data can be printed with the appropriate image quality at the receiving end.
The default setting is <Gamma 1.8>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Color Send Gamma Value>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the gamma value, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to File Server)

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast.
The default setting is <0>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Sharpness>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to slide the indicator towards <Low> or <High>, then press [OK].
  • <Low>: To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be towards <Low>. This setting lessens the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern).
  • <High>: To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards <High>. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (Scan to File Server)

If PDF (Compact) is selected as the file format, you can set the image quality level of the document.
The default setting is <Normal>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <PDF(Compact) Img. Quality>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Text/Photo, Photo Mode> or <Text Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the setting, then press [OK].
  • <Data Size Priority>: The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
  • <Normal>: The data size and image quality are between <Data Size Priority> and <Image Quality Priority>.
  • <Image Quality Priority>: The data size is large, but the image quality is high.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  • If an original with many colors is scanned, the compression level is determined by the data size and the number of colors, according to the selected image level.
    However, if the original is in monochrome or has few colors, it does not matter which image level you select.


Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (Scan to File Server)

This mode enables you to specify what screen is displayed for a send operation. When you select <Send/Fax> on the Main Menu screen and press [OK], the screen specified here is displayed for a send operation.
The default setting is <Default Screen>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Default Screen for Send>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the initial screen, then press [OK].
  • <Favorites>: The Set Favorites screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  • <One-touch>: The One-touch Selection/Clear screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  • <Default Screen>: The Select Send Type screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server)

You can restore almost all of the Send Function Settings to their default settings.


Remark
  • You cannot initialize <Register Unit Name> and <Retry Times>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing the Status of Scanning Data in Memory (Scan to File Server)

The System Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of scanning data in memory.


Checking/Deleting Scanning Data (Scan to File Server)

Checking/Printing the Scanning Log (Scan to File Server)


Checking/Deleting Scanning Data (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can check the detailed information of scanning documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job.

  • If you want to erase the selected job:

  • 1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then go to the next step.

  • If you complete this procedure:
  • 1. Go to step 8.
  1. Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Printing the Scanning Log (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can view or print the results of scanning transactions that list all scanning data sent.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store Log>, then press [OK].
  • If <Job Log Display> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Off>, <Send/Store Log> is not displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. If you want to print a list of transaction results, press the right Any key to select <Print List>.

If you do not want to print the list, go to step 8.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Scanning Documents to a Memory Media

Instructions for storing scanned documents in a USB memory.



Overview of Scanner Functions

This machine enables you to store scanned documents in a USB memory. Scanned documents are converted to file formats such as TIFF and are transmitted directly to the USB memory connected to the machine.


Remark
  • Do not connect anything other than USB memory to the USB memory port.
  • Supported file systems of USB memory are FAT16 and FAT32.
  • Supported maximum sizes of a USB memory are as follows;
  • FAT32: 8GB
  • FAT16: 2GB
  • USB memory with security function or card readers are not supported.
  • USB memory used with an extension cable is not supported.
  • Use of a USB memory through a USB hub is not supported.
  • A USB memory that does not comply with USB specifications is not supported.
  • In other cases not mentioned above, images may not be saved correctly due to the type of USB memory used.
  • For a USB memory formatted with the FAT16 file system, the maximum number of files that can be saved in the root directory (the top level of the directory tree in the USB memory) is only 255. It is recommended that you use a computer to organize the root directory of your USB memory beforehand by moving existing files to a newly created folder or by deleting unnecessary files. If all files in the USB memory are unnecessary, formatting the USB memory to FAT32 is also recommended.
  • If the destination folder of the scanned images contains many files, the time it takes to save will increase. It is recommended that you use a computer to organize your destination folder beforehand by moving existing files to a newly created folder or by deleting unnecessary files.


Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a USB Memory

This section describes the basic procedure for storing scanned documents in a USB memory.


Remark
  • If you use the platen glass to scan your originals, you will not be able to scan multiple-page originals consecutively. Also in the <Color/File Format Settings> screen, you will be able to select <Off> or <On> in the <Divide Pages> menu but the function will be ineffective. To scan multiple-page originals consecutively, use the feeder.
  1. Insert your USB memory to an appropriate slot on the right side of the control panel.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on Memory Media>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the media you want to store in, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Make the scan settings you require.

You can specify the following settings:

  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified media when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel>.


Selecting Color/File Format (Scan to USB Memory)

You can select the color mode and file format when sending documents to an USB memory.
The default setting is <B&W TIFF>.


Remark
  • If you select the <Color PDF (Compact)>, <300 x 300 dpi> is available as the resolution.
  • Details about the color modes are as follows:
  • Color: Scans in full-color regardless of whether the original is in full-color or black-and-white.
  • B&W: Scans in black-and-white regardless of whether the original is in full-color or black-and-white.
  • Details about the file format is as follows:
  • TIFF: Sends the file in the TIFF format. This file format is available only when you scan the document in the B&W mode.
  • JPEG: Sends the file in the JPEG format. This file format is available only when you scan the document in the Color mode.
  • PDF: Sends the file in the PDF format.
  • PDF (Compact): Enables you to send files containing <Text> originals or <Text/Photo> originals using a high compression ratio. This file format is available only when you scan the document in the Color mode.
  • To view a JPEG file, a software application that supports the JPEG format is required.
  • To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
  • If a black-and-white original is scanned in the Color mode, it is counted as a color scan.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on Memory Media>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory media, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color/File Format Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the color mode and file format.
  • If you select <Color JPEG>, <Divide Pages> is automatically set to <On>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Divide Pages>.
  • If you use the platen glass to scan your originals, the On/Off settings in <Divide Pages> will be ineffective.
  1. If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.



Selecting Resolution (Scan to USB Memory)

You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
The default setting is <200 x 200 dpi>.


Remark
  • When sending documents using a USB memory, the maximum image resolution is 600 x 600 dpi.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on Memory Media>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory media, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Resolution Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired resolution, then press [OK].

The following resolution is available.

  • B&W/Color: 100 x 100 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 150 x 150 dpi
  • B&W: 200 x 100 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 200 x 200 dpi
  • B&W: 200 x 400 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 300 x 300 dpi
  • B&W: 400 x 400 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 600 x 600 dpi


Adjusting Density (Scan to USB Memory)

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original manually.


Manual Exposure Adjustment (Scan to USB Memory)

Adjusting Base Color (Scan to USB Memory)


Manual Exposure Adjustment (Scan to USB Memory)

Return to Overview

You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on Memory Media>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory media, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the density, then press [OK].

Move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter or move it to the right to make the exposure darker.



Adjusting Base Color (Scan to USB Memory)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original when scanning. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals such as catalogs and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on Memory Media>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory media, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Background>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select background setting, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not erase the background color of the original.
  • <Background Removal>: If you want to erase the background color of the original, following step is not necessary.
  • <Background Fine Adjust.>: If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].

If you adjust the strength of <Yellow>, the levels of <Red> and <Green> adjust automatically to the same level as <Yellow>. If you adjust the strength of <Red> or <Green>, the <Yellow> level returns to its default level.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Selecting Image Quality (Scan to USB Memory)

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning.
The default setting is <Text/Photo>.


Remark
  • Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the <Photo> mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using the sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to USB Memory).")
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on Memory Media>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory media, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Original Image Quality Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].
  • <Text/Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos such as magazines or catalogs.
  • <Text>: This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly. When PDF (Compact) is selected as the file format and the text mode is selected, the image level in the text mode setting made in <PDF(Compact) Img. Quality> in <TX Settings> under <Common Settings> in <Communications Settings> (from the Additional Functions screen) is activated. (See "Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (Scan to USB Memory).")
  • <Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper or photo originals containing halftones (e.g. printed photos).

If you select <Text/Photo>, go to the next step as necessary.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Priority Level>.
  • If you select B&W in color mode, <Priority Level> is grayed out.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the text level or photo level, then press [OK].

Move the indicator to the left to make the text level higher or move it to the right to make the photo level higher.

  1. If you are finished, press [OK].


2-Sided Original (Scan to USB Memory)

You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on Memory Media>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory media, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>, then press [OK].
  • If <Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type Original> has been selected, <2-Sided Originals Settings> is displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of original, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: 1-sided originals are scanned.
  • <Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.


Naming a Sent Document Using a USB Memory

You can add the document's name.
The default setting is <None>.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on Memory Media>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory media, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Send Document Name Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the document name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image and stored in a USB memory. The extension of the document matches the file format that you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the document you are sending is generated based on the date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) and four digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: date and time_0001.tif
    If you specify the document name in this step or set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>, the file name prefix is assigned as follows:
  • If you specify the document name:
    The document name specified in <Send Document Name Settings> comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: document name_date and time_0001.tif
  • If you set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>:
    The user ID entered when you log in to the machine comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: user ID_date and time_0001.tif
  • If you specify the document name and set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>:
    The document name specified in <Send Document Name Settings> and the user ID entered when you log in to the machine comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: document name_user ID_date and time_0001.tif
  • For instructions on how to set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>, see "Managing User IDs."


Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (Scan to USB Memory)

You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.
The default setting is <Normal>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Data Compression Ratio>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <High Ratio>, <Normal>, or <Low Ratio>, then press [OK].
  • <High Ratio>: A small amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a low quality.
  • <Normal>: The amount of memory used for the document and the quality of the images are moderate, between the High and Low Ratio settings.
  • <Low Ratio>: A large amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a high quality.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Standard Send Settings (Scan to USB Memory)

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the send function.


Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to USB Memory)

Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to USB Memory)


Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to USB Memory)

Return to Overview

You can store the standard send settings.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Color/File Format Settings>: B&W TIFF
  • <Resolution Settings>: 200x200 dpi
  • <Density/Background Removal>: 0
  • <Original Type>: Text
  • <2-Sided Originals Settings>: Off
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to USB Memory)

Return to Overview

You can restore the standard send settings to their default settings.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to USB Memory)

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast.
The default setting is <0>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Sharpness>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to slide the indicator towards <Low> or <High>, then press [OK].
  • <Low>: To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be towards <Low>. This setting lessens the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern).
  • <High>: To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards <High>. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (Scan to USB Memory)

If PDF (Compact) is selected as the file format, you can set the image quality level of the document.
The default setting is <Normal>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <PDF(Compact) Img. Quality>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Text/Photo, Photo Mode> or <Text Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the setting, then press [OK].
  • <Data Size Priority>: The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
  • <Normal>: The data size and image quality are between <Data Size Priority> and <Image Quality Priority>.
  • <Image Quality Priority>: The data size is large, but the image quality is high.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  • If an original with many colors is scanned, the compression level is determined by the data size and the number of colors, according to the selected image level. However, if the original is in monochrome or has few colors, it does not matter which image level you select.


Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (Scan to USB Memory)

You can restore almost all of the Send Function Settings to their default settings.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Printing the Scanning Log (Scan to USB Memory)

You can view or print the results of scanning transactions that list all scanning data sent.


Remark
  • If <Memory Media Store Log> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Do Not Retain>, scanning log data is not stored.
  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store Log>, then press [OK].
  • If <Job Log Display> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Off>, <Send/Store Log> is not displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. If you want to print a list of transaction results, press the right Any key to select <Print List>.

If you do not want to print the list, go to step 8.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer

Instructions for scanning documents from a networked computer.



Overview of Scanner Functions

This machine enables you to scan documents from computers over the network. Scanned documents are transmitted over the network to your computer.



Introduction to Using Scanner Functions - Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer

This section describes the things that you must do before scanning documents from a networked computer. Be sure to set the following items first:

  • TWAIN-compliant Applications

Color Network ScanGear is launched from the menu of a TWAIN-compliant application (applications capable of modifying images or inserting them into a document, such as Adobe Photoshop, Microsoft Office, etc.). A TWAIN-compliant application must be installed in your computer, since Color Network ScanGear cannot be used as an independent application software.

  • Network Settings

Connect the network cable and set the IP address to enable your machine to communicate over the network. For details, see "Basic Network Settings," and "Setting and Checking the IP Address."

  • If you want to use the machine as a network scanner, it must be connected to a computer over an IPv4 network.
  • Color Network ScanGear

Color Network ScanGear is an application software required in order to scan documents from a computer. For information on how to install the software, see "Network Connection."

  • If Color Network ScanGear is already installed in your computer, the [Color Network ScanGear] folder is displayed when you select the [start] (or []) menu, then [Program] (or [All Programs]).
  • ScanGear Tool

Before scanning documents from a computer, you need to select the machine for scanning using the ScanGear Tool. For details, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used (Network Scan)."

  • ScanGear Tool is an application software included with the Color Network ScanGear. ScanGear Tool is installed together with the Color Network ScanGear driver.


Basic Methods for Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer

With the Color Network ScanGear driver installed in your computer, you can remotely scan an original set on the machine and import the scanned image over the network to a TWAIN-compliant application*. (* See "Remark" below for more information on TWAIN-compliant applications.)

Before proceeding to the procedure below, see "Introduction to Using Scanner Functions - Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer," and make sure that all the setups are complete for scanning originals from a computer.


Remark
  • Color Network ScanGear cannot be used as an independent application software. To use the Color Network ScanGear driver, a TWAIN-compliant application (such as Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft Word/Excel/PowerPoint of Microsoft Office 2000 or later, etc.) is required. TWAIN is a technical standard for connecting a computer to an image capturing device, such as a scanner, digital camera, etc.
  • The Color Network ScanGear driver cannot store scanned images or convert them to PDF or other file formats. Store the imported images with the TWAIN-compliant application.
  • The Color Network ScanGear driver is a software used with the machine connected to a computer over the network. The software does not support USB connection.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Remote Scan>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Online>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to continue scanning another original, keep the Use Remote Scan screen in step 4 displayed. If you change the screen, the machine will automatically go offline when scanning is complete or as soon as the preview image is displayed.
  • If you press (Main Menu) while the machine is online, the machine will automatically go offline.

  1. Place your original on the platen glass or in the feeder.

  1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application on your computer. (As an example, this manual provides instructions on how to import scans to Microsoft Word 2007/Microsoft Word 2003.)

The following is an example of a scanning method for other TWAIN-compliant applications:

  • Select Color Network ScanGear as the scanner to be used.
    The command names for this operation includes [Select a scanner], [Select a device], etc.
  • Then, start the Color Network ScanGear driver and scan originals.
    The command names for this operation includes [New scan], [Import from TWAIN source].

For details, see the documentation that comes with the application software used.

  1. Open the [Insert] tab sheet and click [Clip Art].

In Microsoft Word 2003, select [Picture] from the [Insert] menu and click [From Scanner or Camera]. Skip to step 11.

  1. In the [Clip Art] task pane, click [Organize clips].

The Clip Organizer is launched.

  1. Open the [File] menu of the Clip Organizer.

  1. Select [Add Clips to Organizer] and click [From Scanner or Camera].

  1. Select [Color Network ScanGear Vx.xx] and click [Custom Insert].

  • On the actual display, 'x' in [Color Network ScanGear Vx.xx] is replaced by the version number of your Color Network ScanGear.
  1. On the Color Network ScanGear [Main] sheet, select [Platen], [Feeder (1-sided)], or [Feeder (2-sided)] from [Original Placement] according to the location of the original placed in step 5.

If [Platen] is selected, clicking on [Preview] allows you to see the preview image of your scan.

  1. On the [Main] and [Options] sheets, select the desired settings for Color Mode, Resolution, etc.


Remark
  • Some of the settings on the Color Network ScanGear [Main] sheet, as listed below, may not be fully functional:
  • [Color Mode]: neither [Grayscale] or [Auto-color Select] is supported.
  • [Resolution]: Resolution can be set between 100 dpi and 600 dpi. You cannot specify a resolution not in the list by entering a number directly from the key board.
  • [Original Size]: [Custom] is not supported.
  • [Density Adjustment]: [Auto] is not supported.

For more information on the settings on each sheet, see the Online Help (displayed when the Help icon ' ' on the toolbar is clicked) or "Color Network ScanGear Main Window (Network Scan)."

  1. Click [Scan].

  • By default, the scanned images are stored in [Collection List] → [My Collections] → the [Color Network ScanGear Vx.xx] folder.
  • In Microsoft Word 2003, the scanned images are inserted in the document, as shown in step 17. Skip to step 18.
  • To cancel scanning, click [Cancel] in the [Transfer Pages] dialog box.

  1. See your scans located in the [Color Network ScanGear Vx.xx] folder and close the Clip Organizer.

  1. Return to the Microsoft Word window. In the [Clip Art] task pane, open the [Search in] drop-down listbox → [My Collections]. Make sure that [Color Network ScanGear Vx.xx] is selected, and click [Go].

  1. Click the scanned image file to insert the image in the open document.



  1. After scanning is complete, switch the scanner offline. (Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Offline>, then press [OK].)
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Switching the Scanner Online and Offline (Network Scan)

To start the Color Network ScanGear driver and scan, first you must switch the scanner online.


Switching the Scanner Online (Network Scan)

Switching the Scanner Offline (Network Scan)


Switching the Scanner Online (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

Switching the scanner online enables communication with other devices on the network, and allows the scanner to receive data from the computer.
Follow the procedure below to switch the scanner online.


Remark
  • If <Auto Online> is set to <On>, the machine automatically switches online when you select <Remote Scan> on the Select Store Type screen. For details, see "Auto Online."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Remote Scan>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Online>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to make two or more scan jobs continuously, keep the Use Remote Scan screen (the screen for step 4) showing. The machine will automatically switch offline if you make a scan or use the preview function while showing a screen other than this Use Remote Scan screen.
  • If you press (Main Menu) when the machine is online, the machine goes offline.

To switch the machine offline, see "Switching the Scanner Offline (Network Scan)."



Switching the Scanner Offline (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

After scanning over the network, switch the machine offline in order to use other functions.


Remark
  • You do not have to switch the scanner offline in order to use other functions while data is being transferred.
  • If <Auto Offline> is set to <On>, the machine automatically switches offline. For details, see "Auto Offline."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Remote Scan>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Offline>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used (Network Scan)

Before scanning originals from a computer with Color Network ScanGear, you need to select the machine for scanning using ScanGear Tool. Configure the ScanGear Tool settings as described below.

You do not need to configure the settings at each scanning operation, as these settings are automatically saved.


Remark
  • The ScanGear Tool cannot be started at the same time as the Color Network ScanGear driver.
  • ScanGear Tool is installed together with the Color Network ScanGear driver.
  1. On the [start] (or []) menu, point to [Programs] (or [All Programs]) → [Color Network ScanGear] → click [ScanGear Tool].

The ScanGear Tool starts.

  1. Select the scanner to be used.

  • If you want to search for scanners:

  • 1. Click [Discover].

The ScanGear Tool searches for scanners on the network, and the results are displayed in the list.


  • 2. Click the scanner to be used in the list → click [Select].

Information for the selected scanner appears under [Selected Scanner].

  • Only scanners on the same subnet (network with the same network ID) as your computer are displayed in the list.
  • After selecting the scanner, you can click [Test Connection] to check that the selected scanner can be used.

  • If you want to select the scanner using the IP address:

  • 1. Click [Address].

The [Address] dialog box appears.


  • 2. Enter the IP address or host name in [IP Address or Host Name] → click [OK].

For information on how to check the machine's IP address, see "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings."

For the machine connected to an IPv4 network, enter the IP address in a "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" format.

'XXX' represents a decimal number from 0 to 255. Available characters are numerics (0 to 9) and periods (.).

Information for the selected scanner appears under [Selected Scanner].

  • It is possible to specify an IP address outside the subnet.
  • After selecting the scanner, you can click [Test Connection] to check that the selected scanner can be used.
  1. Click [Exit].

The settings are saved and the ScanGear Tool is closed.



Color Network ScanGear Main Window (Network Scan)

The window that appears when the Color Network ScanGear driver is opened in an application is called the Color Network ScanGear Main Window. The Color Network ScanGear Main Window includes the following items.



Toolbar (Network Scan)

Scanning buttons (Network Scan)

Preview Area (Network Scan)

Settings (Network Scan)

Status Bar (Network Scan)


Toolbar (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

The toolbar contains buttons for manipulating the image shown in the Preview Area. You can reposition the toolbar by clicking and dragging it. You can hide the toolbar by clicking [] (Exit), to remove it from the display. To redisplay it, select [Show Toolbar] on the [System] menu in the main window. The functions of the buttons in the toolbar are described below.


  • [] (Crop)

Clicking this button turns the pointer into a cross-hair, which you can then drag within the Preview Area to specify the area to be scanned.

  • [] (Move Image)

Clicking this button turns the pointer into a small hand, which you can then drag to scroll the image in the Preview Area. The Move Image button is available only when the image has been zoomed, so that it is larger than the Preview Area.

  • [] (Zoom)

Clicking this button turns the pointer into a magnifying glass in the Preview Area, allowing you to enlarge or reduce the image in the Preview Area. Click the left mouse button on the preview image to enlarge it by one step, and click the right mouse button on the enlarged image to reduce it by one step. This button is available only when an image appears in the Preview Area.

  • [] (Ruler)

Clicking this button displays rulers at the top and left sides of the Preview Area. Clicking the button toggles the ruler display on and off.

  • [] (Help)

Clicking this button displays the Online Help.



Scanning buttons (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

  • [Scan]

Clicking this button scans an original. When scanning is complete, the Color Network ScanGear Main Window closes and the scanned image is transferred to the application. During scanning, a scanning progress dialog box is displayed. To interrupt scanning, click [Cancel].

  • Depending on the application, the Color Network ScanGear Main Window may not close after scanning is complete. In this case, click [] (Exit) in the Color Network ScanGear Main Window to close it.
  • [Preview]

Clicking this button pre-scans the original and displays a preview image in the Preview Area. After changing the scan settings, click this button once again to display a preview of the image with the new settings. During scanning, [Preview] changes to [Cancel]. If you interrupt scanning by clicking [Cancel], the part of the image already scanned appears in the Preview Area. This button is not available when using the feeder to scan.

  • [Clear]

Clicking this button clears the image displayed in the Preview Area. It also cancels the scanning area setting and magnification of the preview image, and returns the Preview Area display to its default size.



Preview Area (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

This area displays a preview of how the image will look after the original is scanned.

Use it to check the appearance of the image, and to adjust the scanning area or scan settings. Right-clicking on the Preview Area displays a pop-up menu that provides the following functions.


Remark
  • The preview image does not appear when using the feeder for scanning.

  • [Cropping Area]

Displays the [Cropping Area] dialog box, where you can specify the dimensions of the scanning area. This function cannot be selected with 2-sided scanning, when [Auto-adjust Orientation] is selected. For instructions on how to specify the scanning area, see "Specifying the Scanning Area (Network Scan)."

  • [Unit]

Selects the unit (millimeters, inches, or pixels) used on the ruler function in the toolbar.

  • [Original Frame Erase]

Enables you to specify whether to delete a shadow or frame around the original when scanning. Selecting [On] applies a 2.5 mm white frame around the scanned image.

  • The default setting for [Original Frame Erase] is [On]. If you select [Off], streaks may appear on the scanned image.


Settings (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

Click the tabs to access the [Main], [Options], and [Scanner Info] sheets. Use the [Main] sheet to specify scan settings. Use the [Options] sheet to specify processing options. Use the [Scanner Info] sheet to display information about the currently selected scanner. For details about the settings in each sheet, refer to the Online Help for that sheet.



Status Bar (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

The status bar shows the following information, from left to right.

  • The [Color Mode] setting
  • The [Resolution] setting
  • The top left coordinates, and the width and height of the scanning area
  • The amount of memory required to scan the image (units: KB)


Viewing the Online Help (Network Scan)

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The ScanGear Tool cannot be started at the same time as the Color Network ScanGear driver.
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. Click the [Help] (or []) button.

  • ScanGear Tool:

  • 1. Start ScanGear Tool.

For details, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used (Network Scan)."


  • 2. Click the [Help] button.

The online help is displayed.


  • Color Network ScanGear:

  • 1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer."


  • 2. Click the [] button.

The online help is displayed.



Scanning from the Platen Glass (Network Scan)

This section describes how to scan originals set on the platen glass. For full descriptions on how to scan originals from a computer, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer."


Remark
  1. On the Color Network ScanGear [Main] sheet, select [Platen] for [Original Placement].

  1. To preview the image, click [Preview].

A preview image appears in the Preview Area.

  • You can enlarge the preview image by using the toolbar, or adjust the appearance of the image by using the settings in the [Options] sheet.


Scanning from the Feeder (Network Scan)

With the feeder, multiple originals can be scanned consecutively. This section describes how to scan originals set in the feeder. For full descriptions on how to scan originals from a computer, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer."


Remark
  • When scanning from the feeder, use only standard size originals. To scan originals that are not a standard size, use the platen glass.
  • The preview image does not appear when using the feeder for scanning.
  1. On the Color Network ScanGear [Main] sheet, select [Feeder (1-sided)] or [Feeder (2-sided)] for [Original Placement].

For 1-sided originals, select [Feeder (1-sided)]; for 2-sided originals, select [Feeder (2-sided)].

  1. On the [Main] sheet, select [Auto-adjust Orientation], or click [Orientation] to display the [Orientation] dialog box and then select the Feeding Direction setting.

When scanning two-sided originals, also select the [Book Opening] setting on the [Orientation] dialog box.

For details about the setting, see "Setting the Original Feeding Orientation (Network Scan)."



Setting the Original Feeding Orientation (Network Scan)

You can set the Color Network ScanGear driver to automatically detect the originals' orientation, or manually select the orientation at which originals are placed in the feeder beforehand, so that originals scanned from the feeder are displayed with their correct orientation on the computer. For full descriptions on how to scan originals from a computer, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer."

  1. On the Color Network ScanGear [Main] sheet, select [Feeder (1-sided)] or [Feeder (2-sided)] for [Original Placement].

  • To automatically detect the originals' orientation:
  • Select [Auto-adjust Orientation].

During scanning, the orientation of the original is detected automatically, and the scanned image is rotated if necessary, so that it is displayed correctly on the computer screen.

  • To manually specify the originals' orientation:
  • 1. Click [Orientation].

The [Orientation] dialog box appears.

  • 2. Select the orientation of the originals to be loaded into the feeder for [Feeding Direction].

For 2-sided originals, also set [Book Opening] to indicate the relation between the front and back sides of a 2-sided original.

  • 3. When the settings are complete, click [OK] to close the dialog box.


Specifying the Scanning Area (Network Scan)

When scanning from the platen glass, you can display the scan image in the Preview Area, and then select the area to scan within the original. Follow the procedure below to specify the scanning area.

  1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select [Platen] for [Original Placement].

  1. Click [Preview] to display the image in the Preview Area.
  1. Click [Crop] on the toolbar.

The pointer changes to cross-hairs in the Preview Area, allowing you to select the scanning area.

  1. Drag the mouse from one corner of the rectangular area you want to specify to the diagonally opposite corner.

Once an area is specified, you can change it, as follows:

  • You can drag the area to a different position, or drag the frame handles to change the size of the area.
  • To cancel the scanning area setting, click outside the area.

The specified area is indicated by a broken line.

  • You can also specify the scanning area in the [Cropping Area] dialog box.
    Right-click in the Preview Area, and then select [Cropping Area] to display the [Cropping Area] dialog box. Enter the dimensions of the area to be scanned and click [OK].
  • Although it is not possible to display a preview image when scanning using the feeder, you can still specify the scanning area numerically using the [Cropping Area] dialog box, or by dragging the mouse in the empty Preview Area to roughly define the area.
  • You cannot specify the scanning area in the following cases:
  • When scanning 2-sided originals
  • When [Auto-adjust Orientation] is selected


Department ID Management (Network Scan)

You can manage the number of pages scanned by individuals or groups (such as departments or users) with the Color Network ScanGear Department ID Management function.


Remark
  • To use the Department ID Management function, make sure to do the following:

Setting a Department ID and PIN (Network Scan)

Entering the Department ID and PIN When You Scan (Network Scan)


Setting a Department ID and PIN (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

You can set a department ID and PIN beforehand in the ScanGear Tool in order to scan using the Department ID Management function.

  1. Start ScanGear Tool.
  1. Select a scanner to use.

For details about how to start ScanGear Tool or to select a scanner, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used (Network Scan)."

  1. Confirm that [Enabled] is displayed for [Dept. ID Management] under [Selected Scanner] → click [Dept. ID Settings].

The [Department ID Settings] dialog box appears.

  1. Select [Save PIN].
  1. Enter the department ID and PIN in [Department ID] and [PIN].
  1. To confirm the department ID and PIN each time you scan, select the [Confirm Department ID/PIN when Scanning] check box.
  1. Click [OK] to close the dialog box.
  1. Click [Exit] in the ScanGear Tool.

The settings are saved and ScanGear Tool is closed.

Scanning with the selected scanner from then onward is performed with the department ID and PIN.



Entering the Department ID and PIN When You Scan (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

If a department ID and PIN have not been set in the ScanGear Tool, they must be entered each time scanning is executed.


Remark
  1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer."

  1. Make all the necessary settings on the [Main] sheet → click [Scan].

The [Confirm Department ID] dialog box appears.

  1. Enter [Department ID] and [PIN] → click [OK].

Scanning is performed with the entered department ID and PIN.



Summary of Important Features and Settings (Network Scan)

The following setting parameters are available in Color Network ScanGear.

For details, refer to the Online Help in the sheets in which the setting is listed, or in the appropriate dialog box.


  • Basic Settings

Setting Procedure
Color mode for image Select the desired color mode from [Color Mode] in the [Main] sheet.
Scanning resolution Select the desired resolution from [Resolution] in the [Main] sheet.
Size of originals to be scanned Select the desired size from [Original Size] in the [Main] sheet.

  • Image Processing Settings

Setting Procedure
Adjust density Select [Manual] from [Density Adjustment] in the [Main] sheet → move the [Density] slider to adjust the value.
Create color negative image Select [On] from [Reversed Image] in the [Options] sheet.
Mirror image left to right Select [On] from [Mirror Image] in the [Options] sheet.
Rotate image Select the desired angle of rotation from [Image Rotation] in the [Options] sheet.
Setting the brightness, contrast, and gamma for full color scanning In the [Options] sheet, select the color that you want to set from [Channel] → move the [Brightness], [Contrast], and [Gamma] sliders to adjust the settings.
Setting the brightness, contrast, and gamma for grayscale scanning In the [Options] sheet, move the [Brightness], [Contrast], and [Gamma] sliders to adjust the settings.

  • Settings for Scanning from the Feeder

Setting Procedure
Scan originals from feeder with correct orientation Select [Auto-adjust Orientation] in the [Main] sheet.
- or -
Perform the following steps:
1. In the [Main] sheet, click [Orientation] to display the [Orientation] dialog box.
2. Select the feeding direction of originals (and Book Opening direction for 2-sided originals) in the dialog box.
Set the number of pages to scan In the [Main] sheet, select [Specify] from [Pages to Scan] → enter the number of pages.

  • Department ID Management Settings

Setting Procedure
Verify the Department ID Management settings at the scanner Select the scanner in ScanGear Tool, and then confirm that [Enabled] is displayed for [Dept. ID Management] under [Selected Scanner].
Once the scanner is selected, you can verify the scanner information in the [Scanner Info] sheet.
Save a department ID and PIN Perform the following steps:
1. Open the [Department ID Settings] dialog box from ScanGear Tool.
2. In the dialog box, select [Save PIN] → enter values in [Department ID] and [PIN].


E-mail

E-Mail Instructions.



Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions

This machine enables you to send scanned documents to an e-mail application. Scanned documents are converted to file formats such as TIFF and are transmitted as an e-mail attachment to the recipient's e-mail application.
The necessary settings before using the scan to E-mail and I-fax function is as follows.

For details, see "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-fax.")



Sending E-Mails

This section describes the settings and procedures for sending e-mail documents.


Basic Methods for Sending E-Mails

Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents

Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)

Specifying a New E-Mail Address


Using the Address Book (E-Mail)


Using the One-Touch (E-Mail)


Using the Group Addresses (E-Mail)


Specifying a Group from the Address Book (E-Mail)


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (E-Mail)


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (E-Mail)


Specifying E-Mail Addresses via an LDAP Server


Selecting Color/File Format (E-Mail)

Selecting Resolution (E-Mail)

Adjusting Density (E-Mail)

Manual Exposure Adjustment (E-Mail)


Adjusting Base Color (E-Mail)


Selecting Image Quality (E-Mail)

2-Sided Original (E-Mail)

Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (E-Mail)

Naming a Sent Document Using an E-Mail

Subject/Message (E-Mail)

Reply-to (E-Mail)

E-Mail Priority

Favorites (E-Mail)

Registering Favorites (E-Mail)


Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (E-Mail)


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (E-Mail)


Erasing Favorites (E-Mail)


Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (E-Mail)


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (E-Mail)


Using the Favorites (E-Mail)


Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (E-Mail)


Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (E-Mail)


Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (E-Mail)


Job Recall (E-Mail)

Registering the Machine's Name (E-Mail)

Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (E-Mail)

Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (Retry Times) (E-Mail)

Standard Send Settings (E-Mail)

Storing the Standard Send Settings (E-Mail)


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (E-Mail)


Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (E-Mail)

Adjusting Sharpness (E-Mail)

Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (E-Mail)

Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (E-Mail)

Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (E-Mail)

Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails

Dividing the Data for Sending E-Mails

Registering a Subject Line for Your E-Mails


Basic Methods for Sending E-Mails

Return to Overview

This section describes the flow of sending e-mails.


Remark
  • If you select a file format for color from the <Color/File Format Settings>, you will not be able to consecutively scan multiple-page originals from the platen glass. If you want to consecutively scan multiple-page originals using a file format for color, use the feeder instead.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter E-mail (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the e-mail address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the e-mail address.
  1. Make the scan settings you require.

You can specify the following settings:

  • <Reply-to Settings>: Sets the reply address to your e-mail. (See "Reply-to (E-Mail).")
  • <E-mail Priority Settings>: Sets your e-mail priority. (See "E-Mail Priority.")
  • <Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See "Favorites (E-Mail).")
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel) during transmission.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to cancel, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify an e-mail address. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch, or specify a new address.


Remark
  • If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you can only specify a destination using <Address Book>, <Search LDAP Server>, or <Log>. If you select <Log>, you can select only settings stored. (See "Restricting the New Address.")
  • The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent.


Specifying a New E-Mail Address

Return to Overview

You can specify a new e-mail address.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter E-mail (New)>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter an e-mail address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the address.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

  • 3. Specify a destination again.

  • If you want to confirm/edit the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to confirm or edit is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Confirm the specified destination.
  • To complete this procedure, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  • To edit the specified destination, press [OK], then edit the destination.

  • If you want to register the specified destination in the Address Book:
  • For the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you cannot register the destination in the following procedures.

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to register is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Press the left Any key to select <Reg. Add. Book>.

  • 4. Register the specified destination.

For details on how to register the destination in the Address Book, see "Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book."



Using the Address Book (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You must specify the destination to send documents. A maximum of 300 (200 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations (including 200 one-touch destinations) can be stored. If you store addresses in the Address Book, you can easily select them.


Remark
  • If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in Address Books.
  • Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See "Import/Export Function.")
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press[OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].

The icons displayed on the Address Book are:

  • : Fax
  • : E-mail
  • : I-Fax
  • : File Server
  • : Group

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • If the register name is longer than 10 characters, the first 10 characters are displayed in the name column in the Address Book.
  • If the registered destination is longer than 13 characters, the first 13 characters are displayed in the destination column in the Address Book.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Using the One-Touch (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch.
Follow the procedure below to start a transmission and send a document using one-touch.


Remark
  • If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in Address Books.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Using the Group Addresses (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

Group address enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address Book or one-touch. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 299 (199 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations in one group.
You can use the group address from the Address Book or from the one-touch.


Remark

Specifying a Group from the Address Book (E-Mail)

Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (E-Mail)


Specifying a Group from the Address Book (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to clear the specified destination:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/Erase>.

  • 2. Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.


  • 3. Specify a destination again.


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • A maximum of 332 (232 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 332 or 232 destinations, 32 new destinations can be specified.) If you specify a group of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  • When <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See "Restricting Broadcasting.")
  • Broadcasting is available only when you scan the document in the B&W mode.
  • You cannot cancel sending the document to only one destination out of the multiple destinations.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Add Destination>.
  1. Repeat step 4 and 5 until all the destinations are set.
  • Up to 32 new destinations can be specified.
    If you add destinations, specify them from Address Book.
  • You cannot specify the detail settings for each destination.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Specifying E-Mail Addresses via an LDAP Server

Return to Overview

You can specify e-mail addresses and fax numbers by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. E-mail addresses and fax numbers obtained via the server can be specified as destinations or stored in the Address Book.
This section describes how to specify e-mail addresses via an LDAP server.


Remark
  • You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment.
  • If you want to specify or register destinations via an LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must be specified in the machine beforehand. (See "Registering LDAP Server.")
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired server to search, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the search criteria.
  • There are two methods to search for an e-mail address: Simple Search and Detailed Search. Simple Search enables you to search for an e-mail address by entering the name, e-mail address, or fax number for the destination. To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, use Detailed Search.
  • If a destination has both a registered e-mail address and fax number, you can search for it by entering either the e-mail address or the fax number as the search criterion.

  • To use Simple Search:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Name>, <E-mail>, or <Fax>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use the software keyboard to enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched.
  • To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press the left Any key to select <Detailed Search>, and follow the directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.

  • To use Detailed Search:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Detailed Search>.

  • 2. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Add Search Condition>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the first item, then press [OK].

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired search category, then press [OK].
  • <Name>: Search by name.
  • <E-mail>: Search by e-mail address.
  • <Fax>: Search by fax number.
  • <Organization>: Search by organization name.
  • <Organization Unit>: Search by organization unit (e.g., departments in an organization).

For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept, o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the directory, enter <Organization>/<Organization Unit> of the user as follows:
<Organization>=canon
<Organization Unit>=salesdept

  • <Organization>/<Organization Unit> can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the LDAP Server.
  • Detailed Search by <Organization>/<Organization Unit> may not be performed, depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP server and depending on the type of application on the server.

  • 6. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the second item, then press [OK].

  • 7. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired search condition, then press [OK].
  • <contains>: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <does not contain>: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <equals>: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <differs from>: The result must be different from the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <begins with>: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • <ends with>: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.

  • 8. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the third item, then press [OK].

  • 9. Use the software keyboard to enter the search criterion, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information on using the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."


  • 10. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Add or edit the search criteria as necessary.

If you search for an e-mail address using the criteria specified in step 5, go to the next step.


  • To continue adding more search criteria:

  • 1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search Method (and/or)>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <or> or <and>, then press [OK].
  • <or>: The machine searches and returns a result that matches any of the specified search criteria.
  • <and>: The machine searches and returns a result that matches all of the specified search criteria.

  • 4. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Add Search Condition>, then press [OK].

  • 6. Follow step 5 to add the search criteria.
  • You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
  • If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both <or> and <and> together.

  • To edit the search criteria:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search criterion that you want to edit, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit Search Condition>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Follow step 5 to edit the search criteria.

  • To delete the search criteria:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search criterion that you want to delete, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase Search Condition>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Start Search>.

To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press the left Any key to select <Cancel>. If the machine finds some results before you select <Cancel>, these search results are displayed.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  • The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in <Register LDAP Server> in <System Management Set.>. (See "Registering LDAP Server.") If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of addresses to search, or change the search criteria.
  • If you select <Start Search> without specifying any search criteria, all of the addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.
  • If the Network Password Entry screen is displayed, enter your user name and network password, then press [OK].
  • The Network Password Entry screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:
  • If <Login Information> in <Register LDAP Server> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Use> or <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)>, and <Display Auth. Screen> is set to <On>. (See "Registering LDAP Server.")
  • If the user name, password, and domain name specified in <Register LDAP Server> in <System Management Set.> are incorrect. (See "Registering LDAP Server.")
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].
  • You can select up to 32 destinations.
  • If you press the left Any key to select <Menu> and use
    [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Select E-mail for I-Fax>, the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Selecting Color/File Format (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can select the color mode and file format when sending documents to an e-mail address.
The default setting is <B&W TIFF>.


Remark
  • If you select the <Color PDF (Compact)>, <300 x 300 dpi> is available as the resolution.
  • Details about the color modes are as follows:
  • Color: Scans in full-color regardless of whether the original is in full-color or black-and-white.
  • B&W: Scans in black-and-white regardless of whether the original is in full-color or black-and-white.
  • Details about the file format is as follows:
  • TIFF: Sends the file in the TIFF format. This file format is available only when you scan the document in the B&W mode.
  • JPEG: Sends the file in the JPEG format. This file format is available only when you scan the document in the Color mode.
  • PDF: Sends the file in the PDF format.
  • PDF (Compact): Enables you to send files containing <Text> originals or <Text/Photo> originals using a high compression ratio. This file format is available only when you scan the document in the Color mode.
  • To view a JPEG file, a software application that supports the JPEG format is required.
  • To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
  • If a black-and-white original is scanned in the Color mode, it is counted as a color scan.
  • If you select a file format for color from the <Color/File Format Settings>, you will not be able to consecutively scan multiple-page originals from the platen glass. If you want to consecutively scan multiple-page originals using a file format for color, use the feeder instead.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color/File Format Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the color mode and file format.
  • If you select <Color JPEG>, <Divide Pages> is automatically set to <On>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Divide Pages>.
  1. If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.



Selecting Resolution (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
The default setting is <200 x 200 dpi>.


Remark
  • If you are sending documents by e-mail, the maximum image resolution is 600 x 600 dpi.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Resolution Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired resolution, then press [OK].

The following resolution is available.

  • B&W/Color: 100 x 100 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 150 x 150 dpi
  • B&W: 200 x 100 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 200 x 200 dpi
  • B&W: 200 x 400 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 300 x 300 dpi
  • B&W: 400 x 400 dpi
  • B&W/Color: 600 x 600 dpi


Adjusting Density (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original manually.


Manual Exposure Adjustment (E-Mail)

Adjusting Base Color (E-Mail)


Manual Exposure Adjustment (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the density, then press [OK].

Move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter or move it to the right to make the exposure darker.



Adjusting Base Color (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original when scanning. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals such as catalogs and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Background>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select background setting, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not erase the background color of the original.
  • <Background Removal>: If you want to erase the background color of the original, following step is not necessary.
  • <Background Fine Adjust.>: If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].

If you adjust the strength of <Yellow>, the levels of <Red> and <Green> adjust automatically to the same level as <Yellow>. If you adjust the strength of <Red> or <Green>, the <Yellow> level returns to its default level.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Selecting Image Quality (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning.
The default setting is <Text/Photo>.


Remark
  • Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the <Photo> mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using the sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting Sharpness (E-Mail).")
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Original Image Quality Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].
  • <Text/Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos such as magazines or catalogues.
  • <Text>: This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly. When PDF (Compact) is selected as the file format and the text mode is selected, the image level in the text mode setting made in <PDF(Compact) Img. Quality> in <TX Settings> under <Common Settings> in <Communications Settings> (from the Additional Functions screen) is activated. (See "Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (E-Mail).")
  • <Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper or photo originals containing halftones (e.g. printed photos).

If you select <Text/Photo>, go to the next step as necessary.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Priority Level>.
  • If you select B&W in color mode, <Priority Level> is grayed out.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the text level or photo level, then press [OK].

Move the indicator to the left to make the text level higher or move it to the right to make the photo level higher.

  1. If you are finished, press [OK].


2-Sided Original (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>, then press [OK].
  • If <Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type Original> has been selected, <2-Sided Originals Settings> is displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of original, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: 1-sided originals are scanned.
  • <Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.


Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

The delayed sending mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it sent at a later time.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • You can reserve up to 70 jobs for the delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 70, depending on the following conditions:
  • If multiple documents are being sent at the same time.
  • If large documents are being sent.
  • If there are jobs other than delayed sending.
  • Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory.
  • Delayed sending is available only when you scan the document in the B&W mode.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Delayed TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the send time using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
    Examples:
    3:50 p.m.→1550
  • To cancel to enter the time, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> to return to the previous screen.
  • If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on the next day.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four-digit number.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder. The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.



Naming a Sent Document Using an E-Mail

Return to Overview

You can add the document's name.
The default setting is <None>.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Send Document Name Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the document name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image attached to an e-mail message, and the extension of the document matches the file format that you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the e-mail message is generated based on the date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) and four digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: date and time_0001.tif
    If you specify the document name in this step or set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>, the file name prefix is assigned as follows:
  • If you specify the document name:
    The document name specified in <Send Document Name Settings> comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: document name_date and time_0001.tif
  • If you set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>:
    The user ID entered when you log in to the machine comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: user ID_date and time_0001.tif
  • If you specify the document name and set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>:
    The document name specified in <Send Document Name Settings> and the user ID entered when you log in to the machine comes first as the file name prefix.
    Example: document name_user ID_date and time_0001.tif
  • For instructions on how to set <Add User Name to Document Name> in <User ID Management> to <On>, see "Managing User IDs."


Subject/Message (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can add a subject line and message body text.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Subject/Message Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Subject>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the subject of the e-mail message, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 40 characters for the subject.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the subject, press (Clear) to clear your entry.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Message>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the message body text, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 140 characters for the text.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the text, press (Clear) to clear your entry.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.


Reply-to (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can select a reply-to addresses.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • You cannot select multiple destinations for the reply-to address.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Reply-to Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the address to which you want to send the reply, then press [OK].
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.


E-Mail Priority

Return to Overview

You can select a priority level when sending an e-mail.
The default setting is <Normal>.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <E-mail Priority Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a priority for your e-mail message, then press [OK].
  • <High>: Priority level is high.
  • <Normal>: Priority level is normal.
  • <Low>: Priority level is low.


Favorites (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them as favorites in memory. You can register up to 9 favorites. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.
  • If an address included in a favorites is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites.

Registering Favorites (E-Mail)

Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (E-Mail)


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (E-Mail)


Erasing Favorites (E-Mail)

Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (E-Mail)


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (E-Mail)


Using the Favorites (E-Mail)

Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (E-Mail)

Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (E-Mail)


Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (E-Mail)



Registering Favorites (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can register names for favorites from the Select Send Type Screen or register settings for favorites from the Send Settings screen.


Remark
  • The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.


Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
  • If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).


Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  • The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes> or <Details>, then press [OK].

To store the current settings, select <Yes>. To cancel storing the settings, select <No>. If you select a key that has settings stored, select <Yes> to overwrite the previous settings.
You can check detail settings to select <Details>.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
  • If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).


Erasing Favorites (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can erase the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.



Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.


Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
  • You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.


Using the Favorites (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.
You can recall the settings from the Select Send Type screen.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to recall, then press [OK].
  • If you select a favorites that already has specified destinations, the Send Settings screen appears. You can change the send settings or add destinations at this time.
  • You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>.

  • If you select a favorites that has no specified destinations, the Select Send Type screen appears. You can specify destinations.
  • To cancel all settings and return to the Select Send Type screen, press (Reset).


Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to check detail settings for favorites.
You can check the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.


Remark


Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Favorites>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.

You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.



Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify a destination.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.

You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.



Job Recall (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can recall the addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set in the <Log>, and then send your documents.


Remark
  • The settings such as destinations, scan settings and send settings are stored in a log. The actions below after you change settings are not recorded in a log:
  • Pressing the (Start) or (Reset) or (Main Menu).
  • Activation of the Auto Clear mode.
  • Turning OFF the machine.
  • Identical send settings are stored only once in recall memory.
  • If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, the addresses specified from the Address Book are only recalled.
  • The settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF.
  • If <Restrict Sending From Log> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you cannot specify a destination using the <Log>. (See "Restricting Recall.")
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Log>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Mode 1>, <Mode 2> or <Mode 3>, then press [OK].

You can check the recall settings by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>.


  • If you select a log in which a destination is stored:

The Send Settings screen appears.


  • 1. Confirm the settings.

  • If you select a log in which a destination is not stored:

The Select Send Type screen appears.


  • 1. Specify a destination.
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • Scanning starts.
  • To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
  1. Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
  1. When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.



Registering the Machine's Name (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

Your name or company's name must be registered as the machine's name.
When you send a document, the name that you registered is displayed in the From field of the e-mail message. For information on registering the unit name, see "Make Fax Settings."



Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.
The default setting is <Normal>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Data Compression Ratio>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <High Ratio>, <Normal>, or <Low Ratio>, then press [OK].
  • <High Ratio>: A small amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a low quality.
  • <Normal>: The amount of memory used for the document and the quality of the images are moderate, between the High and Low Ratio settings.
  • <Low Ratio>: A large amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a high quality.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (Retry Times) (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select <0> to turn the Retry Times mode off.
The default setting is <3>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Retry Times>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the number of retry attempts, then press [OK].
  • You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the number of retry attempts.
  • If the number of retry times is set to <0>, the machine will not resend the data.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Standard Send Settings (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the send function.



Storing the Standard Send Settings (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can store the standard send settings.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Color/File Format Settings>: B&W TIFF
  • <Resolution Settings>: 200x200 dpi
  • <Density/Background Removal>: 0
  • <Original Type>: Text
  • <2-Sided Originals Settings>: Off
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can restore the standard send settings to their default settings.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Change Send Func. Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

If you are sending to an e-mail destination, you can specify the gamma value used when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr. By setting a gamma value corresponding to the gamma value at the receiving end, sent image data can be printed with the appropriate image quality at the receiving end.
The default setting is <Gamma 1.8>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Color Send Gamma Value>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the gamma value, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Sharpness (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast.
The default setting is <0>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Sharpness>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to slide the indicator towards <Low> or <High>, then press [OK].
  • <Low>: To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be towards <Low>. This setting lessens the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern).
  • <High>: To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards <High>. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

If PDF (Compact) is selected as the file format, you can set the image quality level of the document.
The default setting is <Normal>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <PDF(Compact) Img. Quality>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Text/Photo, Photo Mode> or <Text Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the setting, then press [OK].
  • <Data Size Priority>: The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
  • <Normal>: The data size and image quality are between <Data Size Priority> and <Image Quality Priority>.
  • <Image Quality Priority>: The data size is large, but the image quality is high.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  • The setting made for <Text/Photo, Photo Mode> or <Text Mode> is enabled only if <Text/Photo>, <Photo> or <Text> is selected from <Original Image Quality Settings>. (See "Selecting Image Quality (E-Mail).")
  • If an original with many colors is scanned, the compression level is determined by the data size and the number of colors, according to the selected image level.
    However, if the original is in monochrome or has few colors, it does not matter which image level you select.


Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to specify what screen is displayed for a send operation. When you select <Send/Fax> on the Main Menu screen and press [OK], the screen specified here is displayed for a send operation.
The default setting is <Default Screen>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Default Screen for Send>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the initial screen, then press [OK].
  • <Favorites>: The Set Favorites screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  • <One-touch>: The One-touch Selection/Clear screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  • <Default Screen>: The Select Send Type screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can restore almost all of the Send Function Settings to their default settings.


Remark
  • You cannot initialize <Register Unit Name> and <Retry Times>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize TX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails

Return to Overview

This function enables you to set the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail documents. If an e-mail transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent.
The default setting is <3 MB>.


Remark
  • When sending an e-mail document, you can set to divide the data before sending it if the size of the data exceeds the maximum data size for sending. For information on dividing data before sending it, see "Dividing the Data for Sending E-Mails."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Data Size Limit>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the maximum data size for sending e-mails, then press [OK].

You can also use - (numeric keys) to set the data size.

  • The maximum data size for sending must not be greater than the maximum data size of the mail server.
  • If you enter <0> MB as the data size, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Dividing the Data for Sending E-Mails

Return to Overview

This function enables you to divide an e-mail document into separate files when it is sent, if the data size exceeds the limit you specify in "Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails." Each file is sent separately as an e-mail attachment.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Divide TX Data Oversize>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering a Subject Line for Your E-Mails

Return to Overview

This function enables you to register a subject line for e-mails you send. The subject that you enter here is used as the default subject whenever you do not enter a subject when sending a job.
The default setting is <Attached Image>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Default Subject>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a subject, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information on using the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Receiving E-Mails

This section describes the settings and procedures for receiving e-mail documents.
Your machine can receive and print e-mail messages without a computer. If the machine receives an e-mail with attachments, the messages and attachments are printed separately.
The accepted message format and file types are as follows:

  • Message format: Plain text
  • File types: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR compression), JPEG, Exif JPEG (Exif 2.2)

Remark
  • You cannot read e-mail messages on the machine's display.

Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (E-Mail)

Reducing a Received Document (E-Mail)

Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (E-Mail)

Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (E-Mail)

Specifying the Gamma Value for Receiving Color Documents (E-Mail)

Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (E-Mail)

Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (E-Mail)


Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <2-Sided Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Reducing a Received Document (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Receive Reduction>: On
  • <RX Reduction>: Auto
  • <Reduce %>: 90%
  • <Reduce Direction>: Vertical Only
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive Reduction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>.
  • <Off>: Does not reduce received documents. If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step 14.
  • <On>: Reduces received documents. If you select <On>, press the right Any key to select <Set>, then go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Reduction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto> or <Fixed Reduction>.
  • <Auto>: The image is automatically reduced by a suitable reduction ratio. If you select <Auto>, press [OK], then go to step 12.
  • <Fixed Reduction>: The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set for <Reduce %> in the next step. If you select <Fixed Reduction>, press [OK], then go to the next step.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reduce %>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the reduction ratio, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reduce Direction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Vertical and Horizontal> or <Vertical Only>, then press [OK].
  • <Vertical and Horizontal>: The image is reduced in both the vertical and horizontal directions.
  • <Vertical Only>: The image is reduced in the vertical direction only.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can set whether the machine prints the date, day, and time received, transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Received Page Footer>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to continue printing your current jobs when the toner is low.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When <Toner Out Continuous Print> is set to <On>, the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Toner Out Continuous Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Specifying the Gamma Value for Receiving Color Documents (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can set the gamma value to use when receiving documents. This enables you to print received documents with the appropriate image quality.
The default setting is <Gamma 1.8>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <YCbCr Receive Gamma Val.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the gamma value, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be occasions when you want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].

If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>.
  • <Off>: Does not use the memory lock reception mode. If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step 12.
  • <On>: Uses the memory lock reception mode. If you select <On>, press the right Any key to select <Option>, then go to the next step.
  1. If you want to set or change a password for the Memory Lock mode, enter a password (up to seven digits) using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].

If you set a password, it will be necessary to enter the password whenever you want to change the Memory Lock mode settings, or cancel the Memory Lock mode.

If you do not want to set the Memory Lock with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.

  • You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
  • If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
    Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
  • If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear), then enter the correct password.
  1. Set the machine to print an RX report or not.

If you want to print an RX report when receiving documents, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to print an RX report, select <Off>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to print an RX report, you need also to set <RX Report> to <On>. (See "RX Report.")
  1. Set the time for the machine to enter and leave the Memory Lock mode.

If you want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings, select <Do Not Specify>, then press [OK]. Go to step 12.

If <Do Not Specify> is selected, the Memory Lock mode will not start automatically at a specified time. The machine enters the Memory Lock mode only when you manually set the Memory Lock mode to <On> in step 6.

  1. Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to enter the Memory Lock mode using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.
  1. Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to leave the Memory Lock mode using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.
  • If you set the same time for Memory Lock Start Time and Memory Lock End Time, the machine will be in the Memory Lock mode through the entire day.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].

If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].

The received documents are printed.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Forwarding Received E-Mail Documents

This machine enables you to automatically forward received e-mail documents to any desired destination. If a received document matches the specified forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. Received documents that do not match the forwarding conditions can also be forwarded to any desired destination.


Remark
  • The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 52 (12 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn): 50 (10 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) with forwarding conditions and 2 without conditions.
  • If a forwarding error occurs when <Print Image> and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to <Off> and <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Do Not Store>, the received documents will be lost.

Specifying Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Storing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)


When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions (E-Mail)


Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)


Erasing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)


Printing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)


Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (E-Mail)

Handling Forwarding Documents (E-Mail)

Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (E-Mail)

Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (E-Mail)


Specifying Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings.



Storing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can register the forwarding conditions and destinations.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a name for the forwarding condition, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information on using the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  • E-mail functions are nearly identical to I-fax functions, so you need to select <I-Fax> as the type of document to receive.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination>, <Sender>, or <Subject>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding condition, then press [OK].

The available forwarding conditions are:

  • <disregard>: Disregards the Destination, Sender, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
  • <equals>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
  • <differs from>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
  • <begins with>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
  • <ends with>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
  • <contains>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
  • <does not contain>: Forwards the document if the Destination, Sender, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.

If you select <disregard>, go to step 12.

  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the forwarding criterion using - (numeric keys), then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the forwarding criterion.
  1. If necessary, repeat steps 9 through 11.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Next>.
  1. Check the message on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press [OK].
  • You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.
  • <TIFF (Black)/PDF (Color)>: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or PDF (Color) format.
  • <TIFF (Black)/JPEG (Color)>: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Color) format.
  • <PDF>: Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
  • <PDF (Black)/JPEG (Color)>: Sends the file in either the PDF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Color) format.

If you select <PDF>, go to the next step.
If you select the others, go to step 21.

  • This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 16. Go to step 21.
  • To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Divide Pages>.
  1. If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.


Remark
  • Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the received document.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forward w/o Condition>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  • E-mail functions are nearly identical to I-fax functions, so you need to select <I-Fax> as the type of document to receive.
  1. Check the message on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press [OK].
  • You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.
  • <TIFF (Black)/PDF (Color)>: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or PDF (Color) format.
  • <TIFF (Black)/JPEG (Color)>: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Color) format.
  • <PDF>: Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
  • <PDF (Black)/JPEG (Color)>: Sends the file in either the PDF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Color) format.
  • This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 9. Go to step 14.
  • To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Divide Pages>.
  1. If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can set whether received documents are forwarded.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired forwarding setting, then press [OK].

Each time you press [OK], the icon status displayed on the left side of the condition name is switched.

  • <>: The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it matches the forwarding conditions.
  • <>: The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Erasing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to erase.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to check or change.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details/Edit>, then press [OK].
  1. Check or change the forwarding settings.

For instructions on changing forwarding settings, see "Storing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)."

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can redirect the e-mail documents received in memory to the specified destination.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax RX Document>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Forward>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Start>.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Handling Forwarding Documents (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can set how the machine handles the documents to be forwarded.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Print Image>: On
  • <Store Image to Memory>: Do Not Store

Remark
  • When <Print Image> and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to <Off> and <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Do Not Store>, the received documents will be lost if a forwarding error occurs.
  • If <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <On>, forwarded documents or those with forwarding errors are not printed even if <Print Image> is set to <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>. They are printed when <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <Off>.
  • When <Print Image> is set to <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>, the first page of a document with forwarding errors will be printed on the Error TX Report if it is set to be printed with image in <Report Settings>, even if <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <On>. For information on Report Settings, see "Printing Reports Automatically."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store/Print When Fwding.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print Image>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, <On>, or <Only When Error Occurs>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not print the image.
  • <On>: Prints all the images that has been forwarded.
  • <Only When Error Occurs>: Prints the image only when forwarding has failed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store Image to Memory>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Do Not Store> or <Only When Error Occurs>, then press [OK].
  • <Do Not Store>: Does not store the image.
  • <Only When Error Occurs>: Stores the image in memory if forwarding fails.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can resend the e-mail documents that the machine failed to forward.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Only When Error Occurs> in <Store/Print When Fwding.> in <System Management Set.>. (See "Handling Forwarding Documents (E-Mail).")
  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax Fwd. Error Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Forward>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Start>.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  • If the transfer is successful, the document is erased from memory.
  • You cannot select a group address for transferring the document.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can check the details of e-mail documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print those documents.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Only When Error Occurs> in <Store/Print When Fwding.> in <System Management Set.>. (See "Handling Forwarding Documents (E-Mail).")
  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax Fwd. Error Status>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to check the details of documents with forwarding errors:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to check.

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  • If you want to erase a document with a forwarding error:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to erase.

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.

  • If you want to print a document with a forwarding error:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to print.

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • To print multiple document, select and print one document at a time.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Changing the Status of E-Mail Documents in Memory

The System Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of e-mail documents in memory.


Checking/Deleting E-Mail Transmission Documents

Checking/Deleting E-Mail Reception Documents

Checking the Arrival of E-Mail Documents

Checking/Printing the E-Mail Transmission Log

Checking/Printing the E-Mail Reception Log


Checking/Deleting E-Mail Transmission Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the detailed information of e-mail documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job.

  • If you want to erase the selected job:

  • 1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then go to the next step.

  • If you complete this procedure:
  • 1. Go to step 8.
  1. Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Deleting E-Mail Reception Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the detailed information of e-mail documents received in memory, then delete unwanted documents as necessary. You can also forward received documents in memory to a desired destination.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax RX Document>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job.

  • If you want to erase the selected job:

  • 1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then go to the next step.

  • If you complete this procedure:
  • 1. Go to step 8.
  1. Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select <Erase>.
  • To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.
  • You cannot erase a document that is being printed.
  • If you select a document that is being received, <Erase> changes to <Cancel>, enabling you to cancel receiving the document.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking the Arrival of E-Mail Documents

Return to Overview

The machine regularly checks for the arrival of an e-mail. However, you can check for the arrival of an e-mail at any time by performing the procedure below.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Confirm I-Fax RX Doc.>, then press [OK].

The machine accesses to your mail server for checking for e-mail documents.

  • To be able to use <Confirm I-Fax RX Doc.>, you must first set <POP> to <On> in <E-mail/I-Fax>, so that you can receive documents using POP. (See "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-fax.")


Checking/Printing the E-Mail Transmission Log

Return to Overview

You can view or print the results of e-mail transactions that list all e-mails sent.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Store Log>, then press [OK].
  • If <Job Log Display> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Off>, <Send/Store Log> is not displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. If you want to print a list of transaction results, press the right Any key to select <Print List>.

If you do not want to print the list, go to step 8.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Printing the E-Mail Reception Log

Return to Overview

You can view or print the results of e-mail transactions that list all e-mails received.

  1. Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receive Job Log>, then press [OK].
  • If <Job Log Display> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Off>, <Receive Job Log> is not displayed.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
  1. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. If you want to print a list of transaction results, press the right Any key to select <Print List>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Settings from a PC

Settings from a PC Instructions



System Requirements

The Remote UI has been confirmed to work in the following system environments.


Windows

  • OS
  • Windows 2000
  • Windows XP
  • Windows Vista
  • Windows 7
  • Web Browser
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later

Macintosh

  • OS
  • Mac OS 10.3 or later, except Mac OS X Classic environment
  • Web Browser
  • Safari 1.3.2 or later


Using the Remote UI

The Remote UI software enables you to access and manage the machine connected to a network using a web browser.

  • Check the machine status from a network computer.
  • Set and control the machine from a computer.

Starting the Remote UI


Starting the Remote UI

Return to Overview

To start the Remote UI, follow the procedure described below.


Remark
  • Before you start the Remote UI, press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.> → <System Management Set.>* → <Network Settings> → <TCP/IP Settings> → <IPv4 Settings> → <IP Address Settings> then press the left Any key to select <Confirm Set.>, and verify the IP address of the machine. If you do not know the IP address, consult with your network administrator. (See "Checking Network Connection (IPv4)" or "Checking Network Connection (IPv6).")
    * If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).
  1. Prepare the Network.

Set up the machine for use in a network, then connect the machine and the PC to your network router or a hub.

  1. Start the web browser.
  1. Enter the IP address of the machine in [Address] or [Location], then press [Enter] on the keyboard.

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

For details on how to check the IP address, see "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings" or "Confirming Stateful Address."

The Remote UI screen appears.

  1. Enter the required data.

The required data differ depending on the authentication mode you are using.

  • If both Department ID and User Management are disabled:
  • 1. Select [System Manager Mode] or [End-User Mode].

  • 2. Enter the System Manager ID and password or user name.

  • For Department ID Management mode:
  • 1. Enter the Department ID and Password.

  • For User Management mode:
  • 1. Enter the User ID and password.

  • If no password is set, you can log on without entering a password.
  1. Click [OK].

[Device] - [Device Status] page is displayed when you logon the Remote UI.

1 Displays the current status of the machine, etc.
2 Takes you to the Remote UI top page.
3 Updates (refreshes) the currently displayed screen with the latest information.
4 Displays the online help for the Remote UI.
5 Displays the current status of print jobs, etc.
6 Takes you back to the top of a current page.
7 Displays a list of settings for the machine, etc.
8 Displays one-touch or coded speed dialing data (fax numbers, etc.) registered on the machine.
Takes you back to the previous page.


Checking Device Status and Information

You can view the current status of the machine and also information about the administrator in charge of the machine, the installation location and various machine settings.


Checking Device Status

Checking Device Information

Checking Device Features

Checking Network Settings

Checking Counter Check


Checking Device Status

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Device Status] from the menu under the [Device].
    If [Device Status] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Device Status] appears displaying information such as consumables and error messages. To check details of errors, click [Error Information].



Checking Device Information

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Device Information] from the menu under the [Device].
    If [Device Information] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Device Information] appears displaying information related to the machine, such as the system manager's information and the location of the machine.



Checking Device Features

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Device Features] from the menu under the [Device].
    If [Device Features] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Device Features] appears displaying following items depending on the current system configuration:

  • Maximum Print Speed
  • Total RAM Size
  • Number of Drawers


Checking Network Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Network Settings] from the menu under the [Device].
    If [Network Settings] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Network Settings] appears displaying information about the network interface and any network protocols that are enabled.



Checking Counter Check

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Counter Check] from the menu under the [Device].
    If [Counter Check] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Counter Check] appears displaying the total number of pages that have been output for printing, copying, and received job printing.



Job Management

The Remote UI enables you to manage print jobs. It also enables you to view the sending and receiving results of jobs.


Managing Print Jobs

Viewing the Print Job Log

Viewing the Send and Fax Job Logs


Managing Print Jobs

Return to Overview

You can use the Remote UI to manage print jobs that are being processed by the machine, or are held in the print queue.


Remark
  • If [Permit End-user's Job Operation] is not selected in [Register ID and Password] in [Edit] in [System Settings] under [Add. Func.], you cannot delete any print jobs when the machine is in the End-User Mode. If [Permit End-user's Job Operation] is selected, you can delete print jobs for which you have owner privileges. (See "Customizing System Settings.")
  1. Click [Job Status] → select [Status] menu of the [Print Job] that appears under [Job Status].

A list of print jobs being waiting or processed by the machine appears.

  1. To delete a print job, select the [Select] check box next to the desired job → click [].

  • You cannot recover the job once it is deleted.


Viewing the Print Job Log

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to view the log of print jobs.
The Print Job page displays up to 128 recent print jobs.


Remark
  • If you set <Job Log Display> to <Off> in <System Management Set.>, the log of print jobs does not appear. (See "Checking the Job Log.")
  1. Click [Job Status] → select [Log] menu of the [Print Job] that appears under [Job Status].

The [Print Job Log] appears displaying information about print jobs that have already been processed by the machine.



Viewing the Send and Fax Job Logs

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to view the logs of Send and Fax jobs on the pages below:

Send/Receive Fax Job: displays up to 45 recent fax jobs.
Send/Store/Receive Job: displays up to 128 recent jobs including fax jobs.


Remark
  • If you set <Job Log Display> to <Off> in <System Management Set.>, the [Send/Receive Fax Job] and [Send/Store/Receive Job] menu does not appear. (See "Checking the Job Log.")
  1. Click [Job Status] → select [Log] menu of the [Send/Receive Fax Job] or [Send/Store/Receive Job] that appears under [Job Status].

The [Send/Receive Fax Job] or [Send/Store/Receive Job Log] appears displaying information about jobs that have already been processed by the machine.



Managing the Address Book

The Remote UI enables you to make additions and changes to each item of the Address.


Remark
  • If the password for address book is set, you need to enter password before you access to the address book.

Registering, Editing, Deleting Destinations

Registering, Editing, Deleting One-touch Speed Dial


Registering, Editing, Deleting Destinations

Return to Overview


Remark
  • If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in Address Books.
  1. Click [Address] → select [Address Book] from the menu that appears under [Address].

  • If you set an address book password, the screen for entering the password appears when you click [Address].

To view/edit the registered addresses:

To register a new address:

To delete the registered addresses:

  • To view/edit the registered addresses:
  • 1. Click the number or the name to display the current address information.

  • 2. To edit the information, click [Edit] → make the necessary changes on the Edit Destination screen → click [OK].

  • To register a new address:
  • 1. Click [None] or any number for which [None] is displayed as the name.

  • 2. Specify the type of address from [Type] → enter the necessary information → click [OK].

  • 3. For group dialing, select [Group] from [Type] → enter a group name in [Group Name] → click [Address Book] under [Members List].

  • 4. Select [One-touch Speed Dial] or [Address Book] from the drop-down list → select the check box next to the number to register for the group dialing → click [OK].

  • 5. Make sure that the registered addresses are displayed in [Members List] → click [OK].

  • To delete the registered addresses:
  • 1. Select the check box next to the number to delete → click [].

  • You cannot recover the address once it is deleted.


Registering, Editing, Deleting One-touch Speed Dial

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Address] → select [One-touch Speed Dial] from the menu that appears under [Address].

  • If you set an address book password, the screen for entering the password appears when you click [Address].

To view/edit the registered One-touch Speed Dials:

To register a new One-touch Speed Dials:

To delete the registered addresses:

  • To view/edit the registered One-touch Speed Dials:
  • 1. Click the number or the name to display the current address information.

  • 2. To edit the information, click [Edit] → make the necessary changes on the Edit Destination screen → click [OK].

  • To register a new One-touch Speed Dial:
  • 1. Click [None] or any number for which [None] is displayed as the name.

  • 2. Specify the type of address from [Type] → enter the necessary information → click [OK].

  • 3. For group dialing, select [Group] from [Type] → enter a group name in [Group Name] and a button name in [One-touch Name] → click [Address Book] under [Members List].

  • 4. Select [One-touch Speed Dial] or [Address Book] from the drop-down list → select the check box next to the number to register for the group dialing → click [OK].

  • 5. Make sure that the registered addresses are displayed in [Members List] → click [OK].

  • To delete the registered addresses:
  • 1. Select the check box next to the number to delete → click [].

  • You cannot recover the address once it is deleted.


Customizing System Settings

The Remote UI enables you to specify the machine's system settings.


Remark
  • You can also access the System Settings from the Operation Panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [System Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Edit].

  1. Enter the necessary information → click [OK].


  • To set restrictions for the send function:

  • 1. Click [Restrict the Send Function].


  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].


  • To set the System Manager ID and password:

  • 1. Click [Register ID and Password].


  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Set ID and Password: Sets the System Manager ID and Password to protect the contents of System Settings. Once the System Manager ID and Password is set, they must be entered when you access the System Settings menu from the operation panel, or when you log on to the Remote UI as the System Manager.
System Manager ID: Sets the System Manager ID (seven digits maximum).
Set/ Change Password: Select this check box to set the password for the System manager ID.
System Manager Password: Enter the password (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the password you enter here is different from the one entered for [System Manager Password], an error dialog box appears.
Permit End-user's Job Operation: Select this check box to permit deleting print jobs for which you have owner privileges when the machine is in the End-User Mode from the Remote UI.
  • To set the password for memory lock reception:
  • 1. Click [Memory Lock Settings].

  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].



Editing the LDAP Server Settings

The Remote UI enables you to specify the LDAP server settings.


Remark
  • The following types of LDAP servers can be used with this machine:
  • Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory
  • Windows Server 2003 with Active Directory
  • Windows Server 2008 with Active Directory
  • Lotus Notes R5 to R8
    For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • You can register up to five LDAP servers.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Register LDAP Server] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  • To register a new LDAP server:
  • 1. Click [] (New).

  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Server Name: Enter a server name.
Server Address: Enter the server's address.
  • If <Login Information> is set to [Use (Security Authentication)] for the LDAP server and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, enter a host name instead of an IP address.
Location to Start Search: Enter the location to start searching.
  • Enter the location to start searching according to the type of LDAP server you are using, or as described below. You can leave this field blank.
  • If you are using Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008 with Active Directory:
    Add "DC=" to each dot separated series of characters in the Active Directory domain name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
    Example: If <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp> is the domain name in Active Directory:
    DC=team1, DC=salesdept, DC=canon, DC=co, DC=jp
  • If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
    Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the node on the directory tree, such as "ou=team1",
    "ou=salesdept", "o=canon", or "c=jp".
  • If the server's LDAP version is 3, you do not have to specify [Location to Start Search]. (If the LDAP version is 3, the machine automatically retrieves settings from the server, and sets the location to start searching.) If the server's LDAP version is 2, you have to specify [Location to Start Search].
Port Number: Enter a port number.
Max Number of Addresses to Search: Enter the maximum number of addresses to search.
Search Timeout: Enter the timeout time in seconds.
  • Depending on the conditions such as authentication methods you are using, the timeout time may be shorter than designated.
Login Information: Specify the authentication method used when the machine communicates with the LDAP server.
  • [Use (Security Authentication)] can be selected only if the LDAP server is running on Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008 with Active Directory.
  • If you entered an IP address in <Server Address>, and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, select either [Do not use] or [Use].
  • If <Login Information> is set to [Use (Security Authentication)], and if Date & Time Settings in Timer Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is different from the time settings on the LDAP server, the machine may not be able to connect to the LDAP server.
[Do not use]: Allows anonymous access to the LDAP server.
[Use]: Uses the Simple authentication method for access to the LDAP server. If you select [Use], enter the user name and password in [User Name] and [Password].
  • If you are using Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008 with Active Directory:
    Enter "Windows domain name/Windows user name" in [User Name].
    Example: If <team1> is the Windows domain name, and <user1> is the Windows user name:team1/user1
  • If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
    Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the user, such as "cn=admin",
    "ou=team1", or "ou=salesdept" in [User Name].
[Use (Security Authentication)]: Uses the Kerberos authentication method for access to the LDAP server. If you select [Use (Security Authentication)], enter the user name, password, and domain name in [User Name], [Password], and [Domain Name].
  • Example: Enter 'user1', if the Windows user name is <user1> for the user name.
  • Enter the directory tree name of the Active Directory, such as <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp> for the domain name.
[Display Certification Dialog when Searching]: By selecting this check box, when searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is displayed even if a password is not required.
Server LDAP Version and Character Code: Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's environment.
  • This setting is not available if <Login Information> is set to [Use (Security Authentication)].
  • To edit the LDAP server settings:
  • 1. Click the LDAP server name you want to edit.

  • 2. Make the necessary changes → click [OK].

  • To delete the LDAP server:
  • 1. Select the check box next to the LDAP server to delete → [] (Delete).

  • To register or edit the LDAP search attributes:
  • 1. Click [Register/Edit LDAP Search Attributes].

  • 2. Specify or edit the necessary settings → click [OK].


Display Name: Enter or edit the name to display.
Attribute Name: Enter or edit the attribute name.


Specifying Forwarding Settings

The Remote UI enables you to automatically forward received documents to specified addresses. To use this function, you need to specify the forwarding settings in two ways, and depending on the settings the function will work differently:

  • Forwarding conditions are set: the machine will forward only documents that meet specified conditions.
  • Forwarding conditions are not set: the machine will forward all received documents.

Remark
  • [Forwarding Settings] is displayed only when you are in the System Manager Mode.
  • The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 52 (12 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn): 50 (10 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) with forwarding conditions and 2 without conditions.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].


  • To forward only documents that meet specified forwarding conditions:

  • 1. Click [] (Add New Conditions).


  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Receive Type: Select [Fax] or [I-Fax] for the receiving mode.
Condition Name: Enter a name for the forwarding condition. If you select [Enable This Forwarding Condition], this forwarding condition will be enabled.
Forwarding Conditions: The settings here enable you to specify the forwarding conditions that the received documents must meet in order to be forwarded.
The setting items differ depending on the type of the receiving mode:

Items for Fax:

[disregarded]: Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding condition.
[does not exist]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not exist.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not contain the characters entered.

Items for I-Fax:

[disregarded]: Disregards the Destination, From, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.

Forwarding Destination: Specify an address from the Address Book by clicking [Address Book] → select the desired address from the displayed list → click [OK].
Forwarding Settings: If you are forwarding documents to an E-mail address or a file server, you can set their file format to [TIFF] or [PDF].
If you select [Divide into Pages], you can forward files as divided pages.

Proceed to Next Step


  • To forward all received documents without specific conditions:

  • 1. Click [Forwarding without Conditions].


  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Proceed to Next Step

  1. Select the receiving mode from [Receive Type].

If you select [All], all the forwarding settings stored in the machine are displayed.


  • To view/change the registered forwarding settings:

  • 1. Click the condition name to display the current forwarding setting.


  • 2. To change the setting, make the necessary changes → click [OK].


  • To delete the registered forwarding settings:

  • 1. Select the check box next to the forwarding condition to delete → click [] (Delete the Selected Conditions).

  • You cannot recover the setting once it is deleted.


Managing the Department/User ID from a Computer

By registering a department/user ID and password for each department/user, you can manage the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct department/user ID and password. You can register up to 1000 Department and User IDs for Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn, and 100 Department and User IDs for Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn. You can also set the page limit for each department to copy, print, and scan for sending documents.


Remark
  • You can also access these setting menus from the operation panel of the machine, although registering, editing, and deleting user IDs are available only on the Remote UI. For details, see "Machine Settings."
  • [Department ID/User Management] is displayed only when you are in the System Manager Mode.
  • When you use Department ID Management, and if the System Manager ID and System Password are not set, all uses will be considered as the System Manager, and anyone can access the <System Management Set.> menu from the operation panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction. (See "Specifying the System Manager Settings.")
  • When you use User Management, you need to register at least one user ID with the System Manager privileges. Otherwise, all users will be considered as System Manager, and any one can access the <System Management Set.> menu from the operation panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Department ID/User Management] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Settings].

  1. Click [Department ID Management Settings] or [User Management Settings] to register a new department or user.

  1. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].


Department ID registration screen

Department ID: Enter the Department ID (seven digits maximum).
Set Password: Select this check box to set a password for the Department ID.
Password: Enter the password (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the password you enter here is different from the one entered for [Password], an error dialog box appears.
Page Limits: You can restrict the number of pages by the total of prints, copies, scan and color scan mode, or by limiting each function separately. Select the item, then use the numeric keys to enter the number of pages.


User ID registration screen

User ID: Enter a log-on name (32 characters maximum).
Set Password: Select this check box to set a password for the User ID.
Password: Enter the password (32 characters maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the password you enter here is different from the one entered for [Password], an error dialog box appears.
Department ID: Enter the Department ID the user belongs to (seven digits maximum). If the Department ID Management mode is set, be sure to assign the user to a department. Otherwise, the user cannot log on to the machine or Remote UI.
Set Password: Select this check box to set the password for the Department ID.
Password: Enter the password (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the password you enter here is different from the one entered for [Password], an error dialog box appears.
User Type: Classify the user in two categories [User] (End-User Mode) or [System Manager] (System Manager Mode). Users with the System Manager privileges can access the System Settings without entering the System Manager ID and System Password.
Display Name: Enter the user name.
E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address of the user.
  1. Click [Settings].

  1. Select [Enable Department ID Management] or [Enable User Management] → click [OK] to activate the management mode.

[Enable Department ID Management] When this check box is selected, Department ID Management becomes enabled. When enabled, the user must enter the Department ID and password in order to execute jobs, perform operations on Remote UI, and use functions such as Copy, Fax, and Scan. (This enables you to keep track of the total number of prints by department and set impression limits.)
[Enable User Management] When this check box is selected, User Management becomes enabled. When enabled, the user must enter the User ID and password in order to execute jobs, perform operations on Remote UI, and use functions, such as Copy, Fax, and Scan. When you enable both Department ID Management and User Management, you need to assign a Department ID for each user. A user without a Department ID cannot use the machine.
Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs: Select the check box to permit print jobs with unknown IDs.
Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs: Select the check box to permit scan jobs with unknown IDs.
Allow Black Copy Jobs: Select the check box to permit black copy jobs.
[Add Username to Document Name]: Select the check box to add the User ID to the name of the sent document.
[Clear All Counts]: Click this button to reset the counter to zero for all departments.

  • To view/edit the registered department/user ID:

  • 1. Click [] next to the department ID, or click the user ID to display the current department or user information.

  • You can click [Change List View] to switch the management list between department and user ID.
  • [Change List View] appears when both Department ID Management and User Management are activated.
  • When only the User Management is activated, you can view and edit the user ID. In this case, you can view, edit and delete the user ID even if the department ID management is not activated.

  • 2. To edit the information, make the necessary changes → click [OK].


  • To delete the registered department/user ID:

  • 1. Select the check box next to the department/user ID to delete → click [] (Delete).

  • You can click [Change List View] to switch the management list between department and user ID.
  • [Change List View] appears when both Department ID Management and User Management are activated.
  • When only the User Management is activated, you can view and edit the user ID. In this case, you can view, edit and delete the user ID even if the department ID management is not activated.


Import/Export Function

The Remote UI enables you to save the Address Book and other settings information, such as a file that can be loaded into the machine when needed. This function is useful when you want to use the same settings on another machine, and for backing up. The Import/Export function is intended for data exchange, and is available only through the Remote UI.


Remark
  • The Import/Export operation may take more than a few minutes to complete. Do not turn the machine's main power OFF until the operation is complete. Otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
  • Do not operate the machine while importing or exporting an address book.
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press (Power) on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  • During an Export operation, the screen display does not change until the operation is complete. Do not click [Start Export] while the hourglass or pointer indicates that the operation is still being processed.
  • [Import/Export] is displayed only when you are in the System Manager Mode.
  • Importing/Exporting are performed based on the language displayed on the display of the machine.

Saving the Address Book (Export)

Loading an Address Book (Overwrite/Import)

Saving User Management Data in Files (Export)

Loading User Management Data Files (Overwrite/Import)

Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export)

Loading Additional Functions Settings Files (Overwrite/Import)


Saving the Address Book (Export)

Return to Overview

You can store the Address Book as a file in your computer.


Remark
  • The password registered for the address book is not exported. If the address book is imported, specify the password again.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Address Book].

  1. Click [Start Export].

  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.



Loading an Address Book (Overwrite/Import)

Return to Overview

You can load address books into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press (Power) on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  • When you register the contents of a new file, the currently registered addresses are overwritten by the new address list.
  • You can register up to 300 addresses in the Address Book. Each address is treated as a separate item.
  • You cannot import the group dialing information which contains another group dialing.
  • When Delayed Send is set on the machine, do not import an address book.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Address Book].

  1. Click [Import].

  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [OK].

  • Do not execute any other jobs while importing an address book.


Saving User Management Data in Files (Export)

Return to Overview

You can store User Management Data as a file in your computer.


Remark
  • User type of all exported data is the End-User.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [User Management Data].

  1. Click [Start Export].

  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.



Loading User Management Data Files (Overwrite/Import)

Return to Overview

You can load User Management Data into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press (Power) on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  • Imported user data is registered or overwritten as the End-User.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [User Management Data].

  1. Click [Import].

  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import click [OK].

  • Do not import any files while the machine is executing other jobs.
  • If overlapped User IDs are registered in imported data, those IDs will be registered in the machine as being overlapped. Among those overlapped data, the last registered one is available.


Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export)

Return to Overview

You can store Additional Functions settings as a file in your computer.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Additional Functions].

  1. Click [Start Export].

  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.



Loading Additional Functions Settings Files (Overwrite/Import)

Return to Overview

You can load Additional Functions settings into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press (Power) on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Additional Functions].

  1. Click [Import].

  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [OK].

  • When Additional Functions settings are imported, Network Settings are automatically overwritten.
  • The machine must be restarted to enable the imported Additional Functions settings. After importing, turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
  • After importing Additional Functions settings, the Remote UI cannot be used to perform other operations until the machine is restarted.
  • Do not import any files while the machine is executing other jobs.


Managing Key Pairs and Digital Certificates

Key pairs and digital certificates can be used for security purposes, such as IEEE802.1X port-based authentication.

You can manage key pairs and digital certificates from the Remote UI by dividing them into the following types:

  • Key and Certificate

In IEEE802.1X port-based authentication, a key pair (or a private key and certificate) in PKCS#12 format is required for enabling the EAP-TLS method on the client device. Up to three key pairs can be registered.

  • CA Certificate

CA certificates are used for verifying the digital certificates sent from other devices, such as servers, client computers, etc. Up to 10 CA certificates (including the pre-installed CA certificate) can be registered.


Remark
  • Certificates must meet the following requirements:
  • Format: X.509 version 1 or version 3 (DER encoded binary)
  • Signature algorithm: SHA1-RSA, MD5-RSA, or MD2-RSA (For CA certificates, SHA1-DSA is also allowed.)
  • Key length: 512 bits or 1024 bits (RSA)/2048 bits (DSA)
  • File extension: ‘.p12’ (for key pair files)/‘.cer’ (for CA certificate files)
  • The machine does not use certificate revocation list (CRL) for verifying digital certificates.
  • Self-signed certificates are not supported.
  • [Certificate Settings] is displayed only when you are in the System Manager Mode.

Installing and Registering a Key and Certificate

Checking and Deleting a Key and Certificate

Installing and Registering a CA Certificate

Checking and Deleting a CA Certificate


Installing and Registering a Key and Certificate

Return to Overview

Install a key and certificate in the machine as described below. You can also register the key and certificate or delete unnecessary key pair files.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [TCP/IP Settings].

  1. Scroll the page until [Certificate Settings] appears → click [Key and Certificate Settings].

  1. Click [Register Key and Certificate].

  1. Select the function.
  • To install a new key and certificate:
  • 1. Click [Install].

  • 2. Click [Browse] → select the file to install → click [Start Installation].

  • You can enter up to 24 characters for the file name (including the file extension ‘.p12').
  • To register the key and certificate:
  • 1. Select the [Select] check box next to the desired file → click [Register].

  • 2. Enter the key name and password → click [OK].

  • You can enter up to 24 characters for the key name and password respectively.
  • Up to three key pairs can be registered.
  • To delete the installed (but not registered) key and certificate:
  • Select the [Select] check box next to the desired file → click [Delete].

  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Checking and Deleting a Key and Certificate

Return to Overview

Keys and certificates become invalid when the certificate expires or when the file becomes corrupted. If this happens, delete unnecessary key pair files as described below.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [TCP/IP Settings].

  1. Scroll the page until [Certificate Settings] appears → click [Key and Certificate Settings].

  1. Select the function.
  • To check the details of a certificate:
  • Click [] (Certificate).

  • If [Certificate Verification] is clicked, the machine checks for errors in the certificate.

  • To delete a key and certificate:
  • 1. Select the [Select] check box next to the desired file → click [Delete].

  • A key pair file cannot be deleted if it is currently being used (indicated under [Key Usage]).
  • 2. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Installing and Registering a CA Certificate

Return to Overview

Install a CA certificate in the machine as described below. You can also register the CA certificate or delete unnecessary certificate files.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [TCP/IP Settings].

  1. Scroll the page until [Certificate Settings] appears → click [CA Certificate Settings].

  1. Click [Register CA Certificate].

  1. Select the function.
  • To install a new CA certificate:
  • 1. Click [Install].

  • 2. Click [Browse] → select the file to install → click [Start Installation].

  • You can enter up to 24 characters for the file name (including the file extension ‘.cer').
  • To register the CA certificate:
  • Select the [Select] check box next to the desired file → click [Register].

  • Up to 10 CA certificates (including the pre-installed CA certificate) can be registered.
  • To delete the installed (but not registered) CA certificate:
  • Select the [Select] check box next to the desired file → click [Delete].

  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Checking and Deleting a CA Certificate

Return to Overview

CA certificates become invalid when the certificate expires or when the file becomes corrupted. If this happens, delete unnecessary files as described below.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [TCP/IP Settings].

  1. Scroll the page until [Certificate Settings] appears → click [CA Certificate Settings].

  1. Select the function.
  • To check the details of a certificate:
  • Click [] (Certificate).

  • If [Certificate Verification] is clicked, the machine checks for errors in the certificate.

  • To delete a CA certificate:
  • 1. Select the [Select] check box next to the desired file → click [Delete].

  • 2. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Device Custom Settings

The machine's custom settings can be edited with the Remote UI.
The following procedure shows how to customize the machine's settings from the Remote UI.


Remark
  • You can also access these setting menus from the Operation Panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."

Paper Settings

Volume Control

Common Settings

Timer Settings

TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings)

RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings)

User Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

Report Settings

Printer Settings

PCL Settings

PS Settings

Startup Time Settings (Network Settings)

TCP/IP Settings (Network Settings)

SMB Settings (Network Settings)

SNMP Settings (Network Settings)

Enable Dedicated Port (Network Settings)

Ethernet Driver Settings (Network Settings)

IEEE802.1X Settings (Network Settings)

E-mail/I-Fax (Network Settings)


Paper Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Paper Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Stack Bypass: Sets the paper size and type on the stack bypass.

Drawer 1: Sets the paper size and type on the Drawer 1.

Drawer 2*: Sets the paper size and type on the Drawer 2.
* Displayed only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached.



Volume Control

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Volume Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Monitor Volume Settings: Sets the priority for volume settings.
Fax Volume: Sets the volume for monitor tone during the fax transmission.
Incoming Ring Volume: Sets the volume of the ring produced when the machine detects a call.
Entry Tone: Beeps when pressing the keys on the operation panel.
Error Tone: Beeps when an error (e.g., TX error) occurs.
Send Job Done Tone: Beeps when a document is sent.
Receive Job Done Tone: Beeps when a document is received.
Print Done Tone: Beeps when printing is completed.
Scan Done Tone: Beeps when scanning is completed.


Common Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Common Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Initial Function: Set the default function for the machine to start up in.
Auto Clear Settings: Sets the machine function when the machine returns to standard mode after the auto clear.
Auto Drawer Select: Sets whether to change to another paper source of the same size if the current paper source runs out while processing a job.
Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode: Selects power consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode between two levels.
Paper Feed Switch: Sets the paper feed method for each feeder.
ADF Dirty Message: Sets whether the error message will appear when the ADF is dirty.


Timer Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Timer Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Time Zone: Sets the Time Zone the machine is located in.
Use Auto Sleep: Sets auto sleep mode when the machine remains idle for a certain period of time.
Use Auto Clear: Set auto clear mode for when the machine has no operation for a set period of time. The machine will return to standby mode.
Use Daylight Saving Time Settings: Sets daylight saving time mode.


TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [TX Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Unit Name: Registers your name/company name.
Data Compression Ratio: Sets the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.
Retry Times: Sets the number of retry attempts for sending jobs to an e-mail or file server address.
Add TX Terminal ID: Sets the options for sender information.
Gamma Value For Color Send Jobs: Sets the gamma value for color scanned data. If the set value corresponds to the gamma value at the recipient's machine, the scan exposure of the output data at the recipient's machine is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original.
Sharpness: Sets the sharpness for the document.
PDF (Compact) Image Level: Sets the Text/Photo Mode, Photo Mode, or Text Mode Image Level.


RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [RX Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Enable 2-Sided Print: Sets whether the machine prints received documents on both sides of the paper.
RX Reduction: Sets whether the received images print out at a reduced size.
Enable RX Page Footer: Sets whether to insert the date, day, and time received, transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.
Continue Printing When Toner is Out: Sets whether to continue printing your current jobs when the toner is low.
Gamma Value for YCbCr Received Jobs: Sets the gamma value for YCbCr received jobs.


User Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [User Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

User Tel. Number: Registers your fax number.
TEL. Line Type: Selects the telephone line type.
  • [Offhook Alarm] is not functional for this machine.


TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [TX Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

ECM TX: Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) transmission is activated.
Pause Time: Sets the pause time when you insert pause into the dialing sequence.
Enable Auto Redial: Sets whether to redial automatically when the other line is busy or a transmission error occurs.
Check Dialtone Before Sending: Sets whether to check the telephone line condition.


RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [RX Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Enable ECM RX: Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) reception is activated.
Receive Mode: Sets the receive mode.
FAX/TEL. Option Settings: Sets the optional items in <FaxTel> mode.
DRPD: Sets the ring pattern when <Receive Mode> is set to <DRPD>.
Use Incoming Ring: Sets whether the external telephone rings when the machine receives a fax. This function is only available when <Receive Mode> is set to <FaxOnly> or <FaxTel>.
Remote RX: Sets whether to use remote receiving. This function is not available when <Energy In Sleep> in <Common Settings> is set to <Low>.
Manual/Auto Switch: Sets whether the machine switches to the document receive mode after the external telephone rings for a specified length of time in the manual receive mode.
RX Restriction: You can reject faxes from senders with no fax/telephone number in their sender information.


Report Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Report Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

TX Report: Sets whether the transmission report prints out.
Activity Report: Sets whether to automatically print the report, listing all sending and receiving transactions.
RX Report: Sets whether the reception report prints out.
Fax Auto Transmission Management Report Sets whether to automatically print the report, listing all fax sending and receiving transactions.


Printer Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Settings] under the Printer Settings menu.

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Copies: Sets the number of documents printed.
2-Sided Printing: Sets whether to activate two-sided printing.
Paper Feed: Sets default paper size and default paper type.
Print Quality: Sets the print quality settings.
Layout: Sets the printing layout.
Personality: Specify the data format in which the machine processes data received from the host computer.
Mode Priority: Specify which personality should be used if a job is received without a specified command language or Direct Print data.
Auto Select: Enable or disable the desired personality options applied when the Personality setting is set to [Auto].
Auto Continue: Sets whether to skip errors and automatically continue printing.
Collate: Specify whether or not to sort copies into sets arranged in page order.
Timeout: Sets the length of time before the machine returns an error when no data is received from the computer.
Color Mode: Sets the color mode.
Gradation Settings: Sets the gradation settings.
Compressed Image Output: Sets whether to compress the large data and print.
Paper Size Override: Enable the machine to automatically feed paper of an available size when paper of the specified size is not loaded in the machine.


PCL Settings

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The PCL Settings are available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [PCL Settings] under the Printer Settings menu.

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Paper Save: Sets whether to save blank pages.
Orientation: Sets the page direction.
Font Number: Sets the default font typeface for the printer function using the corresponding font numbers.
Point Size: Specifies a point size for the default font. This item appears when the number in <Font Number> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font.
Pitch: Sets the number of characters at cpi.
Form Lines: Sets the number of lines.
Symbol Set: Sets the symbol set.
Custom Paper: Sets whether to use irregular sized paper.
Unit: Sets the unit of the user specified paper size.
X dimension: Sets the width of the user specified paper.
Y dimension: Sets the height of the user specified paper.
Append CR to LF: Sets a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received.
Enlarge A4 Print Width: Sets whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter size in width.
Halftones: Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium gradation) for black-and-white data for each text part, graphics part and image part.
RGB Source Profile: Sets the RGB source profile.
Output Profile: Sets the output profile.
Matching Method: Sets the matching method.
Gray Compensation: Sets the gray compensation.
CMS (Matching) Selection: Sets CMS processing side (printer side or printer driver side).
CMS (Matching)/Gamma: Sets color correct method.
Gamma: Sets gamma correction value.
Advanced Smoothing: Sets the advanced smoothing settings.


PS Settings

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The PS Settings are available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [PS Settings] under the Printer Settings menu.

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Job Timeout: Specify the amount of time before a job times out.
Wait Timeout: Specify the amount of time the machine will wait for data sent from the host computer before it times out.
Print PS Errors: Specify whether an error page is printed when an error occurs.
RGB Source Profile: Sets the RGB source profile.
CMYK Simulation Profile: Specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data.
Use Grayscale Profile: Define how device dependent gray data is processed.
Output Profile: Sets the output profile.
Matching Method: Sets the matching method.
Perform RGB Pure Black Processing: Specify how black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B should be processed.
Perform CMYK Pure Black Processing: Specify how monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) should be printed when the device dependent CMYK data is processed.
Pure Black Text: Specify the effects on black text on a printed page.
Halftones: Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium gradation) for black-and-white data for each text part, graphics part and image part.
Advanced Smoothing: Sets the advanced smoothing settings.
Toner Volume Adjustment: Select the appropriate mode to save toner.


Startup Time Settings (Network Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Startup Time Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Startup Time: Sets the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine.
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.


TCP/IP Settings (Network Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [TCP/IP Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

IPv4 Settings: IPv4 Address and DNS Server settings.
IPv6 Settings: IPv6 Address and DNS Server settings.
WINS Configuration: Sets the WINS settings to resolve a name with WINS.
LPD Print Settings: Sets whether to use LPD as the print application.
RAW Print Settings: Sets whether to use RAW as the print application.
WSD Print Settings: Sets whether to use WSD as the print application.
SNTP Settings: Specify the NTP server for time synchronization.
FTP Settings: Sets the FTP PASV mode and FTP Extension settings.
HTTP Settings: Sets whether to activate HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) for the Remote UI.
PORT Number Settings: Sets the port number settings.
IP Address Range Settings: Sets whether to restrict the range of IP addresses.
Allowed Receiving MAC Address Settings: Sets whether to activate a MAC address filter.
Department ID Management Password Confirmation Settings: Select the check box to enable Department ID and password confirmation when printing using a driver that supports Windows Vista.
Certificate Settings: Install, register, or delete key pairs and digital certificates.
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.


SMB Settings (Network Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [SMB Server Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Use SMB Client: Sets the SMB settings to use the machine on a NetBIOS network.
Use LM Announce: Sets if the machine notifies the LAN Manager of its existence.
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.


SNMP Settings (Network Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [SNMP Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Use SNMP: Sets detailed information about SNMP.
Community Name1: Sets SNMP community name 1 (default: public).
Community Name2: Sets SNMP community name 2.
SNMP Writable1: Enables computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
SNMP Writable2: Enables computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
Obtain Printer Management Information from Host: Sets whether to automatically enable the SNMP port monitoring function, when a port is set to [Standard TCP/IP Port] in Windows Vista. The SNMP port monitoring function can obtain print management information such as printer applications and printer ports.
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.


Enable Dedicated Port (Network Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Dedicated Port].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Enable Dedicated Port: Sets or browses detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility.
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.


Ethernet Driver Settings (Network Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Ethernet Driver Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Ethernet Driver: Specifies the type of network connection.
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.


IEEE802.1X Settings (Network Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [IEEE802.1X Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Use IEEE802.1X: Select whether to enable or disable the IEEE802.1X Settings.
Login Name: Enter the login name as required.
Use TLS: Select whether to use TLS as the EAP method.
Key Name: Displays the key name specified in [Key and Certificate].
Key and Certificate: Specify the key and certificate when [Use TLS] is selected.
Use TTLS: Select whether to use TTLS as the EAP method.
TTLS Settings (TTLS Protocol): Select the desired TTLS internal protocol.
Use PEAP: Select whether to use PEAP as the EAP method.
User Name/Password Settings: Specify the user name and password when [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] is selected.
Same User Name as Login Name: Select whether to use the login name as the user name.
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.


E-mail/I-Fax (Network Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [E-mail/I-Fax Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

SMTP Server: Registers the host name of the machine with the DNS server.
E-mail Address: Enters the e-mail address your machine will use.
POP Server: Enters the POP server IP address or name.
POP Address: Enters the login name for access to the POP server.
POP Password: Enters the password for access to the POP server.
POP Interval: Sets the interval you want the POP server to check for incoming e-mail. If the interval is set to 0, the POP server is not checked automatically.
SMTP Receive: Sets whether to receive e-mail using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
POP Receive: Sets whether to receive e-mail using a POP server.
Authentication/Encryption Settings: Specifies authenticating method before sending e-mail.
POP Authentication Before Send: Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).
SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH): Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending e-mail).
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.


Network Settings

Network Settings Instructions



Basic Network Settings

The basic network settings are required in order to use the machine functions described below.

  • Using E-mail and I-fax


  • Sending data to a file server


  • Printing or sending a fax from a computer


  • Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer


To perform the basic network settings, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  1. Checking the Network Environment

The network environment for this machine is based on the assumption that:

  • Computers are connected to the intranet or network.
  • This machine is connected to a router or hub. Below is a sample network configuration for this machine.

  1. Connect the LAN Cable
  • 1. Connect a Category 5 or greater twisted pair LAN cable to the 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX port on the back of the machine. Connect the other end of the cable to a network router or a hub.

  • 2. Press the [I] side of the main power switch to turn it ON.
  1. Setting and Checking the IP Address

Set the machine's IP address so that it can communicate with computers on the network.



Setting and Checking the IP Address

Setting the IP address to the machine allows it to communicate with computers on the network.


Remark

Setting IPv4 Address

If you assign static IP addresses to the network devices, manually assign a static address to the machine. If you use a router (a DHCP server) to assign IP addresses, you can set the machine to obtain an IP address automatically. After setting the machine to automatically obtain an IP address, check that the machine has successfully obtained an IP address and has been connected to the network.

The <Obtain Automatically> of <IP Address Settings> is set to <On> in the factory default. Therefore, the machine will automatically obtain an IP address after being connected to the network for a few moments. Even when assigning IPv6 addresses to the machine, you must obtain an IPv4 address beforehand.


Remark
  • The machine can be assigned an IPv4 address and IPv6 addresses at the same time.
  • The following functions are not supported in IPv6.
  • the Scan to File Server (File Sharing) function
  • the Remote Scan function

Setting IPv4 Address Manually


Setting IPv4 Address Automatically


Confirming IPv4 Address Settings


Checking Network Connection (IPv4)


Setting IPv6 Address

The following explains the procedure for specifying IPv6 address settings. After specifying the IPv6 address settings, perform the procedure in "Checking Network Connection (IPv6)," check that the network settings are correct.
The machine can be assigned up to nine IPv6 addresses. With IPv6 communication, multiple IPv6 addresses can be assigned at the same time. If you manually assign a fixed address, the machine will be able to communicate even if stateless addresses or a stateful address cannot be obtained.

  • Link local address (1)

An address that is only valid within the same link. A link local address is automatically set using a specific prefix (fe80::) and an interface identifier generated from the MAC address of the machine. When the machine is using the functions of IPv6, one link local address is always registered.

  • Manual address (0 or 1)

A fixed address.

  • Stateless address (0 to 6)

A stateless address is automatically set using the machine's MAC address and the prefix (information indicating the network it belongs to) included in the RA (Router Advertisement) notified by the router when the machine is started. The machine can automatically obtain stateless addresses and access the network without a DHCP server.

  • Stateful address (0 or 1)

A stateful address can be obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6. Without a DHCP server, the machine cannot obtain a stateful address.


Remark
  • You cannot use the functions of IPv6 without using the functions of IPv4.

Setting the Use of IPv6


Confirming Link Local Address


Setting the Use of Stateless Address


Confirming Stateless Address


Setting IPv6 Address Manually


Setting the Use of DHCPv6


Confirming Stateful Address


Checking Network Connection (IPv6)


Checking Network Connection Using IPv6 Address


Checking Network Connection Using IPv6 Hostname



Setting IPv4 Address Manually

Return to Overview

If you assign fixed IP addresses to the devices on the network, manually assign an IP address (IPv4) to the machine.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Manual Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the IP address, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the subnet mask address, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the gateway address, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Proceed to "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings."



Setting IPv4 Address Automatically

Return to Overview

If you use a network environment which can automatically assign IP addresses, such as a network with a router (a DHCP server), you can set the machine to automatically obtain an IPv4 address. In this setting, the machine will automatically obtain an IP address after being connected to the network for a few moments.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • The IP address currently assigned to the machine may be changed when the server or machine is restarted. In these cases, check the IP address and make the necessary settings. Additionally, most routers have functions that can assign specific IP addresses even under a DHCP environment. Use of these functions are recommended.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Obtain Automatically>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired protocol, then press [OK].
  • <DHCP>: The machine obtains the necessary information for communication via DHCP.
  • <BOOTP>: The machine obtains the necessary information for communication via BOOTP.
  • <RARP>: The machine obtains the necessary information for communication via RARP.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the IP address, then press [OK].

The settings entered in this step are used when the machine cannot obtain the necessary information for communication via DHCP, BOOTP or RARP.

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the subnet mask address, then press [OK].

The settings entered in this step are used when the machine cannot obtain the necessary information for communication via DHCP, BOOTP or RARP.

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the gateway address, then press [OK].

The settings entered in this step are used when the machine cannot obtain the necessary information for communication via DHCP, BOOTP or RARP.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Proceed to "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings."



Confirming IPv4 Address Settings

Return to Overview

To confirm IPv4 address settings, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Confirm Set.>.

The current IPv4 address settings are displayed.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Proceed to "Checking Network Connection (IPv4)."



Checking Network Connection (IPv4)

Return to Overview

To check that the IPv4 network connections are properly set, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <PING Command>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the desired IPv4 address existing on the network, then press [OK].

When the connection is established, <Received response from the host.> is displayed.
If the connection is not established, <No response from the host.> is displayed. Make sure that the network settings are properly set.

  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in "Setting Startup Time," execute the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Setting Startup Time," for information on how to set up the startup time.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  • To use the Print, PC fax, or Remote Scan function, it is necessary to install the drivers. Proceed to "Set Up Computers and Software" to see the installing procedure.


Setting the Use of IPv6

Return to Overview

To set the use of IPv6, follow the procedure below.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use IPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use an IPv6 network.
  • <On>: Uses an IPv6 network.
  • If you select <On>, a link local address is automatically set.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Proceed to "Confirming Link Local Address."



Confirming Link Local Address

Return to Overview

To confirm the link local address settings, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The link local address is automatically set when <Use IPv6> is set to <On>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use IPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Conf. Address>.
  • When the link local address is displayed, proceed to step 10.
  • If <Conf. Address> is inactive and the message <Could not obtain.> is displayed, confirm that <Use IPv6> is set to <On> and restart the machine.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Use of Stateless Address

Return to Overview

To set the use of stateless address, follow the procedure below.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • <Stateless Address Settings> can be selected when <Use IPv6> is set to <On>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Stateless Address Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use the stateless address.
  • <On>: Uses the stateless address.
  • The stateless address is automatically set when the machine is started.
  • The stateless address is discarded when the machine is restarted (with the main power switch ON).
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Proceed to "Confirming Stateless Address."



Confirming Stateless Address

Return to Overview

To confirm the stateless address settings, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The Stateless Address is automatically set when <Stateless Address Settings> is set to <On>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Stateless Address Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Conf. Address>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the Address you want to confirm, then press [OK].

The current stateless address settings are displayed.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Proceed to "Checking Network Connection (IPv6)."



Setting IPv6 Address Manually

Return to Overview

To specify the IPv6 address manually, follow the procedure below.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Manual Address Settings>: <Off>
  • <Prefix Length>: <64>

Remark
  • <Manual Address Settings> can be selected when <Use IPv6> is set to <On>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Manual Address Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Sets the IPv6 address manually.
  • <On>: Does not set the IPv6 address manually.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Manual Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the IPv6 address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Prefix Length>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the prefix length, then press [OK].

You can also use the numeric keys to enter the prefix length.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Default Router Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the default router address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Proceed to "Checking Network Connection (IPv6)."



Setting the Use of DHCPv6

Return to Overview

To set the use of DHCPv6, follow the procedure below.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • <Use DHCPv6> can be selected when <Use IPv6> is set to <On>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use DHCPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use DHCPv6 to obtain a stateful address from a DHCP server.
  • <On>: Uses DHCPv6 to obtain a stateful address from a DHCP server.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Proceed to "Confirming Stateful Address."



Confirming Stateful Address

Return to Overview

To confirm the stateful address settings, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The Stateful Address is set when <Use DHCPv6> is set to <On>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use DHCPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Conf. Address>.

The current stateful address settings are displayed.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Proceed to "Checking Network Connection (IPv6)."



Checking Network Connection (IPv6)

Return to Overview

There are two ways to check the IPv6 network connections.


Checking Network Connection Using IPv6 Address

Checking Network Connection Using IPv6 Hostname


Checking Network Connection Using IPv6 Address

Return to Overview

To check that the IPv6 network connections are properly set using the IPv6 address, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Ping Command>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter an IPv6 address existing on the network, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

When the connection is established, <Received response from the host.> is displayed. If the connection is not established, <No response from the host.> is displayed. Make sure that the network settings are properly set.
If you enter an incorrect IP address, <The entered IP address is incorrect> is displayed. Check and make sure that you have entered the correct IP address.

  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in "Setting Startup Time," execute the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Setting Startup Time," for information on how to set up the startup time.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

The machine is successfully connected to the Internet using IPv6.



Checking Network Connection Using IPv6 Hostname

Return to Overview

To check that the IPv6 network connections are properly set using IPv6 hostname, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Ping Command>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Host Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a IPv6 host name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

When the connection is established, <Received response from the host.> is displayed. If the connection is not established, <No response from the host.> is displayed. Make sure that the network settings are properly set.

  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in "Setting Startup Time," execute the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Setting Startup Time," for information on how to set up the startup time.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

The machine is successfully connected to the Internet using IPv6.



Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-fax

This section describes the procedures for setting scan to E-mail and I-fax.


Scan to E-mail and I-fax

Using this feature, you can scan a document and send it as an attached file from this machine without using your computer. This feature is very easy to use if a recipient's address is registered in advance, and it is useful when you want to send paper copies of documents to your customers or peers quickly.



System Requirements

The following system environments are compatible when using the Scan to E-mail and I-fax features in this machine:

  • Mail forwarding server software
  • Sendmail 8.93 or later (UNIX)
  • Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
    The following versions are supported:
    - Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later
    - Microsoft Exchange Server 2000
    - Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
    * Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is not supported.
  • Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
  • Mail receiving server software
  • Qpopper 2.53 or later (UNIX)
  • Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
    The following versions are supported:
    - Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later
    - Microsoft Exchange Server 2000
    - Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
    * Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is not supported.
  • Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)

Remark
  • The machine sends E-mails and I-faxes to mail servers using SMTP.
  • The machine can receive incoming messages from a mail server using the POP3 protocol or directly using the machine's own SMTP receiving function. If the latter method is used, it is not necessary for the mail server to support the POP3 protocol.
  • The accepted message format and file types are as follows:
  • Message format: Plain text
  • File types: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR compression), JPEG, Exif JPEG (Exif 2.2)

Setup Procedures for Scan to E-Mail and I-fax

To set up the Scan to E-Mail and I-fax functions, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  1. Connect the LAN cable, and set the IP address.

For details, see "Basic Network Settings."

  1. Check the information required for setting up the machine.

For details, see "Confirming Necessary Information for Scan to E-Mail and I-fax."

  1. Set up the machine for using the Scan to E-Mail and I-fax functions.

For details, see "Settings from the Machine (E-Mail/I-fax)."



Confirming Necessary Information for Scan to E-Mail and I-fax

Return to Overview

The following information is necessary to use the Scan to E-mail and I-fax functions.


Preparing to Send E-Mails and I-faxes

Before setting up the machine to use the Scan to E-mail and I-fax function, it is necessary to check the information of the E-mail account. Writing down checked information is recommended.
The following information is required:


  • SMTP server address:

This is the server address to which E-mails and I-faxes are sent.

  • Authentication method:

The two authentication methods described below are supported.
(Authentication may not be required for some internet providers.)

SMTP authentication

In the authentication method, the SMTP server checks the user name and password before sending E-mails and I-faxes.

POP before SMTP

In this authentication method, the POP server checks the POP address and POP password before sending E-mails. If your provider uses this method, you need to make settings both to receive and send E-mails and I-faxes on this machine. For details about the settings to receive E-mails and I-faxes, see " Preparing to Receive E-Mails and I-faxes."
For information concerning the authentication method, check the information you received from your provider.


Remark
  • If the E-mail account you are currently using is set to this machine, this machine will receive the E-mails instead of the E-mail software on your computer. Therefore, if you want this machine to receive E-mails, you need to provide the machine a separate E-mail account that is different from that for your E-mail software. For details about the settings for receiving E-mails, see "Preparing to Receive E-mails and I-faxes."

Viewing E-Mail Address

  • If you set an individual account for the machine
  • If you set an individual account for the machine, refer to a notification form delivered from your provider for information on SMTP server address (outgoing mail) or POP server address (incoming mail). For more information, contact your provider.
  • If you assign an IP address among a number of IP addresses that your office possesses, contact your network administrator.

After checking the information, proceed to "Settings from the Machine (E-Mail/I-fax)."

  • If you set your E-mail account to the machine

You may set the E-mail account you are currently using to the machine if you intend to use this machine only for sending a scanned document using the Scan to E-mail and I-fax functions.
In such a case, the necessary information can be checked from your E-mail software. For details on how to view the information, see "Checking Your E-Mail Account."


Preparing to Receive E-Mails and I-faxes

If the provider uses POP before SMTP as the authentication method to send E-mails and I-faxes, or if you want this machine to receive E-mails and I-faxes, you need another POP3 E-mail account for this machine in addition to your current E-mail account. For details on how to obtain another E-mail account, consult with your internet provider or network administrator. To make settings, the information outlined below is required.


Remark
  • The accepted message format and file types are as follows:
  • Message format: Plain text
  • File types: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR compression), JPEG, Exif JPEG (Exif 2.2)

  • POP server:

The server address that is used when receiving E-mails and I-faxes In some cases, the address is same as the SMTP server address.

  • POP address:

This is sometimes referred to as a mail account or mail ID.

  • POP password:

The password required in order to receive E-mails and I-faxes.


To check the information required for your E-mail software settings, see "Checking Your E-Mail Account."



Checking Your E-Mail Account

Return to Overview

If you want to set your current E-mail account to this machine, you can view what information is required for your E-mail software. This section describes the procedures for checking your E-mail account, using Outlook Express 6.x (the E-mail software included with Windows XP) as an example.


Remark
  • For Windows Mail (the E-mail software included with Windows Vista), you can check your E-mail account in the same way as for Outlook Express 6.x.
  • For Windows 7 or Server 2008 R2 users, it is necessary to install an e-mail software.

For Outlook Express 6.x:
  1. Start Outlook Express 6.x.
  1. On the [Tools] menu, select [Account] to open the [Internet Account] dialog box.
  1. Click the [Mail] tab.

  1. Select the account in use. Click the [Properties] button to open the [<Account name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Click the [Servers] tab.
  • To confirm the necessary information for sending E-mails and I-faxes
  • 1. Confirm the SMTP server address in the [Outgoing mail (SMTP)] box.

If there is no need for authentication, proceed to Step 9.

If SMTP authentication is used, proceed to Step 6.

  • To confirm the necessary information for receiving E-mails and I-faxes
  • 1. Confirm the POP server address in the [Incoming mail (POP3)] box, the POP address in the [Account name] box, and the POP password in the [Password] box. Proceed to Step 9.

  • The typed password is hidden with bullets. To check the password, use a notification form delivered from your provider.
  1. Under [Outgoing Mail Server], click [Settings] to open the [Outgoing Mail Server] dialog box.
  1. Confirm [Account name] (user name authorized by SMTP server).

  • The typed password is hidden with bullets. To check the password, use a notification form delivered from your provider.
  1. Once you confirm all the information, click [Cancel] to close the [Outgoing Mail Server] dialog box.
  1. Click [Cancel] to close the [<Account name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Click [Close] to close the [Internet Account] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (E-Mail/I-fax)."



Settings from the Machine (E-Mail/I-fax)

Return to Overview

To set up the Scan to E-mail and I-fax function, follow the procedure below.
Before making the machine settings, the procedures in "Basic Network Settings" and "Confirming Necessary Information for Scan to E-Mail and I-fax" are required. This section describes how to set the machine according to the information checked in "Confirming Necessary Information for Scan to E-Mail and I-fax."

The default settings are as follows:

  • <SMTP Receive>: <Off>.
  • <POP>: <On>
  • <POP Interval>: <0>
  • <POP Auth. Before Send>: <Off>
  • <SMTP Authentication>: <Off>

Setting up the E-Mail and I-fax Send Functions

Make the required settings to the machine, Select one of the following procedures according to the authentication used by your provider.


When No Authentication is Required


When SMTP Authentication is Used


When POP before SMTP Authentication is Used


Setting up the E-Mail and I-fax Reception Functions

If you use the E-mail and I-fax reception function, proceed to one of the following procedures according to the authentication used by your provider.


When a POP Server is Used


When the Machine's Own SMTP Receiving Function is Used



When No Authentication is Required

Return to Overview

When no authentication is required, follow the procedure below to set up the E-mail and I-fax send functions.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SMTP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the SMTP server address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

Enter the SMTP server address if the SMTP server address is already registered in the DNS server.

Enter the IP address of the SMTP server if the SMTP server address is not registered in the DNS server.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the E-mail address for this machine is set, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Authentication/Encryption>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <POP Auth. Before Send>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP.
  • <On>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending E-mails and I-faxes).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SMTP Authentication>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication.
  • <On>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in to the SMTP server before sending E-mails and I-faxes).
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Setting up the E-mail and I-fax send functions is completed.



When SMTP Authentication is Used

Return to Overview


Remark
  • SMTP authentication is a method in which the SMTP server checks the user name and password before sending e-mails.

When SMTP authentication is used, follow the procedure below to set up the E-mail and I-fax send functions.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SMTP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the SMTP server address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

Enter the SMTP server address if the SMTP server address is already registered in the DNS server.

Enter the IP address of the SMTP server if the SMTP server address is not registered in the DNS server.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the E-mail address for this machine, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Authentication/Encryption>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <POP Auth. Before Send>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP.
  • <On>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending E-mails and I-faxes).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SMTP Authentication>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication.
  • <On>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending E-mails and I-faxes).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the SMTP user name for the authentication method, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the SMTP password for the authentication method, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Setting up the E-mail and I-fax send functions is completed.



When POP before SMTP Authentication is Used

Return to Overview

When POP before SMTP authentication is used, follow the procedure below to set up the E-mail and I-fax send functions.


Remark
  • If your provider uses this method, you need to make settings both to receive and send E-mails and I-faxes on this machine.
  • To use this authentication method, you need to set up the machine to receive E-mails and I-fax using a POP server. For details, see "When a POP Server is Used."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SMTP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the SMTP server address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

Enter the SMTP server address if the SMTP server address is already registered in the DNS server.

Enter the IP address of the SMTP server if the SMTP server address is not registered in the DNS server.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the E-mail address for this machine, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Authentication/Encryption>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <POP Auth. Before Send>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP.
  • <On>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending E-mails and I-faxes).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SMTP Authentication>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication.
  • <On>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending E-mails and I-faxes).
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Setting up the E-mail and I-fax send functions is completed.



When a POP Server is Used

Return to Overview

When a POP server is used, follow the procedure below to set up the E-mail and I-fax reception functions.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SMTP Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not receive E-mails and I-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function. If you want to receive E-mails and I-faxes using a POP server, select <Off>.
  • <On>: Receives E-mails and I-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
  • The accepted message format and file types are as follows:
  • Message format: Plain text
  • File types: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR compression), JPEG, Exif JPEG (Exif 2.2)
  • You must register the host name of the machine with the DNS server if you want to receive E-mails and I-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <POP>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not receive E-mails and I-faxes using a POP server. If you want to receive E-mails and I-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function, select <Off>.
  • <On>: Receives E-mails and I-faxes using a POP server.
  • The accepted message format and file types are as follows:
  • Message format: Plain text
  • File types: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR compression), JPEG, Exif JPEG (Exif 2.2)
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <POP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the POP server address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

Enter the POP server address if the POP server address is already registered in the DNS server.

Enter the IP address of the POP server if the POP server address is not registered in the DNS server.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <POP address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the POP address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <POP password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the POP password, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <POP Interval>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the interval at which you want to check the POP server for incoming E-mail, then press [OK].

You can also use the numeric keys to enter the interval.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Setting up the E-mail and I-fax reception functions is completed.



When the Machine's Own SMTP Receiving Function is Used

Return to Overview

When the machine's own SMTP receiving function is used, follow the procedure below to set up the E-mail and I-fax reception functions.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail/I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SMTP Receive>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not receive E-mails and I-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function. If you want to receive E-mails and I-faxes using a POP server, select <Off>.
  • <On>: Receives E-mails and I-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
  • The accepted message format and file types are as follows:
  • Message format: Plain text
  • File types: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR compression), JPEG, Exif JPEG (Exif 2.2)
  • You must register the host name of the machine with the DNS server if you want to receive E-mail using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <POP>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not receive E-mails and I-faxes using a POP server. If you want to receive E-mails and I-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function, select <Off>.
  • <On>: Receives E-mails and I-faxes using a POP server.
  • The accepted message format and file types are as follows:
  • Message format: Plain text
  • File types: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR compression), JPEG, Exif JPEG (Exif 2.2)
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.
Setting up the E-mail and I-fax reception functions is completed.



Setting Scan to File Server

This section describes procedures for setting the Scan to File Server function.


Scan to File Server

Using this feature, you can send a scanned document to a file server on a network.
This is very useful when you want to back up frequently-used documents such as quotation forms or when you want to share information on a project with your peers.



System Requirements

For some types of networks, the following system environments are compatible when sending data from the machine to a file server:

  • Scan to File Server (FTP)
  • Servers
  • Windows 2000 Server and Internet Information Services 5.0
  • Windows XP Professional and Internet Information Services 5.1
  • Windows Server 2003 and Internet Information Services 6.0
  • Windows Vista/Server 2008 and Internet Information Services 7.0
  • Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 and Internet Information Services 7.5
  • Solaris Version 2.6 or later
  • Mac OS X
  • Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later
  • FTP server for imageWARE Gateway
  • Protocol
  • TCP/IP
  • Scan to File Server (File Sharing)
  • Servers
  • Windows 2000 Server
  • Windows 2000 Professional
  • Windows XP Professional
  • Windows XP Home Edition
  • Windows Server 2003
  • Windows Vista
  • Windows Server 2008
  • Windows 7
  • Server software for sending data
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X)
  • Protocol
  • NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NetBT)

Remark
  • IPv6 is not supported for the Scan to File Server (File Sharing) function.
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 or later.

Setup Procedures for Scan to File Server

To set up the Scan to File Server function, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  • If you have installed computer security software on your computer, the firewall (which prevents network intrusion to the network) may restrict access from this machine to the shared folder. As a result, you may not be able to store data in the shared folder. For details, see the manual provided with the security software.

  • Setup Procedures for Scan to File Server (FTP)

  1. Connect the LAN cable, and set the IP address.

For details, see "Basic Network Settings."


  1. Set up an FTP server according to your OS.

For details, see "Setting File Server (FTP)."


  • Setup Procedures for Scan to File Server (File Sharing)

  1. Connect the LAN cable, and set the IP address.

For details, see "Basic Network Settings."


  1. Set up a shared folder according to your OS.

For details, see "Setting File Server (File Sharing)."


  1. Set up the machine to use the send files function and register the destination address.

For details, see "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Setting File Server (FTP)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set up a computer as an FTP server.


Remark
  • This section describes only the procedures for setting up a computer to receive data sent from the machine. To send data from the machine to a server on the network, you must enter an address setting from the control panel. For instructions on how to specify destination address settings, see "Registering Destinations in the Address Book."
  • The procedures below explain sample FTP server setups. The procedures may vary according to the actual environment.
  • Depending on the network environment you are using, you may need to enable the PASV mode to send scanned documents to a FTP server. For details on how to set up the PASV mode, see "Setting PASV Mode for FTP." Consult your network administrator on whether or not the PASV mode is required.
  • To send scanned documents to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, you need to enable the FTP extension. For details on how to set it up, see "Setting FTP Extension."

Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008

UNIX

Mac OS X

FTP Server for imageWARE Gateway


Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008

Return to Overview


Remark
  • It is recommended that the FTP server be configured by the network administrator.
  • The use of Windows 2000 Server as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.0 (IIS 5.0).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings.
    For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
  • The use of Windows XP Professional as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.1 (IIS 5.1).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system. Windows XP Home Edition cannot be used as an FTP server.
  • The use of Windows Server 2003 as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0 (IIS 6.0).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
  • The use of Windows Vista/Server 2008 as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.0 (IIS 7.0).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
  • The use of Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.5 (IIS 7.5).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
  • Verification of users for access to FTP servers is done by referencing the local account database of the Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008 that is used as the FTP server. Therefore, it is not possible to use the account of a domain user registered in Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008 to send data directly from the machine to FTP servers in other domains.
  • This section describes the procedures for using the default home directory under [Default FTP Site]. To use other settings, enter the FTP site and home directory by referring to the documentation for IIS.
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows XP are used; items might differ depending on your operating system.
  1. Log on to Windows as a member of the group with access rights to the directory to be designated as the FTP site directory.
  • Depending on your environment, the access rights settings for a drive or directory may differ. For details, see the Windows documentation.
  1. Start IIS.

For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Services Manager].

For Windows XP, click [start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [Performance and Maintenance] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services].

For Windows Server 2003/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services Manager].

For Windows Vista, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [Systems and Maintenance] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services].

For Windows 7, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [System and Security] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

  1. Enter the FTP site settings.

For Windows 2000, right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties].

For Windows XP/Server 2003, double-click the [FTP Sites] icon → right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties].

For Windows Vista/7/Server 2008, double-click the [FTP Sites] icon → right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties].

In the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box, click the [Security Accounts] tab to display the [Security Accounts] sheet.

For Windows 2000, deselect [Allow Anonymous Connections]. For Windows XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008, deselect [Allow only anonymous connection].

Click the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] sheet → select both [Read] and [Write].

Click [OK] to close the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box.

  1. Confirm [Full computer name].

Click the [Network Identification] tab to display the [Network Identification] sheet → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the [System Properties] dialog box.

For Windows XP/Server 2003:
Click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties].
Click the [Computer Name] tab to display the [Computer Name] sheet → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the dialog box.

For Windows Vista:
Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties].
Click the [Computer Name] tab to display the [Computer Name] sheet → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the dialog box.

For Windows 7/Server 2008:
Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [Computer] → click [Properties] → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the dialog box.

  1. Set up the users and passwords for access to the FTP server.

For Windows 2000, right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows XP/Server 2003, click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows Vista, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows 7, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, [Control Panel] → [System and Security] → click [Administrative Tools] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, click [Administrative Tools] to open the [Computer Management] window.

Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups] → right-click the [Users] folder → click [New User].

In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] → enter the password in [Password] → re-enter the password in [Confirm password].

Enter a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 24 (14 for Windows 2000) alphanumeric characters.

Deselect [User must change password at next logon].

Select [Password never expires].

Confirm the settings → click [Create].

Close the [Computer Management] dialog box.

  1. Set a destination address using the control panel.

Set the information checked from steps 1 through 5 in the machine.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Full computer name]: starfish.organization.company.com Create a directory named "share" in the specified FTP server's directory "\Inetpub\ftproot", and then set "share" as the data destination.

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <FTP>
<Host Name>: starfish.organization.company.com
<Folder Path>: share
<User Name>: User name entered in step 5
<Password>: Password for the above user
  • To use [Full computer name], which was confirmed in step 4, as the host name for <Host Name> as shown in the example, it is necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • Registering a destination in the Address Book or One-touch saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job. For instructions on how to register a destination in the Address Book or One-touch, see "Registering Destinations in the Address Book."


UNIX

Return to Overview


Remark
  • UNIX users must have Solaris 2.6 or later installed in order to use the computer as an FTP server.
  • In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use FTP. For details, consult your network manager.
  1. Log in to a workstation as a super user.
  1. Set up the users who send documents from the machine, and their passwords.

Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.

  1. Create a shared directory to be used for destination addresses, and then enable read access and write access by the users who will be sending data.
  1. Set a destination address using the control panel.

Set the information checked from steps 1 through 3 in the machine.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Host name]: starfish
[Domain]: organization.company.com
The user's home directory is /home/hsato, and /home/hsato/share is the data destination.

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <FTP>
<Host Name>: starfish.organization.company.com
<Folder Path>: Enter one of the following:
share (when using relative path)/home/hsato/share (when using absolute path)
<User Name>: User name entered in step 2
<Password>: Password for the above user
  • To use [Full computer name], which was confirmed in step 4, as the host name for <Host Name> as shown in the example, it is necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • Registering a destination in the Address Book or One-touch saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job. For instructions on how to register a destination in the Address Book or One-touch, see "Registering Destinations in the Address Book."


Mac OS X

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The following procedures are based on Mac OS X version 10.4. The procedures may differ depending on the versions of Mac OS X you are using.
  1. Log in to Mac OS X as Administrator.
  1. Start the FTP services under Mac OS X.
  • Click the Apple icon in the top left of the screen → [System Preferences].
  • Click the [Sharing] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • Click to select the [FTP Access] → click [Start].
  • Click [Show all] on the toolbar.
  1. Specify the user to whom you want to send data, and then the password.
  • Click the [Accounts] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • Click [] to create a new account.
  • Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
  • Click [Create Account].
  • Close the [Accounts] window.
  1. Create a shared folder to which files are to be sent.

Sample setting:

Create a folder named "share" in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder.

  1. Grant access to the shared folder created in step 4.
  • Click to select the shared folder → select [Get Info] from the [File] menu.
  • Click [Ownership & Permissions] → [Details].
  • Enable read and write access to the folder by the owner and members of a group to which the owner belongs.
  • Close the Info window.
  1. Set a destination address using the control panel.

Set the information checked from steps 1 through 5 in the machine.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
Server side settings (set using the above procedure): Create a folder named "share" in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder of the user named "yoko", and then specify the shared folder as the folder to which files are sent.

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <FTP>
<Host Name>: IP address of Macintosh
<Folder Path>: Enter an absolute path to a folder to which files are sent:
/Users/yoko/Public//share
<User Name>: User name entered in step 3
<Password>: Password for the above user
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • Registering a destination in the Address Book or One-touch saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job. For instructions on how to register a destination in the Address Book or One-touch, see "Registering Destinations in the Address Book."


FTP Server for imageWARE Gateway

Return to Overview


Remark
  • An FTP server for imageWARE Gateway is required for receiving data from the machine when used with imageWARE Gateway.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set <FTP Extension> to <On>. For more information, see "Setting FTP Extension."
  1. Set up the FTP server for imageWARE Gateway.

For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.

  1. On the FTP server for imageWARE Gateway, specify the folder to store data sent from the machine.

For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.

  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for a folder name.
  • Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
  1. On the FTP server for imageWARE Gateway, export destination data.

For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.

  • A DNS server is needed to use an FQDN format (for example, starfish.organization.company.com) for the FTP server address. (A DNS server is also required if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If you have not set up a DNS server, use IP addresses.]
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for an FTP server address of the FQDN format.
  1. Use the Remote UI of the machine to import the destination data exported in step 3 into the machine.
  • Click [Add. Func.] of the Remote UI → click [Import/Export].
  • Click [Address Book].
  • Click [Import].
  • Click [Browse] → select the file to import.
  • Click [OK].


Setting File Server (File Sharing)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to set up File Server (File Sharing).


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  1. Set up the file server (file sharing).

The setting procedures vary depending on your OS.

  • For file servers with Windows
1. Check the computer name and necessary components for file sharing.
For instructions, see "Confirming Computer Name and Necessary Components for File Sharing."
2. Set up a shared folder using the information checked in step 1.
For instructions, see "Setting Shared Folder."
  • For file servers with Mac OS X

For instructions, see "Setting File Server (File Sharing) (Mac OS X)."

  • For file servers with UNIX/Linux

For instructions, see "Setting File Server (File Sharing) (UNIX/Linux)."

  1. Set up the machine for Scan to File Server (file sharing).

For instructions, see "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Confirming Computer Name and Necessary Components for File Sharing

Return to Overview

To store a scanned document to a shared folder on a computer, you need to set up your computer in addition to the machine settings for the Scan to File Server function.
Follow the procedures below to view the computer name and check if all the components required for setting up the shared folder are installed.


If you are using Windows 2000

Confirming Computer Name (Windows 2000)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 2000)


If you are using Windows Server 2003

Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2003)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2003)


If you are using Windows XP

Confirming Computer Name (Windows XP)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows XP)


If you are using Windows Vista

Confirming Computer Name (Windows Vista)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Vista)


If you are using Windows Server 2008

Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2008)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2008)


If you are using Windows 7

Confirming Computer Name (Windows 7)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 7)



Confirming Computer Name (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting up the shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedure below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Right-click the [My Computer] on the desktop. Click [Properties] to open the [System Properties] dialog box.
  1. Click the [Network Identification] tab to display the [Network Identification] sheet.
  1. Click [Properties].
  1. In the [Identification Changes] dialog box, confirm the computer name in the [Computer name] box.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the computer name you confirmed here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Click [Cancel] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.

Proceed to "Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 2000)."



Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to check whether or not the components required for setting up the shared folder are installed in your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • 1. Right-click the [My Network Places] icon on the desktop. Select [Properties] to open the [Network and Dialup Connections] dialog box.
  • 2. Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon. Select [Properties].
  1. Check whether or not the network components required for file sharing are installed.

Make sure that all the check boxes below are selected. If any of the boxes are not selected, select them.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Component Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For details, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.

Proceed to "Setting Shared Folder."



Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedure below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer]. Click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] dialog box.
  1. Click the [Computer Name] tab.
  1. Click [Change...].
  1. In the [Computer Name Changes] dialog box, confirm the computer name in the [Computer name] box.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the computer name you confirmed here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Click [Cancel] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.

Proceed to "Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2003)."



Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to check whether or not the components required for setting up the shared folder are installed in your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • 1. Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar. Select [Control Panel].
  • 2. Select [Network Connections].
  • 3. Right-click [Local Area Connection]. Select [Properties].
  1. Check whether or not the network components required for file sharing are installed.

Make sure that all the check boxes below are selected. If any of the boxes are not selected, select them.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Component Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For details, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.

Proceed to "Setting Shared Folder."



Confirming Computer Name (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedure below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Right-click [My Computer] on the desktop. Select [Properties] to open the [System Properties] dialog box.
  1. Click the [Computer Name] tab.
  1. Click [Change...].
  1. In the [Computer Name Changes] dialog box, confirm the computer name in the [Computer name] box.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the computer name you confirmed here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Click [Cancel] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.

Proceed to "Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows XP)."



Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to check whether or not the components required for setting up the shared folder are installed in your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • 1. On the [start] menu, right-click [My Network Places]. Select [Properties].
  • 2. Right-click [Local Area Connection]. Select [Properties].
  1. Check whether or not the network components required for file sharing are installed.

Make sure that all the check boxes below are selected. If any of the boxes are not selected, select them.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Component Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For details, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.

Proceed to "Setting Shared Folder."



Confirming Computer Name (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address. Follow the procedure below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. On the [Start] menu, right-click [Computer]. Select [Properties].
  1. In the [System] window, confirm the computer name.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the computer name you confirmed here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Close the [System] window.

Proceed to "Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Vista)."



Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to check whether or not the components required for setting up the shared folder are installed in your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • 1. On the [Start] menu, right-click [Network]. Select [Properties].
  • 2. Click [Manage network connections].
  • 3. Right-click [Local Area Connection]. Select [Properties].
  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
  1. Check whether or not the components required for file sharing are installed.

Make sure that all the check boxes below are selected. If any of the boxes is not selected, select it.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Feature Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For the setting, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.

Proceed to "Setting Shared Folder."



Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedures below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. On the [Start] menu, right-click [Computer]. Select [Properties].
  1. In the [System] window, confirm the computer name.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the computer name you created here. You need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Close the [System] window.

Proceed to "Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2008)."



Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to confirm that the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • For Windows Server 2008 users
  • On the [Start] menu, right-click [Network]. Select [Properties].
  • Click [Manage network connections].
  • Right-click [Local Area Connection]. Select [Properties].
  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
  • For Windows Server 2008 R2 users
  • On the [Start] menu, right-click [Network]. Select [Properties].
  • Click [Local Area Connection].
  • Click [Properties].
  1. Confirm that the components required for file sharing are installed.

Confirm that all of the following check boxes are selected. If any of the boxes is not selected, select it.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Feature Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For the setting, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.

Proceed to "Setting Shared Folder."



Confirming Computer Name (Windows 7)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedures below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. On the [Start] menu, right-click [Computer]. Select [Properties].
  1. In the [System] window, confirm the computer name.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the computer name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Close the [System] window.

Proceed to "Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 7)."



Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 7)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to check whether or not the components required for setting up the shared folder are installed in your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • 1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel] window.
  • 2. Click [View network status and tasks].

  • 3. Click [Local Area Connection] to open [Local Area Connection Status] dialog box.

  • 4. Click [Properties].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes].
  1. Confirm that the components required for file sharing are installed.

Make sure that all the check boxes below are selected. If any of the boxes is not selected, select it.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Feature Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For the setting, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] to close the dialog box and close all the windows.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.

Proceed to "Setting Shared Folder."



Setting Shared Folder

Return to Overview

Once you confirm that the required components are installed, set up shared folder in which a scanned document is stored as a file.
The two setting options for the shared folder are described below.


Shared Folder without Access Control

This is useful when you want to share files with other users over a network without any restrictions.
Users can access these folders from any computer on the network without having to enter a user name and password.



Follow the procedure below to set up the shared folder without access control.


File Sharing without Access Restriction


Shared Folder with Access Control

This is useful when you want to limit access to certain users.
To access a shared folder of this type, users have account information (user names and passwords) for the shared folder. If they do not know their account information, they cannot access that shard folder.



Follow the procedure below to access a shared folder with access control.


File Sharing with Access Restriction



File Sharing without Access Restriction

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to set up the shared folder without access control.


File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows 2000)

File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2003)

File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows XP)

File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Vista)

File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Server 2008)

File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows 7)


File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview


About access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered for computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

This section describes the procedure for granting FULL Control permission to the "everyone" account so that any user can access the shared folder.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control users who access folders by logging on to their computers.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Set a shared folder.
  • 1. Create a new shared folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex.: C:\share

  • It is recommended that you write down the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  • 2. Right-click the created folder.
  • 3. Select [Sharing] to open the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

  • 4. Select [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • 1. In the [Sharing] sheet, click the [Permissions] button to open the [Permissions for <Folder Path>].

  • 2. In the [Permissions for <Folder Path>], under [Group or user names], select [Everyone] to grant. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow] if not selected.

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine on a computer (the file server).
  • 3. Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Path>] dialog box.
  • 4. If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder Path> Properties], proceed to Step 3 to set the local-level access permission. If not, proceed to Step 4.
  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set both the local-level and network-level access permissions.

  • 1. In the [<Folder Path> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • 2. Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • 3. Type "Everyone" in [Enter the object names to select].

  • 4. Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If the object name is entered incorrectly, you see the [Name Not Found] dialog box. If this happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are incorrect.
  • 5. Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • 6. In the [Security] sheet, under [Name], select [Everyone]. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine on a computer (the file server).
  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Activate the Guest user account.
  • 1. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop. Click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.
  • 2. Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups], and then click the [Users].
  • 3. Double-click the [Guest] user.

  • 4. Deselect [Account is Disabled] to activate the Guest user account.

  • 5. Click [OK] to close the [Guest Properties] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview


About access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered for computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

This section describes the procedure for granting FULL Control permission to the "everyone" account so that any user can access the shared folder.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control users who access folders by logging on to their computers.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Set a shared folder.
  • 1. Create a new shared folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex.: C:\share

  • It is recommended that you write down the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  • 2. Right-click the created folder.
  • 3. Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

  • 4. Select [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • 1. In the [Sharing] sheet, click the [Permissions] button to open the [Permissions for <Folder Path>].

  • 2. In the [Permissions for <Folder Path>], under [Group or user names], select [Everyone] to grant. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow] if not selected.

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine on a computer (the file server).
  • 3. Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Path>] dialog box.
  • 4. If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder Path> Properties], proceed to Step 3 to set the local-level access permission. If not, proceed to Step 4.
  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set both the local-level and network-level access permissions.

  • 1. In the [<Folder Path> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • 2. Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • 3. Type "Everyone" in [Enter the object names to select].

  • 4. Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If the object name is entered incorrectly, you see the [Name Not Found] dialog box. If this happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are incorrect.
  • 5. Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • 6. In the [Security] sheet, under [Group or user names], select [Everyone]. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine on a computer (the file server).
  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Activate the Guest user account.
  • 1. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop. Click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.
  • 2. Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups], and then click the [Users].
  • 3. Double-click the [Guest] user.

  • 4. Deselect [Account is Disabled] to activate the Guest user account.

  • 5. Click [OK] to close the [Guest Properties] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

If you are using Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition, use simple file sharing to set up the shared folders without access control.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional and simple file sharing is disabled, follow the procedures below to enable it.
  • On the [start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then select [Folder Options] to open the [Folder Options] dialog box.
  • Select the [View] tab.
  • Under [Advanced settings], select the [Use simple file sharing (Recommended)] check box.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Folder Options] dialog box.
  1. Create a new shared folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex.: C:\share

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the folder name you created here. You need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Right-click the created folder.
  1. Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

  1. Click [If you understand the security risks but want to share files without running the wizard, click here.].

  • This message is only displayed the first time you open the dialog box. If you are opening the dialog box for the second or subsequent time, proceed to Step 6.
  1. In the [Enable File Sharing] dialog box, select the [Just enable file sharing] check box, and then click [OK].

  1. Select the [Share this folder on the network] and [Allow network users to change my files] check boxes.

  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

In Windows Vista, you can use the special folder named "Public folder," which allows files to be shared with other users on the same network. Using the Public folder, you can set up a shared folder without access control.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • By default, the Public folder is created under [Users] folder, below a drive (e.g. C drive) Windows Vista is installed on.
    Example: \Public\share

  • Sharing the Public folder

  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel] window.

  1. Click [Set up file sharing] to open the [Network and Sharing Center] window.


  1. In the [Network and Sharing Center] window, click the downwards arrow next to [Public folder sharing].


  1. Select [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can open, change, and create files], and then click [Apply].

  • Do not select [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can open files]. Otherwise, you will not be able to store a document scanned with this machine in a shared folder.
  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].

  1. Click the downwards arrow next to [Password protected sharing].


  1. Click [Turn off password protected sharing], and then click [Apply].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].

  • Creating a folder to store a file

You can store a file in the first level of the Public folder. This section describes the procedure for creating a new folder in which to store a file in the Public folder.


  1. Display the Public folder in Windows Explorer, etc.

  1. Create a new folder in the Public folder.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the folder name you created here. You need it in "Specifying Destinations."

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

In Windows Server 2008, you can use the special folder named "Public folder," which allows files to be shared with other users on the same network. Using the Public folder, you can set up a shared folder without access control.

If you are using Windows Server 2008 R2, see "For Windows Server 2008 R2 users."


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • By default, the Public folder is created under [Users] folder, below a drive (e.g. C drive) Windows Server 2008 is installed on.
    Example: \Public\share

For Windows Server 2008 users

  • Sharing the Public folder

  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel] window.

  1. Click [Set up file sharing] to open the [Network and Sharing Center] window.


  1. In the [Network and Sharing Center] window, click the downwards arrow next to [Public folder sharing].


  1. Select [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can open, change, and create files], and then click [Apply].

  • Do not select [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can open files]. Otherwise, you will not be able to store a document scanned with this machine in a shared folder.
  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].

  1. Click the downwards next to [Password protected sharing].


  1. Check [Turn off password protected sharing], and then click [Apply].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Server 2008, click [Continue].

For Windows Server 2008 R2 users

  • Sharing the Public folder

  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel] window.

  1. Click [View network status and tasks] to open the [Network and Sharing Center] window.


  1. Click [Change advanced sharing settings] in the [Network and Sharing Center] window.


  1. In the [Advanced sharing settings] window, under [Public folder sharing], select [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can read and write files in the Public folders].


  1. Under [Password protected sharing], select [Turn off password protected sharing], and then click [Save changes].


  • Creating a folder to store a file

You can store a file in the first level of the Public folder. This section describes the procedure for creating a new folder in which to store a file in the Public folder.


  1. Display the Public folder in Windows Explorer, etc.

  1. Create a new folder in the Public folder.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows 7)

Return to Overview

In Windows 7, you can use the special folder named "Public folder," which allows files to be shared with other users on the same network. Using the Public folder, you can set up a shared folder without access control.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • By default, the Public folder is created under [Users] folder, below a drive (e.g. C drive) Windows 7 is installed on.
    Example: \Public\share

  • Sharing the Public folder

  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel] window.

  1. Click [View network status and tasks] to open the [Network and Sharing Center] window.


  1. In the [Network and Sharing Center] window, click [Change advanced sharing settings] to open the [Advanced sharing settings] dialog box.


  1. Check [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can read and write files in the public folders].


  1. Scroll the screen downwards, click [Turn off password protected sharing], and click [Save changes].


  • Creating a folder to store a file

You can store a file in the first level of the Public folder. This section describes the procedure for creating a new folder in which to store a file in the Public folder.


  1. Display the Public folder in Windows Explorer, etc.

  1. Create a new folder in the Public folder.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



File Sharing with Access Restriction

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to set up file sharing with access restriction.


Remark
  • Windows XP Home Edition supports only simple file sharing and you cannot set any access permissions on the folders.

If you are using Windows 2000

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 2000)


If you are using Windows Server 2003

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2003)


If you are using Windows XP

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows XP)


If you are using Windows Vista

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Vista)


If you are using Windows Server 2008

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2008)


If you are using Windows 7

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 7)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 7)



Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts for users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedure for creating a new account on your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • Even if you do not create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account for users who are permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if one has not been set for the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop. Click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] dialog box.
  1. Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups].
  1. Right-click the [Users] folder. Click [New User...].

  1. Set up the user accessing the shared folder.

  • 1. In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name].
  • A user name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you write down the user name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  • 2. Enter the password in [Password]. Re-enter the password in [Confirm password].
  • A password can be up to 14 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you write down the password you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  • 3. Deselect [User must change password at next logon].
  • 4. Check [Password never expires].
  • 5. Confirm the settings. Click [Create].
  • 6. Click [Close] to close the [New User] dialog box.
  1. Close the [Computer Management] dialog box.

Proceed to "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 2000)."



Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account on your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as a user who is permitted to access that folder. Set the permission which allows the user to access the folders as well.


About access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control access to folders by users who are logged on to the computer.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Set a shared folder.
  • 1. Create a new folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex) C:\share

  • It is recommended that you write down the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  • 2. Right-click the created folder.
  • 3. Select [Sharing...] to open the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

  • 4. Check [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • 1. In the [Sharing] sheet, click [Permissions] to open the [Permissions for <Folder Path>].

  • 2. Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • 3. Type [Computer Name]\[User Name].

  • 4. Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If the object name is entered incorrectly, the [Name Not Found] dialog box appears. If this happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are incorrect.
  • 5. Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • 6. In the [Permissions for <Folder Path>], under [Permissions], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • 7. Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Path>] dialog box.
  • 8. If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder Path> Properties], go to the next step to set the local-level access permission. If not, skip to step 4.

  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.

  • 1. In the [<Folder Path> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • 2. Clear the [Allow inheritable permissions from parent to propagate to this object] check box.

  • [Security] dialog box appears.
  • 3. Click [Remove].

  • 4. Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • 5. Type [Computer Name]\[User Name].

  • 6. Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If the object name is entered incorrectly, the [Name Not Found] dialog box appears. If this happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are incorrect.
  • 7. Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • 8. In the [Security] sheet, under [Permissions], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts for users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedure for creating a new account on your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • Even if you do not create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account for users who are permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if one has not been set for the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop.
    Click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] dialog box.
  1. Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups].
  1. Right-click the [Users] folder. Click [New User].

  1. Set up the user accessing the shared folder.

  • 1. In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name].
  • A user name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you write down the user name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  • 2. Enter the password in [Password]. Re-enter the password in [Confirm password].
  • A password can be up to 14 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you write down the password you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  • 3. Deselect [User must change password at next logon].
  • 4. Check [Password never expires].
  • 5. Confirm the settings. Click [Create].
  • 6. Click [Close] to close the [New User] dialog box.
  1. Close the [Computer Management] dialog box.

Proceed to "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2003)."



Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account on your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as a user who is permitted to access that folder. Set the permission which allows the user to access the folders as well.


About access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control access to folders by users who are logged on to the computer.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Set a shared folder.
  • 1. Create a new folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex) C:\share

  • It is recommended that you write down the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  • 2. Right-click the created folder.
  • 3. Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

  • 4. Check [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • 1. In the [Sharing] sheet, click [Permissions] to open the [Permissions for <Folder Path>].

  • 2. Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • 3. Type [Computer Name]\[User Name] in [Enter the object names to select].

  • 4. Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If the object name is entered incorrectly, the [Name Not Found] dialog box appears. If this happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are incorrect.
  • 5. Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • 6. In the [Permissions for <Folder Path>], under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • 7. Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Path>] dialog box.
  • 8. If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder Path> Properties], go to the next step to set the local-level access permission. If not, skip to step 4.

  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.

  • 1. In the [<Folder Path> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • 2. Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • 3. Type [Computer Name]\[User Name] in [Enter the object names to select].

  • 4. Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If the object name is entered incorrectly, the [Name Not Found] dialog box appears. If this happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are incorrect.
  • 5. Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • 6. In the [Security] sheet, under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow] and click [Apply].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • 7. Click [Advanced] to open [Advanced Security Settings for <Folder Path>] dialog box.

  • 8. Clear the [Inherit from parent the permission entries that apply to child objects. Include these with entries explicitly defined here.] check box.

  • [Security] dialog box appears.
  • 9. Click [Remove].

  • 10. Click [OK] to close [Advanced Security Settings for <Folder Path>] dialog box.

  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts for users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedure for creating a new account on your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • Even if you do not create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account for users who are permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if one has not been set for the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  • Windows XP Home Edition supports only simple file sharing and you cannot set any access permissions on the folders.
  1. On the [start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel] window.
  1. Click [User Accounts].

  1. In the [User Accounts] dialog box, click [Create a new account].

  1. Type a user name in [Type a name for the new account], and then click [Next>].

  • A user name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you write down the user name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Check [Limited], and then click [Create Account].

  1. Click the created user, and then click [Create a password].

  1. Type a password in [Type a new password] and [Type the new password again to confirm], and then click [Create Password].

  • A password can be up to 14 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you write down the password you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Close the [User Accounts] dialog box.

Proceed to "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows XP)."



Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account on your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as a user who is permitted to access that folder. Set the permission which allows the user to access the folders as well.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • Windows XP Home Edition supports only simple file sharing and you cannot set any access permissions on the folders.
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional and simple file sharing is abled, follow the procedures below to unable it.
  • On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then select [Folder Options] to open the [Folder Options] dialog box.
  • Select the [View] tab.
  • Under [Advanced settings], uncheck the [Use simple file sharing (Recommended)] check box.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Folder Options] dialog box.
  • Windows XP Home Edition supports only simple file sharing and you cannot set any access permissions on the folders.

About access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control access to folders by users who are logged on to the computer.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.

  1. Set a shared folder.
  • 1. Create a new folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex) C:\share

  • It is recommended that you write down the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  • 2. Right-click the created folder.
  • 3. Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

  • 4. Check [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • 1. In the [Sharing] sheet, click [Permissions] to open the [Permissions for <Folder Path>].

  • 2. Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • 3. Type [Computer Name]\[User Name] in [Enter the object names to select].

  • 4. Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If the object name is entered incorrectly, the [Name Not Found] dialog box appears. If this happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are incorrect.
  • 5. Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • 6. In the [Permissions for <Folder Path>], under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • 7. Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Path>] dialog box.
  • 8. If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder Path> Properties], go to the next step to set the local-level access permission. If not, skip to step 4.

  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.

  • 1. In the [<Folder Path> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • 2. Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • 3. Type [Computer Name]\[User Name] in [Enter the object names to select].

  • 4. Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If the object name is entered incorrectly, the [Name Not Found] dialog box appears. If this happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are incorrect.
  • 5. Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • 6. In the [Security] sheet, under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow] and click [Apply].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • 7. Click [Advanced] to open [Advanced Security Settings for <Folder Path>] dialog box.

  • 8. Clear the [Inherit from parent the permission entries that apply to child objects. Include these with entries explicitly defined here.] check box.

  • [Security] dialog box appears.
  • 9. Click [Remove].

  • 10. Click [OK] to close [Advanced Security Settings for <Folder Path>] dialog box.

  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder Path> Properties] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts for users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedure for creating a new account on your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • Even if you do not create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account for users who are permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if one has not been set for the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel] window.
  1. Click [Add or remove user accounts].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
  1. In the [Manage Accounts] dialog box, click [Create a new account].

  1. In the [Create New Account] dialog box, enter the user name, check [Standard user], and then click [Create Account].

  • A user name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you write down the user name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Click the user name created in the [Change an Account], and then click [Create a password].

  1. In the [Create Password] dialog box, type the password in two boxes, and then click [Create password].

  • A password can be up to 14 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you write down the password you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Close the [Change an Account] dialog box.

Proceed to "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Vista)."



Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account on your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as a user who is permitted to access that folder. Set the permission which allows the user to access the folders as well.


About access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.
There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control access to folders by users who are logged on to the computer.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.

The [File Sharing] dialog box is used to set up the access permissions. The network-level and local-level access permissions for a user will be set simultaneously when you select a permission level in the [File Sharing] dialog box.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Create a folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex) C:\share

  • It is recommended that you write down the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Right-click the created folder.
  1. Select [Share...] to open the [File Sharing] dialog box.

  1. Click [] on the left side of [Add], and then select the user.

  1. Click [Add].

  1. Select the added user. Select the [Contributor] or [Co-owner] check box. Click [Share].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
  • Access permissions in Windows Vista
  • Reader: A reader can only view shared files.
  • Contributor: A contributor can create, alter and delete shared files, but not alter access permissions.
  • Co-owner: A co-owner can perform all file operations including creating, altering, deleting shared files and altering access permissions.
  1. Click [Done] to close the [File Sharing] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • Even if you don't create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account as the user who is permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if it is not set to the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel] window.
  1. Click [Add or remove user accounts].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
  1. In the [Manage Accounts] dialog box, click [Create a new account].

  1. In the [Create New Account] dialog box, enter the user name, check [Standard user], and then click [Create Account].

  • A user name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you take a note of the user name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Click the user name created in step 4, and then click [Create a password].

  1. In the [Create Password] dialog box, type the password in two boxes, and then click [Create password].

  • A password can be up to 14 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you take a note of the password you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Close the [Change an Account] dialog box.

Proceed to "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2008)."



Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account on your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as a user who is permitted to access that folder. Set the permission which allows the user to access the folders as well.


About access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.
There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control access to folders from users who are logged on to the computer.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.

In Windows Server 2008/2008 R2, the [File Sharing] dialog box is used to set up the access permissions. The network-level and local-level access permissions for a user will be set simultaneously when you select a permission level in the [File Sharing] dialog box.

If you are using Windows Server 2008 R2, see "For Windows Server 2008 R2 users."


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

For Windows Server 2008 users
  1. Create a folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex) C:\share

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Right-click the created folder.
  1. Select [Share...] to open the [File Sharing] dialog box.

  1. Click [] on the left side of [Add], and select the user.

  1. Click [Add].

  1. Select the added user. Select the [Contributor] or [Co-owner] check box. Click [Share].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
  • Access permissions in Windows Server 2008
  • Reader: A reader can only view shared files.
  • Contributor: A contributor can create, alter and delete shared files, but not alter access permissions.
  • Co-owner: A co-owner can perform all file operations including creating, altering, deleting shared files and altering access permissions.
  1. Click [Done] to close the [File Sharing] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."


For Windows Server 2008 R2 users
  1. Create a folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex) C:\share

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Right-click the created folder.
  1. Select [Share with], and then select [Specific people…] to open the [File Sharing] dialog box.

  1. Click [] on the left side of [Add], and then select the user.

  1. Click [Add].

  1. Select the added user. Select the [Read/Write] check box. Click [Share].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
  • Access permissions in Windows Server 2008 R2
  • Read: "Read" can only view shared files.
  • Read/Write: "Read/Write" can create, alter and delete shared files, but not alter access permissions.
  1. Click [Done] to close the [File Sharing] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 7)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts for users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedure for creating a new account on your computer.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  • Even if you do not create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account for users who are permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if one has not been set for the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel] window.
  1. Click [Add or remove user accounts].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes].
  1. Click [Create a new account] in the [Manage Accounts] dialog box.

  1. In the [Create New Account] dialog box, enter the user name, check [Standard user], and then click [Create Account].

  • A user name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you take a note of the user name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Click the user name created in the [Change an Account], and then click [Create a password].

  1. In the [Create Password] dialog box, type the password in two boxes, and then click [Create password].

  • A password can be up to 14 alphanumeric characters.
  • It is recommended that you take a note of the password you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Close the [Change an Account] dialog box.

Proceed to "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 7)."



Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 7)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account on your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as a user who is permitted to access that folder. Set the permission which allows the user to access the folders as well.


About access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.
There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control access to folders from users who are logged on to the computer.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.

The [File Sharing] dialog box is used to set up the access permissions. The network-level and local-level access permissions for a user will be set simultaneously when you select a permission level in the [File Sharing] dialog box.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Create a folder in any drive.

It is recommended to create the folder in a place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive.

Ex) C:\share

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the folder name you created here. You will need it in "Specifying Destinations."
  1. Right-click the created folder.
  1. Select [Shared with], and select [Specific people…].

  1. Click [] on the left side of [Add], and select the user.

  1. Click [Add].

  1. Select the added user. Select the [Read/Write] check box. Click [Share].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes].
  • Access permissions in Windows 7
  • Read: "Read" can only view shared files.
  • Read/Write: "Read/Write" can create, alter and delete shared files, but not alter access permissions.
  1. Click [Done] to close the [File Sharing] dialog box.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Setting File Server (File Sharing) (Mac OS X)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
  • The following procedures are based on Mac OS X version 10.4. The procedures may differ depending on the versions of Mac OS X you are using.
  • In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use Samba. For details, consult your network manage.
  1. Log in to Mac OS X as Administrator.
  1. Specify the user to whom you want to send data, and then the password.
  • 1. Click the [Accounts] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • 2. Click [] to create a new account.
  • 3. Enter a user name not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters.
  • 4. Click [Create Account].
  • 5. Close the Accounts Windows.
  1. Start the Windows Sharing services under Mac OS X.
  • 1. Click the Apple icon in the top left of the screen → [System Preferences].
  • 2. Click the [Sharing] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • 3. Click to select the [Windows Sharing] → click [Enable Accounts].
  • 4. Click to select the user account created in step 2 and enter the password created in step 2 → Click [Done].
  • 5. Close the [Sharing] window.
  1. Log out of Mac OS X, and log in to Mac OS X in the user account created in step 2.
  1. Create a destination shared folder.

For example, create the [share] folder under the Home folder.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."

  1. Set the access permissions of the shared folder created in step 5.
  • 1. While the shared folder is selected, go to [file] menu and click [Get Info].
  • 2. Select [Ownership & Permission] and then click [Detail].
  • 3. Select "Read & Write" for "Access" of both "Owner" and "Group."

If you send data such as PDF files to the shared folder, either "Write" or "Read & Write" must be selected.

  • 4. Close the [Info] window.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Setting File Server (File Sharing) (UNIX/Linux)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
  • In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use Samba. For details, consult your network manage.
  1. Log in to a workstation as a superuser.
  1. Set up the users who access Samba shared folder, and their passwords.

Set a user name not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters.

Proceed to "Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)."



Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set up the send files function of the Machine and specify the destination to which the document is sent. To make the machine settings, proceed to "Setting Up the Send Files Function of the Machine."


Remark
  • Before making the machine settings, setting on the computer is required. If you do not set up a shared folder, see "Setting File Server (File Sharing)" to set up the shared folder.

Setting Up the Send Files Function of the Machine

Specifying Destinations


Setting Up the Send Files Function of the Machine

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to set up the send files function of the machine.
The default setting is <On>.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <SMB Settings>: <On>
  • <Use LM Announce>: <Off>
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SMB Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Does not send data to the file server.
  • <On>: Sends data to the file server.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Server Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the name of this machine, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can also leave this field blank.

This name is displayed in Windows Explorer, etc.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Workgroup Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter workgroup name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

Enter the same name as that of the target computer that has the shared folder in which to store the scanned document.
You can also leave this field blank.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Comment>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a comment, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can also leave this field blank.

The typed comment is displayed on the network.

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use LM Announce>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].

<Off>: Does not notify the existence of this machine to LAN Manager. To avoid network congestion, Select this.
<On>: Notify the existence of this machine to LAN Manager.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.

Setting the machine to use the Scan to File Server function is completed. Proceed to "Specifying Destinations" to register the destinations on the machine.



Specifying Destinations

Return to Overview

To send a document a shared folder, you need to specify the destination to which the document is sent.
Set a destination address using the control panel.


Remark

File Sharing without Access Restriction

  • File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows 2000)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows 2000)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows 2000)"
<User Name>: Leave this box blank.
<Password>: Leave this box blank.
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


  • File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2003)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2003)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2003)"
<User Name>: Leave this box blank.
<Password>: Leave this box blank.
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


  • File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows XP)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows XP)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows XP)."
<User Name>: Leave this box blank.
<Password>: Leave this box blank.
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


  • File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Vista)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Vista)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "Sharing the Public folder" in "File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Vista)"
Delimitate Public folder and the other folder using "\", as shown below.
Ex) \Public\share
<User Name>: Leave this box blank.
<Password>: Leave this box blank.
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


  • File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2008)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2008)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 2 in "Creating a folder to store a file" in "File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Server 2008)"
Delimitate Public folder and the other folder using "\", as shown below.
Ex) \Public\share
<User Name>: Leave this box blank.
<Password>: Leave this box blank.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display. Enter each of these items on the server using no more than their allowable number of characters.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • You can send data using the following formats. A DNS server is required for the latter case:
    \\192.168.2.100\share
    \\host_name.organization.company.com\share

  • File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows 7)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: SWAN
[Share name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows 7)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 2 in "Creating a folder to store a file" in "File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows 7)"
Delimitate Public folder and the other folder using "\", as shown below.
Ex) \Public\share
<User Name>: Leave this box blank.
<Password>: Leave this box blank.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


File Sharing with Access Restriction

  • File Sharing with Access Restriction (Windows 2000)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows 2000)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 2000)"
<User Name>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000)"
<Password>: Password entered in step 7 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000)"
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


  • File Sharing with Access Restriction (Windows Server 2003)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2003)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2003)"
<User Name>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003)"
<Password>: Password entered in step 7 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003)"
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


  • File Sharing with Access Restriction (Windows XP)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows XP)."
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows XP)."
<User Name>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP)."
<Password>: Password entered in step 7 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP)."
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


  • File Sharing with Access Restriction (Windows Vista)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Vista)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Vista)"
<User Name>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista)"
<Password>: Password entered in step 6 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista)"
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


  • File Sharing with Access Restriction (Windows Server 2008)

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2008)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2008)"
<User Name>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008)"
<Password>: Password entered in step 7 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008)"
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display. Enter each of these items on the server using no more than their allowable number of characters.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • You can send data using the following formats. A DNS server is required for the latter case:
    \\192.168.2.100\share
    \\host_name.organization.company.com\share

  • File Sharing with Access Restriction (Windows 7)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: SWAN
[Share name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows 7)"
<Folder Path>: \share
Folder name created in step 1 in "Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 7)"
<User Name>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 7)"
<Password>: Password entered in step 6 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 7)"
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


File Sharing (Mac OS X)

Sample destination setting:

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: IP address of Macintosh
<Folder Path>: Enter a relative path to a folder to which files are sent:
\"user name" entered in step 2 in "Setting File Server (File Sharing) (Mac OS X)."\share
<User Name>: User name entered in step 2 in "Setting File Server (File Sharing) (Mac OS X)."
<Password>: Password entered in step 2 in "Setting File Server (File Sharing) (Mac OS X)."
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."


File Sharing (UNIX/Linux)

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

  • The machine's destination settings:
<Register Name>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<Host Name>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
<Folder Path>: \share
<User Name>: User name entered in "Setting File Server (File Sharing) (UNIX/Linux)."
<Password>: Password entered in "Setting File Server (File Sharing) (UNIX/Linux)."
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <Host Name> and <Folder Path> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the language of the computer on your network, <Host Name> and <Folder Path> may not be displayed correctly and you may not be able to browse the directories.

For information on how to send scanned document to a shared folder, see "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server."



Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax

This section describes procedures for Setting Up a computer for printing/sending a fax.


System Requirements

The following system environments are compatible when printing or sending a fax from a computer:

  • OS
  • Windows 2000 Server
  • Windows 2000 Professional
  • Windows XP Professional
  • Windows XP Home Edition
  • Windows Server 2003
  • Windows Vista
  • Windows Server 2008
  • Windows 7
  • Computers
  • Windows; IBM PC/compatibles
  • Protocol
  • TCP/IP

Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 or later.
  • Before setting up a computer for printing/sending a fax, it is necessary to perform the following setup procedures.
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.

Settings from the Machine (Printing from PC/PC Fax)

Setting Printer Connection Method (LPD/Raw)

Setting Print Server

Changing the Port Settings

Confirming and Changing the IP Address of the Machine and Port Settings of Your Computer


Settings from the Machine (Printing from PC/PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can select the printing method over a TCP/IP network.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <LPD Print Settings>: <On>
  • <RAW Print Settings>: <On>
  • <Use Bidirectional>: <On>
  • <Use WSD Print>: <Off>
  • <Use WSD Browsing>: <Off>
  • <Use Multicast Discovery>: <Off>
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <LPD Print Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use LPD.
  • <On>: Uses LPD as the print application.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RAW Print Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use Raw. Skip to step 12.
  • <On>: Uses Raw as the print application.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not establish bidirectional communication using Port 9100.
  • <On>: Establishes bidirectional communication using Port 9100.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <WSD Print Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use WSD Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use WSD.
  • <On>: Use WSD (Web Services for Devices) as the print application. Skip to step 17.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use WSD Browsing>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not allow device information to be obtained using WSD.
  • <On>: Allows device information to be obtained using WSD.
  • <Use WSD Browsing> is automatically set to <On> when <Use WSD Print> is set to <Off>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use Multicast Discovery>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not respond to multicast discovery requests.
  • <On>: Responds to multicast discovery requests.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting Printer Connection Method (LPD/Raw)

Return to Overview

  • Connecting to a TCP/IP Network:

All computers that use the machine must have TCP/IP client software installed and must be enabled for TCP/IP network use. For details, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  • Installing the Printer Driver and Specifying the Machine Destination Setting:

To print from a computer, you must install a printer driver and specify a setting for the machine destination. The machine destination setting differs depending on the print application used for printing. Use the following information as a guide to determine the print application you are using, and then perform the necessary operations.

  • LPD: This is the print application generally used with TCP/IP.
  • Raw: This is a print application used with Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008. It can print at higher speeds than LPD.

Remark
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows XP are used; items might differ depending on your operating system.
  1. Open the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers] folder.
  • For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].
  • For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].
  • For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printer] under [Hardware and Sound].
  • For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Devices and Printers].
  1. Right-click the icon of the printer you installed → select [Properties] (Windows7/Server 2008 R2: [Printer properties]).
  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, click [Continue].
  1. Click the [Ports] tab → [Add Port].

  1. From [Available ports types], select [Standard TCP/IP Port] → click [New Port].

The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts.

  1. Click [Next].
  1. In [Printer Name or IP Address], enter the machine IP address or machine host name → click [Next].

  • Your entry in [Printer Name or IP Address] is automatically copied in [Port Name].

After the computer has confirmed that there is a machine in which the entered IP address is assigned, the [Completing the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window appears.

  1. Click [Finish].

If the dialog box displays [Additional Port Information Required], follow the instructions on the screen to search again, or click [Standard] → click [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] from the pull-down list → click [Next].

  1. Click [Close] to close the [Printer Ports] dialog box.
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click [Configure Port] → Click [LPR] under [Protocol] → enter a print queue in [Queue Name] under [LPR Settings].

If you want to use Raw, confirm [Raw] under [Protocol] is selected, and go to the next step.

  • You can specify a print queue in [Queue Name]. The following three print queues are available:
    LP: The machine prints according to its spool settings. Normally select this option.
    SPOOL: The machine prints only after spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
    DIRECT: The machine prints without spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
  1. Click [OK].
  1. Click [Close].


Setting Print Server

Return to Overview

If Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008 are on your network, the following procedure enables you to set up a print server for more efficient management of network printers. Once a print server is set up, print jobs can be managed by the print server. Also, by setting up an alternate driver for the print server, printer drivers can be installed in each computer via the network.

  1. Open the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers] folder.
  • For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].
  • For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].
  • For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers].
  • For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Devices and Printers].
  1. Right-click the icon of the printer you installed → select [Sharing] (For Windows7/Server 2008 R2, select [Printer Properties], and then click the [Sharing] tab).
  1. For Windows Vista, click [Change sharing options].

For other operating systems, go to the next step.

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, click [Continue].
  1. Select [Share this printer] (Windows 2000: [Shared as]) and enter a share name.
  1. If this machine is shared with users running different versions of Windows, click [Additional drivers].

When the alternate driver is installed, additional windows will open for entering the location of the file containing the printer driver. Follow the instructions in these windows.

  • To install the printer driver on another computer, use the [Printer Wizard] window for selecting the printer destination → select [Network printer] → select the shared printer for the computer selected in the print server.
  1. Click [OK].

The shared printer settings are complete.



Changing the Port Settings

Return to Overview

Change the computer's port settings according to the machine's newly assigned or manually specified IP address.


Remark
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows Vista are used; items might differ depending on your operating system.
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Open the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers] folder.
  • For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].
  • For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] or [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].
  • For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers].
  • For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Devices and Printers].
  1. Right-click the icon of the printer you installed → select [Printer Properties].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, click [Continue].
  1. Click the [Ports] tab → [Add Port].

  1. From [Available port types], select [Standard TCP/IP Port] → click [New Port].

The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts.

  1. Click [Next].

  1. In [Printer Name or IP Address], enter the machine's IP address or host name → click [Next].

Your entry in [Printer Name or IP Address] is automatically copied in [Port Name].

  1. Click [Finish].

If the dialog box displays [Additional Port Information Required], follow the instructions on the screen to search again, or click [Standard] → click [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] from the pull-down list → click [Next].

  1. Click [Close] to close the [Printer Ports] dialog box.

  1. Make sure that the IP address specified in step 6 is added to the port list, and click [Apply].

  1. Click [OK].



Confirming and Changing the IP Address of the Machine and Port Settings of Your Computer

Return to Overview

If the machine is connected to a network with a DHCP server, an IP address is automatically assigned to the machine. However, the IP address may be changed when the router (DHCP server) is restarted. As a result, printing may not be performed over the network because the machine's IP address set on the computer during the printer driver installation differs from the machine's updated IP address.

Resolving this discrepancy will enable printing over the network.

If you experience the problem above, change the computer port settings using one of the following methods:


  • Check the IP address assigned to the machine and change the port settings on the computer.

(See "If you want to check the machine's updated IP address and change the port settings."

  • Manually set the machine's IP address to avoid automatic updates, and change the port settings on the computer.

(See "If you want to manually set the machine's IP address and change the port settings."

  • Configure the router to use the manual address assignment or static address assignment, which reserves a distinct IP address for a device in a DHCP environment, so that the machine's IP address is not changed when the router is restarted. (The names of these features may vary depending on the manufacturer of the router used.) For more information, see the documentation that comes with your router. After configuring the router, change the port settings on the computer. (See "Changing the Port Settings.")

  • If you want to check the machine's updated IP address and change the port settings:
  • Solving the problem using this method is relatively easier. However, whenever the machine's IP address is changed by restarting the router, the port settings need to be reconfigured. If the IP address is subject to frequent changes, set the IP address manually or configure a DHCP address reservation/exclusion on the router (by using a manual address assignment or static address assignment). (See "If you want to manually set the machine's IP address and change the port settings.")

  1. Check the machine's updated IP address.

(See "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings.")


  1. Change the port settings on the computer.

(See "Changing the Port Settings.")


  • If you want to manually set the machine's IP address and change the port settings:

  1. Check the machine's IP address.

(See "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings.")

  • It is also possible to set an arbitrary IP address instead of the one assigned to the machine. To set an arbitrary IP address to the machine, check the IP addresses of other devices on the same network, and then change the last two or three digits of the machine's IP address to a number that is not used.

    Example (If the machine and two computers are connected to the same network):
    IP address for computer1: 192.xxx.xx.01
    IP address for computer2: 192.xxx.xx.02
    IP address assigned automatically to the machine: 192.xxx.xx.03

    Arbitrary IP address that is to be assigned manually to the machine: 192.xxx.xx.20*

    * In general, a router (DHCP server) assigns consecutive IP addresses to the devices on the network. It is recommended that you select a number away from other IP addresses already assigned as a local address so that the same IP address will not be assigned when other devices or computers are connected to the network. If an IP address already set to one device is assigned to other devices or computers on the same network, these devices or computers may not be able to connect to the network.

  1. Manually set the machine's IP address.

(See "Setting IPv4 Address Manually.")

  • You do not need to change the subnet mask or gateway address settings.

  1. Change the port settings on the computer.

(See "Changing the Port Settings.")



Additional Network Settings

Depending on your network environment, additional network settings may be required.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.

Setting SNMP

Setting Startup Time

Setting Speed and Duplex

IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings

Selecting the IEEE802.1X Authentication Method


Setting Dedicated Port (IPv4 Only)

Setting IPv4 DNS

Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 Addresses

Registering a Single IPv4 Address to Prohibit


Registering a Range of IPv4 Addresses to Prohibit


Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IPv4 Addresses


Editing Registered IPv4 Addresses


Deleting Registered IPv4 Addresses


Setting IPv6 DNS

Controlling Machine Access Using IPv6 Addresses

Registering a Single IPv6 Address to Prohibit


Registering a Range of IPv6 Addresses to Prohibit


Registering a Prefix for the IPv6 Address to Prohibit


Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IPv6 Addresses


Editing Registered IPv6 Addresses


Deleting Registered IPv6 Addresses


Setting WINS

Setting SNTP

Setting SNTP Settings


Checking the Connection to the NTP Server


Setting PASV Mode for FTP

Setting FTP Extension

Managing Key Pairs and Digital Certificates

Registering a Key and Certificate


Checking/Deleting a Key and Certificate


Registering a CA Certificate


Checking/Deleting a CA Certificate


Setting the Use of HTTP

Setting Port Number

Setting Up LDAP Server

Registering LDAP Server


Changing LDAP Server Setting


Deleting LDAP Server


Printing LDAP Server Settings


Registering/Editing LDAP Search Attributes


Confirming the Machine's MAC Address

Limiting Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address

Registering MAC Addresses to Allow


Editing Registered MAC Addresses


Deleting Registered MAC Addresses


Confirming the Department ID and Password


Setting SNMP

Return to Overview

SNMP helps monitor the state of the machine and collects information on it. The following items can be set:

Community Name: Sets the SNMP community name. You can specify up to two community names.

Writable SNMP: Enables the computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings if this item is activated. You can specify this setting for each community separately.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <SNMP Settings>: <On>
  • <Community Name 1>: <public>
  • <Writable SNMP 1>: <On>
  • <Writable SNMP 2>: <Off>
  • <Printer Mgt. Info from Host>*: <On>

* Functional only for Windows Vista clients.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SNMP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: When you do not use an SNMP utility.
  • <On>: When you set or browse each item of the machine with utility that uses SNMP to obtain information.
  • If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, select <On> for both <SNMP Settings> and <Dedicated Port Settings>.
  • You can restrict the IP addresses of computers on which items can be set or browsed. If you restrict the IP addresses, it is not possible to use the Remote UI to set or browse detailed information on computers other than those whose IP addresses are allowed, even if both <SNMP Settings> and <Dedicated Port Settings> are <On>. For details, see "Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 Addresses."
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Community Name 1>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the desired community name other than "public," then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Community Name 2>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify <Community Name 2>, skip to step 12.

  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the desired community name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Writable SNMP 1>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not allow the computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
  • <On>: Allows the computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Writable SNMP 2>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify <Writable SNMP 2>, skip to step 16.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not allow the computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
  • <On>: Allows the computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Printer Mgt. Info from Host>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not allow automatically the SNMP port monitoring function.
  • <On>: Allows automatically the SNMP port monitoring function to obtain printer management information such as information on print applications and printer ports.
  • This function is only available if you are using Windows Vista and set [Standard TCP/IP port] for the printer driver port.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting Startup Time

Return to Overview

If you connect the machine to a switching hub, it may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are set correctly.
This occurs because the spanning tree process performed between switching hubs prevents them from communicating with each other immediately after the machine connects to a switching hub. In this case, use the following procedure to delay the startup of network communication.
The default setting is <0 Seconds>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Startup Time Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine, then press [OK].

You can also use the numeric keys to enter the time period.

You can enter the value from 0 to 300 (seconds).

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting Speed and Duplex

Return to Overview

You can specify the communication method and Ethernet connection type.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Auto Detection>: <On>
  • <Communication Mode>: <Half Duplex>
  • <Ethernet Type>: <10 Base-T>
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Ethernet Driver Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a <Auto Detection> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: You have to manually specify the communication mode and Ethernet type.
  • <On>: Automatically determines the communication mode (Half Duplex/Full Duplex) and Ethernet type (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX). Press [OK] to proceed step 13.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communication Mode>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to the desired communication method, then press [OK].
  • <Half Duplex>: Sends and receives alternately.
  • <Full Duplex>: Sends and receives simultaneously.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Ethernet Type>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to he desired Ethernet connection type, then press [OK].
  • <10 Base-T>: Establishes a 10 Base-T network connection.
  • <100 Base-TX>: Establishes a 100 Base-TX network connection.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings

Return to Overview

IEEE802.1X is a standard for port-based network access control, which realizes a local area network secured with a robust authentication system. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server (authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicant).

The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. After installing and registering the required key pair and digital certificates, select the method of EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol). The EAP methods supported by the machine are outlined below.


Remark
  • Key pairs and digital certificates can be registered both with the control panel and from the Remote UI.
  • You cannot set EAP-TLS and EAP-TTLS/PEAP at the same time.

  • EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)

Authentication using the EAP-TLS method requires both the client machine and the RADIUS server to issue their digital certificates to each other. The key and certificate (in PKCS#12 format) sent from the machine are verified using the CA certificate on the RADIUS server. The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server is verified using the CA certificate on the client.

  • EAP-TTLS (Tunneled TLS)

EAP-TTLS requires only the RADIUS server to issue a digital certificate. The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server is verified using the CA certificate on the client machine. The client machine is required to provide the user name/login name and password in order to authenticate itself to the server. As an internal authentication protocol, MS-CHAPv2 or PAP is available for selection.

  • PEAP (Protected EAP)

When PEAP is selected, only the RADIUS server issues a digital certificate. The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server is verified using the CA certificate on the client machine. The client machine is required to provide the user name/login name and password in order to be authenticated by the server. With PEAP, the machine uses MS-CHAPv2 as the internal authentication protocol.



Selecting the IEEE802.1X Authentication Method

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to enable the IEEE802.1X authentication and select the EAP method.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IEEE802.1X Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Disables the IEEE802.1X settings.
  • <On>: Enables the IEEE802.1X settings.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Login Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the login name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the login name.

  1. Select the desired EAP method.

  • To set EAP-TLS:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use TLS>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Key and Certificate>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the key pair you want to use, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set as Default Key>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to check the details of the certificate, select <Certificate Details>. On the Certificate Details page, selecting <Cert. Verif.> enables you to check whether the selected certificate is expired or not.
  • If you want to check what the key pair is being used for, select <Display Use Location>.

  • 6. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

  • 7. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  • To set EAP-TTLS:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use TTLS>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Disables TTLS.
  • <On>: Enables TTLS.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <MSCHAPv2> or <PAP> as the internal authentication protocol, then press [OK].
  • <MSCHAPv2>: Uses MS-CHAPv2 as the internal authentication protocol.
  • <PAP>: Uses PAP as the internal authentication protocol.

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <LoginName as UserName>, then press [OK].

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use the login name as the user name.
  • <On>: Uses the login name as the user name. The set login name will override the user name setting.

  • 6. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Name>, then press [OK].
  • If <On> is selected for <LoginName as UserName>, <User Name> cannot be entered.

  • 7. Use the software keyboard to enter the user name specified on the RADIUS server, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name.


  • 8. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].

  • 9. Use the software keyboard to enter the password specified on the RADIUS server, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.


  • To set PEAP:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use PEAP>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Disables PEAP.
  • <On>: Enables PEAP.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <LoginName as UserName>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use the login name as the user name.
  • <On>: Uses the login name as the user name. The set login name will override the user name setting.

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Name>, then press [OK].
  • If <On> is selected for <LoginName as UserName>, <User Name> cannot be entered.

  • 6. Use the software keyboard to enter the user name specified on the RADIUS server, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name.


  • 7. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].

  • 8. Use the software keyboard to enter the password specified on the RADIUS server, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting Dedicated Port (IPv4 Only)

Return to Overview

To set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility, set <Dedicated Port Settings> to <On>.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, select <On> for both <SNMP Settings> and <Dedicated Port Settings>.
  • You can restrict the IP addresses of computers on which items can be set or browsed. If you restrict the IP addresses, it is not possible to use the Remote UI to set or browse detailed information on computers other than those whose IP addresses are allowed, even if both <SNMP Settings> and <Dedicated Port Settings> are <On>. For details, see "Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 Addresses."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dedicated Port Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: If you are not using a Canon printer driver or utility.
  • <On>: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting IPv4 DNS

Return to Overview

DNS (Domain Name Service) is a service used for associating a host name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP/IPv4 network) with a unique IPv4 address.
The default setting is <Off> for <DNS Dynamic Update Set.>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <DNS Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <DNS Server Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Primary DNS Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the IPv4 address of a primary DNS server, then press [OK].
  • If <BOOTP> or <DHCP> is set to <On>, the IP address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Secondary DNS Server>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify secondary DNS server, skip to step 14.

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the IPv4 address of a Secondary DNS server, then press [OK].
  • If <BOOTP> or <DHCP> is set to <On>, the IP address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <DNS Host/Domain Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Host Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the desired host name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Domain Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the network domain name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <DNS Dynamic Update Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use the DNS server dynamic update function.
  • <On>: Use the DNS server dynamic update function.
  • The DNS dynamic update function enables the machine to register its IP address, host name, and domain name to the DNS server automatically. This function is available in the environment where there is a dynamic DNS server.
  • To use the DNS dynamic update function, enter the IP address of a DNS server, and the host name and domain name of the machine.
  • If you have a DHCP server running Windows 2000 Server that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record, configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
  • Under the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select [Automatically update DHCP client information in DNS] → [Update DNS only if DHCP client requests].
  • If you have a DHCP server running Windows Server 2003 that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record, configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
  • Under the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select [Enable DNS dynamic updates according to the settings below] → [Dynamically update DNS A and PTR records only if requested by the DHCP clients].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 Addresses

Return to Overview

You can restrict machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the range of IP addresses allowed or forbidden to access the machine.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • You can maintain security by setting the range of IP addresses for computers that can obtain access to the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses for computers that can browse or make the machine settings, it is not possible to use the Remote UI on computers whose IP addresses are not allowed, and no computer utility can be used to set or browse detailed information concerning the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses for computers that can send data (print/fax/I-fax job) to the machine, the machine rejects data sent from computers whose IP addresses are not allowed.

Registering a Single IPv4 Address to Prohibit

Registering a Range of IPv4 Addresses to Prohibit

Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IPv4 Addresses

Editing Registered IPv4 Addresses

Deleting Registered IPv4 Addresses


Registering a Single IPv4 Address to Prohibit

Return to Overview

To register a single IPv4 Address to prohibit, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Single Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the IPv4 address that is to be rejected, then press [OK].

You can register a maximum of 10 IPv4 addresses.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Registering a Range of IPv4 Addresses to Prohibit

Return to Overview

To register a range of IPv4 Addresses to prohibit, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Multiple Destinations>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the first IPv4 address in the range, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the last IPv4 address in the range, then press [OK].

You can register a maximum of 10 IPv4 addresses.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IPv4 Addresses

Return to Overview

To allow machine access only from registered IPv4 addresses, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Confirm>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the address or address range, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reject/Permit>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Editing Registered IPv4 Addresses

Return to Overview

To edit registered IPv4 addresses, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Confirm>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the address or address range, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit>, then press [OK].

  • To edit a single IPv4 address:

  • 1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the IPv4 address, then press [OK].
  • You can switch between registering a range of IPv4 addresses or a singleIPv4 address by pressing <Multiple Dest.> or <Single Address>.

  • To edit a range of IPv4 Addresses:

  • 1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the first IPv4 address in the range, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the last IPv4 address in the range, then press [OK].
  • You can switch between registering a range of IPv4 addresses or a singleIPv4 address by pressing <Multiple Dest.> or <Single Address>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Deleting Registered IPv4 Addresses

Return to Overview

To delete registered IPv4 addresses, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv4 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Confirm>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the address or address range, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting IPv6 DNS

Return to Overview

DNS (Domain Name Service) is a service used for associating a host name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP/IPv6 network) with a unique IPv6 address.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Use Same Host/Domain as IPv4>: <Off>
  • <DNS Dynamic Update Set.>: <Off>
  • <Manual Address Regist.>: <Off>
  • <Register Stateful Address>: <Off>

Remark
  • <DNS Settings> can be selected when <Use IPv6> is set to <On>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <DNS Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <DNS Server Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Primary DNS Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the IPv6 address of a primary DNS server, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You cannot enter a multicast address or address composed entirely of zeros in <Primary DNS Server> or <Secondary DNS Server>.
  • If you set <Use DHCPv6> to <On>, the IPv6 address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Secondary DNS Server>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify secondary DNS server, skip to step 14.

  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the IPv6 address of a secondary DNS server, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You cannot enter a multicast address or address composed entirely of zeros in <Primary DNS Server> or <Secondary DNS Server>.
  • If you set <Use DHCPv6> to <On>, the IPv6 address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <DNS Host/Domain Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press the right Any key to <Set>.
  • <Off>: Sets a different host name or domain name for IPv6 communication.
  • <On>: Sets the same host name or domain name used with IPv4 communication for IPv6 communication. Press [OK] and skip to step 20.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Host Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the desired host name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Domain Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the network domain name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • If you set <Use DHCPv6> to <On>, the IPv6 address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
  1. Press the right Any key to <Done>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <DNS Dynamic Update Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Does not use the DNS server dynamic update function. Skip to step 28.
  • <On>: Enables you to automatically register the IPv6 address, host name, and domain name set for the machine in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating if your environment includes a dynamic DNS server.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Manual Address Regist.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not register a manual address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
  • <On>: Registers a manual address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Stateful Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not register a stateful address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
  • <On>: Registers a stateful address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
  • Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 do not support DHCPv6 servers.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Controlling Machine Access Using IPv6 Addresses

Return to Overview

You can restrict machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the range of IP addresses allowed or forbidden to access the machine.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • <IP Address Range Settings> can be selected when <Use IPv6> is set to <On>.
  • You can maintain security by setting the range of IP addresses for computers that can obtain access to the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses for computers that can browse or make the machine settings, it is not possible to use the Remote UI on computers whose IP addresses are not allowed, and no computer utility can be used to set or browse detailed information concerning the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses for computers that can send data (print/fax/I-fax job) to the machine, the machine rejects data sent from computers whose IP addresses are not allowed.

Registering a Single IPv6 Address to Prohibit

Registering a Range of IPv6 Addresses to Prohibit

Registering a Prefix for the IPv6 Address to Prohibit

Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IPv6 Addresses

Editing Registered IPv6 Addresses

Deleting Registered IPv6 Addresses


Registering a Single IPv6 Address to Prohibit

Return to Overview

To register a single IPv6 Address to prohibit, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Single Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a single IPv6 address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can register a maximum of 10 IPv6 addresses.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Registering a Range of IPv6 Addresses to Prohibit

Return to Overview

To register a range of IPv6 Addresses to prohibit, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Multiple Destinations>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to the first IPv6 address in the range, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use the software keyboard to the last IPv6 address in the range, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can register a maximum of 10 IPv6 address ranges.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Registering a Prefix for the IPv6 Address to Prohibit

Return to Overview

To register a prefix for the IPv6 address to prohibit, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Prefix Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to the enter the IPv6 prefix, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

You can register a maximum of 10 IPv6 address ranges.

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the prefix length, then press [OK].

You can also use the numeric keys to enter the prefix length.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IPv6 Addresses

Return to Overview

To allow machine access only from registered IPv6 addresses, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Confirm>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the address, address range or prefix, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reject/Permit>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Editing Registered IPv6 Addresses

Return to Overview

To edit registered IPv6 addresses, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Confirm>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the address, address range or prefix, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit>, then press [OK].

  • To edit a single IPv6 address:
  • 1. Use the software keyboard to enter the a single IPv6 address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • To edit a range of IPv6 Addresses:
  • 1. Use the software keyboard to the first IPv6 address in the range, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • 2. Use the software keyboard to the last IPv6 address in the range, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • To edit a IPv6 prefix:
  • 1. Use the software keyboard to the enter the IPv6 prefix, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • 2. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the prefix length, then press [OK].
  • You can also use the numeric keys to enter the prefix length.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Deleting Registered IPv6 Addresses

Return to Overview

To delete registered IPv6 Addresses, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IPv6 Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <IP Address Range Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables an IP address filter.
  • <On>: Enables an IP address filter.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Confirm>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the address, address range or prefix, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting WINS

Return to Overview

WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) is a service used for associating a NetBIOS name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a NetBIOS network) with a unique IP address.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <WINS Configuration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].

<Off>: Does not resolve the name with WINS. Skip to step 10.
<On>: Resolves the name with WINS.

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the IPv4 address of a WINS, then press [OK].
  • If DHCP determines the IP address, the IP address obtained from a DHCP server is overwritten with the IP address of a WINS server (obtained from the DHCP server), whenever possible.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting SNTP

Return to Overview

SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) enables the machine to synchronize its system times with public time servers located around the world. The time provided by public NTP servers is generally accurate to within milliseconds.


Setting SNTP Settings

Checking the Connection to the NTP Server


Setting SNTP Settings

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically synchronize the data and time with an NTP server on the network.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • In order to perform time synchronization through SNTP, it is necessary to preset the time zone of the region in which you are using the machine. For instructions on how to set the time zone, see "Setting the Time Zone."
  • IPv6 is not supported.
  • Time synchronization is not performed during two hours before and after the selected start and end dates of the daylight saving time settings.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SNTP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Polling Interval>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the desired polling interval, then press [OK].
  • You can set the interval from 1 to 48 hours (in one-hour increments).
  • You can also enter the polling interval using - (numeric keys).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <NTP Server Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the NTP server's address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Checking the Connection to the NTP Server

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to check the connection to the NTP server is properly set.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <SNTP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <NTP Server Check>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [OK].

If <OK> is displayed, time synchronization is working correctly via SNTP.

When <Error> is displayed, check if <NTP Server Address> is correctly set.

  • Even if you perform <NTP Server Check>, the time settings will not be updated.
  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in "Setting Startup Time," perform <NTP Server Check> only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Setting Startup Time," for information on how to set up the startup time.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting PASV Mode for FTP

Return to Overview

Whether you use the PASV mode for FTP depends on the network environment you are using and the settings of the file server you are sending to. Before specifying the PASV mode for FTP, consult your network administrator.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use PASV Mode for FTP>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Disables the PASV mode for FTP.
  • <On>: Enables the PASV mode for FTP.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting FTP Extension

Return to Overview

If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set the FTP server address specified in imageWARE Gateway as the destination. Set <FTP Extension> to <On>. Using imageWARE Document Manager and the Send function of the machine enables you to manage digitized paper documents and computer data on the network. For more information on imageWARE Document Manager, see the appropriate imageWARE Gateway documentation.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <FTP Extension>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Disables the FTP extension.
  • <On>: Enables the FTP extension.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Managing Key Pairs and Digital Certificates

Return to Overview

The machine can take advantage of key pairs and digital certificates for security purposes, such as IEEE802.1X port-based authentication. After key pairs and digital certificates are installed in the machine, register them for use as described below.

The key pairs and digital certificates registered in the machine are divided into the following types:

  • Key and Certificate

In IEEE802.1X port-based authentication, a key pair (or a private key and certificate) in PKCS#12 format is required for enabling the EAP-TLS method on the client device. Up to three key pairs can be registered.

  • CA Certificate

CA certificates are used for verifying the digital certificates sent from other devices, such as servers, client computers, etc. Up to 10 CA certificates (including the pre-installed CA certificate) can be registered.


Remark
  • Certificates must meet the following requirements:
    - Format: X.509 version 1 or version 3 (DER encoded binary)
    - Signature algorithm: SHA1-RSA, MD5-RSA, or MD2-RSA (For CA certificates, SHA1-DSA is also allowed.)
    - Key length: 512 bits or 1024 bits (RSA)/2048 bits (DSA)
    - File extension: ‘.p12’ (for key pair files)/‘.cer’ (for CA certificate files)
  • The machine does not use certificate revocation list (CRL) for verifying digital certificates.
  • Self-signed certificates are not supported.
  • Key pairs and digital certificates can be installed only from the Remote UI. For details on how to access the Remote UI, see "Starting the Remote UI."
  • Key pairs and digital certificates can be registered both with the control panel and from the Remote UI.


Registering a Key and Certificate

Return to Overview

If you have installed a key and certificate in the machine from a web browser (Remote UI), register the key and certificate as described below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Certificate Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Key and Cert.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired key pair file, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  • Up to three key pairs can be registered. If you want to delete the selected file, select <Erase>, press [OK], and then select <Yes>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Key Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the desired key name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the password, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Checking/Deleting a Key and Certificate

Return to Overview

You can display the details of registered keys and certificates and check how they are currently being used. Delete any unnecessary files including those that are corrupted or marked as invalid.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Certificate Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Key and Certificate List>, then press [OK].
  1. Check or delete the desired keys and certificates.
  • If (invalid) is displayed to the left of a key pair, it may be invalid or corrupted. After deleting the invalid or corrupted file, register a new key and certificate. (See "Registering a Key and Certificate.")

  • If you want to display the details of a certificate:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the key and certificate you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Certificate Details>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll through the certificate details.
  • If you want to check the complete information of the listing, press the right Any key to select <Display All>.
  • If you press the left Any key to select <Cert. Verif.>, the machine checks for errors in the certificate.

  • If you want to check what a key pair is being used for:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the key and certificate with indicated under <Use>, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Use Location>, then press [OK].

The Display Use Location screen is displayed.


  • If you want to delete a registered key and certificate:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the key and certificate you want to erase, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  • A key pair file cannot be deleted if is indicated under <Use> in the list.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

If you want to cancel the operation, select <No>.


  • 4. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

  • 5. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Registering a CA Certificate

Return to Overview

Apart from the X.509 CA certificate (DER) pre-installed in the machine, you can install additional CA certificates. If you have installed a CA certificate in the machine from a web browser (Remote UI), register the certificate as described below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Certificate Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <CA Cert. Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the CA certificate file you want to register, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  • Up to 10 CA certificates can be registered. If you want to delete the selected file, select <Erase>, press [OK], and then select <Yes>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  • <No>: Does not register the selected CA certificate.
  • <Yes>: Registers the selected CA certificate.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Checking/Deleting a CA Certificate

Return to Overview

You can display the details of registered CA certificates. You can also delete unnecessary CA certificates.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Certificate Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <CA Certificate List>, then press [OK].
  1. Check or delete the desired CA certificates.

  • If you want to display the details of a CA certificate:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the CA certificate you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Certificate Details>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll through the certificate details.
  • If you want to check the complete information of the listing, press the right Any key to select <Display All>.
  • If you press the left Any key to select <Cert. Verif.>, the machine checks for errors in the certificate.

  • If you want to delete a registered CA certificate:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the CA certificate you want to erase, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

If you want to cancel the operation, select <No>.


  • 4. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

  • 5. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting the Use of HTTP

Return to Overview

You can restrict the use of Remote UI.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use HTTP>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not use the Remote UI.
  • <On>: Uses the Remote UI.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting Port Number

Return to Overview

Depending on your network environment, you can change the port number for each protocol.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <LPD>: <515>
  • <RAW>: <9100>
  • <HTTP>: <80>
  • <SMTP Receive>: <25>
  • <POP3 Receive>: <110>
  • <FTP Sending>: <21>
  • <SMTP Send>: <25>
  • <SNMP>: <161>
  • <WSD>: <3702>
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Port Number Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the protocol of which you want to change the port number (LPD, RAW, HTTP, SMTP Receive, POP3 Receive, FTP Sending, SMTP Send, SNMP, or WSD), then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the port number, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting Up LDAP Server

Return to Overview

If the information for an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is registered in the machine, you can search for e-mail addresses and fax numbers via the LDAP server. E-mail addresses and fax numbers obtained via the server can be specified as destinations or stored in the Address Book.


Remark
  • The following types of LDAP servers can be used with this machine. For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory
  • Windows Server 2003 with Active Directory
  • Windows Server 2008 with Active Directory
  • Lotus Notes R5 to R8
  • You can register up to five LDAP servers.


Registering LDAP Server

Return to Overview

You have to specify the relevant information for the LDAP server, such as the server name and address.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Server Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter a server name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information on using the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Server Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the server's address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • If <Login Information> is set to <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> for the LDAP server and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, enter a host name instead of an IP address.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Loc. to Start Search>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the location to start searching, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

Enter the location to start searching according to the type of LDAP server you are using, or as described below. You can leave this field blank.

  • If you are using Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008 with Active Directory:
  • Add "DC=" to each dot separated series of characters in the Active Directory domain name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
    Example: If <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp> is the domain name in Active Directory:
    DC=team1, DC=salesdept, DC=canon, DC=co, DC=jp
  • If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
  • Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the node on the directory tree, such as "ou=team1", "ou=salesdept", "o=canon", or "c=jp".
  • If the server's LDAP version is 3, you do not have to specify <Loc. to Start Search>. (If the LDAP version is 3, the machine automatically retrieves settings from the server, and sets the location to start searching.) If the server's LDAP version is 2, you have to specify <Loc. to Start Search>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Port Number>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter a port number using - (numeric keys), then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search Dest. Limit>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the maximum number of addresses to search, then press [OK].

You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter the maximum number of addresses to search.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search Timeout>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the timeout time in seconds, then press [OK].

You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter the timeout time in seconds.

  • Depending on the conditions such as authentication methods you are using, the timeout time may be shorter than designated.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Login Information>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Do Not Use>, <Use>, or <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)>, then press [OK].
  • <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> can be selected only if the LDAP server is running on Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008 with Active Directory.
  • If you entered an IP address in step 10, and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, select either <Do Not Use> or <Use>.
  • If <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> is selected, and if Date & Time Settings in Timer Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is different from the time settings on the LDAP server, the machine may not be able to connect to the LDAP server.

 
  • If <Do Not Use> is selected:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's environment, then press [OK].

  • If <Use> is selected:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Name>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use the software keyboard to enter the user name according to the type of LDAP server you are using, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • If you are using Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008 with Active Directory:
  • Enter "Windows domain name/Windows user name".
    Example: If <team1> is the Windows domain name, and <user1> is the Windows user name: team1/user1
  • If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
  • Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the user, such as "cn=admin", "ou=team1", or "ou=salesdept".

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use the software keyboard to enter a password, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Auth. Screen>, then press [OK].

  • 6. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is not displayed.
  • <On>: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is displayed even if a password is not required.

  • 7. Press the right Any key to select <Next>.

  • 8. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's environment, then press [OK].

  • If <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> is selected:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Name>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use the software keyboard to enter the user name according to the type of LDAP server you are using, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

Example: If <user1> is the Windows user name: user1


  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Use the software keyboard to enter a password, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Domain Name>, then press [OK].

  • 6. Use the software keyboard to enter a domain name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

Enter the directory tree name of the Active Directory, such as <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp>.


  • 7. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Auth. Screen>, then press [OK].

  • 8. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is not displayed.
  • <On>: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is displayed even if a password is not required.

  • 9. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Changing LDAP Server Setting

Return to Overview

You can change the settings for a stored LDAP server.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the LDAP server whose settings you want to change.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details/Edit>, then press [OK].
  1. Change the necessary settings, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For details about each setting, see "Registering LDAP Server."

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Deleting LDAP Server

Return to Overview

You can delete a stored LDAP server.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the LDAP server you want to erase.
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing LDAP Server Settings

Return to Overview

You can print the LDAP server settings.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print List>, then press [OK].
  • The Registered LDAP Server List can be printed on LGL or LTR paper (plain, recycled, or color paper).
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering/Editing LDAP Search Attributes

Return to Overview

You can register or edit the LDAP search attributes.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reg/Edit LDAP Search Attributes>, then press [OK].
  1. Register or edit the LDAP search attributes.

  • If you want to register a search attribute:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Not Registered 1> or <Not Registered 2>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Name>, then press [OK].

  • 3. Use the software keyboard to enter the name to display, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information on using the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."


  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Attribute Name>, then press [OK].

  • 5. Use the software keyboard to enter the attribute name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 6. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If you want to edit a search attribute:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search attribute that you want to edit, then press [OK].

  • 2. Change the necessary settings, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For details about each setting, see "If you want to register a search attribute."


  • If you want to erase a search attribute:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search attribute that you want to erase.

  • 2. Press the left Any key to select <Erase>.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Confirming the Machine's MAC Address

Return to Overview

To check the machine's MAC address, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Ethernet Driver Settings>, then press [OK].

The machine's MAC address is displayed.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Limiting Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address

Return to Overview

You can restrict machine access from computers on the network by specifying the MAC addresses of the computers allowed to access the machine.
The default setting is <Off>.


Registering MAC Addresses to Allow

Editing Registered MAC Addresses

Deleting Registered MAC Addresses


Registering MAC Addresses to Allow

Return to Overview

To register the allowed MAC addresses, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receiving MAC Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables a MAC address filter.
  • <On>: Enables a MAC address filter.
  • If you select <On>, you will be unable to access from MAC addresses which have not been specified.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the MAC address of the computer allowed to access the machine, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Editing Registered MAC Addresses

Return to Overview

To edit registered MAC addresses, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receiving MAC Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables a MAC address filter.
  • <On>: Enables a MAC address filter.
  • If you select <On>, you will be unable to access from MAC addresses which have not been specified.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Confirm>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the MAC address you want to edit, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the MAC address of the computer allowed to access the machine, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Deleting Registered MAC Addresses

Return to Overview

To delete registered MAC addresses, follow the procedure below.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Receiving MAC Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • <Off>: Disables a MAC address filter.
  • <On>: Enables a MAC address filter.
  • If you select <On>, you will be unable to access from MAC addresses which have not been specified.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Confirm>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select MAC address you want to delete, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Confirming the Department ID and Password

Return to Overview

You can confirm the Department ID and password when printing using a driver that supports Windows Vista.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Network Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TCP/IP Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Confirm Dept. ID Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not confirm the Department ID and password when printing using a driver that supports Windows Vista.
  • <On>: Confirms the Department ID and password when printing using a driver that supports Windows Vista.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then, turn it on.



Managing the Machine

The machine enables you to use any of the following software to check the status and to specify the settings on your computer.

  • Web browser (Remote UI)
  • NetSpot Device Installer (Canon utility software included in the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM)

Machine Management Using Web Browser (Remote UI)

You can use Remote UI installed in the machine to manage it on a web browser.
For using Remote UI, see "Using the Remote UI."


Machine Management Using NetSpot Device Installer

NetSpot Device Installer is utility software for specifying the initial settings of Canon devices connected to a network. Available on the CD-ROM, NetSpot Device Installer can be accessed directly without installation, enabling network users to quickly and easily specify the initial settings of network devices.
For instructions on how to use NetSpot Device Installer, see the online help for NetSpot Device Installer.



Security

Security Instructions



Specifying the System Manager Settings

You can set the System Manager ID and System Password, which are required when users are accessing the System Settings of the machine.

Default settings are as follows:
System Manager ID: 7654321
System Password: 7654321

Change them before using the machine by following the procedure below.


Remark
  • When you use Department ID Management, and if the System Manager ID and System Password are not set, all users will be considered as the System Manager, and anyone can access the <System Management Set.> menu from the control panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction. (See "Specifying the System Manager Settings.")
  • You can enter a maximum of 32 characters for the System Manager's name.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for the System Manager ID and System Password is seven. If the number you entered is fewer than seven digits, zeros will be added to the beginning of the entered number to make it seven.
    Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
  • You cannot store a System Manager ID made up of zeros only (i.e. <0000000>).
  • To delete information that has been entered, press down (Clear) → enter the correct number.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Manager Info. Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Mgmt. Dept. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter a number, then press [OK].

You must set both a System Manager ID and password to complete the setting.

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Mgmt. Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter a number, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Manager Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the System Manager's name (up to 32 characters), then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information how to use the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Device Information Settings

You can set a name for the machine, and enter information regarding its location.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Device Info. Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Device Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the Device name (up to 32 characters), then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information how to use the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the <Location Information>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the Location Information (up to 32 characters), then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

For information how to use the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Department ID Management

You can register a Department ID and password for each department, and manage the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department ID and password. This is called Department ID Management. Use Department ID Management to keep track of the copy, scan, and print totals for each department.

With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified:

  • Turn Department ID Management ON or OFF.
  • Register the Department ID and password.
  • Set page limits for color/black-and-white scans, color/black-and-white prints, and color/black-and-white copies.
  • Accept or reject print jobs and Scan Jobs from computers with unknown IDs.

Remark
  • When you use Department ID Management, and if the System Manager ID and System Password are not set, all users will be considered as the System Manager, and anyone can access the <System Management Set.> menu from the control panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction. (See "Specifying the System Manager Settings.")
  • The pages of received fax/I-fax documents and automatically printed reports are not counted as prints.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for the Department ID and password is seven. If the number you entered is fewer than seven digits, zeros will be added to the beginning of the entered number to make it seven.
    Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
  • You cannot register a Department ID or password made up of zeros only (i.e. <0000000>).
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) → enter the correct number.
  • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages.

Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

Changing the Password and Page Limit

Erasing the Department ID and Password

Checking Counter Information

Clearing the Page Total of a Department

Clearing the Page Total of All the Departments

Printing Counter Information (DEPT. INFO LIST)

Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs

Accepting Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs

Accepting B&W Copy Jobs without Entering the Department ID and Password


Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

Return to Overview

The Department ID Management function enables you to register up to 1000 Department IDs for Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn and 100 Department IDs for Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn.
The default settings for Department ID Management and each page limit setting are <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register ID/Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the Department ID, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the password, then press [OK].
  • If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by entering only the Department ID.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Limit On/Off & Page Limit>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired function, then press [OK].

You can select <Total Print Limit>, <Total Color Print Limit>, <Total Black Print Limit>, <Color Copy Limit>, <Color Scan Limit>, <Color Print Limit>, <Black Copy Limit>, <Black Scan Limit>, or <Black Print Limit>.

  • <Total Print Limit> is the sum of <Total Color Print Limit> and <Total Black Print Limit>.
  • <Total Color Print Limit> is the sum of <Color Copy Limit> and <Color Print Limit>.
  • <Total Black Print Limit> is the sum of <Black Copy Limit> and <Black Print Limit>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not set a page limit restriction. Skip to step 16.
  • <On>: Set a page limit restriction.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the maximum number of pages, then press [OK].
  • If either the color or black-and-white page limit is reached with [Auto-color Select] selected, you cannot perform any operations.
  • The machine stops printing if either the color or black-and-white page limit is reached while the machine is printing a document that contains both color and black-and-white areas.
  • The machine stops printing if either the total print limit or copy limit is reached while the machine is copying a document that contains both color and black-and-white areas.
  • The two printing functions with the fewest number of pages remaining until the page limit are displayed on the Copy Basic Features and Print Setting screen. However, only the total print function is displayed if it has the fewest number of remaining pages.
  • The machine stops sending a fax if the Black Scan Limit is reached while faxing a document either from memory or directly to the recipient.
  • The machine stops scanning if the scan limit is reached while the machine is scanning originals that are being fed from the optional feeder. (These originals that were scanned before the limit is reached are not added to the scan count.)
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the number.
  • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once the page limit is reached, copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
  • The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as two pages.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Changing the Password and Page Limit

Return to Overview

You can change the password and page limit settings that you have registered.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register ID/Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the Department ID whose password and page limit you want to change, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Clear) to clear the current password.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the new password, then press [OK].

If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by entering only the Department ID.

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Limit On/Off & Page Limit>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired function, then press [OK].

You can select <Total Print Limit>, <Total Color Print Limit>, <Total Black Print Limit>, <Color Copy Limit>, <Color Scan Limit>, <Color Print Limit>, <Black Copy Limit>, <Black Scan Limit>, or <Black Print Limit>.

  • <Total Print Limit> is the sum of <Total Color Print Limit> and <Total Black Print Limit>.
  • <Total Color Print Limit> is the sum of <Color Copy Limit> and <Color Print Limit>.
  • <Total Black Print Limit> is the sum of <Black Copy Limit> and <Black Print Limit>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not set a page limit restriction. Skip to step 17.
  • <On>: Set a page limit restriction.
  1. Press (Clear) to clear the current page limit.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the maximum number of pages, then press [OK].
  • If either the color or black-and-white page limit is reached with [Auto-color Select] selected, you cannot perform any operations.
  • The machine stops printing if either the color or black-and-white page limit is reached while the machine is printing a document that contains both color and black-and-white areas.
  • The machine stops printing if either the total print limit or copy limit is reached while the machine is copying a document that contains both color and black-and-white areas.
  • The two printing functions with the fewest number of pages remaining until the page limit are displayed on the Copy Basic Features and Print Setting screen. However, only the total print function is displayed if it has the fewest number of remaining pages.
  • The machine stops sending a fax if the Black Scan Limit is reached while faxing a document either from memory or directly to the recipient.
  • The machine stops scanning if the scan limit is reached while the machine is scanning originals that are being fed from the optional feeder. (These originals that were scanned before the limit is reached are not added to the scan count.)
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the number.
  • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once the page limit is reached, copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
  • The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as two pages.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Erasing the Department ID and Password

Return to Overview

You can erase the Department ID and password that you have registered.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register ID/Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Edit/Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the Department ID that you want to erase, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes> or <No>, then press [OK].
  • <No>: Does not erase the selected Department ID and any of its settings.
  • <Yes>: Erases the selected Department ID and all of its settings.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking Counter Information

Return to Overview

You can check how much paper was used by each department.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Page Totals>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the Department ID that you want to check, then press [OK].
  1. Check the counter information.

You can check <Total Prints>, <Total Color Print>, <Total Black Prints>, <Color Copy>, <Color Scan>, <Color Print>, <Black Copy>, <Black Scan>, or <Black Print>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Clearing the Page Total of a Department

Return to Overview

You can clear the page total for a department.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Page Totals>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the Department ID whose page total you want to clear, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Clear>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes> or <No>, then press [OK].
  • <No>:Does not clear the page totals.
  • <Yes>:Clear the page totals.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Clearing the Page Total of All the Departments

Return to Overview

You can clear the page totals for all the departments.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Page Totals>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <All Clear>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes> or <No>, then press [OK].
  • <No>: Does not clear the page totals.
  • <Yes>: Clear the page totals.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing Counter Information (DEPT. INFO LIST)

Return to Overview

You can print a list of how much paper was used by each department.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Page Totals>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the Department ID that you want to print a list, then press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired function, then press [OK].

You can select <All>, <Total Print Only>, <Color Only>, or <Black Only>.

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to print the counter information, use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs

Return to Overview

You can set whether to refuse print jobs sent from the computer to which a Department ID has not been registered.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Allow Unknown ID Printing>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <On>: The machine accepts print jobs sent from the computer to which a Department ID has not been registered.
  • <Off>: The machine refuses print jobs sent from the computer to which a Department ID has not been registered.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Accepting Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to refuse scan jobs sent from the computer to which a Department ID has not been registered.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Allow Unknown ID R. Scan>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <On>: The machine accepts scan jobs sent from the computer to which a Department ID has not been registered.
  • <Off>: The machine refuses scan jobs sent from the computer to which a Department ID has not been registered.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Accepting B&W Copy Jobs without Entering the Department ID and Password

Return to Overview

The Allow Black Copy Jobs mode enables you to make black and white copies without entering the Department ID and password.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Allow Black Copy Jobs>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <On>: Black and white copy jobs are allowed without entering the Department ID and password.
  • <Off>: The Department ID and password must be entered to allow copy jobs.

If <Allow Black Copy Jobs> is set to <On>, <Black Copy> appears on the screen.
To make black and white copies, press the right Any key to select <Black Copy>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Managing User IDs

You can specify settings for the User ID Management. The User ID Management function enables you to register up to 1000 User IDs for Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn and 100 User IDs for Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When you use User ID Management, you need to register a user ID with the System Manager privileges to restrict the access to the <System Management Set.> menu from the control panel, or using the Remote UI. Otherwise, all users will be considered as System Manager, and anyone can access the <System Management Set.> menu from the control panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction. (See "Managing the Department/User ID from a Computer.")
  • You need to register the User ID and password before you set this mode to <On>.
  • If both of Department ID Management and User ID management are enabled at a same time, a department ID must be allocated for each user ID. If a department ID is not allocated for a user ID, you can not login with the user ID.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User ID Management>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>.
  • <On>: User ID Management is enabled. If you select <On>, go to the next step.
  • <Off>: User ID Management is disabled. If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step 8.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The user ID entered when you log in to the machine is not used as a part of the file name of the document you are sending.
  • <On>: The user ID entered when you log in to the machine is used as a part of the file name of the document you are sending.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restricting the Remote UI

You can set whether to enable the Remote UI to operate the machine and change settings.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Remote UI>, then press [OK].
  1. Check the message on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <On>: You can specify settings and operate the machine through the Remote UI.
  • <Off>: You cannot specify settings and operate the machine through the Remote UI.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Restricting Access to Destinations

You can send the documents with following restrictions or settings.


Setting a Password for the Address Book

Restricting the New Address

Restricting PC Faxing

Restricting Recall

Confirming Entered Fax Numbers

Restricting Broadcasting

Restricting Sending Documents to a USB Memory


Setting a Password for the Address Book

Return to Overview

You can set a password for the Address Book. To edit the Address Book, you must enter the correct password.


Remark
  • If you want to cancel password protection, press (Clear) on step 6, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Restrict the Send Function>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the password for confirmation, then press [OK].

If you enter a wrong password, you have to start over from the first entry.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restricting the New Address

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to restrict the entering of new destinations.
The default setting is <Off>.
When you set <Restrict New Addresses> to <On>, the following are restricted:

  • Specifying a destination using the numeric keys.
  • Changing registered destinations.
  • Registering new destinations.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Restrict the Send Function>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Restrict New Addresses>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not set a new destination restriction.
  • <On>: Set a new destination restriction.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restricting PC Faxing

Return to Overview

You can set whether to refuse fax jobs sent from the computer using fax driver.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Restrict the Send Function>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Allow Fax Driver TX>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not set a FAX Driver Sending restriction.
  • <On>: Set a FAX Driver Sending restriction.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restricting Recall

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to restrict the use of Recall function.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Restrict the Send Function>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Restrict Sending From Log>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not set a recall use restriction.
  • <On>: Set a recall use restriction.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Confirming Entered Fax Numbers

Return to Overview

You can set whether to display a fax number entry screen and enter the fax numbers again when you send a fax. The fax number entry screen will be displayed when you enter a fax number using - (numeric keys).
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Restrict the Send Function>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Confirm Entered Fax No.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The confirmation screen does not appear.
  • <On>: The confirmation screen appears when you enter a fax number using - (numeric keys).
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restricting Broadcasting

Return to Overview

If a fax number is included in the destinations, you can select one of the three following options. The default setting is <Off>.

  • Display the confirmation screen before sending a scanned image.
  • Do not send the scanned image.
  • Send the scanned image without the confirmation screen.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Restrict the Send Function>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Restrict Seq. Broadcast>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, <Broadcast Confirmation>, or <Prohibit Broadcast>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Allows sending the documents to multiple recipients.
  • <Broadcast Confirmation>: The message appears after pressing [Start] to confirm whether or not to send documents to multiple recipients. The message only appears when a fax number is included in the recipients.
  • <Prohibit Broadcast>: Does not allow sending the documents to multiple recipients.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restricting Sending Documents to a USB Memory

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to restrict sending documents to a USB memory.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Memory Media Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on Memory Media>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: You cannot send documents to a USB memory.
  • <On>: You can send documents to a USB memory.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Auto Online/Offline

To use the Network Scan function, the scanner must be switched online. This section explains how to set the machine so that it will automatically switch the scanner online and offline.


Remark

Auto Online

Auto Offline


Auto Online

Return to Overview

If <Auto Online> is set to <On>, the machine automatically goes online when you select <Remote Scan> on the Select Store Type screen, then press [OK].
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Online/Offline>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Online>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The machine does not automatically go online.
  • <On>: The machine automatically goes online when you select <Remote Scan>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Auto Offline

Return to Overview

If <Auto Offline> is set to <On>, the machine automatically goes offline when the Auto Clear mode initiates.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • If the Auto Clear mode is not set, the machine automatically goes offline after approximately two minutes. For information on the Auto Clear mode, see "Setting the Auto Clear Time."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Online/Offline>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Offline>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The machine does not automatically go offline.
  • <On>: The machine automatically goes offline when the Auto Clear mode initiates.

If <Auto Offline> is set to <Off> and the Auto Clear mode is set, the screen returns to the default screen but the machine still remains online even after the Auto Clear mode initiates.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking the Job Log

You can specify whether to check the job log. When you set <Job Log Display> to <On>, you can check the job log using the System Monitor screen. When you set <Job Log Display> to <Off>, the job log does not appear on the System Monitor screen.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • When you set <Job Log Display> to <Off>, the Activity Report and the Fax Activity Report will not be printed automatically.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Job Log Display>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not display job log on system monitor.
  • <On>: Display job log on system monitor.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Storing Log to USB Memory

You can set whether to record the log of storing job to USB memory.
The default setting is <Do Not Retain>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Memory Media Store Log>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Retain> or <Do Not Retain>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restricting the USB Interface Port

You can specify whether to reject jobs through the USB port.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • This function restricts jobs through the USB port on the side body of the machine. This function does not affect job through the USB memory connected to the right side of the control panel.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Use USB Device>, then press [OK].
  1. Check the message on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <On>: The machine accepts jobs through the USB port.
  • <Off>: The machine does not accept jobs through the USB port.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Displaying the Current Department ID/User Name

If you are using a login service, you can display the Department ID or user name which is currently being used to log on to the machine in the Job/Print Status Display Area.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept. ID/User Name Display>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not display User Name and Department ID in the Job/Print Status Display Area.
  • <On>: Display User Name and Department ID in the Job/Print Status Display Area.
  • If you set Display Dept. ID/User Name to <On>, and Department ID Management or User ID Management has not been enabled, the Department ID/User ID is not displayed.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Restricting Printing Images from a USB Memory

This mode enables you to restrict printing images from a USB memory.
The default setting is <On>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Memory Media Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Direct Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: You cannot print images from a USB memory.
  • <On>: You can print images from a USB memory.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Introduction of the Machine

This category describes the features of the machine and its useful functions.

Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be available.



Machine Components

External View (Front)

External View (Back)

Internal View


External View (Front)

Return to Overview

This section describes the names and functions of all the parts on the outside and inside of the machine.


1 Feeder
Originals placed in the Feeder are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area. The feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to make one- or two-sided copies.
2 Slide Guides
Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the originals.
3 Original Supply Tray
Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area of the platen glass. Place originals into this tray with the surface that you want to scan face up.
4 Original Output Tray
Originals that have been scanned from the original supply tray are output to the original output tray in the order that they are fed into the feeder.
5 Original Stopper
Prevents the originals from falling off the paper delivery tray.
Open the stopper from its original position for LTR/A4 size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the extension first, and then open the stopper.
6 Control Panel
Machine controls.
7 Stack Bypass Tray
Feeds non-standard size or thick/thin type paper stacks.
8 Stack Bypass Tray Extension
Pull out to load paper stack.
9 Slide Guides for Stack Bypass Tray
Adjusts to the width of the paper.
10 Paper Stopper
Prevents the paper from falling off the paper delivery tray.
Open the stopper from its original position for LTR/A4 size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the extension first, and then open the stopper.
11 Paper Delivery Tray
Copies, prints and faxes are output to the paper delivery tray.

12 Main Power Switch
Press to the "I" side to turn the power ON.
13 USB Port
Connect the USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.
14 Ethernet Port
Connect the network cable.
15 External Device Jack
Connect an external device.
16 Telephone Line Jack
Connect the external telephone cable.
17 Paper Drawer
Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)).
18 Optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1
Holds the additional paper supply. Up to 500 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)) can be held.


External View (Back)

Return to Overview


19 Back Cover
Open this cover to clear paper jams.
20 Power socket
Connect the power cord.


Internal View

Return to Overview


21 Scanning Area
Originals placed in the feeder are scanned here.
22 Platen Glass
Place originals here when scanning books, thick originals, thin originals, transparencies, etc.
23 Toner Cartridges
When toner runs out, pull out the empty toner cartridges, and replace them with new ones.
24 Delivery Feeder Unit (Electrostatic Transfer Belt)
Transfers toner to paper. Do not place any objects on or touch the transfer belt. Doing so deteriorates print quality.
25 Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridges or to clear paper jams.

26 Duplex Unit
The duplex unit enables you to use the 2-Sided mode for copying or printing.
27 Fixing Unit
The fixing unit fixes the toner to the paper. The parts inside the fixing unit are subject to high temperatures. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area.


Control Panel

Main Control Panel

Left Side of Control Panel

Right Side of Control Panel


Main Control Panel

Return to Overview

This section describes the names and functions of the keys on the control panel.


* The Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn is used for illustration purposes in this section.


1 [Power] switch (Sub Power Supply)
Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When the control panel is turned OFF, the machine is in the Sleep mode.
2 Numeric keys
Use to enter alphanumeric characters.
3 [Clear] key
Press to clear entered values or characters.
4 [Log In/Out] key
Press to enter the Security mode.
5 Volume Control Dial
Move to adjust the line volume.
6 [Stop] key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan or copy job.
7 Main Power Indicator
Lights when the main power is turned ON.
8 Error Indicator
Blinks or lights up if there is an error with the machine. When the Error indicator flashes, follow the instructions that appear on the display. When the Error indicator maintains a steady red light, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
9 [Start] key
Press to start an operation.
10 Processing/Data Indicator
Blinks or lights up green when the machine is performing operations. When the Processing/Data indicator maintains a steady green light, a job is waiting or a document has been received in memory.
11 [Reset] key
Press to restore the current settings to the Standard mode.
12 [OK] key
Press to confirm the settings and proceed to the next screen.
13 Scroll Wheel
Turn left and right to select menu items or setting items.
14 [], [], [], [] keys
Press to move the cursor position.
15 [Back] key
Press to return to the previous screen.
16 Any key
Press to select the setting item displayed on the bottom of the display.
17 [Status Monitor/Cancel] key
Press to display the System Monitor screen. The System Monitor screen enables you to check the status and log of Copy, Send, Fax, and Print jobs and cancel the ongoing jobs. The status of device or consumable can also be checked.
18 Display
The settings screen for each function is shown on this display. Some settings screens may have several pages. (See "Display Parts and Functions." )
19 Custom Key 2
You can assign the desired function for this key. For details, see "Registering the Custom Keys."
20 Custom Key 1
You can assign the desired function for this key. For details, see "Registering the Custom Keys."
21 [Main Menu] key
Press to display the setting menu. Press to return to the Main Menu screen when you are on the mode screen.
  • Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel

The angle of the control panel is adjustable in the range shown below.

  • Do not apply excess force to the control panel when adjusting its angle.


Left Side of Control Panel

Return to Overview



Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn


Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn


22 SD/MS Card Slot
Insert an SD/MS Card when using the Direct Print function.
23 CF Card Slot
Insert a CF Card when using the Direct Print function.
  • When two different types of cards are inserted, the machine only recognizes the one that was inserted first.


Right Side of Control Panel

Return to Overview



24 [Power] switch (Sub Power Supply) 25 USB Slot
Insert a USB memory media device when scanning documents to it or printing image files stored in it (Direct Print)*.
26 Volume Control Dial
* The Direct Print function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Display Parts and Functions

The settings screen for each function is shown on the display on the control panel. Select and set items using the [OK] key and Any keys. (See "Main Control Panel.") For details about each setting, refer to the pages for the corresponding function.


Remark
  • Depending on the number of destinations registered, after the main power switch is turned ON, you may not be able to perform operations using the control panel when the main menu screen appears. If this happens, wait until the machine responses to the key operations.
  • Depending on your needs, you can change the main menu screen which appears when the main power switch is turned ON. For details, see "Setting the Initial Function"
  • If the Auto Clear function is activated, the display returns to the main menu screen.
  • Log in mode is displayed only when Department/User ID Management is set to <On> in <System Management Set.>. For instructions, see "Department/User ID Management."

Main Menu Screen

Copy Top Screen

Send Type Selection Screen

Store Type Selection Screen

Select Memory Media Screen

Log In Mode


Main Menu Screen

Return to Overview


Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn


Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn


1 Copy
Displays the Copy top screen. (See "Copy Top Screen.")
2 Send/Fax
Displays the Send Type Selection screen. (See "Send Type Selection Screen.")
3 Scan to Store
Displays the Store Type Selection screen. (See "Store Type Selection Screen.")
4 Direct Print*
Displays the Select Memory Media screen. (See "Select Memory Media Screen.")
5 Additional Func. (Select with the right Any key)
On the Additional Functions screen, you can adjust the machine settings to customize the way the machine works. (See "Machine Settings.")
6 Device Info. (Select with the left Any key)
On the Device Information screen, you can check the current machine status. (See "Checking the Device Information.")

* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.



Copy Top Screen

Return to Overview


1 Selected item and its description
Shows the highlighted item and its description.
2 Current Setting
Lists the current settings.
3 Scroll Bar
Indicates that more items can be viewed using [], [] or (Scroll Wheel).
4 Quantity
Displays the copy quantity.
5 Paper Supply
Displays the selected paper.
6 Copy Ratio
Displays the copy ratio.


1 Color Mode Settings
Sets the color mode (color or black and white).
2 Paper Source Settings Selects the paper source.
3 Density/Background Removal Settings
Sets the density.
4 2-Sided Settings
Sets 2-sided copying.
5 Preview Img.
You can confirm the current standard settings. (See "Checking Current Settings.")
6 Mode Memory (Select with the left Any key)
You can store and recall frequently used copy settings and recall them. (See "Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory).")


7 Copy Ratio Settings
Enlarges or reduces the copy size.
8 Original Image Quality Settings
Sets the image quality of the original.
9 N on 1 Settings
Reduces the size of multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper.
10 Sharpness Settings
Sets the sharpness of the image.


11 Frame Erase Settings
Erases shadows and lines that appear when using various types of originals.
12 Color Balance
Adjusts color balance depending on the color of the originals.
13 Collate Settings
Sorts copies into sets arranged in page order.
14 ID Card Copy
Copies the both sides of an ID card on one side of paper.


15 Copies
Sets the number of copies.
16 Standard Settings
Changes the Standard mode.
17 Back
Select this item to return to the previous screen.


Send Type Selection Screen

Return to Overview


1 Address Book
Displays the Address Book screen. (See "Registering Destinations in the Address Book.")
2 Search LDAP Server
Specify a fax number and an e-mail address via an LDAP server. (See "Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server" and "Specifying E-Mail Addresses via an LDAP Server.")
3 New Fax Entry
Enter a fax number using the numeric keys. (See "Basic Methods for Sending Faxes.")
4 New E-mail Entry
Displays the E-mail address entry screen. (See "Basic Methods for Sending E-Mails.")
5 New I-Fax Entry
Displays the I-Fax address entry screen. (See "Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes.")


6 New File Server Entry
Displays the file server address entry screen. (See "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server.")
7 Specify from Log
Select a destination from the last three destinations. (See "Job Recall (Fax)", "Job Recall (E-Mail)," and "Job Recall (Scan to File Server).")
8 Back
Select this item to return to the previous screen.


Store Type Selection Screen

Return to Overview


1 Store on File Server
Stores the scanned originals on the specified file server. (See "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server.")
2 Store on Memory Media
Stores the scanned originals in the memory media. (See "Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a USB Memory.")
3 Remote Scan
Enables to use the Network Scan function. (See "Network Settings.")
4 Back
Select this item to return to the previous screen.


Select Memory Media Screen

Return to Overview


Remark
  • This function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.

For details about the Select Memory Media Screen, see "Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)."

Insert a memory media, select a medium, then press [OK].



Log In Mode

Return to Overview

If the Department ID Management or User ID Management is set, the Log In screen is displayed. For information on the Department ID Management or User ID Management, see "Security."

  • For Department ID Management

Enter the Department ID and password, then press (Log In/Out). For details, see "Procedure before Using the Machine."


  • For User ID Management

Enter the User ID and password, then press (Log In/Out). For details, see "Procedure before Using the Machine."



Entering Characters

For screens that require alphanumeric entries, follow the procedure below to enter characters.


  • Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to move the cursor position left or right.

  • Use [] and [] to move the cursor position up and down.

  • Press [OK] to enter the highlighted character or space and to determine the entry mode.
  • Press [], [] and [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to change the entry mode, then press [OK].
  • <A/1>: Alphanumeric character entry mode
  • <Sym>: Symbol entry mode
  • You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers.

  • Select <Backspace> by pressing the left Any key to clear the entered characters one by one.

  • Select <Set> by pressing the right Any key to complete the entry and return to the previous screen.


Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses. You can also register multiple destinations for a group address.

Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job.


Remark
  • Storing addresses in the Address Book is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • You can register a total of 300 destinations in the Address Book, including 200 destinations registered in one-touch.
  • New destinations cannot be registered in the Address Book if <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> is set to <On>.
  • Each address entry is treated as a single entry, so if a destination is registered in a group address, that destination and the group address are counted as two entries.
  • Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the machine. For information on how to export and import the Address Book, see "Import/Export Function."
  • For easy reference, it is recommended to print the list of recipients registered in the Address Book and one-touch. For information on how to print the lists, see "Printing Address Book List."

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book


Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book


Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book


Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book


Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book


Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book


Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book


Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the Address Book


Erasing Addresses from the Address Book


Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch


Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch


Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch


Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch


Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch


Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch


Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch


Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch


Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch



Storing/Editing Address Book

Return to Overview

You can register up to 300 destinations in the Address Book.


Remark
  • This function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.

Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book

Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book

Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book

Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book

Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book

Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book

Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book

Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the Address Book

Erasing Addresses from the Address Book


Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book

Return to Overview


Remark
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register New>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient's name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the fax number.
  • You can enter up to 40 characters for fax number.
  • If you want to move the position of the cursor, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel).
  • If you want to delete the number or character immediately to the left of the cursor, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Backspace>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to insert a pause of several seconds, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press [OK]. If you insert a pause within the fax number, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers. If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number, the letter <P> appears. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the fax number.
  • If you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which accepts only tone signals, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Tone>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to insert a space between numbers, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Space>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to delete the entire number you entered, press (Clear).
  • You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number.
  • If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
  1. If you want to set the ECM TX, sending speed, and long distance settings, press the right Any key to select <Option>.

These settings are optional. If you do not want to set the optional settings, skip to step 20.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <ECM TX>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Sending Speed>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the sending speed, then press [OK].

If your document transmissions are slow to start, it may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, or <4800 bps>.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Long Distance>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the long distance setting, then press [OK].

Select <Domestic> for dialing domestic (local) telephone numbers. Select <Long Distance (1)> if communication errors frequently occur when you make overseas calls (when the overseas telephone number is registered in the Address Book). If errors persist, try selecting <Long Distance (2)> or <Long Distance (3)>.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Destination>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another fax number, repeat from step 6.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register the fax numbers that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.


Remark
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register New>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Follow steps 4 to 7 in "Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server" to search destinations.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].
  • You can select up to 32 destinations.
  • If you want to select the first 32 destinations, press the left Any key to select <Menu> and use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Select All>. (If a destination is selected, <Select All> changes to <Clear Selection>.)
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If only one destination is selected:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Name>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Confirm the recipient's name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

If you edit the recipient's name obtained from the search results, see "Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book."

  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Destination>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Confirm the destination.

If you edit the destination obtained from the search results and specify the optional settings, see "Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book."


  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Destination>, then press [OK].

  • 6. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

  • If multiple destinations are selected:

  • 1. Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book

Return to Overview


Remark
  • By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register New>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient's name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's e-mail address.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the e-mail address.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another e-mail address, repeat from step 6.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register the e-mail addresses that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.


Remark
  • By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register New>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Follow steps 4 to 7 in "Specifying E-Mail Addresses via an LDAP Server" to search destinations.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].
  • You can select up to 32 destinations.
  • If you want to select the first 32 destinations, press the left Any key to select <Menu> and use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Select All>. (If a destination is selected, <Select All> changes to <Clear Selection>.)
  • If you press the left Any key to select <Menu> and use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register E-mail for I-Fax>, the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination. To register e-mail addresses as I-fax addresses, register one e-mail address at a time.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • If only one destination is selected:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Name>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Confirm the recipient's name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

If you edit the recipient's name obtained from the search results, see "Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book."

  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Destination>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Confirm the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

If you edit the destination obtained from the search results, see "Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book."


  • 5. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

  • If multiple destinations are selected:

  • 1. Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book

Return to Overview


Remark
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register New>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient's name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's I-fax address.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the I-fax address.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another I-fax address, repeat from step 6.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book

Return to Overview


Remark
  • If <Language Switch> in Common Settings is set to <On>, the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type or Select Store Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK]. Or, in the Select Store Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, press [OK], use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register New>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <File>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the file server name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the file server name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a server protocol, then press [OK].
  • <FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information Services 5.0 on Windows 2000 Server, Internet Information Services 5.1 on Windows XP Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 on Windows Server 2003, Internet Information Services 7.0 on Windows Vista/Server 2008, Internet Information Services 7.5 under Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.
  • <Windows (SMB)>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later) or Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008.
  • <Windows (SMB): Browse>: Select this protocol if you want to specify a file server connected to a specific network.
  • After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to elapse before selecting <Windows (SMB): Browse>. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See "Setting Startup Time.")

  • If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Host Name>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use the software keyboard to enter the host name.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters (47 characters if <FTP> is selected) for the host name.
  • A host name is a unique name assigned to identify each host computer that provides services on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.

  • 3. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Folder Path>, then press [OK].

  • 5. Use the software keyboard to enter the path to the folder.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the folder path.
  • A file path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway.

  • 6. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 7. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Name>, then press [OK].

  • 8. Use the software keyboard to enter the user name.
  • You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway.

  • 9. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 10. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].

  • 11. Use the software keyboard to enter the password.
  • You can enter up to 24 characters when <FTP> is selected as the server protocol, or up to 14 when <Windows (SMB)> is selected.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway.

  • 12. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 13. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 14. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

  • If you select <Windows (SMB): Browse>:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired workgroup, then press [OK].
  • If the desired workgroup is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired workgroup.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press [OK].
  • If the desired file server is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired file server.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed after pressing [OK], enter your user name (up to 24 characters) and network password (up to 14 characters), then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 4. Specify the folder name, user name, and password as described from steps 5 to 11 in "If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>."

  • 5. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  • 6. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another filer server address, repeat from step 6.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book

Return to Overview

The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinations as a single destination.


Remark
  • You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.
  • The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses. You cannot register a group address in a group address.
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register New>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Group>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the group name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the group name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination to store in the group address, then press [OK].
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again and press [OK] to clear the check mark.
  • Use [] or [] to select the index key (e.g., [ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries. Select [All] to return to the full address list.
  • If the desired destination is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination.
  • You can select a destination and press the left Any key to select <Details> to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destination. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.

  1. Repeat step 11 to select all destinations you want to register in the group address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another group address, repeat from step 6.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the Address Book

Return to Overview

You can check and edit the details of the destinations registered in the Address Book.


Remark
  • This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also check and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Confirm/Edit Address Book Dest.>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit, then press the left Any key to select <Edit/Erase>.
  • You cannot check or edit multiple destinations at the same time.
  • Use [] or [] to select the index key (e.g., [ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries. Select [All] to return to the full address list.
  • If the desired destination is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination.
  • If you select [All], destinations registered in one-touch are also displayed. However, you cannot edit those destinations. For information on how to edit the destinations registered in one-touch, see "Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch."
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Confirm/Edit Address Book Dest.>, then press [OK].
  1. Check or edit the address details.

  • If you want to check the address details:

  • 1. Check the details, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  • If you want to edit the address details:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the item you want to edit, then press [OK].

  • 2. Confirm that <Edit> is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Edit the address details.

Follow the same procedure as you used when registering destinations.


  • 4. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Erasing Addresses from the Address Book

Return to Overview


Remark
  • This section describes how to erase the destinations registered in the Address Book from the Additional Functions screen. You can also erase them from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to erase.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase from Add. Book>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Address>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit, then press the left Any key to select <Edit/Erase>.
  • You cannot erase multiple destinations at the same time.
  • Use [] or [] to select the index key (e.g., [ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries. Select [All] to return to the full address list.
  • If the desired destination is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination.
  • If you select [All], destinations registered in one-touch are also displayed. However, you cannot delete those destinations. For information on how to delete the destinations registered in one-touch, see "Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch."
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase from Add. Book>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

If you want to cancel erasing the destination, select <No>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Storing/Editing One-Touch

Return to Overview

You can register up to 200 destinations in one-touch.


Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch

Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch

Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch

Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch

Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch

Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch

Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch

Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch

Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch


Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch

Return to Overview


Remark
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient's name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
  • You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch name.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the fax number.
  • You can enter up to 40 characters for fax number.
  • If you want to move the position of the cursor, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel).
  • If you want to delete the number or character immediately to the left of the cursor, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Backspace>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to insert a pause of several seconds, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press [OK]. If you insert a pause within the fax number, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers. If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number, the letter <P> appears. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the fax number.
  • If you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which accepts only tone signals, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Tone>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to insert a space between numbers, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Space>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to delete the entire number you entered, press (Clear).
  • You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number.
  • If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
  1. If you want to set the ECM TX, sending speed, and long distance settings, press the right Any key to select <Option>.

These settings are optional. If you do not want to set the optional settings, skip to step 23.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <ECM TX>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Sending Speed>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the sending speed, then press [OK].

If your document transmissions are slow to start, it may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, or <4800 bps>.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Long Distance>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the long distance setting, then press [OK].

Select <Domestic> for dialing domestic (local) telephone numbers. Select <Long Distance (1)> if communication errors frequently occur when you make overseas calls (when the overseas telephone number is registered in the Address Book). If errors persist, try selecting <Long Distance (2)> or <Long Distance (3)>.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Destination>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another fax number, repeat from step 5.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register the fax numbers that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.


Remark
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Follow steps 4 to 7 in "Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server" to search destinations.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].

You cannot select multiple destinations at a time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm the recipient's name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

If you edit the recipient's name obtained from the search results, see "Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch."

  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display One-touch Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch name.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Destination>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm the destination.

If you edit the destination obtained from the search results and specify the optional settings, see "Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Destination>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch

Return to Overview


Remark
  • By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <E-mail>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient's name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
  • You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch name.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's e-mail address.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the e-mail address.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another e-mail address, repeat from step 5.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register the e-mail addresses that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.


Remark
  • By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
  1. Follow steps 4 to 7 in "Specifying E-Mail Addresses via an LDAP Server" to search destinations.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].
  • You cannot select multiple destinations at a time.
  • If you press the left Any key to select <Menu> and use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register E-mail for I-Fax>, the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination.
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
  • You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm the recipient's name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

If you edit the recipient's name obtained from the search results, see "Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch."

  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display One-touch Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch name.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Display Destination>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.

If you edit the destination obtained from the search results, see "Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch."

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch

Return to Overview


Remark
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <I-Fax>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient's name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
  • You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch name.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient's I-fax address.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the I-fax address.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another I-fax address, repeat from step 5.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch

Return to Overview


Remark
  • If <Language Switch> in Common Settings is set to <On>, the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type or Select Store Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>. Or, in the Select Store Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, press [OK], then press the right any key to select <One-touch>.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <File>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the file server name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the file server name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient's name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
  • You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch name.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a server protocol, then press [OK].
  • <FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information Services 5.0 on Windows 2000 Server, Internet Information Services 5.1 on Windows XP Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 on Windows Server 2003, Internet Information Services 7.0 on Windows Vista/Server 2008, Internet Information Services 7.5 under Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.
  • <Windows (SMB)>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later) or Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008.
  • <Windows (SMB): Browse>: Select this protocol if you want to specify a file server connected to a specific network.
  • After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to elapse before selecting <Windows (SMB): Browse>. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See "Setting Startup Time.")

  • If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Host Name>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use the software keyboard to enter the host name.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters (47 characters if <FTP> is selected) for the host name.
  • A host name is a unique name assigned to identify each host computer that provides services on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.

  • 3. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Folder Path>, then press [OK].

  • 5. Use the software keyboard to enter the path to the folder.
  • You can enter up to 120 characters for the folder path.
  • A file path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway.

  • 6. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 7. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Name>, then press [OK].

  • 8. Use the software keyboard to enter the user name.
  • You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway.

  • 9. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 10. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].

  • 11. Use the software keyboard to enter the password.
  • You can enter up to 24 characters when <FTP> is selected as the server protocol, or up to 14 when <Windows (SMB)> is selected.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway.

  • 12. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 13. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

  • 14. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

  • If you select <Windows (SMB): Browse>:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired workgroup, then press [OK].
  • If the desired workgroup is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired workgroup.

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press [OK].
  • If the desired file server is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired file server.

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  • If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed after pressing [OK], enter your user name (up to 24 characters) and network password (up to 14 characters), then press the right Any key to select <Set>.


  • 4. Specify the folder name, user name, and password as described from steps 5 to 11 in "If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>."

  • 5. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  • 6. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another file server address, repeat from step 5.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch

Return to Overview

The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinations (199 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) as a single destination.


Remark
  • You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.
  • The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses. You cannot register a group address in a group address.
  • This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Group>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the group name.
  • You can enter up to 16 characters for the group name.
  • Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its name, in alphabetical order.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch Name>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
  • You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch name.
  1. If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Destination Registration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination to store in the group address, then press [OK].
  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again and press [OK] to clear the check mark.
  • Use [] or [] to select the index key (e.g., [ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries. Select [All] to return to the full address list.
  • If the desired destination is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination.
  • You can select a destination and press the left Any key to select <Details> to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destination. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.

  1. Repeat step 14 to select all destinations you want to register in the group address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Register>.

If you want to register another group address, repeat from step 5.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch

Return to Overview

You can check and edit the details of the destinations registered in one-touch.


Remark
  • This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also check and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to check or edit.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Confirm/Edit One-touch Dest.>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to check or edit, then press [OK].
  • You cannot check or edit multiple one-touch destinations at the same time.
  • If the desired one-touch is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired one-touch.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details/Edit>, then press [OK].
  1. Check or edit the address details.

  • If you want to check the address details:

  • 1. Check the details, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.

  • If you want to edit the address details:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the item you want to edit, then press [OK].

  • 2. Confirm that <Edit> is selected, then press [OK].

  • 3. Edit the address details.

Follow the same procedure as you used when registering destinations.


  • 4. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch

Return to Overview


Remark
  • This section describes how to erase one-touch destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also erase them from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
  • In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to erase.
  • Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
  • Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase from One-touch>, then press [OK].
  • Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using - (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (See "Setting a Password for the Address Book.")

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to erase, then press [OK].
  • You cannot erase multiple one-touch destinations at the same time.
  • If the desired one-touch is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired one-touch.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

If you want to cancel erasing the destination, select <No>.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Toner Cartridges

The lifetime of the Canon genuine toner cartridges used in this machine (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) is approximately 6000 pages for K (Black) and is approximately 6000 pages for each C (Cyan), M (Magenta) and Y (Yellow). The page counts are based on 5% coverage* when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting. The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type of originals printed. If your average original contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts, the life of the toner cartridge will be shorter as they consume more toner. When you are replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to use a toner cartridge designed for this product. To purchase the Canon genuine replacement toner cartridge, contact your local Canon dealer or Canon Customer Care Center (U.S.A.:1-800-OK-CANON, Canada:1-800-652-2666).

* The term "5% coverage" denotes a document on which the area covered with toner is 5% of the total area of a sheet.


Model Name Supported Canon
Genuine Toner Cartridge
Print Yield
Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Canon CRG111 Black
Canon CRG111 Magenta
Canon CRG111 Yellow
Canon CRG111 Cyan
Approx. 6,000 pages
Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn

Maintaining the Toner Cartridges

Checking the Toner Level


Maintaining the Toner Cartridges

Return to Overview

Note the following when handling toner cartridges.


  • Keep the toner cartridges away from computer screens, disk drives, and floppy disks. The magnets inside the toner cartridges may harm these items.
  • Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or rapid changes in temperature.
  • Storage temperature range: 32 to 95°F (0 to 35 °C)
  • Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (no condensation)
  • Do not expose the toner cartridges to direct sunlight or bright light for more than five minutes.
  • Store the toner cartridges in their protective bags. Do not open the bags until you are ready to install the toner cartridges in the machine.
  • Save the protective toner cartridge bags in case you need to repack and transport the toner cartridges at a later date.
  • If the toner cartridge has to be removed from the machine for maintenance, place it in the protective bag that it came in or wrap it with a thick cloth immediately.
  • Do not store the toner cartridges in a salty atmosphere or where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays.
  • Do not remove the toner cartridges from the machine unnecessarily.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridges. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
  • Always hold the toner cartridges by their handles to avoid touching the drum protective shutter.
  • Do not place the toner cartridges in an upright or an upside down position. If toner becomes caked in the toner cartridges, it may become impossible to free it even by shaking the toner cartridges.
  • For optimum print quality, when you replace toner cartridges, using Canon genuine ones is recommended.
  • [Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges]
    Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of non-genuine Canon toner cartridge or counterfeit toner cartridge.
    For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.


Checking the Toner Level

Return to Overview

The Device Info. screen indicates one of three levels for the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. If the message <Empty> appears, it is recommended that the toner cartridges be replaced. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges.")

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Device Info.>.
  • The screen below indicates there is sufficient toner in the toner cartridge.

  • The screen below indicates that only a small amount of toner remaining inside the machine, You can continue printing. Proceed to step 4.

  • It is recommended that you purchase a new toner cartridge to have it available when needed.

  • The screen below indicates the toner cartridge is running out of toner.

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Recovery Steps> and follow the instructions on the display to replace the toner cartridge.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Checking the Device Information

On the Device Information screen you can check the current machine status.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the left Any key to select <Device Info.>.

1 Toner
The status of toner is displayed.
2 Available Memory
The remaining amount of available system memory is displayed in percentage.
3 Paper Supply
The paper supply, and the paper type, paper size loaded in the paper drawer(s)* are displayed.

*The paper drawer 2 is displayed only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

You can also return to the Main Menu screen by pressing [OK].



Placing Originals

Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder, depending on the size and type of the original, and the copy modes that you want to use.


On the Platen Glass

In the Feeder


On the Platen Glass

Return to Overview

Place the originals on the platen glass when copying bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies.

  1. Lift up the feeder.
  1. Place your original face down.
  1. Align the original with the appropriate paper size marks.

If your original does not match any of the paper size marks, align the center of your original with the arrow mark.

  1. Gently close the feeder.

The original is ready for scanning.

  • Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.


In the Feeder

Return to Overview

Place the originals into the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same time, and press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the scanning area and scans them.

  1. Fan the original stack and even the edges.
  1. Adjust the slide guides to the width of the originals.
  1. Neatly place the originals face up in the original supply tray.

The originals are ready for scanning.

  • Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
  • When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the originals delivery tray to avoid paper jams.
  • Avoid using feeder to scan the same originals more than 30 times. When scanned repeatedly, originals can become folded or torn, which may cause paper jams.
  • If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning originals written in pencil, clean them. (See "Cleaning the Machine.")


Loading Paper

This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers and stack bypass tray.


In the Paper Drawer

In the Stack Bypass Tray


In the Paper Drawer

Return to Overview

This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawer or in the optional paper drawer.


  1. Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

  1. Hold the paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.

  1. Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together.
  • Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

  1. Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded.
  • Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

  1. Fan the paper stack and even the edges.

  1. Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up. Align the rear edge of the paper stack with the rear paper guide.
  • Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark (A).

  • The paper drawer holds approximately 250 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)).

  1. Hold the paper drawer with both hands and set it back into the machine.

  1. Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.

  • In the Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2)

When the optional drawer is installed in the machine, follow the procedure described below.


  1. Pull out the optional paper drawer until it stops.

  1. Hold the optional paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.

  1. Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together.
  • Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

  1. Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded.
  • Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

  1. Fan the paper stack and even the edges.

  1. Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up. Align the rear edge of paper stack with the rear paper guide.
  • Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark (A).

  • The optional paper drawer holds approximately 500 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)).

  1. Hold the optional paper drawer with both hands and set it back into the machine.

  1. Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.

  • When printing paper with a letterhead or logo (preprinted paper) using the paper drawer:

Load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.

  Portrait orientation Landscape orientation
1-sided printing
(When "Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority" is set to <Speed Priority> (the default setting))

(with the printing side facing up)

(with the printing side facing up)
1-sided printing
(When "Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority" is set to <Print Side Priority>)

(with the printing side facing down)

(with the printing side facing down)
2-sided printing
(with the front side facing down)

(with the front side facing down)


In the Stack Bypass Tray

Return to Overview

If you are making prints on transparencies, labels, nonstandard-sized paper, or envelopes, load them into the stack bypass tray.


Remark
  • Note the following points when using the stack bypass tray:
  • Paper Quantity: one to approximately 100 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2)).
  • Paper Size: 3" x 5" to 8 1/2" x 14" (76.2 x 127 mm to 216 x 356 mm )
  • Paper Weight: 16 to 47 lb (60 to 176 g/m2)
  • Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow the paper to feed smoothly through the stack bypass tray (allowable curl amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm) for normal paper, less than 1/4" (5 mm) for heavyweight paper).
  • Depending on the paper storage conditions, it may not be possible to feed some paper into the stack bypass tray. In this case, set the amount of paper to less than 50 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2)).
  • Do not load different size/type paper at the same time.
  • If you load multiple sheets of heavyweight paper into the stack bypass tray, a paper jam may occur depending on the type of heavyweight paper,. If this happens, load only one sheet of heavyweight paper at a time.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, make sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
  • If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in the output tray. Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated.
  • You cannot use <Custom Size> when you print from a USB memory (Direct Print). (Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn)
  • Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.
  • For high quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
  • For more information on paper types that can be used with this machine, see "Paper Requirements."
  1. Open the stack bypass tray.
  • If the paper drawer is not set, you will not be able to print or copy from the stack bypass tray.
  • If the paper size you are going to load into the stack bypass tray is different from the paper size stored in stack bypass tray Standard Settings, set stack bypass tray Standard Settings to 'Off' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")
  1. Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper.

If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray, and extend the tray extension.

  1. Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.

Insert the paper stack as far as it will go.


  • Before inserting paper:
  • 1. When you use the stack bypass tray to make copies, straighten out curled paper prior to use, as shown below. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.

  • 2. If there is difficulty in straightening out curled paper, curl the front edges of the paper upward, as shown below.


  • To print on the back side of preprinted paper:
  • 1. Load the preprinted paper face up into the stack bypass tray, as shown in the illustration below.

The screen for selecting the paper size appears.

  • When loading paper into the stack bypass tray, align the paper stack neatly between the slide guides. If the paper is not loaded correctly, a paper jam may occur.
  • If you are printing on heavyweight paper or envelopes using the stack bypass tray, and find that the paper or envelopes are not being fed smoothly or evenly through the stack bypass tray, remove the paper or envelopes, curl the feeding edges upward approximately 1/8" (3 mm), and then reload the paper or envelopes. Curling the feeding edges enables the rollers to grip the paper or envelopes as they are fed into the machine from the stack bypass tray.

  • If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load, follow those instructions.
  • When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass tray, the side facing down is the one printed on.
  • If problems, such as poor print quality or paper jams occur, try turning the paper stack over and reload it.

  • If you are loading envelopes into the stack bypass tray:
  • 1. Take five envelopes, loosen them as shown, and then stack them together. Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.

  • 2. Place the envelopes on a clean, level surface, and press all the way around the envelopes by hand, in the direction of the arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.

  • Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in the direction that they will be fed.
  • 3. Hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly, so that they and the sealed or glued portion stay flat.

  • Do not print on the back side of the envelopes (the side with the flap).
  • If the envelopes become filled with air, flatten them by hand before loading them into the stack bypass tray.

Load the envelopes face down (flap side up) in the stack bypass so shown below.

For top opening envelopes, load them as their sealing side (flap side) is located on the left when viewed from the front.

For side opening envelopes, load them so their sealing side (flap side) is located in the back of the stack bypass tray when viewed from the front.

The screen for selecting the paper size appears.

  • The stack bypass tray can hold 10 envelopes at a time.
  • Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.

  • When printing paper with a letterhead or logo (preprinted paper) using the stack bypass tray:

Load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.

  Portrait orientation Landscape orientation
1-sided printing
(When "Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority" is set to <Speed Priority> (the default setting))

(with the printing side facing down)

(with the printing side facing down)
1-sided printing
(When "Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority" is set to <Print Side Priority>)

(with the printing side facing up)

(with the printing side facing up)
2-sided printing
(with the front side facing up)

(with the front side facing up)


Setting Paper Size and Type

For the Stack Bypass Tray

Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray

For the Paper Drawer


For the Stack Bypass Tray

Return to Overview

You can register a frequently used paper size and type for the stack bypass tray.
The default setting is <Off>.


  1. Press (Main Menu).

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Paper Settings>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.

If you do not want to set the stack bypass standard settings, select <Off>, then press [OK], and press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


  • If you register a standard paper size:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK].
  • You can select from the following paper sizes: <LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>, <OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-OFI>, <G-LTRR>, <G-LGL>, <Custom Size>, <COM10>, <Monarch>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>
  • If you use A/B size paper, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes> and select the paper size you want to use.

  • If you register an irregular paper size:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Custom Size>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <X:> (length for the short edge), then press [OK].

  • 3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for X (short edge), then press [OK].

  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Y:> (length for the long edge), then press <OK>.

  • 5. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for Y (long edge), then press [OK].

  • 6. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Size>, then press [OK].

  • If you register an irregular paper size by recalling the previously set size:

You can recall the previously set paper size. For instructions on how to register the irregular paper size, see "Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray."


  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Custom Size>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Press the right Any key to select <Recall/Register>.

  • 3. Use [] or [] to select <Size 1> or <Size 2>, then press [OK].

The recalled paper size is displayed.

  • You can also edit the previously set size or register a new irregular size from this display. Press the right Any key to select <Register/Edit> → select <Size 1> or <Size 2> → press [OK] → specify the lengths for <X:> and <Y:> → select <Set Size> → press the right Any key to select <Done> → select <Back> → press [OK].


  • 4. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Size>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK].

The selectable paper types vary depending on the paper size you have specified. The unavailable paper types are grayed out on the display.


  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select [On], then press [OK].

  1. Press right Any key to select [Done].

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray

Return to Overview

You can register two irregular paper sizes for the stack bypass tray. You can recall the registered size when you use irregular paper size on the stack bypass tray. For details on recalling the registered irregular paper size, see "Recalling Irregular Paper Size Registered for the Stack Bypass Tray."

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Custom Size>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Size 1> or <Size 2>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <X:> (length for the short edge), then press <OK>.
  1. Use [] or [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for X (short edge), then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Y:> (length for the long edge), then press <OK>.
  1. Use [] or [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for Y (long edge), then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Size>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Done>.

If you want to register the other custom paper size, select <Size 1> or <Size 2>, then repeat steps 6 to 10.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  • You can use the irregular paper size registered with the procedure above for the <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting, which is useful if you frequently use the same irregular size paper. See "For the Stack Bypass Tray."


For the Paper Drawer

Return to Overview

When you place other sizes and/or types of paper, follow this procedure to change the settings.
The default settings are <LTR> and <Plain 2>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>*, then press [OK].

*Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK].
  • You can select from the following paper sizes: <LTR>, <LGL>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>, <OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-OFI>
  • If you use A/B size paper, press the right Any key to select <A/B Sizes> and perform the step above.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK].
  • You can select from the following paper types:
    <Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>, <Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>
  • If you use the paper drawer 2*, repeat the steps 4 to 6 for the paper drawer 2*.

* Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Tone Volume

This section describes how to adjust the tones that the machine sounds during operation or fax transmission.


Setting the Monitor Volume

Setting the Audible Tones


Setting the Monitor Volume

Return to Overview

The monitor volume can be adjusted. Follow the procedure described below.

The default setting is <Volume Key Setting Priority>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Volume Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Monitor Volume Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Volume Key Setting Priority> or <Screen Settings Priority>, then press [OK].
  • <Volume Key Setting Priority>: Use the volume key to adjust the monitor volume. Skip to step 8.
  • <Screen Settings Priority>: Adjust the monitor volume using the Additional Functions screen. Proceed to step 6.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Turns off the monitor volume. Skip to step 8.
  • <On>: Turns on the monitor volume. Proceed to step 7.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the monitor volume, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Audible Tones

Return to Overview

The volume can be adjusted for various tones. Follow the procedure described below.

The default settings are:

  • <Incoming Ring>: On (1)
  • <Entry Tone>: On (1)
  • <Error Tone>: On (1)
  • <TX Done Tone>: On (1)
  • <Receive Done Tone>: On (1)
  • <Print Done Tone>: On (1)
  • <Scan Done Tone>: On (1)
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Volume Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Audible Tones>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Incoming Ring>, <Entry Tone>, <Error Tone>, <TX Done Tone>, <Receive Done Tone>, <Print Done Tone> or <Scan Done Tone>, then press [OK].
  • <Incoming Ring>: Set whether the telephone rings when it receives a voice call, enabling you to answer the call. This function is only available when the <Reception Mode Selection> is set to <Auto RX>.
  • <Entry Tone>: Adjust the tone that beeps when pressing keys on the control panel.
  • <Error Tone>: Adjust the tone that beeps when an error (e.g., paper jam) occurs.
  • <TX Done Tone>: Adjust the tone that beeps when a document is sent.
  • <Receive Done Tone>: Adjust the tone that beeps when receiving document is complete.
  • <Print Done Tone>: Adjust the tone that beeps when printing is complete.
  • <Scan Done Tone>: Adjust the tone that beeps when scanning is complete.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Turns off the tone. Skip to step 8.
  • <On>: Turns on the tone. Proceed to step 7.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the volume (1 to 3), then press [OK].
  • If you set <Incoming Ring> to <On>, the telephone rings when it receives a voice call if an external telephone is connected. For information how to set the incoming ring times, see "Setting the Incoming Ring Tone (Fax)."
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Date and Time

This section describes how to set the current date and time, the time zone in which the machine is used, and the daylight saving time.


Setting the Current Date and Time

Setting the Time Zone

Setting the Daylight Saving Time


Setting the Current Date and Time

Return to Overview

You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Date & Time Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Current Time Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the current date and time, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Time Zone

Return to Overview

The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of the difference in hours (±up to 12 hours) from GMT (±0 hours)*. A time zone is a region throughout which this time difference is the same.
The default setting is <GMT- 5:00>.

*GMT stands for Greenwich Mean Time.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Date & Time Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Time Zone Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired time zone, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Daylight Saving Time

Return to Overview

In some countries or areas, time is advanced throughout the summer season. This is called "Daylight Saving Time."
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Date & Time Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Daylight Saving Time Set.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Month>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the month when the daylight saving time starts, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Week>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the week, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Day of the Week>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the day of the Week, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.

The End Date Month to End DST screen appears.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Month>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the month when the daylight saving time ends, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Week>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the week, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Day of the Week>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the day of the Week, then press [OK].
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Sleep Mode

If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, it automatically enters the Sleep mode. The default settings are <On> and <15 Minutes.>.
We recommend that you use this option in the default setting.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Sleep Time>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the desired interval, then press [OK].
  • You can set the interval from 3 to 240 minutes (in one-minute increments).
  • You can also set the interval using - (numeric keys).
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  • To enter the Sleep mode manually, press [Power] on the operation panel.
  • The machine will not enter the Sleep mode when:
  • the machine is in operation
  • the Processing/Data indicator is lit or flashing
  • a message is on the display and the Error indicator is flashing
  • there is a paper jam in the machine
  • the handset of the external telephone is off the hook
  • The machine will leave the Sleep mode when:
  • you press [Power] on the operation panel
  • a fax is received
  • the handset of the external telephone is off the hook
  • a print job is sent from a computer, and the print is started (printing starts but the display remains off)
  • a computer performs a scan through the machine


Setting the Auto Clear Time

If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, the display returns to the standby mode (Auto Clear function).
The default setting is <2 Minutes>.


Remark
  • If <0> is selected, the Auto Clear mode is not set.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Clear Time>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the desired interval, then press [OK].
  • You can set the interval from 0 (off) to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments).
  • You can also set the interval using - (numeric keys).
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Detecting and Installing Drivers that Support Functions Specified on the Machine into Your Computer

This section describes how to specify functions suitable for the fax board or printer kit installed in the machine. From your computer, you can detect and install drivers that are compatible with the specified functions.


Remark
  • If the desired driver is not in your computer, detection and installation cannot be performed.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <PDL Selection (PnP)>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <UFRII LT>, <PCL5c>, <PCL6>, <FAX>, or <PS3>, then press [OK].
  • <PCL5c>, <PCL6>, and <PS3> are displayed only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Starting "Setup Guide"

This section describes how to start the "Setup Guide" from the Additional Functions menu.

The "Setup Guide" assists you the required settings of the machine by simply following it.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <System Management Set.>, then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Start Setup Guide>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

The "Setup Guide" is displayed on the display.



Customizing Settings

You can specify the settings that are common to the Copy, Send, and Fax functions.


Setting the Initial Function

Registering the Custom Keys

Adjusting the Brightness

Reversing the Contrast on the Display

Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates

Enabling the Inch Entry

Setting Auto Drawer Selection

Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode

Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority

Changing the Language Shown on the Display

Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt

Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults


Setting the Initial Function

Return to Overview

You can specify the screen that is displayed when you turn ON the main power, or after the Auto Clear mode starts. You can also set the default System Monitor screen to display the Device Information.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Select Initial Function>: Main Menu
  • <Set Status Monitor to Def.>: Off
  • <Status Monitor Device>: Off

Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initial Function Settings>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to change the initial function screen:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Select Initial Function>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the initial function, then press [OK].
  • <Main Menu>: Displays the main menu screen.
  • <Copy>: Displays the Copy top screen.
  • <Send/Fax>: Displays the Send type selection screen.
  • <Scan to Store>: Displays the Store type selection screen.
  • <Direct Print>: Displays the Direct Print screen.
  • <Direct Print> is displayed only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.

  • If you want to set the Status Monitor screen as the initial function screen:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Status Monitor to Def.>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to set the default Status Monitor screen to Device Info.:

  • 1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Status Monitor Device>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Registering the Custom Keys

Return to Overview

You can assign frequently used functions to two custom keys located on the left of the display.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Key 1>: Copy
  • <Key 2>: Send/Fax
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register Custom Key>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Key 1> or <Key 2>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the function you want to assign, then press [OK].

You can select from <Copy>, <Send/Fax>, <Fax>, <E-mail>, <I-Fax>, <File Server>, <Send Log>, <Address Book>, <Search LDAP Server>, <Favorites>, <One-touch>, <Scan to Store>, <Store on Memory>, <Remote Scan>, and <Direct Print>*.

* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting the Brightness

Return to Overview

You can adjust the brightness of the display.
The default setting is the brightest.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Brightness Adjustment>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to move the slider to <Darker> or <Brighter>, then press [OK].

You can set the brightness in five levels.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Reversing the Contrast on the Display

Return to Overview

The Reverse Color Display mode reverses the light and dark areas on the display. If you find it hard to read what is shown on the display, try using this mode.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Reverse Color Display>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The display screen returns to its default colors.
  • <On>: The colors of the display screen are reversed (i.e., the areas that are normally light become dark, and the dark areas become light).
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates

Return to Overview

You can set whether the screen specified as the Initial Function is displayed after the Auto Clear mode initiates.
The default setting is <Initial Function>.


Remark
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Clear Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initial Function> or <Selected Function>, then press [OK].
  • <Initial Function>: The screen specified as the initial function is displayed after the Auto Clear mode initiates. For information on how to set the initial function, see "Setting the Initial Function."
  • <Selected Function>: The display returns to the top screen of the function that was displayed before the Auto Clear mode initiated.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Enabling the Inch Entry

Return to Overview

This setting ensures that the key for entering values in inches is displayed on the various numeric entry screens.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • Even if Inch Entry is set to <On>, you still have the option to enter measurements in millimeters by selecting <Enter mm> on the various numeric entry screens.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Inch Entry>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting Auto Drawer Selection

Return to Overview

You can set the paper sources that can be used for Auto Drawer Selection. When the paper sources are set to <On>and a paper source runs out of paper during a continuous print job, the machine automatically selects another paper source with the same paper size, and begins feeding paper from that paper source. This setting can be made independently for all functions of the machine.

The default settings are <Off> for the stack bypass and <On> for the paper drawers.


Remark
  • Auto Drawer Selection setting is not applied to the Direct Print* function.
    * Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Drawer Selection>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy>, <Printer>, <Receive> or <Other>, then press [OK].
  • <Other> is used for specifying the paper source for printing reports.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper source you want to set, then press [OK].
  • <Drawer 2> is displayed only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off> for the stack bypass and the other paper sources, then press [OK].
  • <On>: The paper source is eligible for Auto Drawer Selection.
  • <Off>: The paper source is ineligible for Auto Drawer Selection.
  • Regardless of the stack bypass setting, you cannot select <Off> for all of the paper sources at the same time. At least one of the paper sources, besides the stack bypass must be set to <On>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode

Return to Overview

You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the Sleep mode.
The default setting is <Low>.


Remark
  • If there are less than 10 minutes remaining before a Delayed Send job is to be sent, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode completely.
  • If you are using a management application to view or manage the settings and status of the machine via the network, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely.
  • If you are using the machine as a Windows printer, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely if SNMP Status is enabled for your operating system (unless your computer is turned OFF). For more information on disabling SNMP Status, contact your network administrator.
  • The energy consumption level in the Sleep mode is <High> even when the energy consumption level is set to <Low> when a job is being processed (including a forwarding job, report job, and receive job).
  • The energy consumption level in the Sleep mode is <High> even when the energy consumption level is set to <Low> when any of the following settings are set in <Network Settings> in <System Management Set.>:
  • In <TCP/IP Settings>, <DHCP> is set to <On>.
  • In <SMB Settings>, <Use SMB Client> is set to <On>.
  • In <E-mail/I-Fax>, <POP> is set to <On> and <POP Interval> is set to a value greater than or equal to one minute.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Sleep Mode Energy Use>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Low> or <High>, then press [OK].
  • <Low>: Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is low, but it takes longer to recover from the Sleep mode.
  • <High>: Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is high, but it takes shorter to recover from the Sleep mode.
  • If <Sleep Mode Energy Use> is set to <Low>, it may take more than 10 seconds for the display to turn on after pressing the control panel power switch.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority

Return to Overview

You can specify whether to match the sides of the paper to be printed for 2-sided printing and 1-sided printing. As the side of the paper to be printed changes depending on this setting, read "In the Paper Drawer" and "In the Stack Bypass Tray" thoroughly before using preprinted paper so it is loaded in the proper side and orientation.

The default setting is <Speed Priority>.

  • When you select <Speed Priority>:

With this mode, the machine prints on the different side of the paper depending on the printing mode (2-sided or 1-sided printing). To print images on the proper side of preprinted paper, you need to change the side of loaded paper for 2-sided printing and for 1-sided printing each time you switch the printing mode.

Select <Speed Priority> in the following cases.

  • When not using preprinted paper
  • When performing only 1-sided printing on preprinted paper
  • When you select <Print Side Priority>:

With this mode, the machine prints on the same side regardless of the printing mode (2-sided or 1-sided printing). Even when using preprinted paper, you do not need to switch the side of loaded paper for 2-sided printing and 1-sided printing.

Select <Print Side Priority> in the following case.

  • When you want to perform 2-sided printing and 1-sided printing on preprinted paper without changing the side of loaded paper
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Paper Feed Method Switch>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper source you want to set the paper feed method switch, then press [OK].
  • <Drawer 2> is displayed only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>, then press [OK].

When you select <Speed Priority>, load paper as follows:
For details on how to load paper in the paper drawer in the landscape orientation, see "In the Paper Drawer."
For details on how to load paper in the stack bypass tray, see "In the Stack Bypass Tray."

  • When performing 1-sided printing, load paper with the printing side facing up.

  • When performing 2-sided printing, load paper with the front side (first page) facing down.

When you select <Print Side Priority>, load paper as follows:
For details on how to load paper in the paper drawer in the landscape orientation, see "In the Paper Drawer."
For details on how to load paper in the stack bypass tray, see "In the Stack Bypass Tray."

  • The paper side and orientation is the same for 2-sided printing and 1- sided printing:

  • When performing 1-sided printing, load paper with the printing side facing down.
  • When performing 2-sided printing, load paper with the front side (first page) facing down.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Changing the Language Shown on the Display

Return to Overview

You can change the language displayed on the display and printed on reports.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • Even if <Language Switch> is set to <On>, there are some languages that cannot be displayed.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Language Switch>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired language, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Language Switch>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK].
  • If <Language Switch> is set to <On>, some characters are restricted and cannot be entered. To be able to enter all characters, set <Language Switch> to <Off>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to prompt you to clean the scanning area when the feeder is dirty. The prompt appears when originals are placed in the feeder.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • For instructions on cleaning the feeder's scanning area, see "Scanning Area."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Error when Feeder is Dirty>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults

Return to Overview

You can restore all of the Common Settings to their defaults.


Remark
  • If you set <Language Switch> to <On>, and then return the Common Settings to their default settings, <Language Switch> is turned <Off>, but the language shown on the display and reports remains unchanged. (See "Changing the Language Shown on the Display.")
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Initialize Common Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

If you want to cancel returning the Common Settings to their defaults, select <No>, then press [OK].

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Summary of Reports and Lists

The machine prints the following reports and lists.

  • Address Book List: Lists the recipient addresses registered in the Address Book (Address Book or One-touch). For information on how to print this list, see "Printing Address Book List."
  • User's Data List: Lists all the current settings and registered sender information. For information on how to print this list, see "Printing User's Data List."
  • TX Report: Shows the transmission result. Can be set to print automatically. For information on how to print this report automatically, see "TX Report."
  • Activity Report: Shows the results of all sending and receiving transactions. This report can be printed at a specified time or it can be printed automatically when the number of send and receive transactions reaches 40. For information on how to print this report automatically, see "Activity Report."
  • RX Report: Shows the reception result. Can be set to print automatically. For information on how to print this report automatically, see "RX Report."
  • Fax Activity Report: Shows the results of all fax sending and receiving transactions. This report can be printed at a specified time or it can be printed automatically when the number of send and receive transactions reaches 40. For information on how to print this report automatically, see "Fax Activity Report."


Printing Reports Automatically

TX Report, Activity Report, RX Report, and Fax Activity Report can be set to print automatically.


Remark
  • Reports can be printed automatically on LGL or LTR paper (plain, recycled, or color paper).

TX Report

Activity Report

RX Report

Fax Activity Report


TX Report

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set TX reports to print automatically.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <TX Report>: Only When Error Occurs
  • <Display Send Original>: On

The following items are printed in a TX Report:

  • REPORT NAME: When the document transmission is completed successfully, a "TX Report" is printed. When a send error occurs, an "Error TX Report" is printed.
  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Destination number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Destination name registered in the Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Transmission start time
  • TIME USE: Transmission duration
  • PAGES SENT: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Transmission successful
  • NG: Transmission failed
  • - -: E-mail or I-fax transmission to a mail server has been confirmed as successful.
  • STOP: Transmission manually canceled before completion
  • BUSY/NO SIGNAL: The line is busy or the recipient does not answer your call
  • Error code: For descriptions of error codes, see "Error Codes."

Remark
  • If the memory becomes full during scanning the document to be sent, the TX Report is not printed regardless of the setting.
  • When a sequential broadcast transmission was performed, a Multiple Communication Result Report is printed instead of a TX Report.
  • When a PC-Fax transmission was performed, a part of the sent document is not printed even if you set <Display Send Original> to <On>.
  • For a Multiple Communication Result Report, the following items are displayed.
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • PGS.: The number of pages that were sent successfully
  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
  • TX/RX INCOMPLETE: If a transmission is incomplete, the address and name of the destination are printed. If there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _ _ _" is printed.
  • TRANSACTION OK: The address and name of the destination of a completed transmission are printed. If there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _ _ _" is printed.
  • ERROR INFORMATION: If an error in transmission occurs, the address and name of the destination are printed. If there is no error, "_ _ _ _ _" is printed.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Report Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <TX Report>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 8.
  • <On>: Prints a report every time you send a document. Proceed to step 7.
  • <Only When Error Occurs>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs. Proceed to step 7.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On> for <Display Send Original>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not print a part of the sent original on the report.
  • <On>: Prints a part of the sent original on the report.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Activity Report

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set Activity Reports to print automatically.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Auto Print>: On
  • <Send/Receive Separate>: Off
  • <Daily Activity Rep. Time>: Off

The following items are printed in an Activity Report:

  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. All sending and receiving transactions are listed for each Department ID.
  • ST. TIME: Transmission or reception start time
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Name and fax number or address of the sender or recipient. If a job is sent to a file server (FTP or SMB), the path name is printed on the second line.
  • NO: Transaction number. Numbers between 0001 and 4999 are for sent jobs, while numbers between 5001 and 9999 are for received jobs.
  • MODE: Transaction mode
  • PGS.: Number of pages sent or received
  • RESULT: Result of transaction and transaction duration
  • OK: Transmission or reception successful
  • NG: Transmission or reception failed or canceled using [Stop]
  • - -: E-mail or I-fax transmission to a mail server has been confirmed as successful.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Report Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Activity Report>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <On>: The Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and receive transactions reaches 40.
  • <Off>: The Activity Report is not automatically printed.
  • If <Job Log Display> in <System Management Set.> is set to <On>, <Auto Print> automatically switches to <Off>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Receive Separate>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The send and receive logs are not printed separately.
  • <On>: The send and receive logs are printed separately.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Daily Activity Rep. Time>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The time to print the Activity Report is not specified.
  • <On>: The Activity Report is printed at the specified time. Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros) in 24-hour notation, using - (numeric keys). If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number. If the number of send and receive transactions exceeds 40 before the specified time, an Activity Report of most recent 40 transactions is printed.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


RX Report

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set RX reports to print automatically.
The default setting is <Off>.

The following items are printed in an RX Report:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Recipient's number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Sender's name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Reception start time
  • TIME USE: Reception duration
  • PGS.: Number of pages received
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Reception successful
  • NG: Reception failed
  • STOP: Reception manually canceled before completion
  • Error code: For descriptions of error codes, see "Error Codes."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Report Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <RX Report>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Does not print a report.
  • <On>: Prints a report every time you receive a document.
  • <Only When Error Occurs>: Prints a report only when a reception error occurs.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Fax Activity Report

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set Fax Activity Reports to print automatically.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <Auto Print>: On
  • <Send/Receive Separate>: Off
  • <Daily Activity Rep. Time>: Off

The following items are printed in a Fax Activity Report:

  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. All fax sending and receiving transactions are listed for each Department ID.
  • ST. TIME: Transmission or reception start time
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Name and fax number of the sender or recipient.
  • NO: Transaction number. Numbers between 0001 and 4999 are for sent jobs, while numbers between 5001 and 9999 are for received jobs.
  • MODE: Transaction mode
  • PGS.: Number of pages sent or received
  • RESULT: Result of transaction and transaction duration
  • OK: Transmission or reception successful
  • NG: Transmission or reception failed or canceled using [Stop]
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Report Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Activity Report>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Print>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The Fax Activity Report is not automatically printed.
  • <On>: The Fax Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and receive transactions reaches 40.
  • If <Job Log Display> in <System Management Set.> is set to <On>, <Auto Print> automatically switches to <Off>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Send/Receive Separate>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The send and receive logs are not printed separately.
  • <On>: The send and receive logs are printed separately.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Daily Activity Rep. Time>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The time to print the Fax Activity Report is not specified.
  • <On>: The Fax Activity Report is printed at the specified time. Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros) in 24-hour notation, using - (numeric keys). If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number. If the number of send and receive transactions exceeds 40 before the specified time, a Fax Activity Report of most recent 40 transactions is printed.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing Lists

You can print the following lists.

  • Address Book List
  • Address Book List (One-touch)
  • User's Data List

Remark
  • Lists can be printed on LGL or LTR paper (plain, recycled, or color paper).

Printing Address Book List

Printing User's Data List


Printing Address Book List

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Report Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book> or <One-touch>, then press [OK].
  • <Address Book>*1: Prints the Address Book list.
  • <One-touch>: Prints the One-touch list.

*1 Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

The selected list is printed.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Printing User's Data List

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Report Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User's Data List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

The User's Data List is printed.

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Introduction (UFRII LT Printer Driver)

Canon UFRII LT printer driver enables you to print from any application software to the machine. Taking full advantage of your computer's processing power to compress the print data, this driver executes the high-speed data processing.

You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.


Remark
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows you are using.


Introduction (PCL Printer Driver)

The Canon PCL5c and PCL6 printer drivers enable users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008 to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon machine.

The PCL5c and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5c, and offers superior printing quality and speed.

You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.


Remark
  • The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using.


Introduction (PS Printer Driver)

The PS printer driver converts print data from applications into data for use with PS printers, and sends it to the printer. As well as converting print data, it can also enable you to configure settings relating to finishing and detailed settings such as color adjustment, and provides an appropriate print environment for desktop publishing and publishing on demand.

You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.


Remark
  • The PS function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows you are using.


Introduction (FAX Driver)

The fax driver gives users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008 operating system the ability to make full use of the fax function of the machine.

The fax driver is conceptually akin to a printer driver. A user would select [Print] from any Windows application software, select the Canon fax driver as the printer, and specify its destination(s) and options.

The fax driver would then convert this into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols, to be printed or stored on the recipient fax machine(s).



Department/User ID Management

If <Dept. ID Management> or <User ID Management> is set to <On> in <System Management Settings>, you must enter your ID and password to be able to operate the machine.


Procedure before Using the Machine

Procedure after Using the Machine


Procedure before Using the Machine

Return to Overview

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Dept ID> or <User ID>, then press [OK].

The department ID login screen is used as an example.

  1. Enter the department ID or user ID.

  • If you enter the department ID:
  • 1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the department ID, then press [OK].

  • If you enter the user ID:

  • 1. Use the software keyboard to enter the user ID.

For information on how to use the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."


  • 2. Use the left Any key to select <Set>.

  1. If the password is set, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Password>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password.

  • If you enter the department ID management password:
  • 1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the password, then press [OK].

  • If you enter the user ID management password:

  • 1. Use the software keyboard to enter the password.

For information on how to use the software keyboard, see "Entering Characters."


  • 2. Use the left Any key to select <Set>.

  1. Press (Log In/Out).

The Main Menu screen appears.



Procedure after Using the Machine

Return to Overview

  1. Press (Log In/Out).


Setting Up the Machine

This chapter describes the settings before using the machine.



Set Up the Machine to Suit Your Purposes

To use the functions (Copy, Fax, Direct Print, Scan to Media, PC Print, PC Fax, Scan, E-Mail, I-Fax, Remote UI, Scan to File Server) of the machine, you need to make the settings in the flowchart below.
For example, if you intend to use the copy function, you need to make the settings in "Machine Settings."



Set Up the Machine

Unpack the Machine

Items Included with the Machine

Connect the LAN Cable

Connect the Power Cord and Turn On the Machine

Start "Setup Guide"

Load Paper

Set Date and Time

Make Fax Settings

Connect Telephone Cables

Adjust Color with "Auto Gradation Correction"

Set Up Network Connection

Finish "Setup Guide"


Unpack the Machine

Return to Overview

Remove all shipping tape and packing materials from the machine.

  • Make sure that at least two people carry the machine.



  1. Open the front cover by using the handle (A).
  • The toner cartridges are installed in order of black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.



  1. To prevent damage to the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit (A), cover the thin plastic belt with paper (LTR size paper is recommended) as shown in the figure and be sure that they do not move out of place.
  • When installing or removing the toner cartridges, be sure to place the papers on the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit to protect the belt.
  • Do not touch or place objects on the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) comes with a self cleaning function so do not wipe the transfer belt (A) even when toner can be seen attached to the belt. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or the transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality.



  1. Hold the blue tabs on the both sides of toner cartridge, and pull it horizontally.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A).

  • Do not touch the high-voltage contact (A) or the electrical contacts (B), as this may result in damage to the printer.



  1. Gently rock the toner cartridge 5 to 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside.

If toner is not distributed evenly, this may result in deterioration in print quality. Make sure to carry out this procedure properly.

  1. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface, fold back the tab of the sealing tape (A) located at left side of the toner cartridge.


  1. Remove the sealing tape (approx. 18 7/8 inch long) gently by hooking your finger into the tab and pulling it out straight in the direction of the arrow.
  • If toner is adhered to the removed seal, be careful not to dirty your hands or clothing by touching it.
  • If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. Doing so may cause the toner to set permanently.
  1. Hook your finger into the tab and remove the packing material (A) located at right side of the toner cartridge.
  1. Hold the toner cartridge properly by the blue tabs on the both sides with the arrowed side facing up
  • Do not hold the toner cartridge in a manner that is not described in this procedure.

  1. Align the guides (A) of the toner cartridge that you want to replace with the slots (B) to which the label of the same color is attached, then insert the cartridge until it stops.
  1. Repeat steps for all 4 cartridges.
  1. After removing all the packing materials from each toner cartridge and installing the cartridges, remove the papers on the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit.
  • When removing the paper, be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit.
  1. Close the front cover.
  • If the front cover does not close properly, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.


Items Included with the Machine

Return to Overview

  • Machine

  • Toner Cartridge x 4 (black, yellow, cyan, magenta) (Stored in the machine)

  • Power Cord

  • Telephone Cable

  • Customize Labels



    *Size and form of the customize labels may vary depending on the countries or regions you purchased.
  • Limited Warranty Notice
  • Cartridge Warranty
  • Starter Guide
  • Basic Operation Guide
  • UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM
  • PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)
  • User Manual CD-ROM
  • Registration Card
  • Power Switch Label
  • Optional Items
  • Cassette Paper Drawer
  • Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1

  • Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup Instruction


Connect the LAN Cable

Return to Overview


Connect a LAN cable that is compatible with the LAN connector of this machine.


  • Compatible LAN Cables

A category 5 or greater twisted pair LAN cable is compatible with the machine. Connect one end to the 10Base-T/100Base-TX port on the right side of the machine and the other end to a network router or a hub.



Connect Power Cord and Turn on the Machine

Return to Overview

  1. Connect the power cord to the rear socket on the back side of the machine and to the wall outlet, and press the [I] side of the main power switch (A) to ON.
  • Make sure all shipping tape/packing materials on the machine and tabs/tape on the toner cartridges have been removed.
  • Do not connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable at this time. Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable only during the software installation procedure. (A USB cable is not used when the machine is used via a network connection.)
  • If you want to use the optional paper drawer, connect the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 to the machine before turning on the machine. (For instructions on how to connect the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1, see "Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup Instruction.")
  • Apply the power switch label to the space above the main power switch.


  1. If the screen to select the language appears as shown below, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a language, then press [OK].

The machine restarts automatically.

  • The language setting can be changed later.
    Press (Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> →<Common Settings> → <Language Switch> → <Done> →Select <On> → Select the desired language → Turn OFF the main power → Restart the machine.
  1. If the screen to select the country/region appears as shown below, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a country/region, then press [OK].

The machine restarts automatically.

  • Make sure that the country/region is set correctly for your country/region.
    If the country/region is not set or set incorrectly, you may have problems in sending/receiving faxes. The country/region setting can be changed later. Press (Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <System Management Set.> → <Communications Settings> → <Select Country/Region> → <Done> → Select the country/region → Turn OFF the main power → Restart the machine.
  1. The "Setup Guide" automatically appears on the display.

Remark
  • If <Close the front cover.> is displayed, make sure that the front cover is closed properly. (See "Unpack the Machine.")
  • If <Set Toner Cartridge Again> is displayed, make sure that the tabs are removed from the toner cartridges and toner cartridges are properly installed to the machine. (See "Unpack the Machine." )


Start "Setup Guide"

Return to Overview

The "Setup Guide" assists you in setting up the machine before using it.


Remark
  • When you turn on the machine for first time, the "Setup Guide" automatically starts on the display.
  • Once the "Setup Guide" starts, it cannot be stopped.
  • If you turn off the machine while using the "Setup Guide," turn on the machine and start the "Setup Guide" again.
  • Once you complete the "Setup Guide," it does not start automatically when you turn on the machine.

  • Information About the Keys
  • Press the Left/Right Any key to select the alternative key at the bottom of the display.
  • Press [] [] [] [] to move the cursor position.
  • Use (Scroll Wheel) to move the cursor position.
  • Press [OK] to set the entry or to proceed to the next screen.
  • Press [Back] to return to the previous screen.

    * The Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn is used for illustration purposes in this section.

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

The screen explains how to operate the "Setup Guide" using the keys on the operation panel. For details on the key operation, see "Information About the Keys," above.

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

Check that all the packing materials are removed from the main unit and the cartridges.

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

The auto obtain IP address function enables the machine to get the IP address after connecting the LAN cable to the machine.

  • Connect the LAN cable when you use the machine to share with a group through the network.
  • Connect the LAN cable even if you do not use the auto obtain IP address function, because your network environment requires the IP address to be set manually.
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

Do not connect the USB cable at this point even if you use the machine as a local printer by directly connecting the machine to the computer.

  • During the software installation procedure, you can connect the USB cable. (When using the network function, the USB cable is not required.)
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display.

Go to "Load Paper"

  • If the toner cartridges have not been set in the machine or the tabs and tape have not been removed from the toner cartridges, the <Set Toner Cartridge Again> screen appears. You will need to finish the cartridge installation before you proceed. (See "Unpack the Machine.")


Load Paper

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedures for making paper and paper size settings in the "Setup Guide." Animated screens are included with each step described in the "Setup Guide."


  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

  1. Hold the paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together.
  • Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded.
  • Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Fan the paper stack and even the edges.

  1. Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up. Align the rear edge of the paper stack with the rear paper guide.
  • Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark (A).

  • The paper drawer holds approximately 250 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (75 g/m2)).

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Hold the paper drawer with both hands and set it back into the machine.

  1. Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.
  • If you loaded a size and/or type of paper that is different from what you registered in the "Setup Guide," you need to change the paper settings on the machine. See "Finish 'Setup Guide'."

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper size you loaded, then press [OK].
  • If you use inch size paper, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes> and the paper size you want to use.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper type you loaded, then press [OK].

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display.

Go to "Set Date and Time."

  • If the Optional Paper Drawer is installed in the machine, this screen is not displayed. Go to "Optional Paper Drawer."

  • Optional Paper Drawer

When the Optional Paper Drawer is installed in the machine, the procedure for setting up the Optional Paper Drawer displays on the "Setup Guide."


  1. Pull out the optional paper drawer until it stops.

  1. Hold the optional paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together.
  • Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded.
  • Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Fan the paper stack and even the edges.

  1. Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up. Align the rear edge of paper stack with the rear paper guide.
  • Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark (A).

  • The optional paper drawer holds approximately 500 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (75 g/m2)).

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Hold the optional paper drawer with both hands and set it back into the machine.

  1. Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.
  • If you loaded a size and/or type of paper that is different from what you registered in the "Setup Guide," you need to change the paper settings on the machine. See "Finish 'Setup Guide'."

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper size you loaded, then press [OK].
  • If you use inch size paper, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes> and the paper size you want to use.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper type you loaded, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes> or <No> for setting the default paper drawer, then press [OK].

When you install paper drawer 2 (optional paper drawer) that is usually used for copying, select <Yes>. If you selected <No>, the default paper drawer (Standard mode of copy) will be the paper drawer 1 (paper drawer). (For details on the standard mode of copy, see "Selecting Paper Source.")


  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display.

Go to "Set Date and Time."



Set Date and Time

Return to Overview

Before using the machine, you MUST set the current date and time. The date and time set are used as a standard for timer settings functions.

  • Information About the Keys
  • Press - (numeric keys) to enter numbers.
  • Press [OK] to proceed to set the entry or to proceed to the next screen.
  • Press [Back] to return to the previous screen.
  • Press (Clear) to delete the entry.

    * The Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn is used for illustration purposes in this section.

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the date (month/day/year) and time (in 24-hour/military time format), then press [OK].
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display.

Go to "Make Fax Settings."

  • By default, <DAYLIGHT SV.TIME> in <TIMER SETTINGS> menu is set to <Off>.


Make Fax Settings

Return to Overview

This section describes the fax settings in the "Setup Guide."


Remark
  • You can also register the user telephone number from (Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Communications Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <User Settings> → <Register Unit Telephone #> → Enter the telephone number, then <Register> → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.
  • You can also register the Unit Name from (Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Communications Settings> → <Common Settings> → <TX Settings> → <Register Unit Name> → Enter the unit name, then <Set> → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Make Fax Setting Now> or <Make Fax Setting Later>.
  • <Make Fax Setting Now>: If you use the fax function, select <Make Fax Setting Now> then press [OK].
  • <Make Fax Setting Later>: If you do not use the fax function, select <Make Fax Setting Later>, then press [OK]. (Go to "Adjust Color with "Auto Gradation Correction".")

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display.

Go to "Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name."


  • Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name

This section describes the procedure for registering the user telephone number and unit name. Refer to the following "Information About the Keys."


  • Information About the Keys

Use the keys shown below to enter information in the machine.

* The Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn is used for illustration purposes in this section.
You can enter the following characters in each input mode:



  • Press - (numeric keys) to enter numbers.
  • Press the Left/Right Any key to select the alternative key at the bottom of the display.
  • Press [] [] [] [] to move the cursor position.
  • Use (Scroll Wheel) to move the cursor position.
  • Press [OK] to set the entry or to proceed to the next screen.
  • Press [Back] to return to the previous screen.
  • For screens that require alphanumeric entries.
  • Press [] [] [] [] and (Scroll Wheel) to move the highlighted cursor position.
    <A/1>: Alphanumeric character entry mode
    <Sym>: Symbol entry mode
  • Press [OK] to enter the highlighted character or space and to determine the entry mode.
  • You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers.
  • Select <Backspace> by pressing the left Any key to clear the entered characters one by one.
  • Select <Set> by pressing the right Any key to complete the entry and return to the previous screen.

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter your fax number (up to 20 digits). To confirm your entry, press the right Any key to select <Register> or use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select register, then press [OK]. (For information on how to enter characters, see "Information About the Keys")

Following keys are available by selecting with [], [] or (Scroll Wheel).

  • <Space>: Inserts a space.
  • <+>: Inserts a plus sign.
  • <Backspace>: Deletes the last number entered.
  • To delete all of the entered number, press (Clear).

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Enter the unit name (your name, company name, etc.) using [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the characters then press [OK] to enter. To confirm your entry, press right Any key to select <Set>. (For information on how to enter characters, see "Information About the Keys")
  • You can register only one unit name.
  • To delete the last entered characters, press the left Any key to select <Backspace>.
  • To delete all of the entered characters, press (Clear).

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display.
  • In the next setting, you will set the receive mode.

  • About Sender Information

Before sending documents, you MUST register your fax number, unit name, and the current date and time in the machine. The sender information you register in the machine appears in the header of each page received by the recipient.

  • Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs
  • <Auto RX>

Receives faxes automatically. When you use only the fax function, select this mode without connecting an external telephone.

When Receiving FAX: The machine receives faxes automatically.
When Receiving VOICE CALL: The machine does not respond.
  • <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>

Automatically switches between fax calls and voice calls. The machine receives faxes automatically and rings for voice calls.

When Receiving FAX: The machine receives faxes automatically.
When Receiving VOICE CALL: The machine rings.Answer the call.
  • <Answer Mode>

Receives faxes automatically and routes voice calls to the telephone with built-in answering machine.

When Receiving FAX: The telephone with built-in answering machine rings and the machine receives faxes automatically.
When Receiving VOICE CALL: The telephone with built-in answering machine rings and records voice messages.
  • <Manual RX>

Rings for every call, whether it is a fax call or a voice call. For a fax call, you have to manually activate the machine to receive the fax.

When Receiving FAX: The external phone rings. To receive the fax, pick up the receiver then select <Send/Fax> → <Enter Fax (New)> → <RX Start>. Alternatively, you can use the remote reception function through the external telephone.
When Receiving VOICE CALL: The external telephone rings. Answer the call.

The receive mode determines how the machine responds to incoming faxes and voice calls. Select the mode that most suits your needs from the chart below. For more information about the receive modes, see "Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs"


  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes> or <No> for the question on the screen, the press [OK].

When select <Yes>, the following screen appears. Go to "Connect Telephone Cable."

When select <No>, the next question screen appears .


When select <Yes>, the following screen appears. Go to "Connect Telephone Cable."

When select <No>, the next question screen appears.


When select <Yes>, the following screen appears. After this screen, a screen appears asking you to confirm that the auto answering function of the telephone with built-in answering machine. or answering machine is activated. "Connect Telephone Cable."

When select <No>, the following screen appears. Go to "Connect Telephone Cable."


  • Your telephone with built-in answering machine or answering machine must be connected directly to the machine to use <Answer Mode>. (See "Connect Telephone Cable.")
  • The external telephone must be connected to the machine for <Fax/Tel Auto Switch> or <Manual RX>. (See "Connect Telephone Cable.")
  • By default, <Auto RX> is selected in <Reception Mode Selection>. If an external telephone is connected to the machine and receives a fax or voice call, the external telephone rings. You can answer voice calls while the external telephone is ringing.
  • To disable the incoming ring Press (Main Menu) to select <Additional Func.> → <Communication Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <RX Settings> → <Incoming Ring>, then select <Off>.
  • Voice mail is not supported with <Answer Mode>.
  • DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s), and a telephone number(s), using only one telephone line. Your machine automatically monitors incoming calls and the ring pattern, to let you know if the call is fax or voice call. Set the ring patterns assigned by your telephone company for a fax or voice call. Contact your telephone company for information on availability.


Connect Telephone Cables

Return to Overview




  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Check the socket on the right side of the main unit, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Connect the supplied telephone cable to the telephone line jack (A) on the right side of the machine and the wall jack.
    If you want to use your own external telephone or telephone with built-in answering machine, connect the cable to external device jack (B) on the right side of machine.
  • When your receive mode is <Auto RX>, only the supplied telephone cable to the telephone line jack (A) is displayed on the screen.

  1. Press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display.

  • If You Need to Use Pulse Dialing

By default, the telephone line type on the machine is set to tone dialing. If you use tone dialing, skip the following procedure.
If you use pulse dialing, follow the procedure below after you finish the "Setup Guide," and change the telephone line type setting on the machine to pulse dialing.
If you do not know the type of telephone line you use, contact your local telephone company.


  1. Press (Main Menu).

  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Communications Settings>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fax Settings>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User Settings>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Tel. Line Type Selection>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Manual>, then press [OK].

  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select telephone line type, then press [OK].

<Tone>: Tone dialing (Default)

<Pulse>: Pulse dialing


  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjust Color with "Auto Gradation Correction"

Return to Overview

When using the machine for the first time, it is necessary to adjust the gradation in order to obtain the optimum copy or print results.
There are two types of gradation adjustments that can be made: Full Correction and Quick Correction.

  • Full Correction

This is a precise adjustment. The procedure involves making test prints and placing them on the feeder for scanning. Once this is complete, the machine automatically corrects the irregularities.

  • For an accurate adjustment, do not use colored paper, transparencies, or labels. It is recommended that you use plain white paper when performing Full Correction.
  • Make sure that you place the test prints properly. Accurate adjustments cannot be made if the test prints are not scanned correctly.
  • Two sheets of LTR or A4 paper are required for test prints.
  • Quick Correction

This is a quick and simple adjustment. Adjustment is made internally without outputting any test prints.

  • It is recommended that you select <Full Correction> when performing an automatic gradation adjustment. Select <Quick Correction> for a quick, but less complete adjustment between regular full corrections.
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."
  1. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Perform Full Correction> or <Do Not Perform Full Corr.>, then press [OK].
  • It is recommended that you select <Perform Full Correction>.
  • It takes approximately five minutes to perform the full correction.
  • For the full correction, the machine performs the correction twice and two test prints are output by the machine for the each correction.
  • You selected <Do Not Perform Full Corr.> (=Quick Correction)
  • Make sure the following screen is displayed on the display, then press [OK] to start the quick correction. (It takes approximately two and a half minutes to perform the quick correction.)

Recalibrations are made internally without outputting any test prints.
After finishing the quick correction, go to "Set Up Network Connection."

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to print the first test page.

If an error message appears:
If you set <Color> in <Paper Type> of <Paper Settings>, an error message will appear. If this is the case, follow the instructions below.

1. Press the right Any key to select <Done> and return to the screen in step 3.

2. Load LTR or A4 plain paper into the stack bypass tray and set the paper size and type.

3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Full Correction>.

  1. Place the first test print on the platen glass.

Place the test print face down on the platen glass, with the black bands along the top left edge of the platen glass.
Stack approximately 20 sheets of blank paper on top of the test print for a more precise gradation correction.

  1. Make sure the following screen is displayed on the display, then press (Start) to perform the correction.
  1. Remove the first test print from the platen glass.
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to print the second test page.

If an error message appears:
If you set <Color> in <Paper Type> of <Paper Settings>, an error message will appear. If this is the case, follow the instructions below.

1. Press the right Any key to select <Done> and return to the screen in step 3.

2. Load LTR or A4 plain paper into the stack bypass tray and set the paper size and type.

3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Full Correction>.

  1. Place the second test print on the platen glass.

Place the test print face down on the platen glass, with the black bands along the top left edge of the platen glass.
Stack approximately 20 sheets of blank paper on top of the test print for a more precise gradation correction.

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press (Start) to perform the correction.
  1. Remove the second print from the platen glass.
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display.
  • In the next setting, you will set the network connection. If you do not set the network connection, select <Set or Check Later>, then go to "Finish 'Setup Guide'."


Set Up Network Connection

Return to Overview

To use the machine by connecting to the network, you must set up the IP address.
An IP (Internet Protocol) address is an identification number assigned to each individual computer connected to the Internet.
To use the following functions, you must set up the IP address in advance.

Remote UI: Access and change the machine settings from a web browser on the computer by using the remote UI software.

E-Mail: Send the scanned documents attached to an e-mail message through a network.

Scan to File Server: Send a scanned document to a file server from the computer.

I-Fax: Send a document to a machine that is compatible with I-fax.

PC Print: Print documents on a computer.

PC Fax: Fax a document on a computer.

Scan with Color Network Scan Gear (application on the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM): Save scanned documents to a computer.

The flow chart below indicates the settings needed for each function.


Remark
  • The "Setup Guide" only supports IPv4.
  • By default, the IP address is automatically assigned to the machine by the DHCP server.
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set or Check Now> or <Set or Check Later>.
  • <Set or Check Now>: When you use the machine through the network, select <Set or Check Now> then press [OK].
  • <Set or Check Later>: When you do not use the machine through the network, Select <Set or Check Later>, then press [OK]. (Go to "Finish 'Setup Guide'.")
  • The setting for IPv6 is not supported with the "Setup Guide." When you want to use the machine on the IPv6 environment, select <Set or Check Later> and set it up after finishing the "Setup Guide." See "Setting the Use of IPv6."
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."
  • If the LAN cable is not connected to the machine, a screen instructing you to connect the LAN cable will appear before this screen.
  • If the machine dose not get the IP address 3 minutes after you connect the LAN cable, check the IP address settings and the network cable.
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."

If the machine does not get the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address, each of the screen displays "000.000.000.000."

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."
  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display.

Go to "Finish 'Setup Guide'."

  • If there are any unestablished items, a screen appears before this screen listing the unestablished items.

  • Set IP Address Manually

If you need to manually enter a static IP address (even when the machine is set to obtain an IP address automatically), follow the procedure below. Configure the setting for the IP address manually in the User Mode after finishing the "Setup Guide."
In this setting, enter the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address manually.
Press (Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <System Management Set.>* → <Network Settings> → <Done> → <TCP/IP Settings> → <IPv4 Settings> → <IP Address Settings> → <Manual Settings> → Enter the IP address → Enter the subnet mask → Enter the gateway address → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. → Turn OFF the main power → Restart the machine. For more information on this setting, see "Setting and Checking the IP Address."

* If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).



Finish "Setup Guide"

Return to Overview

All the settings with the "Setup Guide" are completed. Follow the procedure below to finish the "Setup Guide." After finishing the "Setup Guide," you need to set up the computer and software for the machine.

  1. Make sure the screen on the left is shown on the display, then press [OK] to proceed to the "Setup Guide."
  • Make sure the USB cable is not connected to the machine. If it is connected already, disconnect it from the machine.
  1. Press [OK] to finish the "Setup Guide."

  • Change the Settings

When you change the settings on the machine after finishing the "Setup Guide," refer to the following items.

  • Paper Size/Type:

(Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Paper Settings> → Select the bypass or drawer → Select paper size → Select paper type → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. (See "Selecting Paper Source.")

  • Date and Time:

(Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Time Settings> → <Date & Time Settings> → <Current Time Settings> → Enter the date and time → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. (See "Setting the Date and Time.")

  • Daylight Saving Time:

(Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Timer Settings> → <Date & Time Settings> → <Daylight Saving Time Set.> → Select <On> or <Off> → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. (See "Setting the Daylight Saving Time.")

  • Telephone Number Registration:

(Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Communications Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <User Settings> → <Register Unit Telephone #> → Enter the telephone number, then <Register> → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. (See "Specifying a New Fax Number.")

  • Unit Name Registration:

(Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Communications Settings> → <Common Settings> → <TX Settings> → <Register Unit Name> → Enter the unit name, then <Set> → Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. (See "Registering the Machine's Name (Fax).")

  • Receive Mode:

(Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Communications Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <RX Settings> → <Reception Mode Selection> → Select the receive mode → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. (See "Methods for Receiving Faxes.")

  • Telephone Line Type:

(Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Communications Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <User Settings> → <Tel. Line Type Selection> → <Manual> → Select the telephone line type → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. (See "Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax).")

  • Auto Gradation Correction:

(Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <Adjustment/Cleaning> → <Auto Gradation Correction:> → Select the correction type → Perform the correction → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. (See "Correcting Gradation.")

  • Network (Auto):

(Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <System Management Set.>* → <Network Settings> → <Done> → <TCP/IP Settings> → <IPv4 Settings> → <IP Address Settings> → <Obtain Automatically> → <DHCP> → Enter the IP address → Enter the subnet mask → Enter the gateway address number → (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen → Turn OFF the main power → Restart the machine. (See "Setting and Checking the IP Address.")

  • Network (Manual):

(See "Set Up Network Connection.")

  • Restart the "Setup Guide":

<Additional Func.> → <System Management Set.>* → <Start Setup Guide> → <Yes>.

* If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

  • The machine may enter or the Standby mode (default setting is 2 minutes) or the Sleep mode (default setting is 15 minutes) while you are performing setup. To change the settings, see "Introduction of the Machine" in the e-Manual.


Set Up Computers and Software

Types of Connection between Computers and the Machine

About User Software CD-ROM

Network Connection

USB Connection


Types of Connection between Computers and the Machine

Return to Overview

There are two ways to connect the machine and computers: USB connection and network connection



The following functions are available with Network Connection: PC Print, Remote UI, PC Fax, Scan, E-Mail/I-Fax Scan to File Server.
For more information on how to use each function with network connection, refer to the following.

PC Print

→ "Printing through Network Connection"

Remote UI

→ "Using the Remote UI"

PC Fax

→ "PC Fax"

Scan

→ "Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer"

E-Mail/I-Fax

→ "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-fax"

Scan to File Server

→ "Scanning Documents to a File Server"


  • USB Connection (For details about the set up, see "USB Connection.")

The following functions are available with USB Connection: PC Print, PC Fax.
For more information on how to use each function with USB Connection, refer to the following.

PC Print

→ "Printing through USB Connection"

PC Fax

→ "PC Fax"

  • You can use the USB connection and network connection together.

System Requirements

  • Windows 2000
    CPU: Intel Pentium/133MHz or faster
    Memory: 128MB or more
  • Windows XP
    CPU: Intel Pentium/Celeron series 300MHz or faster
    Memory: 128MB or more
  • Windows Vista
    CPU: Intel Pentium 800MHz or faster
    Memory: 512MB or more
  • Windows 7
    CPU: 1 GHz (x86 processor, x64 processor) or faster
    Memory: 1 GB (x86 processor), 2 GB (x64 processor) or more
  • Windows Server 2003*
    CPU: Intel Pentium/Celeron series 133MHz or faster
    Memory: 128MB or more
    *Network only
  • Windows Server 2008*
    CPU: Intel processor/1 GHz (x86 processor),1.4 GHz (x64 processor) or faster
    Memory: 512 MB or more
    *Network only


About User Software CD-ROM

Return to Overview

  • Drivers

Details about each drivers installation can be found in the corresponding HTML manuals listed in the Manuals subsection below.

  • UFRII LT Driver

Using the UFRII LT Driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host computer and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization.

  • FAX Driver

The FAX Driver is conceptually akin to a printer driver. A user selects [Print] from any Windows application software, selects the Canon fax driver as the printer, and specifies its destination(s) and options. The FAX Driver then converts this into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols, to be printed or stored on the recipient fax machine(s).

  • Color Network ScanGear

Color Network ScanGear enables you to remotely scan originals from your computer over the network and transmit the scanned images to your computer.

  • PCL Printer Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)

The PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers, the PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5c and PCL5e, and offers superior printing quality and speed. The PCL5e printer driver is provided as standard with black-and-white printers.

  • PS Printer Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)

The PS printer driver converts print data from applications into data for use with PS printers, and sends it to the printer. As well as converting print data, it can also enable you to configure settings relating to finishing and detailed settings such as color adjustment, and provides an appropriate print environment for desktop publishing and publishing on demand.

  • Bundled Programs

Details about each program installation can be found in the corresponding HTML manuals listed in the Manuals subsection below.

  • NetSpot Device Installer (NSDI)

The NetSpot Device Installer enables you to set up the machine for network operations. To start this program, click [Additional Software Programs] on the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM Setup screen, then follow the instructions that appear on the screen. For details, see the Readme file and online help for this program.

  • Canon Font Manager (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)

Font Manager is a comprehensive program that helps you manage your fonts in Microsoft Windows.

  • Manuals
  • Printer Driver Installation Guide

The Printer Driver Installation Guide describes UFR II printer driver installation, updating shared printer information, uninstallation, configuration, and printing.

  • Canon Products Supported by UFR II Driver

The Canon Products Supported by UFR II Driver describes compatible Canon products that are compatible with the UFR II printer driver.

  • Fax Driver Installation Guide

The Fax Driver Installation Guide describes Fax driver installation, updating shared printer information, uninstallation, configuration, and printing.

  • Canon Products Supported by Fax Driver

The Canon Products Supported by Fax Driver describes compatible Canon products that are compatible with the Fax driver.

  • Network ScanGear Installation Guide

The Network ScanGear Installation Guide describes Color Network ScanGear installation, and uninstallation.

  • About Other Software Programs (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)

The About Other Software Programs describes Canon Font Manager installation, and uninstallation.

  • Printer Driver Installation Guide (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)

The Printer Driver Installation Guide describes PCL printer driver installation, updating shared printer information, uninstallation, configuration, and printing.

  • Canon Products Supported by PCL Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)

The Canon Products Supported by PCL Driver describes compatible Canon products that are compatible with the PCL printer driver.

  • Printer Driver Installation Guide (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)

The Printer Driver Installation Guide describes PS printer driver installation, updating shared printer information, uninstallation, configuration, and printing.

  • Canon Products Supported by PS Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)

The Canon Products Supported by PS Driver describes compatible Canon products that are compatible with the PS printer driver.



Network Connection

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows XP Professional.
  • Before the installation, make sure the following:
  • Log on as an Administrator to install the software.
  • If you want to use the machine as a network scanner, it must be connected to a computer over an IPv4 network.
  • Click on the circled button on each screen to proceed to the next step.


Connect the machine to the network correctly, and confirm that the power is ON.

Insert the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM.

  • If you want to install only the PCL Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only), proceed to step 37. For more information refer to the Printer Driver Installation Guide (located on the PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM).
  • If you want to install only the PS Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only), proceed to step 37. For more information refer to the Printer Driver Installation Guide (located on the PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM).


If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer] ([My Computer]).
Open the CD-ROM icon, then double-click [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).

  • If a language selection screen is displayed before the CD-ROM Setup screen, select a language and then click [Next].

Make sure that the boxes next to the UFR II Printer Driver, FAX Driver, Color Network ScanGear and Manuals are checked. Unchecked items will not be installed.

  • If you want to install only the UFR II Driver, select only the UFR II Printer Driver in this step, then proceed to the next step. For more information refer to the Printer Driver Installation Guide (located on the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CDROM).
  • If you want to install only the fax driver, select only the FAX Driver in this step, then proceed to step 16. For more information refer to the Fax Driver Installation Guide (located on the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM).
  • If you want to install only Color Network ScanGear, select only Color Network ScanGear in this step, then proceed to step 25. For more information refer to the Network ScanGear Installation Guide (located on the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM).
  • If the amount of free disk space is insufficient to install the software, an error message is displayed. Make sure there is sufficient disk space, and then try installing the software again.






  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer to set up the printer configuration automatically or use Department ID Management.
  • If the Canon Driver Information Assist Service is already installed on your computer, this screen is not displayed.
  • If you are using an operating system equipped with Windows Firewall, the following message box may appear. If you want to use Canon Driver Information Assist Service, click [Yes]. If you select [No], you cannot use Canon Driver Information Assist Service.

Select the machine (Product Name: MF9280 or MF9220) using the information displayed in <Printer List> → press [Add].

  • If the machine's information is not displayed in <Printer List> on the screen, click [Search Again].






Installation of the printer driver is completed and the installation of the fax driver will begin.

  • If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not installed on the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, proceed to step 25.



  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer to set up the printer configuration automatically or use Department ID Management.
  • If the Canon Driver Information Assist Service is already installed on your computer, this screen is not displayed.
  • If you are using an operating system equipped with Windows Firewall, the following message box may appear. If you want to use Canon Driver Information Assist Service, click [Yes]. If you select [No], you cannot use Canon Driver Information Assist Service.



Select the machine (Product Name: MF9280 or MF9220) using the information displayed in <Fax List> → press [Add].





Installation of the fax driver is completed and the installation of Color Network ScanGear will begin.



Select the same language as your operating system.







  • The Readme file opens. After reading through the information provided, proceed to the next step.

Installation of Color Network ScanGear is completed and the installation of the manuals will begin.



The Printer Driver Installation Guide and the Fax Driver Installation Guide are installed on your computer and shortcuts are created on the desktop.



Remove the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM.

  • If you are using Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, installation is complete.
  • If you want to install the PCL Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only) or PS Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only), proceed to the next step.
  • Before scanning documents from a computer with Color Network ScanGear, you need to configure the settings using ScanGear Tool*. After making sure that the drivers are correctly installed, proceed to "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used (Network Scan)."
    * ScanGear Tool is installed together with the Color Network ScanGear driver.


Insert the PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only).

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer] ([My Computer]).
Open the CD-ROM icon, then double-click [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).

  • If a language selection screen is displayed before the CD-ROM Setup screen, select a language and then click [Next].


Select the PCL Printer Driver, PS Printer Driver and Manuals.





Select [PCL5e/5c Printer Driver] or [PCL6 Printer Driver].



  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer to set up the printer configuration automatically or use Department ID Management.
  • If the Canon Driver Information Assist Service is already installed on your computer, this screen is not displayed.
  • If you are using an operating system equipped with Windows Firewall, the following message box may appear. If you want to use Canon Driver Information Assist Service, click [Yes]. If you select [No], you cannot use Canon Driver Information Assist Service.

Select the machine (Product Name: MF9280) using the information displayed in <Printer List> → press [Add].









  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer to set up the printer configuration automatically or use Department ID Management.
  • If the Canon Driver Information Assist Service is already installed on your computer, this screen is not displayed.
  • If you are using an operating system equipped with Windows Firewall, the following message box may appear. If you want to use Canon Driver Information Assist Service, click [Yes]. If you select [No], you cannot use Canon Driver Information Assist Service.



Select the machine (Product Name: MF9280) using the information displayed in <Printer List> → press [Add].





Installation of the printer drivers are completed and the installation of the manuals will begin.



The Printer Driver Installation Guides are installed on your computer and shortcuts are created on the desktop.



Remove the PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM. Installation is complete.


  • Check Installation

Verify that the drivers have been installed successfully and that the machine has been set as the default printer.

  • If the name of your machine is selected on the [Printer] screen from an application, it is set as the default printer.

  1. Open the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers] folder.

Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
Windows XP/Server 2003: From the Windows task bar, click [start] or [Start] → select [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Printers].
Windows Server 2008: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Devices and Printers].
Verify that the printer driver icon is displayed.


  1. Set your machine as the default printer.

Right-click the printer icon for this machine and then click [Set as Default Printer] or [Set as default printer].


  1. Verify that [Color Network ScanGear] appears in the program list.

Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Programs].
Windows XP/Server 2003: From the Windows task bar, click [start] or [Start] → select [All Programs].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [All Programs].
Verify that the [Color Network ScanGear] is listed in [All Programs] (or [Programs]).


  • Setting the ScanGear Tool

Before scanning documents from a computer with the Color Network ScanGear, you need to select the machine for scanning using the ScanGear Tool. For details, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used (Network Scan)."



USB Connection

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows XP Professional.
  • Before the installation, make sure the following:
  • Do not connect the USB cable before installing the software. If you connect the USB cable before installing the software and the Found New Hardware Wizard screen appears, click [Cancel].
  • Log on as Administrator to install the software.
  • Make sure the machine is turned ON before connecting the USB cable.
  • Click on the circled button on each screen to proceed to the next step.
  • A USB cable is not included with the machine.


Insert the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM.

  • If you want to install only the PCL Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only), proceed to step 29. For more information refer to the Printer Driver Installation Guide (located on the PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM).
  • If you want to install only the PS Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only), proceed to step 29. For more information refer to the Printer Driver Installation Guide (located on the PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM).
  • If you want to install the PCL/PS driver by connecting the USB cable (plug and play), it is necessary to change the settings of the machine. Press (Main Menu) → <Additional Func.> → <System Management Set.>* → <PDL Selection (PnP)> → <Done> → <PCL5c>/<PCL6>/<PS3> depending on the desired driver. After changing the machine settings, proceed to step 4 to install the driver using the same procedure as for the UFR II Printer Driver.
    * If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer] ([My Computer]).
Open the CD-ROM icon, then double-click [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).

  • If a language selection screen is displayed before the CD-ROM Setup screen, select a language and then click [Next].


Make sure that the boxes next to the UFR II Printer Driver, FAX Driver and Manuals are checked.

  • Color Network ScanGear is an application software that can only be used in the network. If the machine is connected using a USB connection, uncheck the box next to Color Network ScanGear, as it is unnecessary.
  • If you want to install only the UFR II Driver, select only the UFR II Printer Driver in this step, then proceed to the next step. For more information refer to the Printer Driver Installation Guide (located on the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM).
  • If you want to install only the fax driver, select only the FAX Driver in this step, then proceed to step 14. For more information refer to the Fax Driver Installation Guide (located on the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM).
  • If the amount of free disk space is insufficient to install the software, an error message is displayed. Make sure there is sufficient disk space, and then try installing the software again.







  • If the dialog box shown below appears, press [Retry] to continue the installation.



Remove the attachment (A) that covers the USB port on the back of the machine.

  • Remove the attachment (A) by pulling the strap.

Connect the machine and your computer with a USB cable (A).

  • The USB cable is not included.
  • If the Found New Hardware Wizard appears, click [Cancel] and continue the installation.


Installation of the printer driver is completed and the installation of the fax driver will begin.

  • If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not installed on the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, proceed to step 25.



  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer to set up the printer configuration automatically or use Department ID Management.
  • If the Canon Driver Information Assist Service is already installed on your computer, this screen is not displayed.
  • If you are using an operating system equipped with Windows Firewall, the following message box may appear. If you want to use Canon Driver Information Assist Service, click [Yes]. If you select [No], you cannot use Canon Driver Information Assist Service.



Select [Canon MF9200 Series (FAX)].



Select the USB port you want to use from the [Port] drop-down list. If you want to add a port, click [Add Port] and then select the USB port that you want to add.





Installation of the fax driver is completed and installation of the manuals will begin.



The Printer Driver Installation Guide and the Fax Driver Installation Guide are installed on your computer and shortcuts are created on the desktop.



Remove the UFRII LT/FAX User Software CD-ROM.

  • If you are using Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, installation is complete.
  • If you want to install the PCL Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only) or the PS Driver (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only), proceed to the next step.


Insert the PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only).

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer] ([My Computer]).
Open the CD-ROM icon, then double-click [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).

  • If a language selection screen is displayed before the CD-ROM Setup screen, select a language and then click [Next].


Select the PCL Printer Driver, PS Printer Driver and Manuals.





  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer to set up the printer configuration automatically or use Department ID Management.
  • If the Canon Driver Information Assist Service is already installed on your computer, this screen is not displayed.
  • If you are using an operating system equipped with Windows Firewall, the following message box may appear. If you want to use Canon Driver Information Assist Service, click [Yes]. If you select [No], you cannot use Canon Driver Information Assist Service.



PCL Printer Driver:
Select [Canon MF9200 Series PCL5c] or [Canon MF9200 Series PCL6].
PS Printer Driver:
Select [Canon MF9200 Series PS3].



Select the USB port you want to use from the [Port] drop-down list. If you want to add a port, click [Add Port] and then select the printer port that you want to add.







Repeat steps 34 to 43 to install the PS Printer Driver.

Installation of the printer drivers is completed and the installation of the manuals will begin.



The Printer Driver Installation Guides are installed on your computer and shortcuts are created on the desktop.



Remove the PCL/PS User Software CD-ROM. Installation is complete.


  • Check Installation

Verify that drivers have has been installed successfully and that the machine has been set as the default printer.

  • If the name of your machine is selected on the [Printer] screen from an application, it is set as the default printer.

  1. Open the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers] folder.

Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
Windows XP/Server 2003: From the Windows task bar, click [start] or [Start] → select [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Printers].
Windows Server 2008: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Devices and Printers].
Verify that the printer driver icon is displayed.


  1. Set your machine as the default printer.

Right-click the printer icon for this machine and then click [Set as Default Printer] or [Set as default printer].



How to Use This Manual

How to Use This Manual Instructions



User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual)

This section describes about the manuals and also instructions on how to use the e-Manual.


Manuals for the Machine

System Requirements

Using the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual)

Symbols Used in This Manual

Illustrations Used in This Manual

Legal Notices


Manuals for the Machine

Return to Overview

The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.


Read this manual first.
  • Starter Guide
Read this manual to learn the required settings and connections before using the machine.
  • What you can do with the machine
  • Machine setup
  • Connection and settings before using the machine
  • Connecting the machine to a network
  • Software installation

Read this manual next.
  • Basic Operation Guide
Read this manual to learn information about basic operations and machine functions.
  • Safety instructions
  • Registering destinations in the Address Book
  • Copy
  • Fax
  • Basic procedures for each function
  • Specifications
  • Maintenance

Read the sections of this manual that correspond to your intended use.
  • e-Manual
Use this manual as a reference for all of the functions of this machine including information about the driver software. The contents of the Starter Guide and the Basic Operation Guide are also included in this manual.
(Located on the User Manual CD-ROM)
  • Copy/Fax/Print/Scan/E-Mail/
    Remote UI/Network/Security
  • Troubleshooting
  • Maintenance
  • Specifications

  • Considerable effort has been made to make sure that the manuals for the machine are free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.


System Requirements

Return to Overview

The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) can be used in the following system environments.

  • OS (Operating System)
  • Windows 2000 SP4, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7
    (Internet Explorer 6 is required if you are using Windows 2000 SP4.)
  • Mac OS X v10.4.x, v10.5.x, v10.6.x
  • Web Browser
  • Windows: Internet Explorer 6, 7, 8
  • Macintosh: Safari 2, 3, 4
  • Flash Player
  • Flash Player 8.0 or later

Remark
  • The memory and CPU required to run each operating system are also required.
  • A display resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels or higher is required.
  • The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) may not operate correctly if Flash Player is not installed or a version of Flash Player earlier than the above is installed in your computer.


Using the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual)

Return to Overview

When using the e-Manual with Windows, follow the steps below.
1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM on your computer.
2. Select the language.
3. Click [Install] or [Display manual].
4. When you click [Install], the e-Manual is installed on your computer and the shortcut is created on the desktop.
5. When you click [Display manual], the e-Manual is displayed.
6. To display the e-Manual that you installed on your computer, double-click the shortcut icon on the desktop.

When using the e-Manual with Macintosh, follow the steps below.
1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM in your computer.
2. Drag-and-drop the [MF9200_Manual_us] folder into the location you want to save it.
3. Open the [MF9200_Manual_us] folder.
4. Double-click index.html, and the e-Manual is displayed.

  • If you are using a browser such as Internet Explorer for Windows XP, ActiveX blocks pop-ups in the background. If the e-Manual is not displayed properly, look for an information bar at the top of the page and click the information bar.

When you start the e-Manual, the following screen (the top page) is displayed.



1 [Top]
Click to return to the top page.
2 [Function List]
Click to display the topic pages for function categories.
3 [Contents]
Click to display the contents in a separate window.
4 [Index]
Click to display the topic pages for function categories and appendix categories.
5 [Glossary]
Click to display the glossary in a separate window.
6 [Search]
Click to display a list of the topic page titles that include the phrase you enter. Click a title to display the corresponding topic page.
7 [Print]
Click to print all categories or a single category.
8 Function Categories
Select a function category to display a list of image icons for the topics corresponding to that function. Click an image icon or [Display Function List] to display the topic pages for the function category.
9 Appendix Categories
Select an appendix category to display the topic pages not related to functions, such as the maintenance and troubleshooting topics.
10 [Office Locations]
Click to display Canon contact details in a separate window.

Remark
  • If the menu is not displayed automatically after you insert the CD-ROM, follow the procedure below.
    Windows 2000/XP: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
    Windows Vista/7: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer].
    Right-click on the CD-ROM icon and select [Open], then double-click start.exe.
  • Depending on the operating system you are using, a security protection message may be displayed. In this case, allow the contents to be displayed.
  • When performing a search, make sure to enter a phrase that will match a keyword. Depending on the phrase you enter, the correct search results may not be displayed.
  • Topic pages can be printed by page or by category.
  • The background color and images of the Topic Page may not be printed, depending on the web browser settings.


Symbols Used in This Manual

Return to Overview

The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.

  • Indicates a warning or a caution concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. To use this machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings and cautions.
  • Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended.

Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to perform the described operations.

  • Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual
  • The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this manual.
  • Operation Panel Keys: <Key icon> + (Key name)
    Example: (Stop)
  • Buttons on the computer operation screen: [Button name]
    Example: [OK]
  • Information in the display appears in angle brackets: <LOAD PAPER>.


Abbreviations Used in This Manual

Return to Overview

In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:

Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system : Windows 2000

Microsoft Windows XP operating system : Windows XP

Microsoft Windows Vista operating system : Windows Vista

Microsoft Windows 7 operating system : Windows 7

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system : Windows Server 2003

Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system : Windows Server 2008

Microsoft Windows operating system : Windows



Illustrations Used in This Manual

Return to Overview

Illustrations used in this manual are the model Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn (with no optional equipment). When there is any difference among Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn and Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, it is clearly indicated in the text, e.g.,"Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only."



Legal Notices

Return to Overview

  • Trademarks

Canon, the Canon logo, Color imageCLASS, imageWARE and NetSpot are trademarks of Canon Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.

  • Copyright

Copyright © 2010 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.
UFST: Copyright © 1989-2003 Monotype Imaging, Inc.

  • Disclaimers

The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.



Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Instructions



Error Codes

If a job or operation does not complete successfully, check the error code, and perform the necessary operations according to the error code displayed.

You can check the error code on the Details screen when you select <Log> on the System Monitor screen.

If a send, receive, or fax job does not complete successfully, the error code is printed in the RESULT column on the Activity Report, TX Report, and Fax Activity Report. Perform the necessary procedures according to the error code.

For details on reports, see "Summary of Reports and Lists."

See the table below for individual error codes.


#0001

#0003

#0005

#0009

#0012

#0018

#0037

#0059

#0099

#0401

#0403

#0404

#0406

#0407

#0408

#0703

#0705

#0751

#0752

#0753

#0755

#0801

#0802

#0804

#0806

#0808

#0810

#0813

#0816

#0818

#0819

#0820

#0821

#0827

#0828

#0829

#0839

#0853

#0859

#0001

Description

Paper or originals are jammed.

Action

Remove any jammed paper or originals. (See "Clearing Jams.")

#0003

Description

Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 minutes) caused the error.

Action1

Reduce the resolution or divide the document into two or more parts, and then try sending the document again. (See "Selecting Resolution (Fax).")

Action2

When receiving a document, ask the sender to either reduce the resolution at which the document is scanned, or divide the document into two or more parts before sending it.

#0005

Description1

The recipient did not answer within 35 seconds.

Action

Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and try again.

Description2

The recipient's machine is not a G3 fax.

Action

Check the type of receiving machine with the receiving party.

#0009

Description1

There is no paper.

Action

Load paper. (See "Loading Paper.")

Description2

The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the machine.

Action

Insert the paper drawer properly. (See "Loading Paper.")

#0012

Description

The document could not be sent because the recipient's machine was out of paper.

Action

Ask the recipient to load paper into their fax machine.

#0018

Description1

The recipient's machine did not respond when your machine redialed.

Action

Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.

Description2

The documents could not be sent because the recipient's machine was busy.

Action

Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.

Description3

The settings on your machine do not match the settings on the recipient's machine.

Action

Check that the settings on your machine match those on the recipient's machine, and that the recipient's machine is able to communicate. Try sending again.

Description4

No pause was included in the telephone number when sending a fax overseas.

Action1

Insert a pause after the country code, or after the fax number of the recipient, and then dial the number again. (See "Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax).")

Action2

Change the Long Distance setting if you are sending documents to a destination stored in the Address Book or one-touch buttons. (See "Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book," or "Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch.")

#0037

Description1

Documents could not be received because there is insufficient memory available.

Action

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Description2

The data size exceeds the available memory.

Action

Reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format.

#0059

Description

Your transmission is canceled because the number you dialed was different from the number registered on the other party's fax machine.

Action

Check to see that the correct fax number is registered on the other party's fax machine.

#0099

Description

A job was interrupted when the Media To Print or Scan To Media function was being used.

Action

Try to execute the job if necessary.

#0401

Description

The USB memory is full or the maximum number of files that can be stored in the root directory (the top level of the directory tree in the USB memory) has been reached.

Action

Delete unnecessary files in the USB memory or organize the files in the root directory by moving existing files to a newly created folder.

#0403

Description

The job failed because the same file name existed. Generally, if the same file name exists, a file will be automatically renamed by adding a number, which ranges from 1 to 999, to the tail of its file name in order to avoid naming conflicts. However, this error occurred because the file with the same number already added to its file name existed.

Action

Rename the file, and then write the data again.

#0404

Description

The job failed because the write protect switch of the USB memory was ON.

Action

Turn OFF the write protect switch of the USB memory.

#0406

Description1

The job failed because the medium was pulled out while the job was in progress.

Action

Confirm that the medium is properly inserted, and then write the data again.

Description2

An error has occurred while data, such as image data, were being transferred to the medium. (The connected medium may be formatted with a file system that is not supported by the machine.)

Action

Check the status of the medium, or make sure that the medium is formatted with a file system supported by the machine (FAT16 or FAT32), and then try again.

#0407

Description1

The length of the full path to the specified file (or folder) exceeded the supported limit.

Action

The limit of the length of the full path is 120. Change or shorten the file name to be written.

Description2

The transfer of the image to the USB memory was not properly performed because the length of the full path including the root and file name exceeded the limit.

Action1

The limit of the length of the full path is 120. Change or shorten the file name to be written.

Action2

Change the folder to which the data is saved.

#0408

Description1

The transfer of data has failed because the medium was pulled out during the transfer.

Action

Confirm that the medium is correctly inserted and then try the transfer again.

Description2

An error has occurred while data, such as image data, were being transferred to the medium.

Action

Check the status of the medium, or make sure that the medium is formatted with a file system supported by the machine.

#0703

Description

The memory for image data is full when sending color documents.

Action1

Wait a few moments, and then try sending again after other send jobs are complete.

Action2

Erase documents stored in memory. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON.

#0705

Description

The send process was interrupted because the size of the image data being sent was larger than the size limit set in <Send Data Size Limit> in <E-mail/I-Fax Settings> in <Communications Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen).

Action1

Change the setting of the size limit in the <Send Data Size Limit> in <E-mail/I-Fax Settings> in <Communications Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen).

Action2

Select a lower resolution.

Action3

If you are sending an I-fax, reduce the size of the data by decreasing the number of pages that contain images so that it will not exceed the size limit set in <Send Data Size Limit>.

Action4

When scanning, set <Divide Pages> to <On> in <Color/File Format Settings>.

#0751

Description

The server is not functioning. The network is down (the server is unable to connect to the network or was disconnected).

Action1

Check the recipient's address.

Action2

Check that the network is up.

#0752

Description1

The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct.

Action

Start the Remote UI and make sure that the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings matches the SMTP server address you checked in "Checking Your E-Mail Account."

Description2

The domain name or e-mail address may not be set.

Action1

Start the Remote UI and make sure that Domain Name in TCP/IP Settings under Network Settings is set correctly.

Action2

Start the Remote UI and make sure that E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings is set correctly.

Description3

The mail server is not functioning.

Action

Ask the network administrator to check that the mail server is operating properly.

Description4

The network is down.

Action

Ask the network administrator to check that the network is operating properly.

Description5

While an e-mail message were being sent in color, some error occurred.

Action

Try sending several times. If the error persists, ask the network administrator to check that the network is operating properly.

#0753

Description

A TCP/IP error occurred while sending documents to a file server, or sending an e-mail message. (Socket, Select error, etc.)

Action1

Check that the network cable is properly connected between the machine and your computer.

Action2

Check that the <SMB Settings> is set to <On>.

Action3

Check that the <Host Name> of the file server destination is set correctly.

Action4

Check that the <Workgroup Name> is set correctly.

Action5

Set <Use LM Announce> to <On>.

Action6

Check the settings in Windows Firewall.

Action7

If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON.

#0755

Description1

You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.

Action

Check <TCP/IP Settings> in <Network Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen).

Description2

The IP address is not set.

Action

Check <TCP/IP Settings> in <Network Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen).

Description3

When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.

Action

After the machine is turned ON, communication with a network will not start until the time specified in <Startup Time Settings> in <Network Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen) elapses. Wait a few moments, and then try sending again.

#0801

Description1

A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail message.

Action

Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally, or check the network status.

Description2

The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct.

Action

Check the destination setting.

Description3

An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server.

Action

Check that the file server is operating properly.

Description4

The e-mail address is incorrect.

Action

Start the Remote UI and make sure that the E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings is set correctly.

#0802

Description1

The name of the SMTP server is incorrect.

Action

Start the Remote UI and make sure that SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings matches the SMTP server address you checked in "Checking Your E-Mail Account."

Description2

The domain name of the DNS server is incorrect.

Action

Start the Remote UI and make sure that Domain Name in TCP/IP Settings under Network Settings is set correctly.

Description3

The name of the DNS server is incorrect.

Action

Start the Remote UI and make sure that Primary DNS Server Address and Secondary DNS Server Address in TCP/IP Settings under Network Settings are set correctly.

Description4

Connection to the DNS server failed.

Action

Ask the network administrator to check that the DNS server is operating properly.

#0804

Description

You have no permission to access the folder.

Action

Check that the user name and password you specified match the user accounts (user name and password) registered to the computer (file server).

#0806

Description1

An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a file server.

Action

Check that the user name and password you specified match the user accounts (user name and password) registered to the computer (file server).

Description2

An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e-mail message or I-fax.

Action

Check the e-mail or I-fax address.

#0808

Description1

A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the FTP server.

Action1

Check that the FTP server is functioning normally.

Action2

Check the network status.

Description2

The FTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission.

Action1

Check that the FTP server is functioning normally.

Action2

Check the network status.

Action3

Check the destination setting.

Action4

Check the status and setting of the file server.

#0810

Description1

A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error occurred while receiving an I-fax.

Action1

Check the POP Server name in <E-mail/I-Fax Settings> in <Network Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen).

Action2

Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.

Action3

Check the network status.

Description2

The POP server returned an error during the connection.

Action

Start the Remote UI and make sure that POP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings matches the POP server address you checked in "Checking Your E-Mail Account."

Description3

A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server.

Action

Ask the network administrator to check that the mail server or the network is operating properly.

#0813

Description

The login name or password for access to the POP server is incorrect.

Action

Check that POP Address and POP Password in E-mail/I-Fax are set correctly. (See "When a POP Server is Used.")

#0816

Description

You have reached the quota for the number of pages you can scan for faxing.

Action

Reset or increase the page quota or contact your system administrator.

#0818

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (cannot print the attached file).

Action

Check the settings and ask the sender to resend the data.

#0819

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is incorrect).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data. The machine can receive only e-mails in plain text format. HTML e-mails cannot be received.

#0820

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data. The machine can receive only e-mails in plain text format. HTML e-mails cannot be received.

#0821

Description1

You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

Description2

The read job failed because TIFF or JPEG files were not supported or the image data was corrupted.

Action

Confirm that the supported file format is used, and then read data again.

#0827

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information that is not supported).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

#0828

Description

You have received HTML data.

Action

Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and then resend the data.

#0829

Description

Data that contains more than approximately 1,000 pages is received. (This error code may also appear when the machine receives corrupted data.)

Action

This machine can store up to approximately 1,000 pages of data in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages. (If the received data is corrupted, ask the sender to resend the appropriate data.)

#0839

Description

The user name or password for the SMTP Authentication is incorrect.

Action1

Start the Remote UI and make sure that SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings matches the SMTP server address you checked in "Checking Your E-Mail Account."

Action2

Start the Remote UI and enter the correct password for the SMTP Authentication in Password in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings.
If you do not know what your password is, check in the notification form issued by your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or consult the network administrator.

#0853

Description1

The job was not able to be processed due to the reason why it was canceled from an application or operating system while the print data was being sent to this machine from a computer etc.

Description2

You have sent the print data unsupported by the machine or sent corrupted print data.

Action

Check the settings, and then repeat the operation.

#0859

Description

An error occurred while compressing scanned originals.

Action

Check the scan settings, and then try scanning again.



If a Power Failure Occurs

If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging, a built-in battery retains the user data settings and the Address Book settings. Any sent or received documents stored in memory are backed up for about 60 minutes.

During a power cut, functions are limited as follows:

  • You cannot send, receive, copy, or print documents.
  • You may not be able to make telephone calls using an external telephone, depending on the type of telephone you use.
  • You can receive telephone calls using an external telephone depending on the type of telephone you use.

Remark
  • To fully charge the built-in battery, it takes approximately 2 hours when the main power switch is on. If the built-in battery is not fully charged, the data may not be saved properly.


If You Cannot Solve a Problem

  • Customer Support (U.S.A.)

If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST for U.S.A. and 9:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST for Canada Monday through Friday and 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. on Saturday. On-line support for 24 hours is also available at the website.
www.canontechsupport.com

  • Customer Support (Canada)

Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.

  • For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to frequently asked questions, visit
    www.canon.ca
  • Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under warranty 1-800-652-2666
  • For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit www.canon.ca or 1-800-652-2666
  • If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at www.canon.ca
    * Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.

Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon:

  • Product name (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn)
  • Serial number (on the label located on the top inside part of the front cover)

  • Place of purchase
  • Nature of problem
  • Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results

Remark
  • Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.


Clearing Jams

This section describes how to remove jammed paper. When error messages appear on the display, see "Error Messages." For other troubles, see "Troubleshooting."

When <Check the originals.>, <The paper has jammed.>, or <Remove the jammed paper from...> appears on the display, remove jammed paper from the machine. The screen indicating the location of the paper jam and procedure to clear the paper jam appears on the display. The screen repeatedly appears on the display until the paper jam is entirely cleared.

Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:

  • Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")
  • Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine.
  • Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the machine.

Remark
  • If you tear the paper, remove any torn pieces to avoid further jams.
  • If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner may be set permanently.
  • Do not force a jammed document or paper out of the machine. Contact Canon Customer Care Center if needed.

Original Jams

Paper Jams

Paper Delivery Tray


Duplex Unit


Stack Bypass Tray


Paper Drawer 1


Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2)


Inside of the Machine


Fixing Unit


Back Cover



Original Jams

Return to Overview

If a screen similar to the one shown above appears on the display, remove the jammed original from the feeder. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.

  1. Open the feeder cover.
  1. Hold both sides of any jammed original and gently pull it out.
  • Do not force a jammed original out of the machine. If the jammed original cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab (A).
  1. Lift the release lever (A) until it clicks into place.
  1. Remove the jammed original.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine as it may tear.
  1. Return the release lever (A) to its original position.
  1. Close the inner cover.
  1. Close the feeder cover.
  1. Load the original in the feeder again.


Paper Jams

Return to Overview

When <The paper has jammed.> or <Remove the jammed paper from...> appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the machine first, then from the paper cassette or stack bypass tray if necessary.


Remark
  • If the error message still remains after having removed the jammed paper, open and close the front cover to reset the machine.

Paper Delivery Tray

Duplex Unit

Stack Bypass Tray

Paper Drawer 1

Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2)

Inside of the Machine

Fixing Unit

Back Cover


Paper Delivery Tray

Return to Overview

If a screen similar to the one shown above appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the output tray. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.

  1. Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  • If unfixed toner is on the removed paper, it may adhere to the paper to be printed next.
  1. Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.

If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A) of it.



Duplex Unit

Return to Overview

If a screen similar to the one shown above appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the duplex unit. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.

  1. Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked.
  1. Open the inner cover, holding it by its center tab (A).
  1. Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Close the inner cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.
  1. Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.

If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A) of it.



Stack Bypass Tray

Return to Overview

If a screen similar to the one shown above appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the stack bypass tray. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.

  1. Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.


  1. Close the stack bypass tray.
  1. Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.

If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A) of it.



Paper Drawer 1

Return to Overview

If a screen similar to the one shown above appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the paper drawer. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.

  1. Using the handle, pull the paper drawer half way out.
  1. Push downward on the jammed paper as you remove it.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Gently push the optional paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.
  1. Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.

If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A) of it.



Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2)

Return to Overview

If a screen similar to the one shown above appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the optional paper drawer. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.

  1. Using the handle, pull the paper drawer half way out.
  1. Push downward on the jammed paper as you remove it.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off.
  • If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Gently push the optional paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.
  1. Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.

If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A) of it.



Inside of the Machine

Return to Overview

If a screen similar to the one shown above appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the inside of the machine. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
If the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer differs from the paper size set in the <Paper Settings> or the paper size set on the printer driver, a paper jam may occur. If this is the case, load the correct size paper before removing the jammed paper.


Remark
  • If you remove the jammed paper before re-loading the correct size paper, another paper jam may occur. Make sure to re- load the correct size paper before removing the jammed paper.
  1. Open the front cover.

If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Open the front cover gently holding the handle (A).

  • When removing the jammed paper, be sure to place paper on the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit to protect the belt.

  • Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality.

  1. Hold both sides of any jammed paper and pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
  • Gently remove the jammed paper in the direction of the arrow to prevent unfixed toner from spilling.
  • When removing the paper, be careful not to touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit or toner cartridge.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Press the lock release buttons (A) on the duplex print transport guide and lift the duplex print transport guide (B).

If you are not performing two-sided printing, proceed to the next step.

  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Remove the jammed paper while lifting the duplex print transport guide.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Lower the duplex print transport guide until it clicks into its original position.
  • Make sure that the duplex print transport guide is closed completely. If the duplex print transport guide is not closed completely, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
  1. Hold the tab (A) of the delivery feeder unit, and lift the delivery feeder unit until it clicks.
  1. Remove the jammed paper in the direction of the arrow.
  • If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to the next step.
  1. Close the front cover.


Fixing Unit

Return to Overview

If a screen similar to the one shown above appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the fixing unit. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.

  1. Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked.
  1. Open the fixing cover, holding it by its left tab (A).
  1. Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Close the fixing cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.


Back Cover

Return to Overview

If a screen similar to the one above appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the back side of the machine. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.

  1. Open the back cover.
  1. Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
  1. Close the back cover.
  1. Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.

If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A).



When the Message Does Not Disappear

When the message that indicates a paper jam occurring inside the top cover does not disappear even after the jammed paper is removed, this indicates that the jammed paper still remains in the fixing unit. Remove the fixing unit using the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • When you remove the fixing unit, you have to turn the main power switch OFF.
  • Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected.
  • If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
  • Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.
  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  1. Lift the scanning platform until it is locked.
  1. Grasp and pull the tab (A) on the left side of the top cover to open the fixing cover.
  1. Move the control panel into the upright position.
  1. Press the blue tabs (A) and hold the fixing unit by the parts indicated with arrows.
  1. Remove the fixing unit with both hands.
  1. Place the fixing unit on a flat surface.
  1. Open the fixing unit cover.
  1. Remove the jammed paper.
  1. Install the fixing unit.
  1. Close the fixing cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.
  1. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.


If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly

If the delivery feeder unit is not installed correctly, an error code <E000012> appears on the display. Follow the procedure below to install the delivery feeder unit correctly. If the error code does not disappear after the delivery feeder unit is installed correctly, contact Canon Customer Care Center.


Remark
  • You have to remove the delivery feeder unit and re-install the delivery feeder unit correctly.
  • When you remove the delivery feeder unit, you have to turn the main power switch OFF.
  • Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected.
  • If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
  • Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.
  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  • Make sure that the Processing/Data Indicator is turned off and check the display to confirm that a job is not being processed.
  1. Open the front cover.

If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Open the front cover gently holding the handle (A) .

  1. Push the levers (A) on both sides of the delivery feeder unit and remove the delivery feeder unit gently, holding it by the tabs (B).
  • Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality.

  1. Install the delivery feeder unit so that the protrusions (A) of the delivery feeder unit fit into the guides (B) and click into place.
  1. Confirm that the triangle marks (A) on the delivery feeder unit are aligned with the triangle marks (B) on the machine.
  1. Close the front cover

Close the front cover gently holding the handle.

  1. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.


If a Message Such as <Paper diff. from set size/type.> is displayed

If all of the following do not match, a message such as <Paper diff. from set size/type.> is displayed:

  • The paper size specified on the printer driver (Only when printing from a computer)
  • The paper size specified in the <Paper Settings> menu on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer or stack bypass tray

If such a message is displayed and you are unable to make a copy or print job, change the paper size in the items described above so that they all match.

See the following chart for details concerning the messages and remedies.


  • Messages displayed when the paper sizes do not match

Message Cause Remedy
Copy
Load LTR to Drawer 1.
(Depending on the paper supply and settings, the message displayed may vary.)
The following did not match:
  • The paper size specified on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
Change the following so that they match:
Paper diff. from set size/type.
Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover. The following did not match:
  • The paper size specified on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
Follow the procedure below:
1. Change the following so that they match:
  • Paper size setting on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
2. Remove the jammed paper inside the machine and close the front cover.
3. Wait for the machine to automatically resume the job.
(See "Loading Paper" or "Setting Paper Size and Type.")
Print
Load LTR to Drawer 1.
(Depending on the paper supply and settings, the message displayed may vary.)
The following did not match:
  • The paper size specified on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
To print on the paper of the size specified on the machine's paper settings and on the printer driver:
Load the paper of the size specified on the machine and on the printer driver and close the paper drawer. Printing will resume.
To print on the paper of the size that is loaded in the paper drawer:
1. Delete the current job.
2. Change the paper size settings both on the printer driver and on the machine.
3. Retry printing.
Load paper. The following did not match when printing:
  • The paper size specified on the printer driver
  • The paper size specified on the machine
Change the following so that they match, and then retry printing (When you change the paper size setting on the printer driver, cancel the job on the machine.):
  • The paper size setting on the printer driver
  • The paper size setting on the machine
Paper diff. from set size/type. The following did not match:
  • The paper size specified on the printer driver
  • The paper size specified on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
Change the following so that they match, and then retry printing:
If the massage <Paper different from set size/type> appears after you have selected <Recover Later> to the message <Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover.>:
1. Change the following so that they match: 2. Remove the jammed paper inside the machine and close the front cover.
(See "Inside of the Machine.")
Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover. A paper jam occurred because the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer was different from that of the paper specified on the machine and printer driver. Follow the procedure below (the procedure is the same when the massage <Paper different from set size/type> appears after you have selected <Recover Later>).
1. Change the following so that they match:
  • The paper size setting on the machine
  • The size of the paper in the paper drawer
2. Remove the jammed paper inside the machine and close the front cover.


Error Messages

When a message appears on the display, please refer to the examples of error messages on the following pages.


Error Messages <A to E>

Error Messages <F to J>

Error Messages <K to O>

Error Messages <P to Z>


Error Messages <A to E>

Return to Overview


A cover is open.

Avail. Mem.

Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.

Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.

Cannot connect to the server because timer settings for this device differ to those of the selected server.

Cannot find server.

Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.

Check the XXX toner.

Check the XXX toner connection.

Check TCP/IP.

Check that all of the covers are closed.

Check the originals.

Clean the scan area.

Clear the output tray.

Drawer 1 is not inserted.

A cover is open.

Description

The front cover or the fixing unit cover is open.

Action

Close the front cover or the fixing unit cover.

Avail. Mem.

Description

This message shows the percentage of the memory currently available. This message is displayed when you set the originals in the feeder in Fax/Send mode.

Action

If you need more space, wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.

Description1

The machine could not search for destinations within the specified time.

Action

Increase the time setting for <Search Timeout> in <Register LDAP Server>. (See "Setting Up LDAP Server.")

Description2

An error occurred on the LDAP server side.

Action

Check that the LDAP server is functioning normally.

Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.

Description

The machine cannot connect to the specified IP address/port.

Action1

Check the gateway address setting. (See "Setting and Checking the IP Address.")

Action2

Check the server address and port number for the LDAP server. (See "Setting Up LDAP Server.")

Action3

Check that the LDAP server is operating properly.

Action4

If <Login Information> is set to <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> for the LDAP server, check whether UDP (User Datagram Protocol) packages are blocked by the filter.

Cannot connect to the server because timer settings for this device differ to those of the selected server.

Description

The time setting of the LDAP server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart.

Action

The machine cannot connect to an LDAP server if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart with <Login Information> set to <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> for the LDAP server. Check the time settings on the server and the machine.

Cannot find server.

Description

The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.

Action

Check the DNS (Domain Name System) Server Settings in TCP/IPv4 or v6 in <Network Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen).

Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.

Description1

The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.

Action1

Check the DNS (Domain Name System) server settings. (See "Setting IPv4 DNS" or "Setting IPv6 DNS.")

Action2

Check whether the DNS server' s DNS settings are correct.

Description2

If <Login Information> is set to <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> for the LDAP server, the machine cannot determine the host name.

Action

Check the DNS (Domain Name System) server settings. (See "Setting IPv4 DNS" or "Setting IPv6 DNS.")

Check the XXX toner. (XXX indicates "Black", "Yellow", "Cyan", or "Magenta".)

Description

A toner cartridge that cannot guarentee print quality because it has reached the end of its life etc., or a toner cartridge that has already been spent may be set.

Action

Continued use of this toner cartridge may cause the machine to malfunction. Replacing of the toner cartridge is recommended. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One.")

Check the XXX toner connection. (XXX indicates "Black", "Yellow", "Cyan", or "Magenta".)

Description

There may be a problem with the toner cartridge connection of the indicated color.

Action1

Take out the toner cartridge of the indicated color, then properly set it again. For detailed instructions, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One."

Action2

Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again.

Action3

When this message does not disappear even if you take the above procedures, replace the toner cartridge with a new one (see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One.")

Check TCP/IP.

Description1

The machine's TCP/IP is not operating.

Action

Check the IP Address Settings in <Network Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Setting and Checking the IP Address.")

Description2

The machine and the network cable are not properly connected.

Action

Check that the network cable is properly connected between the machine and the network.

Check that all of the covers are closed.

Description

The cover is open.

Action

Check the cover and make sure that it is completely closed.

Check the originals.

Description

The original is not correctly set in the feeder.

Action

Correctly set the original in the feeder.

Clean the scan area.

Description

The feeder scanning area may be dirty.

Action

Clean the feeder scanning area (See "Scanning Area."), then press [OK].

Clear the output tray.

Description

Output paper is piled up on the output tray.

Action

Remove the output paper from the output tray.

Drawer 1 is not inserted.

Description

Printing or copying could not be performed because the paper drawer (Drawer 1) was not set.

Action

Set the paper drawer (Drawer 1) and push it in as far as it will go. The copy or print will automatically resume.



Error Messages <F to J>

Return to Overview


Insert the toner cartridge all the way holding the right & left grips.

IEEE802.1X Error An unknown error has occurred.
IEEE802.1X Error Unknown error has occurred

IEEE802.1X Error Cannot analyze the Certificate.

IEEE802.1X Error Change the password.

IEEE802.1X Error Check authentication settings.

IEEE802.1X Error No reply from the destination.

IEEE802.1X Error Set the correct Certificate info.
IEEE802.1X Error Set the correct certificate information.

IEEE802.1X Error The Certificate has expired.

IEEE802.1X Error The Certificate is incorrect.

Insert the XXX toner correctly.

Insert the XXX toner in the location of the correct color.

Insert the fixing unit.

Insert the toner cartridge all the way holding the right & left grips.

Insert the toner cartridge all the way holding the right & left grips.

Description

A toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly.

Action

Install the toner cartridge correctly.

IEEE802.1X Error An unknown error has occurred.
IEEE802.1X Error Unknown error has occurred.

Description

An unknown error occurred.

Action

Check for any errors in the settings of the supplicant machine, authenticator (LAN switch), as well as the RADIUS server.

IEEE802.1X Error Cannot analyze the Certificate.

Description

The machine failed to analyze the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server.

Action

Check for any errors in the server certificate on the RADIUS server.

IEEE802.1X Error Change the password.

Description

The password has expired.

Action

Set a new password.

IEEE802.1X Error Check authentication settings.

Description

The specified authentication method of the machine does not match the authentication method of the RADIUS server.

Action

Make sure that the correct authentication method is specified on the machine. If the information set on the machine is inconsistent with that of the RADIUS server, specify the correct authentication method.

IEEE802.1X Error No reply from the destination.

Description

An error occurred when communicating with the authenticator.

Action

Check for any errors in the authenticator (LAN switch) settings, as well as the RADIUS server settings.

IEEE802.1X Error Set the correct Certificate info.
IEEE802.1X Error Set the correct certificate information.

Description

The correct client authentication information (the key pair and certificate, user name and password, and the CA certificate) is not set.

Action

Check for incorrect settings in the authentication method and authentication information (the key pair and certificate, user name and password, and the CA certificate).

IEEE802.1X Error The Certificate has expired.

Description

The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.

Action

Check the expiration date of the server certificate on the RADIUS server.

IEEE802.1X Error The Certificate is incorrect.

Description

An error occurred when verifying the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server using the CA certificate.

Action

Check for any errors in the server certificate on the RADIUS server, as well as the CA certificate registered on the machine.

Insert the XXX toner correctly. (XXX indicates "Black", "Yellow", "Cyan", or "Magenta".)

Description

The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not inserted.

Action

Properly insert the toner cartridge of the indicated color. For detailed instructions, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One."

Insert the XXX toner in the location of the correct color. (XXX indicates "Black", "Yellow", "Cyan", or "Magenta".)

Description

The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not inserted in the correct location for that color.

Action

Insert the toner cartridge of the indicated color in the correct location for that color. For detailed instructions, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One."

Insert the fixing unit.

Description

The fixing unit is not inserted.

Action

Insert the fixing unit. For detailed instructions, see "When the Message Does Not Disappear."

Insert the toner cartridge all the way holding the right & left grips.

Description

A toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly.

Action

Install the toner cartridge correctly.



Error Messages <K to O>

Return to Overview


Load LTR to Drawer 1.

Load paper.

No response from the destination.

No response from the server. Check the settings.

Not enough TCP/IP resources. Wait a moment and perform the operation again.

Load LTR to Drawer 1.
(Depending on the paper supply and settings, the message displayed may vary.)

Description1

The following did not match when copying, receiving faxes/I-faxes or E-mails:

  • The paper size specified on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
Action

Change the following so that they match:

  • Paper size setting on the machine
Description2

The following did not match when printing:

  • The paper size specified on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
Action1

To print on the paper of the size specified on the machine's paper settings and on the printer driver:
Load the paper of the size specified on the machine and on the printer driver and close the paper drawer. Printing will resume.

Action2

To print on the paper of the size that is loaded in the paper drawer:
1. Delete the current job.
2. Change the paper size settings both on the printer driver and on the machine.
3. Retry printing.

Load paper.

Description

The following did not match when printing:

  • The paper size specified on the printer driver
  • The paper size specified on the machine
Action

Change the following so that they match, and then retry printing (When you change the paper size setting on the printer driver, cancel the job on the machine.) :

  • The paper size setting on the printer driver
  • The paper size setting on the machine

No response from the destination.

Description1

The server was not running when you tried to send.

Action

Check the destination.

Description2

The network connection was lost when you tried to send. (Either you could not connect to the destination or the connection was lost before the job could complete.)

Action

Check the status of the network.

Description3

A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e-mail or I-fax.

Action

Check that the network cables and connectors are properly connected.

No response from the server. Check the settings.

Description

The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server is not turned ON. Alternatively, the machine's TCP/IP resources may be low.

Action

Wait for a while, and try browsing again. If you still fail, try selecting another server.

Not enough TCP/IP resources. Wait a moment and perform the operation again.

Description

You cannot browse the network due to a lack of TCP/IP resources. This may be because documents have just been continuously sent or are being continuously sent through FTP or Windows (SMB).

Action

Wait for a while, and try browsing again.



Error Messages <P to Z>

Return to Overview


Paper diff. from set size/type.

Paper is jammed in the fixing unit. Check the manual for instructions.

Perform the operation again.

Preparing...

Prepare a new toner cartridge. (XXX)

Press the OK key.

Printer Error

Received in memory.

Remove the jammed paper from inside the cover of the feeder.

Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover.

Remove the jammed paper from XXX.

Remove the paper, and close the tray.

Replace the toner cartridge. (XXX)

Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.

Set the IP Address.

Set the toner cartridge. (XXX)

The counter has reached the set value.

The memory is full.

The number of search results has exceeded limits. If the desired destination is not displayed, change the search conditions and try again.

The scan area is dirty.

This size cannot be used with 2-Sided unit modes.

Transmission has been suspended. Contact system manager.

Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine.

Wait a moment...

Paper diff. from set size/type.

Description1

The following did not match when copying, receiving faxes/I-faxes or E-mails:

  • The paper size specified on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
Action

Change the following so that they match:

  • Paper size setting on the machine
Description2

The following did not match when printing:

  • The paper size specified on the printer driver
  • The paper size specified on the machine
  • The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
Action1

Change the following so that they match, and then retry printing:

  • The paper size specified on the printer driver
  • The paper size specified on the machine
Action2

If the massage <Paper diff. from set size/type> appears after you have selected <Recover Later> to the message <Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover.>:
1. Change the following so that they match:

  • Paper size setting on the machine

2. Remove the jammed paper inside the machine and close the front cover.
("Inside of the Machine")

Description3

The appropriate paper type for printing received faxes, I-faxes, or E-mails is not loaded.

Action

Load the appropriate type of paper (Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color) and change the paper type in <Paper Settings>.

Paper is jammed in the fixing unit. Check the manual for instructions.

Description

A paper jam occurred in the fixing unit.

Action

Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see "Fixing Unit."

Perform the operation again.

Description

A transmission error has occurred because the line condition was poor.

Action

Check the line condition, then try again.

Preparing...

Description

The machine is not ready for scanning.

Action

Wait until the machine is ready.

Prepare a new toner cartridge. (XXX) (XXX indicates "Black", "Yellow", "Cyan", or "Magenta".)

Description

When a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon.

Action

Have a replacement toner cartridge ready so you can quickly replace the toner cartridge when it runs out.

  • If the message is displayed while copying or printing (including manually printing a report), printing of the job that is currently being processed will continue.
  • If the message is displayed when receiving a fax, the received fax is stored in the memory without being printed. If <Toner Out Continuous Print> is set to <On>, however, printing will continue. (Printing will also continue if a report is printed automatically.) See "Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (Fax)."

Press the OK key.

Description

[Stop] has been pressed while scanning the document using the feeder.

Action

Press [OK], then set the originals again.

Printer Error

Description

Some kind of error has occurred in the machine.

Action

Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again. If the message persists, turn OFF the main power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Received in memory.

Description

The machine temporarily received the data in memory because an error of some kind has occurred in the machine. This error message appears with one of the messages below.

  • <Load paper.>
  • <A cover is open.>
  • <Check that all of the covers are closed.>
  • <The paper has jammed.>
  • <Remove the jammed paper from...>
  • <Replace the toner.>
Action

This error message appears with another message. When the error is resolved, the received data will be printed out. For how to solve the problem, see the action for the messages displayed with it.

Remove the jammed paper from inside the cover of the feeder.

Description1

A paper jam occurred inside the cover of the feeder.

Action

Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see "Original Jams."

Description2

The originals fed from the feeder is longer than 24 7/8" (630 mm), or are not feeding correctly when sending a fax.

Action

Reduce the length of the originals to within 24 7/8" (630 mm), then try again.

Description3

The originals are longer than 14" (355.6 mm) when you are sending e-mail, I-fax or sending a document to a file server.

Action

If the originals are shorter than 14" (355.6 mm), then try the procedure again.

Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover.

Description1

A paper jam occurred inside the front cover.

Action

Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see "Inside of the Machine."

Description2

A paper jam occurred because the paper loaded in the paper drawer is different from the paper specified in <Paper Settings> and the printer driver screen.

Action1

When printing, follow the instructions below.
1. Reload the correct size of paper into the paper drawer.
2. Remove the jammed paper and close the front cover. When removing the paper, be careful not to touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit or toner cartridge.

Action2

When copying, follow the instructions below.
1. Reload the correct size of paper into the paper drawer or stack bypass tray.
2. Remove the jammed paper and close the front cover. (See "Inside of the Machine.")
3. Wait a while until the job resumes.

Remove the jammed paper from XXX. (XXX indicates the location of the jam.)

Description

A paper jam occurred at the location shown on the display.

Action

Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see "Paper Jams."

Remove the paper, and close the tray.

Description

A paper jam occurred in the stack bypass tray.

Action

Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see "Stack Bypass Tray."

Replace the toner cartridge. (XXX) (XXX indicates "Black", "Yellow", "Cyan", or "Magenta".)

Description

When the toner runs out.

Action

Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color. Incidentally, even if any of Yellow, Cyan or Magenta toner runs out, black and white printing can still be performed if Black toner remains.

Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.

Description1

"\" is used in the search criterion.

Action

Remove "\" from the search criterion, and then search again.

Description2

The combination of characters used in the search criterion does not constitute an acceptable search criterion.

  • There is an unequal number of "(" and ")".
  • "*" is not placed within "( )".
Action

Make sure that the characters for the search criterion are combined properly, and then search again.

Description3

If <Server LDAP Version and Char. Code> is set to <Ver.2 (JIS)>, characters other than ASCII Code (0x20-0x7E) are being used.

Action

Omit characters that cannot be used, and then search again.

Set the IP Address.

Description

This machine is not set with an IP address.

Action

Specify the IP Address Settings in <TCP/IP Settings> in <Network Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen), then turn the machine's main power OFF and back ON again. (See "Setting and Checking the IP Address," or see "Set Up the Machine," in the Starter Guide.

Set the toner cartridge. (XXX) (XXX indicates either "Black", "Yellow", "Cyan", or "Magenta".)

Description

The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not set.

Action

Set the toner cartridge of the indicated color. For detailed instructions, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One."

The counter has reached the set value.

Description

You cannot print because the set page limit for either scans, prints, or copies in the department ID management function has been reached.

Action

Contact your system manager.

The memory is full.

Description1

The machine is full of jobs.

Action1

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Action2

Divide the document stack or data into a few parts and try again one by one.

Action3

Send the document with low resolution.

Action4

When this message appears during using the feeder, the scanning document stops halfway. In this case, clear the paper jam from the Feeder.

Description2

The number of TX/RX jobs that can be stored in memory reached the maximum.

Action

The maximum numbers of jobs that can be stored in memory are as follows (Based on the condition that the other party sends the fax by the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn/Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn with ITU-T No. 1 Chart standard mode);
Up to 70 jobs for sending or 90 jobs for receiving, 95 fax jobs including sending and receiving, or 75 e-mail and I-fax jobs for receiving.
Wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

The number of search results has exceeded limits. If the desired destination is not displayed, change the search conditions and try again.

Description

The number of addresses that meet the search criteria exceeds the specified maximum number of addresses to search.

Action1

Narrow down the search criteria, and then search again.

Action2

Increase the maximum number of addresses to search. (See "Setting Up LDAP Server.")

The scan area is dirty.

Description

The feeder's scanning area is dirty.

Action

Clean the feeder's scanning area.

This size cannot be used with 2-Sided unit modes.

Description

The paper size is not appropriate for a two-sided copy.

Action

Set the paper size to <LTR> or <LGL>, then load paper of the same size.

Transmission has been suspended. Contact system manager.

Description

You tried to send e-mails or I-faxes when the machine is in the User ID Management with the e-mail address of the login user not registered.

Action

Use the Remote UI to register the e-mail address for each user when User ID Management is enabled.

Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine.

Description

Description Some kind of error has occurred in the machine.

Action

Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again. If the message persists, write down the error code displayed on the bottom left side of the display, turn OFF the main power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or service provider.

Wait a moment...

Description

This message appears when turning ON the main power switch, or when the machine is not ready for printing.

Action

Wait until the message disappears.



Troubleshooting

General Problems

Paper Feeding Problems

Fax Problems

Sending Problems (Fax)


Receiving Problems (Fax)


Sending/Receiving Problems

Sending Problems


Receiving Problems


Copying Problems

Printing Problems

Scanning Problems

If Scanning Takes Too Long (Changing the Firewall Settings)


Telephone Problems

Network Problems


General Problems

Return to Overview


The machine has no power.

The Error indicator flashes.

Nothing appears on the display.

The machine has no power.

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned ON.

Is the power cord supplying power?

Use a different power cord, or test the cord for continuity using a voltmeter.

Is the main power switch turned ON?

Turn ON the main power switch.

The Error indicator flashes.

Does the machine feed paper correctly, or is there paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass tray?

Clear the paper jam, or load paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass tray. (For instructions on clearing paper jams, See "Clearing Jams." For instructions on loading paper, see "Loading Paper.")

If the machine has no paper jam, or if paper is loaded in the paper drawer or stack bypass tray, turn OFF the main power switch and wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again. If the problem is fixed, the Error indicator will turn off, and the display will return to the Main Menu screen. If the Alarm indicator the flashing, unplug the machine and contact Canon Customer Care Center.

Nothing appears on the display.

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned ON.

Is the main power switch turned ON?

Turn ON the main power switch.

Is the machine in Sleep mode?

Press (Power) on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode.



Paper Feeding Problems

Return to Overview


Paper does not feed properly.

Multiple sheets feed together into the machine.

Repeated paper jams occur.

Paper does not feed properly.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Does the machine contain too many sheets?

Make sure you load the correct quantity. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Multiple sheets feed together into the machine.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Does the machine contain too many sheets?

Make sure you load the correct quantity. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are different types of paper loaded in the machine?

Load only one type of paper.

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Let the paper run out before refilling the machine. Avoid mixing new stock with the paper already loaded.

Repeated paper jams occur.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")



Fax Problems

Return to Overview

This section describes how to solve fax problems. Please refer to the Sending/Receiving Problems if you cannot find any solutions to meet your problems.


Sending Problems (Fax)

Receiving Problems (Fax)


Sending Problems (Fax)

Return to Overview


Cannot send a fax.

Faxes sent from the machine are spotted or dirty.

Sending of documents is too slow.

Cannot send using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Errors occur frequently while sending.

Entering the fax number is required again after pressing (Start).

Cannot send the documents to multiple recipients.

The documents you sent are too light.

Cannot recall from <Specify from Log>.

Cannot send a fax.

Did you just turn ON the main power switch?

Wait for a while. After turning ON the main power switch, the machine cannot scan documents immediately.

Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type?

Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See "Make Fax Settings.")

Is your machine in the Send mode?

Use [] , [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Scan to Send>, then press [OK] to display the Send Type Selection screen.

Are the originals loaded correctly?

Make sure the originals are correctly loaded. (See "In the Feeder.")

Make sure the scanning platform and back cover are fully closed. (See "Paper Jams.")

Is the One-touch or Address Book you entered registered correctly?

Check that the Address Book settings are registered correctly. (See "Storing/Editing Address Book.")

Did you dial the correct number?

Check that you have the correct number.

Is the machine in the Sleep mode?

The machine does not scan originals if it is in the Sleep mode. To take the machine out of the Sleep mode, press (Power) on the control panel.

Is the recipient's machine out of paper?

Ask the recipient to make sure paper is loaded in the machine.

Are there other documents being sent from memory?

Allow time for the documents to finish sending.

Has an error occurred during transmission?

Check the display for an error message. (See "Error Messages.")

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

Is the telephone line working properly?

Make sure there is a dial tone when you select <Hook> on the <Enter Fax with Numeric Keys> screen or when you lift the handset of the external telephone connected to the machine. If there is no dial tone, contact your local telephone company.

Is the recipient's machine a G3 fax machine?

Make sure the recipient's machine is compatible with your machine.

Is BUSY/NO SIGNAL shown on the ERROR TX REPORT?

The fax number you dialed is busy. Try sending the document later.

The recipient's machine is not working. Ask the recipient to check the machine.

Did the recipient's machine answer within 35 seconds (after all automatic redialing attempts)?

Ask the recipient to check the machine. For an overseas call, add pauses to the registered number. (See "Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax).")

Is the Processing/Data indicator lit?

The external phone is busy. Please wait until the external phone becomes free.

Is the machine overheated?

Unplug the machine and let it cool for about 5 minutes. Then plug in the machine and try sending again.

Faxes sent from the machine are spotted or dirty.

Is the recipient's machine working properly?

Check the machine by making a copy. If the copy is clear, the problem may be in the recipient's machine. If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanner components. (See "Scanning Area.")

Are the originals loaded correctly?

Make sure the originals are correctly loaded. (See "In the Feeder.")

Are the scanning components of the machine clean?

If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanning components. (See "Scanning Area.")

Sending of documents is too slow.

Are documents being sent at a high resolution?

It is recommended that you send text-only documents with a lower resolution.

Is Error Correction Mode (ECM) set to <On>?

Because ECM corrects errors during a transmission, any problems on the line can mean that the transmission will take extra time. Set <ECM TX> to <Off>. (See "ECM Transmission (Fax).")

Cannot send faxes using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Does the recipient's machine support ECM?

If the recipient's machine does not support ECM, the document is sent in normal mode without error checking.

Errors occur frequently while sending.

Are the telephone lines in poor condition, or do you have a bad connection?

Check if there is a device nearby that interferes with signal transmission (e.g., microwave oven).

Lower the transmission speed. (See "System Management Settings.")

Entering the fax number is required again after pressing (Start).

Is <Confirm Entered Fax No.> set to <On>?

When <Confirm Entered Fax No.> is set to <On>, you need to enter the fax number again after pressing (Start). (See "Confirming Entered Fax Numbers.")

Cannot send the documents to multiple recipients.

Is <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>?

When <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See "Restricting Broadcasting.")

The documents you sent are too light.

Is the density setting set too light?

Adjust the density to make light documents darker. (See "Adjusting Density (Fax).")

Cannot recall from <Specify from Log>.

Is <Restrict Sending From Log> set to <On>?

When <Restrict Sending From Log> is set to <On>, recalling is not available. (See "Restricting Recall.")



Receiving Problems (Fax)

Return to Overview


Cannot receive a fax automatically.

No automatic switching between telephone and fax calls.

Cannot receive a document manually.

Print quality is poor.

Faxes do not print.

Received faxes print blotched or unevenly.

Part of the documents received are cut off.

Cannot receive using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Receiving of documents is too slow.

Cannot get documents from information services.

Errors occur frequently while receiving.

Cannot print received documents on both sides of the paper.

Cannot receive a fax automatically.

Is the machine set to receive automatically?

Make sure that the <Reception Mode Selection> in <RX Settings> is set to <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>, <Auto RX>, <Answer Mode>, or <DRPD>. If you have set <Answer Mode>, confirm that an answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded. (See "Methods for Receiving Faxes.")

Are documents stored in memory, leaving little or no memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Has an error occurred during reception?

Check the display for an error message. (See "Error Messages.")

Is paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "In the Paper Drawer.")

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

No automatic switching between telephone and fax calls.

Is the machine set to switch automatically between telephone and fax calls?

Make sure that the <Reception Mode Selection> in <RX Settings> is set to <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>, <Answer Mode>, or <DRPD>. If you have set <Answer Mode>, confirm that an answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded. (See "Methods for Receiving Faxes.")

Are documents stored in memory, leaving little or no memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Has an error occurred during reception?

Check the display for an error message. (See "Error Messages.")

Is paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "In the Paper Drawer.")

Can the sender's machine send the CNG signal, which tells your machine that the incoming call is a fax call?

Some machines cannot send this signal. In such cases, receive the fax manually.

Cannot receive a document manually.

Is the machine set to receive manually?

Make sure that the <Reception Mode Selection> in <RX Settings> is set to <Manual RX>. (See "Methods for Receiving Faxes.")

If you set <Manual/Auto Switch> to <On>, the machine will receive faxes automatically even when the receive mode is set to <Manual RX>. (See "Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode (Fax).")

Did you hang up the external telephone before pressing [Start] or dialing the remote reception ID?

Always press (Start) or dial the remote reception ID before hanging up. Otherwise you will disconnect the call.

Are originals loaded in the feeder?

Remove the originals from the feeder, and then try to receive faxes. If you press (Start) with originals loaded in the feeder, the machine starts to send faxes.

Print quality is poor.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the scanning components of the machine are clean.

Faxes do not print.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridges?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridges. (See "Set Up the Machine.")

Are the toner cartridges installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridges are installed properly. (See "Set Up the Machine.")

Are the toner cartridges out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges.")

Is the correct size of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Change <Paper Settings>. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")

Received faxes print blotched or unevenly.

Is <ECM RX> set to <On>?

ECM (Error Correction Mode) should eliminate such problems. (See "ECM Reception (Fax).") However, if the telephone lines are in poor condition, ask the sender to send faxes again.

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the scanning components of the machine are clean.

Part of the documents received are cut off.

Are the slide guides of the paper drawer set to the size of the paper?

Adjust the guides of the paper drawer to the size of the paper.

Have you specified the correct paper size for the paper drawer?

Specify the correct paper size for the paper drawer.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges.")

Cannot receive using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Does the sender's machine support ECM?

If the sender's machine does not support ECM, the document is received in normal mode without error checking.

Receiving of documents is too slow.

Is ECM (Error Correction Mode) set to <On>?

Because ECM corrects errors during a transmission, any problems on the line can mean that the transmission will take extra time. Set <ECM RX> to <Off>. (See "ECM Reception (Fax).")

Is the resolution of the sender's machine set too high?

Contact the sender and make sure the resolution of the sender's machine has been set properly.

Cannot get documents from information services.

Is your machine set up for a tone dialing type telephone line?

Press (Tone) to set up the machine for tone dialing.

Do you receive messages from the information services such as instructions to press (Start) after the beep to receive?

When you hear the beep sound, press (Start).

Errors occur frequently while receiving.

Are the telephone lines in poor condition, or do you have a bad connection?

Check if there is a device nearby that interferes with signal reception (e.g., microwave oven).

Lower the reception speed. (See "System Management Settings.")

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the machine is functioning properly.

Cannot print received documents on both sides of the paper.

Is <2-Sided Print> in <RX Settings> set to <On>?

Make sure that <2-Sided Print> in <RX Settings> is set to <On>. (See "Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax).")



Sending/Receiving Problems

Return to Overview

This section describes how to solve send problems such as e-mail and I-fax. Please refer to the Fax Problems if you cannot find any solutions to meet your problems.


Sending Problems

Receiving Problems


Sending Problems

Return to Overview


Document cannot be sent to an e-mail address, I-fax address or file server.

Memory fills up immediately when you try to send.

The documents you sent are too light.

Cannot recall from <Specify from Log>.

Cannot send the documents to multiple recipients.

Document cannot be sent to an e-mail address, I-fax address or file server.

Did you just turn ON the main power switch?

Wait for a while. After turning ON the main power switch, the machine cannot send documents immediately.

Did you enter the correct e-mail or I-fax address, or is the correct e-mail or file server address registered in the Address Book?

Make sure you entered the correct e-mail address, or that the e-mail, I-fax, or file server address registered in the Address Book is correct.

If you are sending an e-mail or I-fax message are the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings correct?

Check the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings.

If you are sending to a file server, are the user and password settings correct?

Check the user and password settings, and send the document again.

If you are sending to a file server, are the shared folder settings correct?

Check the shared folder settings. (See "Setting Shared Folder.")

Memory fills up immediately when you try to send.

Are you sending at a high resolution?

If you want to keep your document quality, divide the document into parts and send them separately.

If your document does not contain fine text or photographs, select a lower resolution.

If your document contains fine text or photographs, send it directly rather than using a memory transmission.

Is a document stored in memory, leaving little memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

The documents you sent are too light.

Is the density setting set too light?

Adjust the density to make light documents darker. (See "Adjusting Density (I-Fax).")

Cannot recall from <Specify from Log>.

Is <Restrict Sending From Log> set to <On>?

When <Restrict Sending From Log> is set to <On>, recalling is not available. (See "Restricting Recall.")

Cannot send the documents to multiple recipients.

Is <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>?

When <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See "Restricting Broadcasting.")



Receiving Problems

Return to Overview


The machine does not receive documents (e-mail, I-fax, or file server).

Print quality is poor.

Part of the documents received are cut off.

Cannot print received documents on both sides of the paper.

The machine does not receive documents (e-mail, I-fax, or file server).

Are network settings specified?

Documents cannot be received if the appropriate network settings are not specified. Confirm this with your system administrator.

Print quality is poor.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the scanning components of the machine are clean.

Part of the documents received are cut off.

Are the slide guides of the paper drawer set to the size of the paper?

Adjust the guides of the paper drawer to the size of the paper.

Have you specified the correct paper size for the paper drawer?

Specify the correct paper size for the paper drawer.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges.")

Cannot print received documents on both sides of the paper.

Is <2-Sided Print> in <RX Settings> set to <On>?

Make sure that <2-Sided Print> in <RX Settings> is set to <On>. (See "Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax).")



Copying Problems

Return to Overview


Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Copy is too light or has uneven density.

Color shift occurs.

Copy has vertical white streaks.

Copy is spotted or dirty.

Paper jams occur.

Copy is skewed.

Copy is not clear.

Originals are copied in <Calendar Type Copy> even if <Book Type Copy> is selected (or vice versa).

The alarm sounds or <The memory is full.> appears on the display when making copies.

Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridges?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridges. (See "Set Up the Machine.")

Are the toner cartridges installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridges are installed properly. (See "Set Up the Machine.")

Are the toner cartridges out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges.")

Copy is too light or has uneven density.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges.")

Color shift occurs.

Are you copying thicker originals on the feeder?

Set thick originals on the platen glass to scan them properly.

Copy has vertical white streaks.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges.")

Copy is spotted or dirty.

If the copy is dirty, clean the interior of the machine (components), the feeder roller, and the scanning area. (See "Cleaning the Machine.")

Paper jams occur.

Make sure the scanning platform and back cover are fully closed. (See "Paper Jams.")

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Copy is skewed.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded in the machine. (See "Loading Paper.")

Make sure the paper delivery slot is free of obstructions.

Copy is not clear.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are you copying on the wrong side of the paper?

Some types of paper have a "correct" side for copying. If the copy quality is not as clear as you think it should be, try copying on the other side of the paper.

Have you performed the full correction with <Auto Gradation Correction>?

Adjust the gradation in order to obtain the optimum print results.

Originals are copied in <Calendar Type Copy> even if <Book Type Copy> is selected (or vice versa).

Are you copying horizontal originals?

For horizontal originals, the front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top-bottom orientation when <Book Type Copy> is selected. When <Calendar Type Copy> is selected, the front and back side of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation. (See "2-Sided Copying.")

The alarm sounds or <The memory is full.> appears on the display when making copies.

Is the machine's memory full?

Check the remaining memory. (See "Checking the Device Information.")



Printing Problems

Return to Overview


Indicators are off and the display is blank.

Printing does not start.

The machine does not work.

Cannot print or store a job.

Paper is excessively curled after coming out of the machine.

Printer is not using the font you want.

One edge of the document is cut off.

The machine is printing garbled text.

The printout is too light or too dark.

Spots appear on the front and back of the printed pages.

Stripes appear on multiple sheets in sequence.

Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Printout is too light or has uneven density.

Printout has vertical white streaks.

Printout is spotted or dirty.

Paper jams occur.

Printout is skewed.

Toner does not set well. (Parts of images drop out, printout is soiled with loose toner.)

Faint images are printed on the blank part of the page.

Printed paper are curled.

Cannot print two-sided documents.

Cannot print documents from a computer. (Could print before, but suddenly stopped working.)

Indicators are off and the display is blank.

Is the main power switch turned ON?

Check the main power switch to ensure that the machine is turned ON.

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check the power cord and make sure it is connected at both ends.

Is the power cord supplying power?

Check the AC outlet. Consult an electrician or the local power company. If you are using a power strip, ensure that the power lead is connected at the source and turned ON.

Printing does not start.

Is the output tray full of paper during the print job?

Remove the paper in the tray.

Does the machine properly connect to the host computer?

Check the cable connection between the host computer and machine. (See "Set Up the Machine.")

Is a message displayed on the display?

Follow the instructions in the message.

Does the paper size set in the drawer match the paper size you have set in the application software?

Change the paper in the selected drawer to match the paper size you have set in the application software (or to match the size you have set for enlarging/reducing copy). Print again.

Select the drawer with the appropriate paper size you have set up in the application software (or to the size you have set for enlarging/reducing copy). Print again.

Is there paper in the drawer or the stack bypass?

Load paper.

The machine does not work.

Is a message displayed on the display?

Follow the instructions in the message.

Cannot print or store a job.

Is the total number of pages in all jobs within the limit which can be processed?

Delete other processes, cancel other jobs being processed, or wait until those jobs are finished, then print again.

Divide the job, then print again.

Paper is excessively curled after coming out of the machine.

Does your paper curl too easily?

Ensure that the paper you are using meets the specifications. Remove the paper stack, turn it over, reload in the drawer and try again. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Printer is not using the font you want.

Have you specified an available font?

Check whether the font you specified is available with the machine. (See "Typeface," and "Symbol Sets.")

One edge of the document is cut off.

Do the graphics or text fit within the specified printable area?

Use your software application to adjust the margins of the page. Make sure that your software application is not trying to print graphics or text outside the printable area. (See the application software manual.)

The machine is printing garbled text.

When you set up or installed your software application, did you select the appropriate printer?

Make sure the correct printer is selected. (See "Network Connection," and "USB Connection.")

Is the length of your interface cable correct?

Using a USB cable of 3 meters or shorter is recommended. If your USB cable is longer than this, replace it with a shorter one.

Is the machine plugged into an outlet shared with another electrical device capable of generating noise, such as a photocopier, shredder or air conditioner?

Plug the machine into a different outlet or consult a qualified technician to install a noise filter.

The printout is too light or too dark.

Are the toner density settings correct?

Adjust the toner density and print the data again. (See "Toner Density.")

Is <Save toner> in <Printing Adjustment> set to <On>?

<Save Toner> in <Print Quality> may be <On>. Set <Save Toner> to <Off> and print again.

Spots appear on the front and back of the printed pages.

Is the fixing roller inside the fixing unit dirty?

Clean the fixing roller. (See "Cleaning the Fixing Unit.")

Stripes appear on multiple sheets in sequence.

Is the cartridge damaged?

Contact Canon Customer Care Center. The cartridge may be damaged.

Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridges?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridges. (See "Set Up the Machine.")

Are the toner cartridges installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridges are installed properly. (See "Set Up the Machine.")

Are the toner cartridges out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One.")

Printout is too light or has an uneven density.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One.")

Printout has vertical white streaks.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridges. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One.")

Printout is spotted or dirty.

If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanning components and machine's interior (See "Cleaning the Machine.")

Paper jams occur.

Make sure the scanning platform and back cover are fully closed. (See "Paper Jams.")

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Printout is skewed.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded in the machine. (See "Loading Paper.")

Make sure the Output tray is free of obstructions. (See "Machine Components.")

Toner does not set well. (Parts of images drop out, printout is soiled with loose toner.)

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

If the paper type setting is <Plain 1>, change the setting to <Plain 2>.

Are you printing on the wrong side of the paper?

Some types of paper have a "correct" side for printing. If the printout quality is not as clear as you think it should be, try printing on the other side of the paper.

Faint images are printed on the blank part of the page.

If the paper type setting is <Plain 2>, <Heavy 1> or <Heavy 2>, change the setting as follows:

  • <Plain 2> → <Plain 1>
  • <Heavy 1> → <Plain 2>
  • <Heavy 2> → <Heavy 1>

Printed paper are curled.

Set <Special Mode P> to <On>*. (See "Reducing Paper Curl (Special Mode P).")
*This may cause the print speed to be slower than normal.

Cannot print two-sided documents.

Are the printer driver settings correctly set for two-sided printing?

Make sure that the printer driver is correctly set. (See Online Help.)

Cannot print documents from a computer. (Could print before, but suddenly stopped working.)

The machine is not connected properly with a cable.

Make sure that the machine is connected to the network with an appropriate cable. After connecting the cable, turn ON the machine. (See "Basic Network Settings.")

The computer that you are printing from is not set up correctly.

Make sure that the appropriate printer driver is installed. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

Check if the selected printer is the one that you are trying to print from. To check for available printers, access [Control Panel] → [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers].

The machine’s IP address settings are not correctly configured.

Check if the IP address settings are correctly set. (See "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings.")
* If the IP address is not assigned, it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".

  • If the IP address has been manually set, check if the correct IP address is assigned to the machine, and change the settings as required. (See "Setting IPv4 Address Manually.")

The machine’s IP address has been changed.

If the machine is used in a network with a DHCP server and assigned an IP address automatically, printing from a computer may suddenly stop working. This could be caused by a restart of the router, which changes the assigned IP address.

To resume printing again, you need to reset the same IP address both on the machine and in the computer's port settings. (See "Confirming and Changing the IP Address of the Machine and Port Settings of Your Computer.")

The file name is too long.

In LPR printing, the computer sends a job name to the printer. A job name is created with the name of the application software used or the file name. You will be able to print the job by shortening the file name so that the job name is reduced to 255 bytes or less.



Scanning Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot scan a document.

Computer has hung up or frozen.

Scanned images look dirty.

Scanned image is displayed at a larger (smaller) size on the computer screen.

Background colors on the originals are scanned and appear on the scanned image.

Dark borders and frame lines that appear around the original have been scanned.

Scanning takes too long.

Cannot scan a document.

Does anything appear on the display?

If nothing appears on the display, see "General Problems."

Is the Error indicator blinking?

If the Error indicator is blinking, see "General Problems."

Is the document placed correctly?

Remove the document and place it on the platen glass or in the ADF correctly. (See "Placing Originals.")

Is your computer working properly?

Restart your computer.

Have you specified the document source correctly?

Choose between placing the document on the platen glass or in the ADF.

Is the image size too large?

On the Color Network ScanGear [Options] sheet, select [High] for [Compression Ratio].

Computer has hung up or frozen.

Is enough memory loaded in your computer?

Quit other opened applications and try again.

Is enough space available in the hard disk?

Check that the hard disk has enough available space, in particular when scanning large documents at a high resolution. For example, a LTR-size document scanned at 600 dpi, full color requires a minimum of 300 MB of disk space.

When an error occurred during scanning an image in Photoshop.

Change the allocated memory in Photoshop. From the [Edit] menu, select [Preferences] → click [Memory & Image Cache]. Change the [Memory Usage] in a range of approximately 50% to 60%.

Is Color Network ScanGear installed properly?

Remove Color Network ScanGear, then reinstall it. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

Scanned images look dirty.

Are the scanning components of the machine clean?

Clean the platen glass, cover and the ADF scanning area.

Is the image size too small?

Some applications do not display an image properly at small sizes. Try displaying the image at 100% magnification.

Is the monitor's display color set below 16 bits?

In [Display Properties], set the display colors to 16-bit color, 24-bit color or higher.

Scanned image is displayed at a larger (smaller) size on the computer screen.

Is the resolution setting correct?

Do one of the following:

  • Enlarge or reduce the image display in the application. If you open the image in Paint or Imaging, it may display at a large size and you will not be able to reduce it.
  • Change the resolution and scan again. The image will be large if the resolution is high. It will be small if the resolution is low.

Background colors on the originals are scanned and appear on the scanned image.

Is the Remove Background setting selected?

1. On the Color Network ScanGear [Main] sheet, select [Manual] for [Density Adjustment] and then [Remove Background] for [Image Qlty Adjstmnt].
2. Click [Fine Adjustment] to display the [Adjustments for Background Removal] and adjust the background density by moving the slider for each color.

Dark borders and frame lines that appear around the original have been scanned.

Is the Original Frame Erase mode enabled?

Perform the following steps:
Right-click in the Preview Area and select [Original Frame Erase] → [On].

Scanning takes too long.

Is Windows firewall enabled?

Computers running Windows Vista/7 or Windows XP with Service Pack 2 may block access from the machine if Windows Firewall settings are incorrect. As a result, scanning may take a long time. If this happens, change the firewall settings. (See "If Scanning Takes Too Long (Changing the Firewall Settings).")



If Scanning Takes Too Long (Changing the Firewall Settings)

Return to Overview

Computers running Windows Vista/7 or Windows XP with Service Pack 2 may block access from the machine if Windows Firewall settings are incorrect. As a result, scanning may take a long time. If this happens, change the firewall settings as described below.


Remark
  • Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

  • For Windows XP Service Pack 2

  1. Select the [start] menu → [Control Panel] to display the Control Panel.

  1. Click [Security Center] to access the Security Center.

  1. Click [Windows Firewall] under [Manage security settings for:] to open the [Windows Firewall] window.


  1. If the check box next to [Don’t allow exceptions] on the [General] sheet is selected, clear the check box and click the [Exceptions] tab.


  1. On the [Exceptions] sheet, click [Add Program].


  1. On the [Add Program] window, select [ScanGear Tool] and click [OK].


  1. After returning to the [Exceptions] sheet, select the check box next to [ScanGear Tool(SgTool.exe)] or the applications used for scanning, and click [OK] to close the [Windows Firewall] window.


  • For Windows Vista

  1. Select the [Start] menu → [Control Panel] to display the Control Panel.

  1. Click [Allow a program through Windows Firewall] under [Security] to open the [Windows Firewall Settings] window.

  1. If the check box next to [Block all incoming connections] on the [General] sheet is selected, clear the check box and click the [Exceptions] tab.


  1. On the [Exceptions] sheet, click [Add program].


  1. On the [Add a Program] window, select [ScanGear Tool] and click [OK].


  1. After returning to the [Exceptions] sheet, select the check box next to [ScanGear Tool(SgTool.exe)] or the applications used for scanning, and click [OK] to close the [Windows Firewall Settings] window.


  • For Windows 7

  1. Select the [Start] menu → [Control Panel] to display the Control Panel.

  1. Click [System and Security] → [Windows Firewall] → [Turn Windows Firewall on or off].

  1. If the check box next to [Block all incoming connections, including those in the list of allowed programs] on the [Customize Settings] window is selected, clear the check box and click [OK].


  1. On the [Windows Firewall] window, click [Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall].


  1. On the [Allowed Programs] window, click [Allow another program].


  1. On the [Add a Program] window, select [ScanGear Tool] and click [Add].


  1. In the [Allowed programs and features] list, make sure that the check box next to [ScanGear Tool (SgTool.exe)] or the applications used for scanning is selected, and click [OK] or [Close] to close the [Windows Firewall] window.



Telephone Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot dial.

Telephone disconnects while talking.

Calls do not connect, or the wrong number is dialed.

Cannot dial.

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned ON.

Is the main power switch turned ON?

Turn ON the main power switch.

Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type?

Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See "Make Fax Settings.")

Telephone disconnects while talking.

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

Is the telephone cable defective?

Use another cord.

Calls do not connect, or the wrong number is dialed.

Did you check for the dial tone before entering the telephone number?

Make sure to check for the dial tone before entering a telephone number. If you enter the number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not connect or the wrong number may be dialed.



Network Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot print documents from a computer. (Could print before, but suddenly stopped working.)

The printer port name is not displayed in [Print to the following port(s)].

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to the network).

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Unable to send data/share files (FTP).

Unable to send data/share files (Windows File Sharing).

Unable to find the machine during the driver software installation (Network Connection).

Cannot print documents from a computer. (Could print before, but suddenly stopped working.)

The machine is not connected properly with a cable.

Make sure that the machine is connected to the network with an appropriate cable. After connecting the cable, turn ON the machine. (See "Basic Network Settings.")

The computer that you are printing from is not set up correctly.

Make sure that the appropriate printer driver is installed. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

Check if the selected printer is the one that you are trying to print from. To check for available printers, access [Control Panel] → [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers].

The machine’s IP address settings are not correctly configured.

Check if the IP address settings are correctly set. (See "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings.")
* If the IP address is not assigned, it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".

  • If the IP address has been manually set, check if the correct IP address is assigned to the machine, and change the settings as required. (See "Setting IPv4 Address Manually.")

The machine’s IP address has been changed.

If the machine is used in a network with a DHCP server and assigned an IP address automatically, printing from a computer may suddenly stop working. This could be caused by a restart of the router, which changes the assigned IP address.

To resume printing again, you need to reset the same IP address both on the machine and in the computer's port settings. (See "Confirming and Changing the IP Address of the Machine and Port Settings of Your Computer.")

The file name is too long.

In LPR printing, the computer sends a job name to the printer. A job name is created with the name of the application software used or the file name. You will be able to print the job by shortening the file name so that the job name is reduced to 255 bytes or less.

The printer port name is not displayed in [Print to the following port(s)].

Are the machine and cable properly connected?

Check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, then restart the machine. (See "Set Up Network Connection.")

Is the computer that is printing properly set up?

Make sure the proper printer driver is installed. (See "About User Software CD-ROM.")

Make sure the correct machine is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing in [Printers and Faxes] or [Printers].

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to the network).

Does the dial-up router send packets via broadcast?

If the dial-up router does not have to send packets via broadcast, change the router settings to ensure that it sends packets via a method other than broadcast. If the dial-up router has to send packets via broadcast, check that the settings are correct.

Dose the file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine exist on the network?

Check that the file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine is correct.

Does the DNS server exist on an external network?

If you attempt to access a device on the network to which the machine is connected, with the DNS server on an external network, set the destination using an IP address, not a host name.

Is the device's information set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected correct?

If information about a device on an external network is set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected, check the settings.

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Are the settings for <IP Address Range Settings> correct?

If the settings for <IP Address Range Settings> do not permit the IP address of a computer on which the Remote UI or utility is used, you cannot set the machine setting items or browse information on the machine. Check the settings for <IP Address Range Settings>. (See "Controlling the Machine Access using IPv4 addresses" or "Controlling the Machine Access using IPv6 addresses.")

Are the settings for <Receiving MAC Address> correct?

If the MAC address of a computer specified in <Receiving MAC Address> is not correct, you cannot set the machine setting items or browse information on the machine. Check the settings for <Receive MAC Address Set.>. (See "Limiting the Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address.")

Is <Use SNMP> or <Dedicated Port Settings> is to <Off>?

Set <Use SNMP> and <Dedicated Port Settings> to <On>. (See "Setting SNMP.")

Does the SNMP community name match?

If an SNMP community name different from the one stored in the machine is used to access the machine from a utility, the utility will not detect the machine. If this happens, check the SNMP community name. (See "Setting SNMP.")

Unable to send data/share files (FTP).

Is the FTP server set correctly?

Check the following (if you are using Windows, perform these from the MS-DOS prompt):

  • Example using UNIX, where the FTP server has the IP address:

192.168.1.195
U:>ftp 192.168.1.195 *Connect to server Connected to 192.168.37.195.220 canmfs FTP server (UNIX(r) System V Release 4.0) ready.
User (192.168.37.195:(none)): user_name *User login
331 Password required for user_name.
Password: *Enter password
230 User user_name logged in.
ftp> cd /export/share *Move to data destination directory
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> bin *Set data transfer type (binary)
200 Type set to I.
ftp> put sample.tif *Set transfer file name for verification
ftp> bye *Cut off server connection
221 Goodbye
If, after checking the above, the file sharing still does not operate normally, consult the network administrator for the environment you are using.

Is the machine's address [User] setting correct?

Ensure that the machine's address [User] setting does not contain spaces after the user name.

Was the machine turned OFF while sending data to the FTP server (if a Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008 FTP server is being used)?

If power to the machine is turned OFF while data is being sent to the FTP server, the FTP server may hold the data in a writing-in-progress state. Therefore, this data cannot be overwritten even when the machine reconnects and sends the same data again. Stop the FTP server temporarily and delete the held data, so that it can be sent again.

Unable to send data/share files (Windows File Sharing).

Are the file sharing settings for the shared folder correct?

Check the following settings:

  • On the computer you are using, go into Windows Explorer → double-click [Entire Network] → check that the computer you want to share is listed there. You can also check for the computer as follows: On the [Start] (or [start]) menu, point to [Find] → [Computer] (or [My Computer]) → enter the name of the computer you want to share → check that the computer is on the network.
  • If the computer you want to share is listed, double-click its icon to see whether the shared name of the folder you want to share is listed.
  • If the name of the shared folder does not appear, see "Setting Shared Folder" and check the shared folder settings.

Is an error message or code displayed on the display of the machine?

After confirming the error message, see "Error Messages" and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.

Unable to find the machine during the driver software installation (Network Connection).

The machine is not turned ON.

If the machine is turned OFF, the driver cannot detect the machine. Press the main power switch to the ‘|’ side. After turning ON the machine, click [Search Again].

The network cable is not properly connected.

Check the connector both on the machine and the computer to see that the network cable is fully inserted in the correct ports. (See "Basic Network Settings.") After properly connecting the cable, click [Search Again].

Security software is installed.

It is possible that the security software installed in your computer is not configured properly. See the documentation that comes with the security software, and check the settings. After correcting the settings as required, click [Search Again].

The machine’s IP address is not set.

Check if an IP address is set on the machine. (See "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings.") After properly setting the IP address, click [Search Again].

The computer port settings are not consistent with the machine’s IP address.

In the computer's port settings, select the port for which the machine's IP address is set, or add a port if the port for the machine has not yet been configured. (See "Changing the Port Settings When Installing the Printer Driver (for Network Connection).") After properly selecting the port settings, install the driver software.



Changing the Port Settings When Installing the Printer Driver (for Network Connection)

When installing the driver software, the machine may not be found on the network. (The machine's information does not appear on the list as shown below.) In this case, see "Unable to find the machine during the driver software installation (Network Connection)" in "Network Problems" and find possible solutions to the problem. If the problem persists, install the driver software after changing the port settings as described below.

  1. Click [Back].

  1. Click [Back].

  1. Select [Manually Set Port to Install] and click [Next].

  1. Click [Next].

  1. In [Printer List], select [Canon iR C1028/1030 UFRII LT] and click [Add].

  1. Select the added printer and click [Next].

  1. In the [Port] drop-down list box, check if the correct port is selected.
  • If the IP address assigned to the machine is found in the list, select the IP address. Skip to step 12.
  • If the IP address assigned to the machine is not found in the list, click [Add Port]. Skip to step 8.

  1. In the [Add Port] dialog box, select [Standard TCP/IP Port] and click [OK].

  1. In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Next].

  1. Enter the machine’s IP address in [Printer Name or IP Address] and click [Next].

  • Your entry in [Printer Name or IP Address] is automatically entered also in [Port Name].
  1. Click [Finish].

  1. Click [Next].

  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to continue the installation.


Uninstalling Software

If the printer driver or fax driver become unnecessary, follow the procedure below to uninstall them.


Remark
  • Confirm the following before performing the uninstallation
  • That you have the installation software (if you want to re-install the drivers)
  • No applications are running on your computer
  • For uninstallation, you must be the user with administrative privileges.
  1. From the Windows task bar, [Start] or [start] menu, click [Programs] or [All Programs] → [Canon] → [Canon Printer Uninstaller] → select the uninstaller for the driver you want to uninstall.
  1. In the [Delete Printer] dialog box, select the printer driver you want to delete.
  • If you click [Cleanup], all the files and registry information related to the selected driver are deleted. Click [Delete] to perform a normal uninstallation of the driver.
  1. Click [Delete].
  1. Click [Yes] to confirm the deletion.
  1. Click [Exit] in the [Delete Printer] dialog box.


Maintenance

Maintenance Instructions



Cleaning the Machine

Note the following before cleaning your machine:

  • Make sure no documents are stored in memory when you turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  • Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.
  • Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can stick to the components or generate static charges.

Remark
  • Never use volatile liquids such as thinner, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine. These can damage the machine components.
  • You cannot send or receive documents when the main power switch is turned off or the power cord is disconnected.
  • If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
  • Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.
  • When you turn OFF the main power switch, the documents stored in memory will be erased. To check the jobs stored in memory, see the following:

Exterior

Interior

Cleaning the Fixing Unit


Scanning Area

Cleaning the Platen Glass


Cleaning the Feeder Automatically



Exterior

Return to Overview

Clean the exterior of the machine.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  1. Wipe the machine's exterior with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution.
  1. Wait for the machine to dry, then reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch.


Interior

Return to Overview

Clean the machine's print area periodically to prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating inside.


Cleaning the Fixing Unit


Cleaning the Fixing Unit

Return to Overview

If black streaks appear on printed output, the fixing unit may be dirty. Also, you should use the Fixing Unit Cleaning procedure every time the toner cartridge is replaced. Print the cleaning pattern on LTR paper for cleaning the fixing unit.


Remark
  • As cleaning paper, LTR or A4 paper must be loaded in the paper drawer or the stack bypass tray.
  • Cleaning the fixing unit takes approximately 60 seconds.
  • When some jobs are stored in memory, this function is not available.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fixing Unit Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <Start Cleaning> is displayed, then press [OK].

Printing starts.

Discard the cleaning paper after use.

  • The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Scanning Area

Return to Overview

Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent.


Cleaning the Platen Glass

Cleaning the Feeder Automatically


Cleaning the Platen Glass

Return to Overview

Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder by following the procedure below.

  1. Open the feeder.
  1. Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.
  1. Close the feeder.


Cleaning the Feeder Automatically

Return to Overview

If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder, clean the rollers of the feeder.


Remark
  • Use LTR or A4 paper as cleaning paper.
  • It takes approximately 30 seconds to clean the feeder.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Feeder Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder.
  1. Confirm that <Start> is displayed, then press [OK].

The display returns to the Adjustment/Cleaning screen. Discard the cleaning paper after use.

  • The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Replacing the Toner Cartridges

This section describes how to replace or handle the toner cartridges and precautions on storing them.


When a Message Appears

Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One


When a Message Appears

Return to Overview

Toner cartridges are consumable products. When the time to replace the toner cartridge is nearing or the toner runs out while using this machine, a message appears on the display.


Message When it is Displayed Contents and Remedies
Prepare a new toner cartridge. (XXX*) When a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon.
  • Prepare a new toner cartridge.
  • Replacing the toner cartridge is recommended before performing a bulk printing.
Check the XXX* toner. A toner cartridge that cannot guarantee print quality because it has reached the end of its life etc., or a toner cartridge that has already been spent may be set. Continued use of this toner cartridge may cause the machine to malfunction.
Replacing of the toner cartridge is recommended.
Replace the toner cartridge. (XXX*) When the toner runs out. Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color. Incidentally, even if any of Yellow, Cyan or Magenta toner runs out, black and white printing can still be performed if Black toner remains.
* XXX indicates "Black", "Yellow", "Cyan", or "Magenta".


Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One

Return to Overview

If any of the following messages appears, replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color with a new one.

<Replace the toner cartridge. (Black)>: Replace the black toner cartridge.
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Yellow)>: Replace the yellow toner cartridge.
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Cyan)>: Replace the cyan toner cartridge.
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Magenta)>: Replace the magenta toner cartridge.

  1. Open the front cover by using the handle (A).
  • The toner cartridges are installed in order of black, yellow, cyan, and magenta from the top as shown in the figure.

  1. To prevent damage to the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit (A), cover the thin plastic belt with paper (LTR size paper is recommended) as shown in the figure and be sure that they do not move out of place.
  • When installing or removing the toner cartridges, be sure to place paper on the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit to protect the belt.
  • Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit has a self cleaning function, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality.



  1. Hold the blue tabs on the both sides of toner cartridge, and pull it horizontally.
  • Do not touch the high-voltage contact (A) or the electrical contacts (B), as this may result in damage to the printer.



  1. Take the new toner cartridge out of the protective bag after taking it out of the package.

There is a cut near the arrow on the protective bag, so you can open it by hand. However, if you cannot open it by hand, use scissors to open the protective bag so as not to damage the toner cartridge.

  1. Gently rock the toner cartridge several times to evenly distribute the toner inside.
  1. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface, fold back the tab of the sealing tape (A) located at left side of the toner cartridge.
  1. Remove the sealing tape (approx. 18 7/8 inch long) gently by hooking your fingers into the tab and pulling it out straight in the direction of the arrow.
  • Do not pull the seal out at an angle.

  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A).

  • If toner is adhered to the removed seal, be careful not to dirty your hands or clothing by touching it.
  • If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. Doing so may cause the toner to set permanently.
  1. Hook your finger into the tab and remove the packing materials (A) located at right side of the toner cartridge.
  1. Hold the toner cartridge properly by the blue tabs on the both sides with the arrowed side facing up.
  • Do not hold the toner cartridge in a manner that is not directed in this procedure.

  1. Align (A) of the toner cartridge that you want to replace with the slots (B) to which the label of the same color is attached, then insert the cartridge until it stops.
  1. After removing all the packing materials on the each toner cartridges and installing the cartridges, remove the paper on the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit.
  • When removing the paper, be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit.
  1. Close the front cover.
  • If the front cover does not close properly, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.


Recycling Used Cartridges

Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called "The Clean Earth Campaign." This program preserves precious natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used cartridges that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the environment cleaner by reducing landfill waste. Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge box.

The Clean Earth Campaign - The Canon Cartridge Return Program

U.S.A. PROGRAM


Packaging


Shipping


Canadian Program - Programme au Canada



The Clean Earth Campaign - The Canon Cartridge Return Program

Return to Overview

The Canon Cartridge Return Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon's Clean Earth Campaign, which supports four critical environmental areas:

  • Recycling in the Workplace
  • Conserving Environmental Resources
  • Scientific Research and Education
  • Encouraging Appreciation of the Outdoors

"Clean Earth" initiatives supported by Canon in the U.S. include Eyes on Yellowstone, Canon Envirothon, NATURE Series on PBS and The Canon Clean Earth Crew. Initiatives supported in Canada include Canon Envirothon and World Wildlife Fund - Canada.

Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Return Program has collected millions of cartridges that otherwise would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities. Instead, this rapidly growing program recovers used cartridges and separates them into components which are then put to various industrial uses.

Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow the instructions detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.

We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Return Program.

Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.

  • Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.
  • This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.



Packaging

Return to Overview


  • One Box Return

To receive your free eight cartridge collection box:
Call 1-800-OK-CANON

or

Visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return

OR

Place as many cartridges as possible into one box. Carefully seal the box with tape;

OR

Place an empty toner cartridge in the box that contained your new toner cartridge.


  • Bundled Return

Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.

Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications (See Below).

Maximum weight = 70 pounds Maximum length = 108 inches
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130 inches

Please Note:
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as provided in the warranty.



Shipping

Return to Overview

Make sure the UPS A.R.S. label is applied.


  • UPS Pick-up

Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery.


Call 1-800-PICK-UPS for Drop-Off options in your area.


By using either of the above methods of shipment, your used cartridge(s) will be forwarded to the Canon Cartridge Collection Center at no charge to you.

Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use UPS authorized return label. Alternative return service with the U.S. Postal Service is available by calling 1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return


For further information about the Clean Earth Campaign in the United States, please call: 1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth



Canadian Program - Programme au Canada

Return to Overview


  • Single Box Return
  • Repackage the empty toner cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge's box.
  • Place the empty toner cartridge in the box from your new toner cartridge. Seal the box.
  • Apply the Canon Canada Inc./ Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon's labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
  • Deposit your empty toner cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or franchise.


  • Volume Box Return (Maximum 8 Cartridges)

We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.

  • Please tape your eight cartridges together and place them in a box.
  • Apply the Canon Canada Inc./ Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon's labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
  • Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up.


Working to protect the environment is a long-standing Canon interest. To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates funds to World Wildlife Fund - Canada and the Canon Envirothon.

For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please write to Canon.
Canon Canada Inc.
Corporate Customer Relations
6390 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7



Adjusting the Machine

This section describes how you can adjust the settings of the machine to improve print quality and to prevent paper jams, which may occur when a variety of functions are used. It is recommended that you perform these settings regularly to prevent a number of problems from occurring.


Remark
  • It is recommended that you select <Full Correction> when performing an automatic gradation correction. Select <Quick Correction> for a quick, but less complete adjustment between regular full adjustment recalibrations.

Correcting Gradation

Full Correction


Quick Correction


Copy Image Correction


Adjusting Feeder Smudge

Calibrating the Machine when Power is Turned on (First Calibration)

Adjusting Detection between Color Documents and Black-and-White Documents (ACS Function Adjustments)

Adjusting Detection of Black Characters in Color Documents (Color Black Character Processing)

Adjusting Toner Fixing (Image Special Processing)

Confirming Paper Length (Paper Length Confirmation)

Reducing Paper Curl (Special Mode P)


Correcting Gradation

Return to Overview

You can recalibrate the machine when you notice irregularities in the color of the copies or prints, such as when copies turn out to be different from the original in gradation, density, or color.

The following three types of gradation corrections can be made:

  • Full Correction (Recommended)

This recalibrates the gradation for both copies and prints.

  • Quick Correction

This is a simple and temporary correction until next time a Full Correction is performed. Quick Correction recalibrates the gradation for both copies and prints. If the recalibration is insufficient, perform a Full Correction.

  • Copy Image Correction

This recalibrates the gradation for copies. If the recalibration is insufficient, perform a Full Correction.


Full Correction

Quick Correction

Copy Image Correction


Full Correction

Return to Overview

This is a precise recalibration for the machine's gradation, density, and color settings. The procedure involves making test prints and placing them on the platen glass for scanning. Once this is complete, the machine automatically corrects the irregularities.


Remark
  • Make sure that you place the test prints properly. Accurate recalibrations of the gradation, density, and color settings of the machine cannot be made if the test prints are not scanned correctly.
  • Two test prints are output by the machine during this adjustment. Make sure that a sufficient supply of LTR or A4 paper is loaded into the machine before starting this procedure.
  • Test prints are not counted as part of the copy or print total page counts.
  • It takes approximately five minutes to perform the Full Correction.
  • For an accurate adjustment, do not use colored paper, transparencies, or labels.
    It is recommended that you use plain white paper when performing a Full Correction.
  • If you set <Color> in <Paper Type> of <Paper Settings>, Full Correction cannot be performed. To perform a Full Correction, set <Paper Type> other than <Color>. For instructions on how to set the paper type, see "Setting Paper Size and Type."
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Gradation Correction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Full Correction>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <Test Print 1> is displayed, then press [OK].

If you set <Color> in <Paper Type> of <Paper Settings>, an error message will appear. If this is the case, follow the instructions below.

1. Press the right Any key to select <Done> and return to the screen in step 5.

2. Load LTR or A4 plain paper into the stack bypass tray and set the paper size and type.

3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Full Correction>.

  • If the paper for the test print is not loaded in a paper source, a message asks you to load the appropriate paper. In this case, load the appropriate paper in a paper source.
  1. Place the first test print on the platen glass.

Place the test print face down on the platen glass, with the black bands along the top left edge of the platen glass.
Stack approximately 20 sheets of blank paper on top of the test print for a more precise gradation correction.

  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <Test Print 2> is displayed, then press [OK].

If you set <Color> in <Paper Type> of <Paper Settings>, an error message will appear. If this is the case, follow the instructions below.

1. Press the right Any key to select <Done> and return to the screen in step 5.

2. Load LTR or A4 plain paper into the stack bypass tray and set the paper size and type.

3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Full Correction>.

  1. Place the second test print on the platen glass.

Place the test print face down on the platen glass, with the black bands along the top left edge of the platen glass.
Stack approximately 20 sheets of blank paper on top of the test print for a more precise gradation correction.

  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Quick Correction

Return to Overview

This is a quick and simple adjustment that is made to the gradation, density, and color settings of the machine. Recalibrations are made internally without outputting any test prints.


Remark
  • It takes approximately two and a half minutes to perform the Quick Correction.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Gradation Correction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Quick Correction>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <Start> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Copy Image Correction

Return to Overview

This is a precise copy image recalibration for the machine's gradation, density, and color settings. The procedure involves making a test print and placing it on the platen glass for scanning. Once this is complete, the machine automatically corrects the irregularities.


Remark
  • For an accurate adjustment, do not use colored paper, transparencies, or labels.
    It is recommended that you use plain white paper when performing Copy Image Correction.
  • If you set <Color> in <Paper Type> of <Paper Settings>, Copy Image Correction cannot be performed. To perform a Copy Image Correction, set <Paper Type> other than <Color>. For instructions on how to set the paper type, see "Setting Paper Size and Type."
  • Make sure that you place the test prints properly. Accurate recalibrations of the gradation, density, and color settings of the machine cannot be made if the test prints are not scanned correctly.
  • A test print is output by the machine during this adjustment. Make sure that a sufficient supply of LTR or A4 paper is loaded into the machine before starting this procedure.
  • Test prints are not counted as part of the copy or print total page counts.
  • It takes approximately two and a half minutes to perform the Copy Image Correction.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Auto Gradation Correction>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy Image Correction>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <Test Print 1> is displayed, then press [OK].

If you set <Color> in <Paper Type> of <Paper Settings>, an error message will appear. If this is the case, follow the instructions below.

1. Press the right Any key to select <Done> and return to the screen in step 5.

2. Load LTR or A4 plain paper into the stack bypass tray and set the paper size and type.

3. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Copy Image Correction>.

  • If the paper for the test print is not loaded in a paper source, a message asks you to load the appropriate paper. In this case, load the appropriate paper in a paper source.
  1. Place the test print on the platen glass.

Place the test print face down on the platen glass, with the black bands along the top left edge of the platen glass.
Stack approximately 20 sheets of blank paper on top of the test print for a more precise gradation correction.

  1. Confirm that a screen shown left appears on the display, then press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Feeder Smudge

Return to Overview

If the feeder is dirty, dots or lines may appear on copies or prints. The Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder mode prevents dirt and grime in the feeder from appearing on your prints and copies.
The default setting is <On>.


Remark
  • If the distance between the paper edge and the image is 1/8" (2.5 mm) or less, Auto Adjustment may not work correctly, resulting in poor output quality, such as with vertical streaks on the image. In this case, set Auto Adjustment to <Off>.
  • While some dots or lines may continue to be printed even if the Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder mode is set to <On>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Feeder Dirty Auto Correct.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
  • <On>: The machine prevents dirt and grime in the feeder from appearing on prints and copies.
  • <Off>: The machine does not prevent dirt and grime in the feeder from appearing on prints and copies.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Calibrating the Machine when Power is Turned on (First Calibration)

Return to Overview

Calibration can be performed automatically when the main power switch is turned ON, depending on the machine's condition. Set the timing of the calibration for such cases.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <First Calibration>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: When the machine is turned ON, if there are any remaining jobs (which were not performed or completed last time), the machine performs the jobs before performing the calibration.
  • <On>: The calibration is performed immediately after the machine is turned ON. The machine performs the remaining jobs after calibration is complete.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Detection between Color Documents and Black-and-White Documents (ACS Function Adjustments)

Return to Overview

Set the threshold value for the ACS function, which automatically judges whether an original is full color or in BLACK-AND-WHITE.
The default settings are as follows:

  • <Feeder>:<0>
  • <Platen Glass>:<0>
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <ACS Function Adjustment>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Feeder> or <Platen Glass>, then press [OK].
  • <Feeder>: Set the threshold value for the original loaded into the feeder.
  • <Platen Glass>: Set the threshold value for the original placed on the platen glass.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the threshold value, then press [OK].
  • [] or (Scroll Wheel) to the left: The original gets more likely to be judged as a color original.
  • [] or (Scroll Wheel) to the right: The original gets more likely to be judged as a BLACK-AND-WHITE original.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Detection of Black Characters in Color Documents (Color Black Character Processing)

Return to Overview

Set the threshold value for the ACS function, which the machine uses to decide whether to print out the text of the original in BLACK-AND-WHITE or in color.
The default settings are as follows:

  • <Feeder>:<0>
  • <Platen Glass>:<0>
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Color Black Char. Process.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Feeder> or <Platen Glass>, then press [OK].
  • <Feeder>: Set the threshold value for the original loaded into the feeder.
  • <Platen Glass>: Set the threshold value for the original placed on the platen glass.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the threshold value, then press [OK].
  • [] or (Scroll Wheel) to the left: The text on the original becomes more likely to be judged as color.
  • [] or (Scroll Wheel) to the right: The text on the original becomes more likely to be judged as black-and-white.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Adjusting Toner Fixing (Image Special Processing)

Return to Overview

Areas with high toner density may appear blotched when printed or may not print properly, because the toner cannot be fixed on the printing paper. If this happens, set this item to <Level 1>. If that does not solve the problem, set this item to <Level 2>.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • When this item is set to <Level 1> or <Level 2>, the machine adjusts the amount of toner used for printing, so the printed image is lighter than when this item is set to <Off>.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Image Special Processing>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, <Level 1> or <Level 2>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: Select this in normal conditions.
  • <Level 1>: Select this if the toner for the high density areas cannot be fixed on the printing paper and the image cannot be printed out properly.
  • <Level 2>: Select this if you cannot solve the problem by setting this item to <Level 1>.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Confirming Paper Length (Paper Length Confirmation)

Return to Overview

When the machine is out of the specified size of paper to be used for printing, it uses the loaded paper for printing instead.
The default setting is <Off>.


Remark
  • This mode is available only for printing from computers.
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Paper Length Confirmation>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The machine does not use the loaded paper for printing. An error message appears on the display. The print job is canceled.
  • <On>: The machine uses the loaded paper for printing and the printing is performed.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Reducing Paper Curl (Special Mode P)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to reduce curling when using paper such as lightweight paper or recycled paper, which curls easily regardless of humidity.
The default setting is <Off>.

  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Special Mode P>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
  • <Off>: The machine does not reduce curling.
  • <On>: The machine reduces curling.
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Transporting the Machine

Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a long distance.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
  1. Disconnect the power cord and all the cables from the machine.
  • 1. Disconnect the power cord from the machine.

  • 2. Disconnect the LAN and USB cables, if any are connected to the machine.

  • 3. Disconnect the telephone cable and other cables from the machine if you connect your own telephone to the machine.

  1. If you are using the output tray extension, fold the paper stopper, and then push the output tray extension into the machine.
  1. If you are using the stack bypass tray, fold stack bypass tray extension, push back the auxiliary tray into place, and then close the stack bypass tray.
  1. Pull out the paper drawer gently.
  1. Hold the paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.
  • Remove the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 from the machine if it is installed. To remove the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1, perform the installation procedure in reverse. (See the sheet "Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup Instruction.")
  1. Pick up the machine using the hand grips on the left, right and back of the machine.
  • Check the weight of the machine to carry it safely. (See "General.")
  • If you need to install the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 in the machine, place the feeder at the installation site first, and then transport the machine to the site. For directions on how to install the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1, see the sheet "Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup Instruction."


Specifications

Remark
  • Specifications are subject to change without notice.


General

General
  • Type
Personal Desktop
  • Power Source
120 V-127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product.)
  • Power Consumption
Max: Less than 1300 W, 1350 W (with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1)
  • Weight
Approx. 96 lb (44 kg)
(including toner cartridges)
  • Dimensions
21 1/2" (W) x 20 3/4" (D) x 24 7/8" (H) (546 mm (W) x 527 mm (D) x 632 mm (H))
21 1/2" (W) x 21 3/8" (D) x 36 7/8" (H) (546 mm (W) x 543 mm (D) x 936 mm (H)) (with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1)
  • Installation Space
21 1/2" (W) x 44 7/8" (D) x 31 1/4" (H) (546 mm (W) x1140 mm (D) x 792 mm (H)) (with drawer pulled out and with back cover and feeder open)
21 1/2" (W) x 44 7/8" (D) x 43 1/8" (H) (546 mm (W) x1140 mm (D) x 1095 mm (H)) (with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 attached, drawer pulled out, and back cover and feeder open)
  • Environmental Conditions
Temperature: 50°F-86°F (10°C-30°C)
Humidity: 20%-80% RH (no condensation)
  • Display Languages
ENGLISH/FRENCH/SPANISH/PORTUGUESE
  • Acceptable Documents
Originals Requirements.
  • Acceptable Paper Stock
Paper Requirements.
  • Printable Area
Printable Area.
  • Scanning Area
Scanning Area.


Copier

Copier
  • Scanning Resolution
600 dpi x 600 dpi
  • Printing Resolution
600 dpi x 600 dpi
  • Magnification
1:1 ±1.0%, 1:2.00, 1:1.29, 1:0.78, 1:0.64, 1:0.50
Zoom 0.50 - 2.00, 1% increments
  • Copy Speed
Direct: Color: 22 cpm (LTR), Black: 22 cpm (LTR)
  • No. of Copies
Max. 99 copies
  • Warm up Time
less than 60 sec*. (from when main power switch is turned on until standby display appears, when temperature is 68°F (20°C) and humidity is 65%)
* Warm up time may differ depending on the condition and environment of the machine.
  • First Copy Time
Platen glass: Less than 12.5 sec. (LTR)
Feeder: Less than 18.5 sec. (LTR)


Printer

Printer
  • Printing Method
Indirect electrostatic method (On-demand fixing)
  • Paper Handling
  • Paper drawer: 250 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2)) x 1
  • Stack Bypass tray: 100 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2))
  • Paper Delivery
250 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2))
  • Print Speed
Direct: Color: 22 cpm (LTR), Black: 22 cpm (LTR)
  • Printing Resolution
600 dpi x 600 dpi (2400 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi)
  • Number of Tones
256
  • Printing Cartridge
Toner Cartridges.


Facsimile

Facsimile
  • Applicable Line
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1
  • Compatibility
G3
  • Data Compression Schemes
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
  • Modem Speed
33.6 Kbps
Automatic fallback
  • Transmission Speed
Approx. 3 seconds/page*2 at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-JBIG,
transmitting from the memory
  • Transmission/Reception Memory
More than 1000 pages*2
(total pages of transmission/reception)
  • Fax Resolution
<200 x 100 dpi>: 203 pels/in. x 98 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 3.85 lines/mm)
<200 x 200 dpi>: 203 pels/in. x 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)
<200 x 400 dpi>: 203 pels/in. x 391 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)
<400 x 400 dpi>: 406 pels/in. x 391 lines/in. (16 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)
  • Dialing
Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn:
Speed dialing
Address Book dialing (100 destinations)
One-touch speed dialing (200 destinations)
Group dialing (299 destinations)
Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn:
Speed dialing
One-touch speed dialing (200 destinations)
Group dialing (199 destinations)
  • Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
  • Automatic redialing
  • Manual redialing (Recalling from the log.)
  • Sequential broadcast
    Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn: 332 destinations
    Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn: 232 destinations
  • TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)
  • Receiving
  • Automatic reception
  • Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)
  • Report
  • ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions)
  • TX (Transmission)/RX (Reception) REPORT
  • FAX ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions)

*1 The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on telephone line conditions.
*2 Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.


Telephone

Telephone
  • Connection
  • External telephone/answering machine (CNG detecting signal)/data modem


Send

Send
Send to file server
  • Communication Protocol
FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP)
  • Data Format
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Color) (Compact)
  • Resolution
TIFF, PDF (B&W): 100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
JPEG, PDF (color): 100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
PDF (color) (compact): 300 x 300 dpi
  • System Environment
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition,
Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later),
Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2
  • Interface
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
  • Color Mode
Color, B&W (black and white)
  • Original Type
Text, Text/Photo, Photo
E-mail and I-Fax Features
  • Communication Protocol
SMTP, POP3, I-FAX (Simple mode)
  • Data Format
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Color) (Compact)
  • Resolution
I-Fax: 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 204 x 98 dpi, 204 x 196 dpi
TIFF, PDF (B&W): 100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
JPEG, PDF (color): 100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
PDF (color) (compact): 300 x 300 dpi
  • System Environment
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition,
Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later),
Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2
  • Original Size
E-mail: LTR, LGL, A4, A5, B5
I-Fax: LTR, LGL*1, A4, A5, B5
*1 Sent as LTR
  • Mail Forwarding Server Software
Sendmail 8.93 or later (UNIX)
Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
The following versions are supported:
- Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later
- Microsoft Exchange Server 2000
- Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
* Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is not supported.
Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
  • Mail Receiving Server Software
Qpopper 2.53 or later (UNIX)
Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
The following versions are supported:
- Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later
- Microsoft Exchange Server 2000
- Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
* Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is not supported.
Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)


Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional)

Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional)
  • Paper Feeding System
500 sheets x 1 drawer (20 lb (75 g/m2))
  • Acceptable Paper Stock
"Paper Requirements"
  • Power Source
From the main unit
  • Dimensions
17 3/8" (W) x 21 3/8" (D) x 12" (H) (440 mm (W) x 543 mm (D) x 304 mm (H))
  • Weight
Approx. 28.7 lb (13 kg)


Originals Handling

Originals Requirements

Scanning Area


Originals Requirements

Return to Overview

Available original type, size, weight and quantity are shown in the table below.



Platen Glass Feeder
Type Sheet*1, book, three-dimensional objects Sheet
Size (W x L) Max. 8 1/2" x 14"
(Max. 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)
Max. 14" x 8.5" (355.6 mm x 215.9 mm)*2
Min. 5" x 5.5" (128 mm x 139.7 mm)*2
Weight Max. 4.4 lb (2 kg) One-sided scanning: (1 page): 13 to 34 lb (50 to 128 g/m2)*3
One-sided scanning: (more than 2 pages): 13 to 28 lb (50 to 105 g/m2)*4
Two-sided scanning: 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m2)
Quantity 1 sheet Max. 50 sheets*5
(Max. 30 sheets for LGL documents)*5

*1 When copying transparent documents such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper to cover the document after placing it face-down on the platen glass.
*2 When copying two-sided originals, only LTR, LGL, FLSC, A4 can be used.
*3 17 to 34 lb (64 to 128 g/m2) when copying originals smaller than LTR/A4.
*4 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m2) when copying originals smaller than LTR/A4.
*5 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper

  • Do not place the originals in the feeder until the glue, ink or correction fluid on the document is completely dry.
  • Remove all fasteners (staples, paper clips, etc.) before loading the originals in the feeder.
  • To prevent originals from jamming in the feeder, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Onion skin or thin paper
  • Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer
  • Transparencies


Scanning Area

Return to Overview

Make sure your originals' text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.

  • Copy Scanning Area

  • Fax Scanning Area



Print Media

Paper Requirements

Printable Area


Paper Requirements

Return to Overview

The paper size and types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.



Paper drawer(s) Stack bypass tray
Size (W x L) Legal*9, Letter*9, Oficio, M-Oficio, B-Oficio, Executive, Foolscap*9, A4*9, A5, B5 3" x 5" to Legal (8 1/2" x 14")
(76.2 x 127 to 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm) (Always set vertically.)
Weight 16 to 32 lb
(60 to 120 g/m2)
16 to 47 lb
(60 to 176 g/m2)
Quantity Max. 250 sheets *1*8 Max. 100 sheets *1
Type Plain 1 *2*9
Plain 2 *3*9
Color *3*9
Recycled *3*9
Heavy 1 *4*9*10
Heavy 2 *5*11*12 -
Bond *6*9
Transparency *7 -
Labels -
Envelopes -

(○: available -: not available)
*1 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper
*2 From 16 to 19 lb (60 to 70 g/m2)
*3 From 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m2)
*4 From 28 to 32 lb (106 to 120 g/m2)
*5 From 32 to 47 lb (121 to 176 g/m2)
*6 From 20 to 28 lb (75 to 105 g/m2)
*7 Use only LTR or A4 size transparencies.
*8 Max. 500 sheets of paper can be set in the optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1.
*9 Can be used for two-sided copying.
*10 Select <Heavy 1> for the paper type when using the coated paper with the weight of 27 to 29 lb (100 to 110 g/m2). Load the paper into the stack bypass tray sheet by sheet.
*11 Select <Heavy 2> for the paper type when using the coated paper with the weight of 32 to 35 lb (120 to 130 g/m2). Load the paper into the stack bypass tray sheet by sheet.
*12 Select <Heavy 2> for the paper type when using the index cards with the weight of 32 to 47 lb (120 to 176 g/m2). Load the cards into the stack bypass tray.

Remark
  • The default paper size is LTR. If you use a different paper size, you must change the paper size settings. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")

  • To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Torn paper
  • Damp paper
  • Very thin paper
  • Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)
  • The following types of paper do not print well:
  • Highly textured paper
  • Very smooth paper
  • Shiny paper
  • Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.
  • Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.
  • Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in their original packaging in a cool, dry location.
  • Store paper at 64.4°F-75.2°F (18°C-24°C), 40%-60% relative humidity.
  • Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers.


Printable Area

Return to Overview

The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper and envelope. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.



Machine Settings

You can adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the machine works. To see the list of current settings, print out USER'S DATA LIST.



Printing USER'S DATA LIST
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Report Settings>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User's Data List>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to print the list, use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No>, then press [OK].

  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Accessing the Setting Menu
  1. Press (Main Menu).
  1. Press the right Any key to select <Additional Func.>.
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the menu you want to access, then press [OK].
  • <Paper Settings>
  • <Volume Settings>
  • <Common Settings>
  • <Communications Settings>
  • <Address Book Settings>
  • <Printer Settings>
  • <Timer Settings>
  • <Adjustment/Cleaning>
  • <Report Settings>
  • <System Management Set.>
  1. Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select a submenu, then press [OK].
  1. To register the settings or go to a submenu item, press [OK].
  1. Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.


Setting Menu

Remark
  • Depending on the country of purchase, some settings may not be available.
  • The default settings are indicated in bold text.

Paper Settings

Volume Settings

Common Settings

Communications Settings

Address Book Settings

Printer Settings

Timer Settings

Adjustment/Cleaning

Report Settings

System Management Settings


Paper Settings

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)
  • Off
  • On
For the Stack Bypass Tray

Paper Size

  • Inch Size : LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI, G-LTR, G-LGL, Custom Size, COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5
  • A/B Size : A4, A5, B5

Paper Type

Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparencies, Labels, Envelope
Drawer 1 For the Paper Drawer

Paper Size

  • Inch Size : LTR, LGL, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI
  • A/B Size : A4, A5, B5

Paper Type

Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond, Heavy 1
Drawer 2*

Paper Size

  • Inch Size : LTR, LGL, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI
  • A/B Size : A4, A5, B5

Paper Type

Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond, Heavy 1
Custom Size
  • Size 1
  • Size 2
Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray
* Only when the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional) is attached.


Volume Settings

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
Monitor Volume Settings
  • Volume Key Settings Priority
  • Screen Settings Priority
Setting the Monitor Volume
Audible Tones Setting the Audible Tones

Incoming Ring

  • Off
  • On (1 to 3)(1)

Entry Tone

  • Off
  • On (1 to 3)(1)

Error Tone

  • Off
  • On (1 to 3)(1)

TX Done Tone

  • Off
  • On (1 to 3)(1)

Receive Done Tone

  • Off
  • On (1 to 3)(1)

Print Done Tone

  • Off
  • On (1 to 3)(1)

Scan Done Tone

  • Off
  • On (1 to 3)(1)


Common Settings

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
Initial Function Settings Setting the Initial Function

Select Initial Function

Main Menu, Copy, Send/Fax, Scan to Store, Direct Print*

Set System Monitor to Def.

  • Off
  • On

Status Monitor Device

  • Off
  • On
Register Custom Key Registering the Custom Keys

Key 1

Copy, Send/Fax, Fax, E-mail, I-Fax, File Server, Send Log, Address Book, Search LDAP Server, Favorites, One-touch, Scan to Store, Store on Memory, Remote Scan, Direct Print*

Key 2

Copy, Send/Fax, Fax, E-mail, I-Fax, File Server, Send Log, Address Book, Search LDAP Server, Favorites, One-touch, Scan to Store, Store on Memory, Remote Scan, Direct Print*
Brightness Adjustment Darker - Brighter (5) Adjusting the Brightness
Reverse Color Display
  • Off
  • On
Reversing the Contrast on the Display
Auto Clear Settings
  • Selected Function
  • Initial Function
Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates
Inch Entry
  • Off
  • On
Enabling the Inch Entry
Auto Drawer Selection Setting Auto Drawer Selection

Copy

Stack Bypass

  • Off
  • On

Drawer 1

  • Off
  • On

Drawer 2

  • Off
  • On

Printer

Stack Bypass

  • Off
  • On

Drawer 1

  • Off
  • On

Drawer 2

  • Off
  • On

Receive

Stack Bypass

  • Off
  • On

Drawer 1

  • Off
  • On

Drawer 2

  • Off
  • On

Other

Stack Bypass

  • Off
  • On

Drawer 1

  • Off
  • On

Drawer 2

  • Off
  • On
Sleep Mode Energy Use
  • Low
  • High
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode
Paper Feed Method Switch Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority

Stack Bypass

  • Speed Priority
  • Print Side Priority

Drawer 1

  • Speed Priority
  • Print Side Priority

Drawer 2

  • Speed Priority
  • Print Side Priority
Language Switch
  • Off
  • On
Changing the Language Shown on the Display
Error when Feeder is Dirty
  • Off
  • On
Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt
Initialize Common Settings
  • No
  • Yes
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Communications Settings

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
Common Settings

TX Settings

Register Unit Name

Max. 24 characters Make Fax Settings

Data Compression Ratio

  • High Ratio
  • Normal
  • Low Ratio
Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (Scan to File Server)
Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (Scan to USB Memory)
Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (E-Mail)

Retry Times

0 to 5 Times (3) Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (Retry Times) (I-Fax)
Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (Retry Times) (Scan to File Server)
Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (Retry Times) (E-Mail)

Change Send Func. Mode

  • Register
  • Initialize
Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax)
Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)
Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server)
Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to USB Memory)
Storing the Standard Send Settings (E-Mail)

TX Terminal ID

On Printing the TX Terminal ID (Fax)
Printing the TX Terminal ID (I-Fax)

Printing Position

  • Inside
  • Outside

Telephone # Mark

  • FAX
  • TEL

Color Send Gamma Value

Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2 Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (Scan to File Server)
Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (E-Mail)

Sharpness

Low - High (0) Adjusting Sharpness (Fax)
Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax)
Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to File Server)
Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to USB Memory)
Adjusting Sharpness (E-Mail)

PDF (Compact) Img. Quality

Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (Scan to File Server)
Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (Scan to USB Memory)
Adjusting the Image Quality of PDF (Compact) (E-Mail)

Text/Photo, Photo Mode

  • Data Size Priority
  • Normal
  • Image Quality Priority

Text Mode

  • Data Size Priority
  • Normal
  • Image Quality Priority

Default Screen for Send

  • Favorites
  • One-touch
  • Default Screen
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (Fax)
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (I-Fax)
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (Scan to File Server)
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation (E-Mail)

Initialize TX Settings

  • No
  • Yes
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (Fax)
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (I-Fax)
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server)
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to USB Memory)
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default (E-Mail)

RX Settings

2-Sided Print

  • Off
  • On
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax)
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax)
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (E-Mail)

Receive Reduction

  • Off
  • On
Reducing a Received Document (Fax)
Reducing a Received Document (I-Fax)
Reducing a Received Document (E-Mail)

RX Reduction

  • Auto
  • Fixed Reduction

Reduce %

97%, 95%, 90%, 75%

Reduce Direction

  • Vertical and Horizontal
  • Vertical Only

Received Page Footer

  • Off
  • On
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (Fax)
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (I-Fax)
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (E-Mail)

Toner Out Continuous Print

  • Off
  • On
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (Fax)
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (I-Fax)
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low (E-Mail)

YCbCr Receive Gamma Val.

Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2 Specifying the Gamma Value for Receiving Color Documents (E-Mail)
Fax Settings

User Settings

Register Unit Telephone #

Max. 20 characters Make Fax Settings

Tel. Line Type Selection

Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax)

Manual

  • Pulse
  • Tone

Offhook Alarm

  • Off
  • On
* Not functional for this machine.
 

TX Settings

ECM TX

  • Off
  • On
ECM Transmission (Fax)

Set Pause Time

1 to 15 Seconds (2) Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax)

Auto-redial

  • Off
  • On
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial) (Fax)

Redial Times

1 to 10 Times (2)

Redial Interval

2 to 99 Minutes (2)

TX Error Redial

  • Off
  • All Pages
  • Error and 1st Page

Check Tone Before Sending

  • Off
  • On
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending (Fax)

RX Settings

ECM RX

  • Off
  • On
ECM Reception (Fax)

Reception Mode Selection

  • Auto RX
  • Fax/Tel Auto Switch
  • Manual RX
  • Answer Mode
  • DRPD: Select Fax
Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

Incoming Ring

  • Off
  • On 1 to 99 Times (2)
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone (Fax)

Remote RX

  • Off
  • On 00 to 99 (25)
Activating the Remote Reception (Fax)

Manual/Auto Switch

  • Off
  • On 1 to 99 Seconds (15)
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode (Fax)

RX Restriction

  • Off
  • On
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders (Fax)


Address Book Settings

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
Register Address*

Fax

Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Destination Registration

Max. 40 characters

ECM TX

  • Off
  • On

Sending Speed

33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps

Long Distance

Domestic, Long Distance (1), Long Distance (2), Long Distance (3)

E-mail

Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Destination Registration

Max. 120 characters

I-Fax

Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Destination Registration

Max. 120 characters

File

Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Destination Registration

FTP, Windows (SMB), Windows (SMB): Browse

Host Name

FTP: Max. 47 characters
Windows (SMB): Max. 120 characters

Folder Path

Max. 120 characters

User Name

Max. 24 characters

Password

FTP: Max. 24 characters
Windows (SMB): Max. 14 characters

Group

Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Destination Registration

Max. 299 destinations

Search LDAP Server

Display Name

Max. 16 characters Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book
Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book

Display Destination

When a fax number is selected from the search results:
Max. 40 characters
When an e-mail address is selected from the search results:
Max. 120 characters

ECM TX

  • Off
  • On

Sending Speed

33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps

Long Distance

Domestic, Long Distance (1), Long Distance (2), Long Distance (3)
Register One-touch

Fax

Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Register One-touch Name

Max. 12 characters

Destination Registration

Max. 40 characters

ECM TX

  • Off
  • On

Sending Speed

33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps

Long Distance

Domestic, Long Distance (1), Long Distance (2), Long Distance (3)

E-mail

Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Register One-touch Name

Max. 12 characters

Destination Registration

Max. 120 characters

I-Fax

Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Register One-touch Name

Max. 12 characters

Destination Registration

Max. 120 characters

File

Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Register One-touch Name

Max. 12 characters

Destination Registration

FTP, Windows (SMB), Windows (SMB): Browse

Host Name

FTP: Max. 47 characters
Windows (SMB): Max. 120 characters

Folder Path

Max. 120 characters

User Name

Max. 24 characters

Password

FTP: Max. 24 characters
Windows (SMB): Max. 14 characters

Group

Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch

Register Name

Max. 16 characters

Register One-touch Name

Max. 12 characters

Destination Registration

Max. 299 destinations
(Max. 199 destinations for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn)

Search LDAP Server

Display Name

Max. 16 characters Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch
Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch

Display Destination

When a fax number is selected from the search results:
Max. 40 characters
When an e-mail address is selected from the search results:
Max. 120 characters

ECM TX

  • Off
  • On

Sending Speed

33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps

Long Distance

Domestic, Long Distance (1), Long Distance (2), Long Distance (3)
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Printer Settings

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
Number of Copies 1 to 999 Copies (1) Number of Copies
2-Sided
  • 2-Sided
  • 1-Sided
2-Sided
Paper Feed

Default Paper Size

LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI, G-LTR, G-LGL, COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5, A4, A5, B5 Default Paper Size

Default Paper Type

Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparencies, Labels, Envelope Default Paper Type

Paper Size Override

  • Off
  • On
Paper Size Override
Print Quality

Gradation Level

  • High Gradation 1
  • High Gradation 2
Gradation Level

Toner Density

Toner Density

Cyan (C)

Lighter - Darker (0)

Magenta (M)

Lighter - Darker (0)

Yellow (Y)

Lighter - Darker (0)

Black (Bk)

Lighter - Darker (0)

Save Toner*

  • Off
  • On
Save Toner

Line Control

  • Resolution Priority
  • Gradation Priority
Line Control
Layout

Binding Location

  • Long Edge
  • Short Edge
Margin Direction

Unit of Measure

  • Millimeter
  • Inch
Unit of Measure (PCL Only)

Margin

- 1.97 to +1.97 inch (0.00)
- 50.0 to +50.0 mm (0.0)
Margin
Auto Continue
  • Off
  • On
Auto Continue
Collate
  • Off
  • On
Collate
Timeout
  • Off
  • Timeout :5 to 300 seconds (15)
Timeout
Personality*
  • Auto
  • PS
  • PCL
Personality
Mode Priority*
  • Off
  • PS
  • PCL
Mode Priority
Auto Select* Auto Select

PS

  • Off
  • On

PCL

  • Off
  • On
Color Mode
  • Auto Detect
  • Color
  • Black and White
Color Mode
Gradation Settings Gradation Settings

Gradation

  • Off
  • Smooth 1
  • Smooth 2

Graphics

  • Off
  • On

Image

  • Off
  • On
Compressed Image Output
  • Output
  • Display Error
Compressed Image Output
Initialize Printer Settings
  • No
  • Yes
Initialize Printer Settings
PCL Settings*

Paper Save

  • Off
  • On
Paper Save (PCL Only)

Orientation

  • Portrait
  • Landscape
Orientation (PCL Only)

Font Number

0 to 104 (0) Font Number (PCL Only)

Point Size

4.00 to 999.75 point (12) Point Size (PCL Only)

Pitch

0.44 to 99.99 (10) Pitch (PCL Only)

Form Lines

5 to 128 Lines (60) Form Lines (PCL Only)

Symbol Set

ARABIC8, DESKTOP, GREEK8, HEBREW7, HEBREW8, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOCYR, ISOGRK, ISOHEB, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL, PC775, PC8, PC850, PC851, PC852, PC862, PC864, PC866, PC8DN, PC8GRK, PC8TK, PC1004, PIFONT, PSMATH, PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINARB, WINBALT, WINCYR, WINGRK, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5 Symbol Set (PCL Only)

Custom Paper Size Setting

  • Off
  • On

Unit of Measure

  • Millimeter
  • Inch
Unit of Measure (PCL Only)

X dimension

3.00 to 8.50 inch (8.50)
76.2 to 216.0 mm (216.0)
X dimension (PCL Only)

Y dimension

5.00 to 14.00 inch (14.00)
127.0 to 356.0 mm (356.0)
Y dimension (PCL Only)

Append CR to LF

  • Yes
  • No
Append CR to LF (PCL Only)

Enlarge A4 Print Width

  • Off
  • On
Enlarge A4 Print Width (PCL Only)

Halftones

  • Off
  • On
Halftones (PCL Only)

Text

  • Resolution
  • Gradation

Graphics

  • Resolution
  • Gradation

Image

  • Resolution
  • Gradation

RGB Source Profile

RGB Source Profile (PCL Only)

Text

  • sRGB
  • Gamma 1.5
  • Gamma 1.8
  • Gamma 2.4

Graphics

  • sRGB
  • Gamma 1.5
  • Gamma 1.8
  • Gamma 2.4

Image

  • sRGB
  • Gamma 1.5
  • Gamma 1.8
  • Gamma 2.4

Output Profile

Output Profile (PCL Only)

Text

  • Normal
  • Photo

Graphics

  • Normal
  • Photo

Image

  • Normal
  • Photo

Matching Method

Matching Method (PCL Only)

Text

  • Perceptual
  • Saturation
  • Colorimetric

Graphics

  • Perceptual
  • Saturation
  • Colorimetric

Image

  • Perceptual
  • Saturation
  • Colorimetric

Gray Compensation

Gray Compensation (PCL Only)

Text

  • Off
  • On

Graphics

  • Off
  • On

Image

  • Off
  • On

CMS (Matching) Selection

  • Printer
  • Host
CMS (Matching) Selection (PCL Only)

CMS (Matching) / Gamma

CMS (Matching)/Gamma (PCL Only)

Text

  • Gamma
  • CMS

Graphics

  • Gamma
  • CMS

Image

  • Gamma
  • CMS

Gamma Correction

Gamma Correction (PCL Only)

Text

1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2

Graphics

1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2

Image

1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2

Advanced Smoothing

Advanced Smoothing (PCL Only)

Advanced Smoothing

  • Off
  • Smooth 1
  • Smooth 2

Graphics

  • Off
  • On

Text

  • Off
  • On
PS Settings*

Job Timeout

0 to 3600 seconds (0) Job Timeout (PS Only)

Wait Timeout

0 to 3600 seconds (300) Wait Timeout (PS Only)

Print PS Errors

  • Off
  • On
Print PS Errors (PS Only)

RGB Source Profile

  • sRGB
  • Gamma 1.5
  • Gamma 1.8
  • Gamma 2.4
RGB Source Profile (PS Only)

CMYK Simulation Profile

US Web Ctd(Canon)
Euro Standard
CMYK Simulation Profile (PS Only)

Use Grayscale Profile

  • Off
  • On
Use Grayscale Profile (PS Only)

Output Profile

  • Normal
  • Photo
  • TR Normal
  • TR Photo
Output Profile (PS Only)

Matching Method

  • Perceptual
  • Saturation
  • Colorimetric
Matching Method (PS Only)

RGB Pure Black Process

  • Off
  • On
RGB Pure Black Process (PS Only)

CMYK Pure Blk Process

  • Off
  • On
CMYK Pure Black Process (PS Only)

Pure Black Text

  • Off
  • On
Pure Black Text (PS Only)

Halftones

Halftones (PS Only)

Error Diffusion

  • Off
  • On

Text

  • Resolution
  • Gradation

Graphics

  • Resolution
  • Gradation

Image

  • Resolution
  • Gradation

Advanced Smoothing

Advanced Smoothing (PS Only)

Advanced Smoothing

  • Off
  • Smooth 1
  • Smooth 2

Graphics

  • Off
  • On

Text

  • Off
  • On

Toner Vol. Adjustment

  • Normal
  • Gradation
Toner Volume Adjustment (PS Only)
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


Timer Settings

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
Date & Time Settings

Current Time Settings

MM/DD/YYYY Setting the Current Date and Time

Time Zone Settings

GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 (GMT-5:00) Setting the Time Zone

Daylight Saving Time Set.

  • Off
  • On
Setting the Daylight Saving Time
Auto Sleep Time*
  • Off
  • On (3 to 240 minutes)(15)
Setting the Sleep Mode
Auto Clear Time 0=Off, 1 to 9 minutes (2) Setting the Auto Clear Time
* We recommend that you use this option in the default setting.


Adjustment/Cleaning

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
Auto Gradation Correction

Full Correction

Test Print 1 Full Correction

Quick Correction

Start Quick Correction

Copy Image Correction

Test Print 1 Copy Image Correction
Feeder Dirty Auto Correct.
  • Off
  • On
Adjusting Feeder Smudge
First Calibration
  • Off
  • On
Calibrating the Machine when Power is Turned on (First Calibration)
ACS Function Adjustment Adjusting Detection between Color Documents and Black-and-White Documents (ACS Function Adjustments)

Feeder

Color Priority - B&W Priority (0)

Platen Glass

Color Priority - B&W Priority (0)
Color Black Char. Process Adjusting Detection of Black Characters in Color Documents (Color Black Character Processing)

Feeder

Color Priority - B&W Priority (0)

Platen Glass

Color Priority - B&W Priority (0)
Image Special Processing
  • Off
  • Level 1
  • Level 2
Adjusting Toner Fixing (Image Special Processing)
Paper Length Confirmation
  • Off
  • On
Confirming Paper Length (Paper Length Confirmation)
Special Mode P
  • Off
  • On
Reducing Paper Curl (Special Mode P)
Fixing Unit Cleaning Start Cleaning Cleaning the Fixing Unit
Feeder Cleaning Start Cleaning the Feeder Automatically


Report Settings

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
Settings

TX Report

  • Off
  • On
  • Only When Error Occurs
TX Report

Display Send Original

  • Off
  • On

Activity Report

Activity Report

Auto Print

  • Off
  • On

Send/Receive Separate

  • Off
  • On

Daily Activity Rep. Time

  • Off
  • On

RX Report

  • Off
  • On
  • Only When Error Occurs
RX Report

Fax Activity Report

Fax Activity Report

Auto Print

  • Off
  • On

Send/Receive Separate

  • Off
  • On

Daily Activity Rep. Time

  • Off
  • On
Print List

Address Book List

Printing Address Book List

Address Book*

  • No
  • Yes

One-touch

  • No
  • Yes

User's Data List

  • No
  • Yes
Printing User's Data List
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.


System Management Settings

Return to Overview


Item Settings Applicable Page
System Manager Info. Settings Specifying the System Manager Settings

System Mgmt. Dept. ID

Max. 7 digits (7654321)

System Mgmt. Password

Max. 7 digits (7654321)

System Manager Name

Max. 32 characters
Device Info. Settings Device Information Settings

Device Name

Max. 32 characters

Location Information

Max. 32 characters
Dept. ID Management
  • Off
  • On
Department ID Management

Register Dept. ID/Pass.

Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

Register

Dept. ID

Max. 7 characters

Password

Max. 7 characters

Limit On/Off & Page Limit

Total Print Limit

  • Off
  • On (0 to 999999)(0)

Total Color Print Limit

  • Off
  • On (0 to 999999)(0)

Total Black Print Limit

  • Off
  • On (0 to 999999)(0)

Color Copy Limit

  • Off
  • On (0 to 999999)(0)

Color Scan Limit

  • Off
  • On (0 to 999999)(0)

Color Print Limit

  • Off
  • On (0 to 999999)(0)

Black Copy Limit

  • Off
  • On (0 to 999999)(0)

Black Scan Limit

  • Off
  • On (0 to 999999)(0)

Black Print Limit

  • Off
  • On (0 to 999999)(0)

Page Totals

Total Prints, Total Color Print, Total Black Prints, Color Copy, Color Scan, Color Print, Black Copy, Black Scan, Black Print Checking Counter Information

Print List

All, Total Print Only, Color Only, Black Only

All Clear

  • No
  • Yes
Clearing the Page Total of All the Departments

Allow Unknown ID Printing

  • Off
  • On
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs

Allow Unknown ID R. Scan

  • Off
  • On
Accepting Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs

Allow Black Copy Jobs

  • Off
  • On
Accepting B&W Copy Jobs without Entering the Department ID and Password
User ID Management
  • Off
  • On
Managing User IDs
Network Settings

TCP/IP Settings

IPv4 Settings

IP Address Settings

Manual Settings

  • Off
  • On
Setting IPv4 Address Manually

IP Address

IP Address (0.0.0.0)

Subnet Mask

IP Address (0.0.0.0)

Gateway Address

IP Address (0.0.0.0)

Obtain Automatically

  • DHCP
  • BOOTP
  • RARP
Setting IPv4 Address Automatically

PING Command

IP Address (0.0.0.0) Checking Network Connection (IPv4)

IP Address Range Settings

  • Off
  • On
Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 Addresses

Register

Registering a Single IPv4 Address to Prohibit

Single Address

IP Address (0.0.0.0)

Multiple Destinations

Max. 10 IPv4 Addresses Registering a Range of IPv4 Addresses to Prohibit

DNS Settings

Setting IPv4 DNS

DNS Server Settings

Primary DNS Server

IP Address (0.0.0.0)

Secondary DNS Server

IP Address (0.0.0.0)

DNS Host/Domain Name

Host Name

Max. 47 characters (Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address))

Domain Name

Max. 47 characters

DNS Dynamic Update Set.

  • Off
  • On

IPv6 Settings

Use IPv6

  • Off
  • On
Setting the Use of IPv6

Stateless Address Settings

  • Off
  • On
Setting the Use of Stateless Address

Manual Address Settings

  • Off
  • On
Setting IPv6 Address Manually

Manual Address

IP Address

Prefix Length

0 to 128 (64)

Default Router Address

IP Address

Use DHCPv6

  • Off
  • On
Setting the Use of DHCPv6

PING Command

IPv6 address

IP Address Checking Network Connection Using IPv6 Address

Host Name

Max. 47 characters Checking Network Connection Using IPv6 Hostname

IP Address Range Settings

  • Off
  • On
Controlling Machine Access Using IPv6 Addresses

Register

Registering a Single IPv6 Address to Prohibit

Single Address

IP Address

Multiple Destinations

Max. 10 IPv6 Addresses Registering a Range of IPv6 Addresses to Prohibit

Prefix Address

IP Address Registering a Prefix for the IPv6 Address to Prohibit

DNS Settings

Setting IPv6 DNS

DNS Server Settings

Primary DNS Server

IP Address

Secondary DNS Server

IP Address

DNS Host/Domain Name

Use Same Host/Domain as IPv4

  • Off
  • On

Host Name

Max. 47 characters (Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address))

Domain Name

Max. 47 characters

DNS Dynamic Update Set.

  • Off
  • On

Manual Address Regist.

  • Off
  • On

Register Stateful Address

  • Off
  • On

WINS Configuration

  • Off
  • On
Setting WINS

WINS Server Address

IP Address (0.0.0.0)

LPD Print Settings

  • Off
  • On
Settings from the Machine (Printing from PC/PC Fax)

RAW Print Settings

  • Off
  • On

Use Bidirectional

  • Off
  • On

WSD Print Settings

Use WSD Print

  • Off
  • On

Use WSD Browsing

  • Off
  • On

Use Multicast Discovery

  • Off
  • On

SNTP Settings

  • Off
  • On
Setting SNTP

Polling Interval

1 to 48 hours (24)

NTP Server Address

Max. 47 characters

NTP Server Check

Start

Use PASV Mode for FTP

  • Off
  • On
Setting PASV Mode for FTP

FTP Extension

  • Off
  • On
Setting FTP Extension

Certificate Settings

Key and Certificate List

Registering a Key and Certificate

Certificate Details

Displays Version, Serial No., Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start, Validity End, Issuer, Public Key, Cert Thumbprint

Erase

  • No
  • Yes

Display Use Location

Displays what the key pair is being used for

CA Certificate List

Checking/Deleting a Key and Certificate

Certificate Details

Displays Version, Serial No., Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start, Validity End, Issuer, Public Key, Cert Thumbprint

Erase

  • No
  • Yes

Register Key and Cert.

Registering a CA Certificate

Register

Key Name

Max. 24 characters

Password

Max. 24 characters

Erase

  • No
  • Yes

CA Cert. Registration

Checking/Deleting a CA Certificate

Register

  • No
  • Yes

Erase

  • No
  • Yes

Use HTTP

  • Off
  • On
Setting the Use of HTTP

Port Number Settings

Setting Port Number

LPD

1 to 65535 (515)

RAW

1 to 65535 (9100)

HTTP

1 to 65535 (80)

SMTP Receive

1 to 65535 (25)

POP3 Receive

1 to 65535 (110)

FTP Sending

1 to 65535 (21)

SMTP Send

1 to 65535 (25)

SNMP

1 to 65535 (161)

WSD

1 to 65535 (3702)

Proxy Settings

Not functional for this machine.

Receiving MAC Address

  • Off
  • On
Limiting Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address

Confirm Dept. ID Password

  • Off
  • On
Confirming the Department ID and Password

SMB Settings

  • Off
  • On
Setting Up the Send Files Function of the Machine

Server Name

Max. 15 characters

Workgroup Name

Max. 15 characters

Comment

Max. 48 characters

Use LM Announce

  • Off
  • On

SNMP Settings

  • Off
  • On
Setting SNMP

Community Name 1

Max. 15 characters (public)

Community Name 2

Max. 15 characters

Writable SNMP1

  • Off
  • On

Writable SNMP2

  • Off
  • On

Printer Mgt. Info from Host

  • Off
  • On

Dedicated Port Settings

  • On
  • Off
Setting Dedicated Port (IPv4 Only)

Startup Time Settings

0 to 300 seconds (0) Setting Startup Time

Ethernet Driver Settings

Setting Speed and Duplex

Auto Detect

  • On
  • Off

Communication Mode

  • Half Duplex
  • Full Duplex

Ethernet Type

  • 10 Base-T
  • 100 Base-TX

E-mail/I-Fax

SMTP Receive

  • Off
  • On
When the Machine's Own SMTP Receiving Function is Used

POP

  • Off
  • On
When a POP Server is Used

SMTP Server

Max. 47 characters

E-mail Address

Max. 64 characters

POP Server

Max. 47 characters

POP Address

Max. 32 characters

POP Password

Max. 32 characters

POP Interval

0 to 99 minutes (0)

Authentication/
Encryption

POP Auth. Before Send

  • Off
  • On
When POP before SMTP Authentication is Used

SMTP Authentication

  • Off
  • On
When SMTP Authentication is Used

User Name

Max. 64 characters

Password

Max. 32 characters

IEEE802.1X Settings

  • Off
  • On
Selecting the IEEE802.1X Authentication Method

Login Name

Max. 24 characters

Use TLS

  • Off
  • On

Key and Certificate

Set as Default Key

  • No
  • Yes

Certificate Details

Displays Version, Serial No., Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start, Validity End, Issuer, Public Key, Cert Thumbprint

Display Use Location

Displays what the key pair is being used for

Use TTLS

  • Off
  • On

TTLS Set. (TTLS Internal Protocol)

  • MSCHAPv2
  • PAP

Use PEAP

  • Off
  • On

LoginName as UserName

  • Off
  • On

User Name

Max. 24 characters

Password

Max. 24 characters
Communication Settings

E-mail/I-Fax Settings

Send Data Size Limit

0 to 99 MB (3) Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails
Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes

Divide TX Data Oversize

  • Off
  • On
Dividing the Data for Sending E-Mails
Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes

Default Subject

Max. 40 characters (Attached Image) Registering a Subject Line for Your E-Mails
Registering a Subject Line for Your I-Faxes

Fax Settings

Send Start Speed

33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps Send Start Speed (Fax)

Receive Start Speed

33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps Receive Start Speed (Fax)

Memory Lock Settings

  • Off
  • On
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (Fax)
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (I-Fax)
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (E-Mail)

Memory Lock Password

Max. 7 digits

Report Print

  • Off
  • On

Memory Lock Time Settings

  • Do Not Specify
  • Specify

Select Country/Region

Brazil, Canada, United States, Mexico, Others Starter Guide "Set Up the Machine"
Forwarding Settings

Register

Storing Forwarding Settings (Fax)
Storing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)
Storing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Fowarding Cond. Name

Max. 50 characters

Forwarding Conditions Settings

  • Fax
  • I-Fax

Forwarding Condition

disregard, Do Not Exist*, equals, differs from, begins with, ends with, contains, does not contain
* Only when <Fax> is selected in <Forwarding Conditions Settings>.

Forwarding Destination

Select from the list of registered addresses

File Format

When <Fax> is selected in <Forwarding Conditions Settings>:
  • TIFF
  • PDF
When <I-Fax> is selected in <Forwarding Conditions Settings>:
  • TIFF(Black)/PDF(Color)
  • TIFF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
  • PDF
  • PDF(Black)/JPEG(Color)

Divide Pages

  • Off
  • On

Forward w/o Condition

When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions (Fax)
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions (I-Fax)
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions (E-Mail)

Forwarding Without Conditions

  • Fax
  • I-Fax

Forwarding Destination

Select from the list of registered addresses

File Format

When <Fax> is selected in <Forwarding Without Conditions>:
  • TIFF
  • PDF
When <I-Fax> is selected in <Forwarding Without Conditions>:
  • TIFF(Black)/PDF(Color)
  • TIFF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
  • PDF
  • PDF(Black)/JPEG(Color)

Divide Pages

  • Off
  • On

Erase

  • No
  • Yes
Erasing Forwarding Settings (Fax)
Erasing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)
Erasing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Print List

  • No
  • Yes
Printing Forwarding Settings (Fax)
Printing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)
Printing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)

Details/Edit

Same as <Register> Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (Fax)
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (E-Mail)
Store/Print When Fwding. Handling Forwarding Documents (Fax)
Handling Forwarding Documents (I-Fax)
Handling Forwarding Documents (E-Mail)

Print Image

  • Off
  • On
  • Only When Error Occurs

Store Image to Memory

  • Do Not Store
  • Only When Error Occurs
Remote UI
  • Off
  • On
Restricting the Remote UI
Restrict the Send Function

Address Book Password

Max. 7 digits Setting a Password for the Address Book

Restrict New Addresses

  • Off
  • On
Restricting the New Address

Allow Fax Driver TX

  • Off
  • On
Restricting PC Faxing

Restrict Sending From Log

  • Off
  • On
Restricting Recall

Confirm Entered Fax No.

  • Off
  • On
Confirming Entered Fax Numbers

Restrict Seq. Broadcast

  • Off
  • Broadcast Confirmation
  • Prohibit Broadcast
Restricting Broadcasting
Auto Online/Offline

Auto Online

  • Off
  • On
Auto Online

Auto Offline

  • Off
  • On
Auto Offline
Register LDAP Server

Register

Registering LDAP Server

Server Name

Max. 24 characters

Server Address

Max. 47 characters

Loc. to Start Search

Max. 120 characters

Port Number

1 to 65535 (389)

Search Dest. Limit

1 to 1000 (100)

Search Timeout

30 to 300 seconds (60)

Login Information

Do Not Use

Server LDAP Version and Char. Code

  • Ver. 3 (UTF-8)
  • Ver. 2 (UTF-8)
  • Ver. 2 (SJIS)
  • Ver. 2 (EUC)
  • Ver. 2 (JIS)
  • Ver. 2 (ISO8859)

Use

User Name

Max. 120 characters

Password

Max. 24 characters

Display Auth. Screen

  • Off
  • On

Server LDAP Version and Char. Code

  • Ver. 3 (UTF-8)
  • Ver. 2 (UTF-8)
  • Ver. 2 (SJIS)
  • Ver. 2 (EUC)
  • Ver. 2 (JIS)
  • Ver. 2 (ISO8859)

Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)

User Name

Max. 120 characters

Password

Max. 24 characters

Domain Name

Max. 120 characters

Display Auth. Screen

  • Off
  • On

Details/Edit

Same as <Register> Changing LDAP Server Setting

Erase

  • No
  • Yes
Deleting LDAP Server

Print List

  • No
  • Yes
Printing LDAP Server Settings

Reg/Edit LDAP Search Attributes

Registering/Editing LDAP Search Attributes

Not Registered 1

Display Name

Max. 11 characters

Attribute Name

Max. 64 characters

Not Registered 2

Display Name

Max. 11 characters

Attribute Name

Max. 64 characters
Job Log Display
  • Off
  • On
Checking the Job Log
Memory Media Store Log
  • Do Not Retain
  • Retain
Storing Log to USB Memory
USB Device
  • Off
  • On
Restricting the USB Interface Port
Dept. ID/User Name Display
  • Off
  • On
Displaying the Current Department ID/User Name
PDL Selection (PnP) UFRII LT, PCL5c, PCL6, FAX, PS3 Detecting and Installing Drivers that Support Functions Specified on the Machine into Your Computer
Memory Media Settings Restricting Sending Documents to a USB Memory
Restricting Printing Images from a USB Memory

Store on Memory Media

  • Off
  • On

Direct Print*

  • Off
  • On
Update Firmware This function is used only when it is necessary to update the firmware.
Start Setup Guide
  • No
  • Yes
Starting "Setup Guide"
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.